Aqidah Ahlus Sunnah Wal Jamaah

Si34 - 804_A
RXQ5-54PAY1
R-410A Cooling Only 50Hz
Si34-804_A
R-410A Cooling Only

50Hz
1. Introduction ............................................................................................ vi
1.1 Safety Cautions ....................................................................................... vi
1.2 PREFACE ................................................................................................x
Part 1 General Information ........................................................... 1

1. Model Names of Indoor/Outdoor Units....................................................2
2. External Appearance...............................................................................3
2.1 Indoor Units ..............................................................................................3
2.2 Outdoor Units ...........................................................................................4
3. Combination of Outdoor Units.................................................................6
4. Model Selection.......................................................................................8
Part 2 Specifications .................................................................. 11

1. Specifications ........................................................................................12
1.1 Outdoor Units .........................................................................................12
1.2 Indoor Units ............................................................................................33
Part 3 Refrigerant Circuit ........................................................... 56

1. Refrigerant Circuit .................................................................................57
1.1 RXQ5PA.................................................................................................57
1.2 RXQ8PA.................................................................................................59
1.3 RXQ10PA, 12PA ....................................................................................61
1.4 RXQ14PA, 16PA, 18PA .........................................................................63
1.5 Outdoor Air Processing Unit FXMQ125MFV1~250MFV1 ......................65
2. Functional Parts Layout ........................................................................66
2.1 RXQ5PA.................................................................................................66
2.2 RXQ8PA.................................................................................................67
2.3 RXQ10PA...............................................................................................68
2.4 RXQ12PA...............................................................................................69
2.5 RXQ14PA, 16PA, 18PA .........................................................................70
3. Refrigerant Flow for Each Operation Mode...........................................71
Part 4 Function............................................................................ 79
1. Function General...................................................................................80
1.1 Symbol ...................................................................................................80
1.2 Operation Mode......................................................................................81
2. Basic Control.........................................................................................82
2.1 Normal Operation ...................................................................................82
2.2 Compressor PI Control...........................................................................82
2.3 Electronic Expansion Valve PI Control.................................................101
2.4 Step Control of Outdoor Unit Fans .......................................................101
2.5 Outdoor Unit Fan Control in Cooling Operation ...................................101
i Table of Contents
Si34-804_A
3. Special Control....................................................................................102
3.1 Startup Control .....................................................................................102
3.2 Oil Return Operation ............................................................................103
3.3 Pump-down Residual Operation ..........................................................104
3.4 Standby ................................................................................................104
3.5 Stopping Operation ..............................................................................105
4. Protection Control ...............................................................................106
4.1 High Pressure Protection Control.........................................................106
4.2 Low Pressure Protection Control..........................................................107
4.3 Discharge Pipe Protection Control .......................................................108
4.4 Inverter Protection Control ...................................................................109
4.5 STD Compressor Overload Protection.................................................110
4.6 Injection Control (only for RXQ5PA).....................................................110
5. Other Control.......................................................................................111
5.1 Outdoor Unit Rotation...........................................................................111
5.2 Emergency Operation ..........................................................................112
5.3 Demand Operation ...............................................................................117
6. Outline of Control (Indoor Unit) ...........................................................118
6.1 Drain Pump Control..............................................................................118
6.2 Louver Control for Preventing Ceiling Dirt............................................120
6.3 Thermostat Sensor in Remote Controller.............................................121
6.4 Thermostat Control while in Normal Operation ....................................122
6.5 Thermostat Control in Dry Operation ...................................................122
6.6 Electronic Expansion Valve Control .....................................................123
6.7 Freeze Prevention ................................................................................123
6.8 List of Swing Flap Operations ..............................................................124
6.9 Control of Outdoor Air Processing Unit
(Unique Control for Outdoor Air Processing Unit) ................................125
Part 5 Test Operation ............................................................... 128

1. Test Operation ....................................................................................129
1.1 Installation Process ..............................................................................129
1.2 Procedure and Outline .........................................................................130
1.3 Operation when Power is Turned On ...................................................145
2. Outdoor Unit PCB Layout....................................................................146
3. Field Setting ........................................................................................147
3.1 Field Setting from Remote Controller ...................................................147
3.2 Field Setting from Outdoor Unit............................................................164
Part 6 Troubleshooting ............................................................. 184

1. Symptom-based Troubleshooting .......................................................187
2. Troubleshooting by Remote Controller ...............................................190
2.1 The INSPECTION / TEST Button.........................................................190
2.2 Self-diagnosis by Wired Remote Controller .........................................191
2.3 Self-diagnosis by Wireless Remote Controller .....................................192
2.4 Operation of the Remote Controllers Inspection /
Test Operation Button ..........................................................................195
2.5 Remote Controller Service Mode .........................................................196
2.6 Remote Controller Self-Diagnosis Function .........................................199
Table of Contents ii
Si34-804_A
3. Troubleshooting by Indication on the Remote Controller ....................206

3.1 A0 Indoor Unit: Error of External Protection Device............................206
3.2 A1 Indoor Unit: PCB Defect ................................................................207
3.3 A3 Indoor Unit: Malfunction of Drain Level Control System (S1L) ......208
3.4 A6 Indoor Unit: Fan Motor (M1F) Lock, Overload...............................210
3.5 A7 Indoor Unit: Malfunction of Swing Flap Motor (M1S).....................214
3.6 A8Abnormal Power Supply Voltage....................................................216
3.7 A9 Indoor Unit: Malfunction of Moving Part of
Electronic Expansion Valve (Y1E)........................................................217
3.8 AF Indoor Unit: Drain Level above Limit .............................................219
3.9 AJ Indoor Unit: Malfunction of Capacity Determination Device ..........220
3.10 C1 Indoor Unit: Failure of Transmission
(Between Indoor unit PCB and Fan PCB) ............................................221
3.11 C4 Indoor Unit: Malfunction of Thermistor (R2T) for
Heat Exchanger....................................................................................223
3.12 C5 Indoor Unit: Malfunction of Thermistor (R3T) for Gas Pipes .........224
3.13 C6 Indoor Unit: Failure of Combination (Between Indoor unit
PCB and Fan PCB) ..............................................................................225
3.14 C9 Indoor Unit: Malfunction of Thermistor (R1T) for Suction Air.........226
3.15 CC Indoor Unit: Malfunction of Humidity Sensor System ....................227
3.16 CJ Indoor Unit: Malfunction of Thermostat Sensor in
Remote Controller ................................................................................228
3.17 E1 Outdoor Unit: PCB Defect .............................................................229
3.18 E3 Outdoor Unit: Actuation of High Pressure Switch..........................230
3.19 E4 Outdoor Unit: Actuation of Low Pressure Sensor..........................232
3.20 E5 Outdoor Unit: Inverter Compressor Motor Lock.............................234
3.21 E6 Outdoor Unit: STD Compressor Motor Overcurrent/Lock..............236
3.22 E7 Outdoor Unit: Malfunction of Outdoor Unit Fan Motor ...................237
3.23 E9 Outdoor Unit: Malfunction of Moving Part of
Electronic Expansion Valve (Y1E, Y2E)...............................................240
3.24 F3 Outdoor Unit: Abnormal Discharge Pipe Temperature..................242
3.25 F6 Outdoor Unit: Refrigerant Overcharged.........................................243
3.26 H7 Outdoor Unit: Abnormal Outdoor Fan Motor Signal ......................244
3.27 H9 Outdoor Unit: Malfunction of Thermistor (R1T) for
Outdoor Air ...........................................................................................245
3.28 J2 Outdoor Unit: Current Sensor Malfunction ....................................246
3.29 J3 Outdoor Unit: Malfunction of Discharge Pipe Thermistor
(R3, R31~33T) .....................................................................................247
3.30 J5 Outdoor Unit: Malfunction of Thermistor (R2T, R7T) for
Suction Pipe .........................................................................................248
3.31 J6 Outdoor Unit: Malfunction of Thermistor (R4T) for
Outdoor Unit Heat Exchanger ..............................................................249
3.32 J7 Outdoor Unit: Malfunction of Liquid Pipe Thermistor (R6T)...........250
3.33 J9 Outdoor Unit: Malfunction of
Subcooling Heat Exchanger Gas Pipe Thermistor (R5T).....................251
3.34 JA Outdoor Unit: Malfunction of High Pressure Sensor......................252
3.35 JC Outdoor Unit: Malfunction of Low Pressure Sensor ......................253
3.36 L4 Outdoor Unit: Malfunction of
Inverter Radiating Fin Temperature Rise .............................................254
3.37 L5 Outdoor Unit: Inverter Compressor Abnormal ...............................256
3.38 L8 Outdoor Unit: Inverter Current Abnormal.......................................258
3.39 L9 Outdoor Unit: Inverter Start up Error .............................................260
iii Table of Contents

Si34-804_A
3.40 LC Outdoor Unit: Malfunction of Transmission Between

Inverter and Control PCB .....................................................................262
3.41 P1 Outdoor Unit: Inverter Over-Ripple Protection...............................265
3.42 P4 Outdoor Unit: Malfunction of Inverter Radiating Fin
Temperature Rise Sensor ....................................................................266
3.43 PJ Outdoor Unit: Faulty Field Setting after Replacing
Main PCB or Faulty Combination of PCB.............................................268
3.44 U0 Outdoor Unit: Low Pressure Drop Due to Refrigerant
Shortage or Electronic Expansion Valve Failure ..................................269
3.45 U1 Reverse Phase, Open Phase ........................................................270
3.46 U2 Outdoor Unit: Power Supply Insufficient or
Instantaneous Failure...........................................................................271
3.47 U3 Outdoor Unit: Check Operation not Executed ...............................274
3.48 U4 Malfunction of Transmission Between Indoor Units ......................275
3.49 U5 Indoor Unit: Malfunction of Transmission
Between Remote Controller and Indoor Unit........................................277
Between Outdoor Units ........................................................................278
3.51 U8 Indoor Unit: Malfunction of Transmission Between
Main and Sub Remote Controllers .......................................................280
Indoor and Outdoor Units in the Same System....................................281
3.53 UA Improper Combination of Indoor and Outdoor Units,
Indoor Units and Remote Controller.....................................................282
3.54 UC Address Duplication of Centralized Controller...............................284
3.55 UE Malfunction of Transmission Between Centralized
Controller and Indoor Unit ....................................................................285
3.56 UF System is not Set yet.....................................................................288
3.57 UH Malfunction of System,
Refrigerant System Address Undefined ...............................................289
4. Troubleshooting (OP: Centralized Remote Controller) .......................291
4.1 M1 PCB Defect ...................................................................................291
4.2 M8 Malfunction of Transmission Between Optional Controllers for
Centralized Control...............................................................................292
4.3 MA Improper Combination of Optional Controllers for
4.4 MC Address Duplication, Improper Setting .........................................296
5. Troubleshooting (OP: Unified ON/OFF Controller) .............................299
5.1 Operation Lamp Blinks .........................................................................299
5.2 Display Under Centralized Control Blinks (Repeats Single Blink) .....301
5.3 Display Under Centralized Control Blinks (Repeats Double Blink) ....304
Part 7 Appendix......................................................................... 308

1. Piping Diagrams..................................................................................309
1.1 Outdoor Unit .........................................................................................309
1.2 Indoor Unit............................................................................................313
2. Wiring Diagrams for Reference...........................................................317
2.1 Outdoor Unit .........................................................................................317
2.2 Field Wiring ..........................................................................................322
2.3 Indoor Unit............................................................................................325
Table of Contents iv
Si34-804_A
3. List of Electrical and Functional Parts .................................................340

3.1 Outdoor Unit .........................................................................................340
3.2 Indoor Side ...........................................................................................343
4. Option List ...........................................................................................350
4.1 Option List of Controllers......................................................................350
4.2 Option Lists (Outdoor Unit)...................................................................352
5. Piping Installation Point.......................................................................354
5.1 Piping Installation Point ........................................................................354
5.2 The Example of a Wrong Pattern .........................................................355
6. Example of Connection (R-410A Type) ..............................................356
7. Thermistor Resistance / Temperature Characteristics........................358
8. Pressure Sensor .................................................................................360
9. Method of Checking the Inverters Power Transistors and
Diode Modules ....................................................................................361
9.1 Method of Checking the Inverters Power Transistors and
Diode Modules .....................................................................................361
Part 8 Precautions for New Refrigerant (R-410A) .................... 363

1. Precautions for New Refrigerant (R-410A) .........................................364
1.1 Outline ..................................................................................................364
1.2 Refrigerant Cylinders............................................................................366
1.3 Service Tools........................................................................................367
v Table of Contents
Si34-804_A Introduction
1. Introduction
1.1 Safety Cautions
Cautions and Be sure to read the following safety cautions before conducting repair work.
Warnings The caution items are classified into Warning and Caution. The Warning
items are especially important since they can lead to death or serious injury if they are not
followed closely. The Caution items can also lead to serious accidents under some
conditions if they are not followed. Therefore, be sure to observe all the safety caution items
described below.
About the pictograms
This symbol indicates an item for which caution must be exercised.
The pictogram shows the item to which attention must be paid.
This symbol indicates a prohibited action.
The prohibited item or action is shown inside or near the symbol.
This symbol indicates an action that must be taken, or an instruction.
The instruction is shown inside or near the symbol.
After the repair work is complete, be sure to conduct a test operation to ensure that the
equipment operates normally, and explain the cautions for operating the product to the
customer
1.1.1 Caution in Repair
Warning
Be sure to disconnect the power cable plug from the plug socket before
disassembling the equipment for a repair.
Working on the equipment that is connected to a power supply can cause an
electrical shook.
If it is necessary to supply power to the equipment to conduct the repair or
inspecting the circuits, do not touch any electrically charged sections of the
equipment.
If the refrigerant gas discharges during the repair work, do not touch the
discharging refrigerant gas.
The refrigerant gas can cause frostbite.
When disconnecting the suction or discharge pipe of the compressor at the

welded section, release the refrigerant gas completely at a well-ventilated
place first.
If there is a gas remaining inside the compressor, the refrigerant gas or
refrigerating machine oil discharges when the pipe is disconnected, and it can
cause injury.
If the refrigerant gas leaks during the repair work, ventilate the area. The
refrigerant gas can generate toxic gases when it contacts flames.
The step-up capacitor supplies high-voltage electricity to the electrical

components of the outdoor unit.
Be sure to discharge the capacitor completely before conducting repair work.
A charged capacitor can cause an electrical shock.
Do not start or stop the air conditioner operation by plugging or unplugging the
power cable plug.
Plugging or unplugging the power cable plug to operate the equipment can
cause an electrical shock or fire.
vi
Introduction Si34-804_A
Caution
Do not repair the electrical components with wet hands.
Working on the equipment with wet hands can cause an electrical shock.
Do not clean the air conditioner by splashing water.

Washing the unit with water can cause an electrical shock.
Be sure to provide the grounding when repairing the equipment in a humid or

wet place, to avoid electrical shocks.
Be sure to turn off the power switch and unplug the power cable when cleaning
the equipment.
The internal fan rotates at a high speed, and cause injury.
Do not tilt the unit when removing it.

The water inside the unit can spill and wet the furniture and floor.
Be sure to check that the refrigerating cycle section has cooled down
sufficiently before conducting repair work.
Working on the unit when the refrigerating cycle section is hot can cause burns.
Use the welder in a well-ventilated place.
Using the welder in an enclosed room can cause oxygen deficiency.
1.1.2 Cautions Regarding Products after Repair

Warning
Be sure to use parts listed in the service parts list of the applicable model and
appropriate tools to conduct repair work. Never attempt to modify the
equipment.
The use of inappropriate parts or tools can cause an electrical shock,
excessive heat generation or fire.
When relocating the equipment, make sure that the new installation site has
sufficient strength to withstand the weight of the equipment.
If the installation site does not have sufficient strength and if the installation
work is not conducted securely, the equipment can fall and cause injury.
Be sure to install the product correctly by using the provided standard For integral units
installation frame. only
Incorrect use of the installation frame and improper installation can cause the
equipment to fall, resulting in injury.
Be sure to install the product securely in the installation frame mounted on a For integral units
window frame. only
If the unit is not securely mounted, it can fall and cause injury.
Be sure to use an exclusive power circuit for the equipment, and follow the
technical standards related to the electrical equipment, the internal wiring
regulations and the instruction manual for installation when conducting
electrical work.
Insufficient power circuit capacity and improper electrical work can cause an
electrical shock or fire.
vii
Warning
Be sure to use the specified cable to connect between the indoor and outdoor
units. Make the connections securely and route the cable properly so that there
is no force pulling the cable at the connection terminals.
Improper connections can cause excessive heat generation or fire.
When connecting the cable between the indoor and outdoor units, make sure
that the terminal cover does not lift off or dismount because of the cable.
If the cover is not mounted properly, the terminal connection section can cause
an electrical shock, excessive heat generation or fire.
Do not damage or modify the power cable.
Damaged or modified power cable can cause an electrical shock or fire.
Placing heavy items on the power cable, and heating or pulling the power cable
can damage the cable.
Do not mix air or gas other than the specified refrigerant (R-410A) in the
refrigerant system.
If air enters the refrigerating system, an excessively high pressure results,
causing equipment damage and injury.
If the refrigerant gas leaks, be sure to locate the leak and repair it before
charging the refrigerant. After charging refrigerant, make sure that there is no
refrigerant leak.
If the leak cannot be located and the repair work must be stopped, be sure to
perform pump-down and close the service valve, to prevent the refrigerant gas
from leaking into the room. The refrigerant gas itself is harmless, but it can
generate toxic gases when it contacts flames, such as fan and other heaters,
stoves and ranges.
When replacing the coin battery in the remote controller, be sure to disposed
of the old battery to prevent children from swallowing it.
If a child swallows the coin battery, see a doctor immediately.
Caution
Installation of a leakage breaker is necessary in some cases depending on the
conditions of the installation site, to prevent electrical shocks.
Do not install the equipment in a place where there is a possibility of
combustible gas leaks.
If a combustible gas leaks and remains around the unit, it can cause a fire.
Be sure to install the packing and seal on the installation frame properly. For integral units
If the packing and seal are not installed properly, water can enter the room and only
wet the furniture and floor.
1.1.3 Inspection after Repair

Warning
Check to make sure that the power cable plug is not dirty or loose, then insert
the plug into a power outlet all the way.
If the plug has dust or loose connection, it can cause an electrical shock or fire.
If the power cable and lead wires have scratches or deteriorated, be sure to
replace them.
Damaged cable and wires can cause an electrical shock, excessive heat
generation or fire.
Do not use a joined power cable or extension cable, or share the same power
outlet with other electrical appliances, since it can cause an electrical shock,
excessive heat generation or fire.
viii
Introduction Si34-804_A
Caution
Check to see if the parts and wires are mounted and connected properly, and
if the connections at the soldered or crimped terminals are secure.
Improper installation and connections can cause excessive heat generation,
fire or an electrical shock.
If the installation platform or frame has corroded, replace it.
Corroded installation platform or frame can cause the unit to fall, resulting in
injury.
Check the grounding, and repair it if the equipment is not properly grounded.
Improper grounding can cause an electrical shock.
Be sure to measure the insulation resistance after the repair, and make sure
that the resistance is 1 Mohm or higher.
Faulty insulation can cause an electrical shock.
Be sure to check the drainage of the indoor unit after the repair.
Faulty drainage can cause the water to enter the room and wet the furniture
and floor.
1.1.4 Using Icons

Icons are used to attract the attention of the reader to specific information. The meaning of each
icon is described in the table below:
1.1.5 Using Icons List

Icon Type of Description
Information
Note A note provides information that is not indispensable, but may
nevertheless be valuable to the reader, such as tips and tricks.
Note:
Caution A caution is used when there is danger that the reader, through
incorrect manipulation, may damage equipment, loose data, get
Caution an unexpected result or has to restart (part of) a procedure.
Warning A warning is used when there is danger of personal injury.
Warning
Reference A reference guides the reader to other places in this binder or

in this manual, where he/she will find additional information on a
specific topic.
ix
1.2 PREFACE
Thank you for your continued patronage of Daikin products.
This is the new service manual for Daikin's Year 2009 VRVIII series Cooling Only System.
Daikin offers a wide range of models to respond to building and office air conditioning needs.
We are confident that customers will be able to find the models that best suit their needs.
This service manual contains information regarding the servicing of VRVIII series R-410A
Cooling Only System.
August, 2009
After Sales Service Division
x
Si34-804_A
Part 1
General Information
1. Model Names of Indoor/Outdoor Units....................................................2

2. External Appearance...............................................................................3
2.1 Indoor Units ..............................................................................................3
2.2 Outdoor Units ...........................................................................................4
3. Combination of Outdoor Units.................................................................6
4. Model Selection.......................................................................................8
1 General Information
Si34-804_A Model Names of Indoor/Outdoor Units
1. Model Names of Indoor/Outdoor Units

Indoor Units
Type Model Name Power Supply
Ceiling Mounted
Cassette Type FXFQ 25P 32P 40P 50P 63P 80P 100P 125P
(Round Flow)
VE
Ceiling Mounted
Cassette Type FXCQ 20M 25M 32M 40M 50M 63M 80M 125M
(Double Flow)
Ceiling Mounted
Cassette Corner Type FXKQ 25MA 32MA 40MA 63MA
FXDQ-
PBVE 20PB 25PB 32PB
FXDQ- 20PB 25PB 32PB
Slim Ceiling Mounted PBVET
Duct Type FXDQ-
40NB 50NB 63NB
NBVE
FXDQ-
40NB 50NB 63NB
NBVET
Ceiling Mounted
Built-in Type FXSQ 20M 25M 32M 40M 50M 63M 80M 100M 125M
Ceiling Mounted VE
Duct Type (Middle and FXMQ 20P 25P 32P 40P 50P 63P 80P 100P 125P 140P
high static pressure)
Ceiling Mounted
Duct Type FXMQ 200MA 250MA
Ceiling Suspended
Type FXHQ 32MA 63MA 100MA
Wall Mounted Type FXAQ 20MA 25MA 32MA 40MA 50MA 63MA
Floor Standing Type FXLQ 20MA 25MA 32MA 40MA 50MA 63MA
Concealed Floor
Standing Type FXNQ 20MA 25MA 32MA 40MA 50MA 63MA
Outdoor Air Processing FXMQ-

Unit 125MF 200MF 250MF
MF
V1
Ceiling Suspended
Cassette Type FXUQ 71MA 100MA 125MA
Connection Unit
BEVQ- 71MA 100MA 125MA VE
MA
Note:FXDQ has following 2 Series, as show below.
FXDQ-PB, NBVET: without Drain Pump
FXDQ-PB, NBVE: with Drain Pump
BEV unit is required for each indoor unit.
MA: RoHS Directive models; Specifications, Dimensions and other functions are not changed compared with
M type.
Outdoor Units
Normal Series
Series Model Name Power Supply
5PA 8PA 10PA 12PA 14PA 16PA 18PA 20PA 22PA
Cooling Only RXQ 24PA 26PA 28PA 30PA 32PA 34PA 36PA 38PA 40PA Y1
42PA 44PA 46PA 48PA 50PA 52PA 54PA
High COP Series (Energy Saving Series)

Series Model Name Power Supply
16PAH 18PAH 24PAH 26PAH 28PAH 30PAH 32PAH 34PAH 36PAH
Cooling Only RXQ Y1
38PAH 40PAH 42PAH 44PAH 46PAH 48PAH 50PAH
Power Supply VE : 1 phase 220~240V, 50Hz

V1 : 1 phase 220~240V, 50Hz
Y1 : 3 phase 380~415V, 50Hz
General Information 2
External Appearance Si34-804_A
2. External Appearance
2.1 Indoor Units
Ceiling Mounted Cassette Type (Round Flow) Ceiling Mounted Duct Type
FXFQ25P FXMQ200MA
FXFQ32P FXMQ250MA
FXFQ40P
FXFQ50P
FXFQ63P
FXFQ80P
FXFQ100P
FXFQ125P
Ceiling Mounted Cassette Type (Double Flow) Ceiling Suspended Type

FXCQ20M FXHQ32MA
FXCQ25M FXHQ63MA
FXCQ32M FXHQ100MA
FXCQ40M
FXCQ50M
FXCQ63M
FXCQ80M
FXCQ125M
Ceiling Mounted Cassette Corner Type Wall Mounted Type

FXKQ25MA FXAQ20MA
FXKQ32MA FXAQ25MA
FXKQ40MA FXAQ32MA
FXKQ63MA FXAQ40MA
FXAQ50MA
FXAQ63MA
Slim Ceiling Mounted Duct Type Floor Standing Type

FXDQ20PB FXDQ40NB FXLQ20MA
FXLQ40MA
FXLQ50MA
with Drain Pump (VE) FXLQ63MA
without Drain Pump (VET)
Ceiling Mounted Built-in Type Concealed Floor Standing Type

FXSQ20M FXNQ20MA
FXSQ25M FXNQ25MA
FXSQ32M FXNQ32MA
FXSQ40M FXNQ40MA
FXSQ50M FXNQ50MA
FXSQ63M FXNQ63MA
FXSQ80M
FXSQ100M
FXSQ125M
Ceiling Mounted Duct Type (Middle and high static Ceiling Suspended Cassette Type
pressure) (Connection Unit Series)
FXMQ20P FXUQ71MA + BEVQ71MA
FXMQ40P
FXMQ50P Connection Unit
FXMQ63P
FXMQ80P
FXMQ100P
FXMQ125P
FXMQ140P
Si34-804_A External Appearance
2.2 Outdoor Units

Normal Series (Space Saving Series)
RXQ5PA RXQ8PA, 10PA RXQ12PA, 14PA, 16PA, 18PA
5HP 8, 10HP 12, 14, 16, 18HP
RXQ20PA, 22PA, 24PA, 26PA, 28PA RXQ30PA, 32PA, 34PA, 36PA
20, 22, 24, 26, 28HP 30, 32, 34, 36HP
RXQ38PA, 40PA, 42PA, 44PA, 46PA RXQ48PA, 50PA, 52PA, 54PA
38, 40, 42, 44, 46HP 48, 50, 52, 54HP
External Appearance Si34-804_A
RXQ16PAH, 18PAH RXQ24PAH, 26PAH
16, 18HP 24, 26HP
RXQ28PAH, 30PAH RXQ32PAH, 34PAH
28, 30HP 32, 34HP
RXQ36PAH, 38PAH, 40PAH, 42PAH, 44PAH, 46PAH, 48PAH, 50PAH
36, 38, 40, 42, 44, 46, 48, 50HP
Si34-804_A Combination of Outdoor Units
3. Combination of Outdoor Units

Normal Series
System Number Module Outdoor Unit Multi Connection
Piping Kit (Option)
Capacity of units 5 8 10 12 14 16 18
5HP 1
8HP 1
10HP 1
12HP 1
14HP 1
16HP 1
18HP 1
20HP 2
22HP 2
24HP 2
26HP 2
28HP 2 Cooling Only: BHFP22P100
30HP 2
32HP 2
34HP 2
36HP 2
38HP 3
40HP 3
42HP 3
44HP 3
48HP 3
50HP 3
52HP 3
54HP 3
Note: For multiple connection of 18HP system or more, an optional Daikin Outdoor Unit Multi
Connection Piping Kit is required.
Combination of Outdoor Units Si34-804_A

System Number Module Outdoor Unit Multi Connection
Piping Kit (Option)
Capacity of units 8 10 12 14 16 18
16HP 2
18HP 2
24HP 3
26HP 3
30HP 3
32HP 3
34HP 3
36HP 3
38HP 3
40HP 3
42HP 3
46HP 3
48HP 3
50HP 3
Note: For multiple connection of 16HP system or more, an optional Daikin Outdoor Unit Multi
Connection Piping Kit is required.
Si34-804_A Model Selection
4. Model Selection
VRVIII Cooling Only Series
Outdoor Units
Normal Type (Space Saving Type)
Outdoor unit multi Total capacity index of Maximum number of
HP Model name Combination connectable indoor units*
connection piping kit connectable indoor units*
5 HP RXQ5PA RXQ5PA 62.5 to 162.5 (250) 8 (12)
8 HP RXQ8PA RXQ8PA 100 to 260 (400) 13 (20)
10 HP RXQ10PA RXQ10PA 125 to 325 (500) 16 (25)
12 HP RXQ12PA RXQ12PA 150 to 390 (600) 19 (30)
14 HP RXQ14PA RXQ14PA 175 to 455 (700) 23 (35)
16 HP RXQ16PA RXQ16PA 200 to 520 (800) 26 (40)
18 HP RXQ18PA RXQ18PA 225 to 585 (900) 29 (45)
20 HP RXQ20PA RXQ8PA + RXQ12PA 250 to 650 (800) 32 (40)
26 HP RXQ26PA RXQ8PA + RXQ18PA 325 to 845 (1,040) 42 (52)
28 HP RXQ28PA RXQ10PA + RXQ18PA BHFP22P100 350 to 910 (1,120) 45 (56)
30 HP RXQ30PA RXQ12PA + RXQ18PA 375 to 975 (1,200) 48 (60)
32 HP RXQ32PA RXQ16PA x 2 400 to 1,040 (1,280) 52 (64)
34 HP RXQ34PA RXQ16PA + RXQ18PA 425 to 1,105 (1,360) 55 (64)
36 HP RXQ36PA RXQ18PA x 2 450 to 1,170 (1,440) 58 (64)
38 HP RXQ38PA RXQ8PA + RXQ12PA + RXQ18PA 475 to 1,235 (1,235) 61 (61)
40 HP RXQ40PA RXQ8PA + RXQ16PA x 2 500 to 1,300 (1,300)
42 HP RXQ42PA RXQ8PA + RXQ16PA + RXQ18PA 525 to 1,365 (1,365)
46 HP RXQ46PA RXQ10PA + RXQ18PA x 2 BHFP22P151 575 to 1,495 (1,495) 64 (64)
54 HP RXQ54PA RXQ18PA x 3 675 to 1,755 (1,755)
Note: For multiple connection of 20 HP systems and above, the above Daikin optional kit (separately sold) is required.
*Values inside brackets are based on connection of indoor units rated at maximum capacity, 200% for single outdoor units, 160%
for double outdoor units, and 130% for triple outdoor units.
High COP Type (Energy Saving Type)

Outdoor unit multi Total capacity index of Maximum number of
HP Model name Combination connectable indoor units* connectable indoor units*
connection piping kit
16 HP RXQ16PAH RXQ8PA x 2 200 to 520 (640) 26 (32)
BHFP22P100
18 HP RXQ18PAH RXQ8PA + RXQ10PA 225 to 585 (720) 29 (36)
24 HP RXQ24PAH RXQ8PA x 3 300 to 780 (780) 39 (39)
26 HP RXQ26PAH RXQ8PA x 2 + RXQ10PA 325 to 845 (845) 42 (42)
28 HP RXQ28PAH RXQ8PA x 2 + RXQ12PA 350 to 910 (910) 45 (45)
30 HP RXQ30PAH RXQ8PA + RXQ10PA + RXQ12PA 375 to 975 (975) 48 (48)
32 HP RXQ32PAH RXQ8PA + RXQ12PA x 2 400 to 1,040 (1,040) 52 (52)
36 HP RXQ36PAH RXQ12PA x 3 450 to 1,170 (1,170) 58 (58)
BHFP22P151
38 HP RXQ38PAH RXQ12PA x 2 + RXQ14PA 475 to 1,235 (1,235) 61 (61)
40 HP RXQ40PAH RXQ12PA x 2 + RXQ16PA 500 to 1,300 (1,300)
46 HP RXQ46PAH RXQ12PA + RXQ16PA + RXQ18PA 575 to 1,495 (1,495)
48 HP RXQ48PAH RXQ16PA x 3 600 to 1,560 (1,560)
Note: For multiple connection of 16 HP systems and above, the above Daikin optional kit (separately sold) is required.
*Values inside brackets are based on connection of indoor units rated at maximum capacity, 200% for single outdoor units, 160%
for double outdoor units, and 130% for triple outdoor units.
Model Selection Si34-804_A
Connectable Indoor Unit

Type Model Name Power Supply
Ceiling Mounted
Cassette Type FXFQ 25P 32P 40P 50P 63P 80P 100P 125P
(Round Flow)
Ceiling Mounted
Cassette Type FXCQ 20M 25M 32M 40M 50M 63M 80M 125M
(Double Flow)
Ceiling Mounted
Cassette Corner Type FXKQ 25MA 32MA 40MA 63MA
FXDQ-
PBVE 20PB 25PB 32PB
FXDQ- 20PB 25PB 32PB

Slim Ceiling Mounted PBVET
Duct Type FXDQ-
40NB 50NB 63NB
NBVE
FXDQ-
NBVET 40NB 50NB 63NB
VE
Ceiling Mounted
Built-in Type FXSQ 20M 25M 32M 40M 50M 63M 80M 100M 125M
Ceiling Mounted
Duct Type (Middle and FXMQ 20P 25P 32P 40P 50P 63P 80P 100P 125P 140P
high static pressure)
Ceiling Mounted
Duct Type FXMQ 200MA 250MA
Ceiling Suspended
Type FXHQ 32MA 63MA 100MA
Wall Mounted Type FXAQ 20MA 25MA 32MA 40MA 50MA 63MA
Floor Standing Type FXLQ 20MA 25MA 32MA 40MA 50MA 63MA
Concealed Floor
Standing Type FXNQ 20MA 25MA 32MA 40MA 50MA 63MA
Outdoor Air Processing FXMQ-

Unit 125MF 200MF 250MF
MF
V1
Ceiling Suspended
Cassette Type FXUQ 71MA 100MA 125MA
Connection Unit BEVQ-MA 71MA 100MA 125MA VE
Note: FXDQ has following 2 Series, as show below.

FXDQ-PB, NBVET: without Drain Pump
FXDQ-PB, NBVE : with Drain Pump
BEV unit is required for each indoor unit.
Indoor unit capacity

New refrigerant model code P20 P25 P32 P40 P50 P63 P80 P100 P125 P140 P200 P250
type type type type type type type type type type type type
Selecting model capacity 2.2 2.8 3.5 4.5 5.6 7.0 9.0 11.2 14.0 16.0 22.4 28.0
kW kW kW kW kW kW kW kW kW kW kW kW
Equivalent output 0.8HP 1HP 1.25HP 1.6HP 2.0HP 2.5HP 3.2HP 4HP 5HP 6HP 8HP 10HP
Use the above tables to determine the capacities of indoor units to be connected. Make sure the
total capacity of indoor units connected to each outdoor unit is within the specified value (kW).
The total capacity of connected indoor units must be within a range of 50 to 130% of the
rated capacity of the outdoor unit.
In some models, it is not possible to connect the maximum number of connectable indoor
units. Select models so the total capacity of connected indoor units conforms to the
specification.
Si34-804_A Model Selection
Differences from Conventional Models

Differences
Item
Object New model (PA Model) Conventional model (P Model)
z NONE z NONE
Compressor Connection of equalizer oil pipe (No particular changes in (No particular changes in
terms of service) terms of service)
Equalizer oil pipe for multi- z NONE z NONE
outdoor-unit system
z Additional refrigerant charging z Additional refrigerant charging
Workability quantity due to piping length + quantity due to piping length +
Procedure for calculating Adjustment quantity Adjustment quantity
refrigerant refilling quantity according to models of according to models of
outdoor units outdoor units
z Y branch z Y branch
Optional accessories Branch pipe for outdoor unit
connection Type: BHFP22P100/151 Type: BHFP22P100/151
z Some of Heat Pump units
require refrigerant amount of
Change of refrigerant amount not less than 12 kg.
Refrigerant charge Refrigerant amount reduced to z Less than 12 kg (Heat recovery units have
less than 12 kg. been designed for refrigerant
amount of less than 12 kg.)
Si34-804_A
Part 2
Specifications
1. Specifications ........................................................................................12
1.1 Outdoor Units .........................................................................................12
1.2 Indoor Units ............................................................................................33
11 Specifications
Si34-804_A Specifications
1. Specifications
1.1 Outdoor Units
Cooling Only 50Hz Standard Series <RXQ-PA>
Model Name RXQ5PAY1 RXQ8PAY1
kcal / h 12,100 19,400
1 Cooling Capacity (19.5CWB) Btu / h 48,100 76,800
kW 14.1 22.5
2 Cooling Capacity (19.0CWB) kW 14.0 22.4
Casing Color Ivory White (5Y7.5/1) Ivory White (5Y7.5/1)
Dimensions: (HWD) mm 1680635765 1680930765
Heat Exchanger Cross Fin Coil Cross Fin Coil
Type Hermetically Sealed Scroll Type Hermetically Sealed Scroll Type
Piston Displacement m/h 13.34 16.90
Comp. Number of Revolutions r.p.m 6300 7980
Motor OutputNumber kW 2.21 3.61
of Units
Starting Method Soft Start Soft Start
Type Propeller Fan Propeller Fan
Motor Output kW 0.351 0.751
Fan
Airflow Rate m/min 95 180
Drive Direct Drive Direct Drive
Connecting Liquid Pipe mm 9.5 (Brazing Connection) 9.5 (Brazing Connection)
Pipes Gas Pipe mm 15.9 (Brazing Connection) 19.1 (Brazing Connection)
Product Mass (Machine weight) kg 160 205
Safety Devices High Pressure Switch, Fan Driver Overload Protector, High Pressure Switch, Fan Driver Overload Protector,
Overcurrent Relay, Inverter Overload Protector Overcurrent Relay, Inverter Overload Protector
Capacity Control % 28~100 20~100
Refrigerant Name R-410A R-410A
Refrigerant Charge kg 6.2 7.2
Control Electronic Expansion Valve Electronic Expansion Valve
Refrigerator Oil Refer to the nameplate of compressor Refer to the nameplate of compressor
Standard Accessories Installation Manual, Operation Manual, Clamps Installation Manual, Operation Manual, Connection Pipes,
Clamps
Drawing No. C: 4D061669A C: 4D061687A
Notes:
Conversion Formulae
1 Indoor temp. : 27CDB, 19.5CWB / outdoor temp. : 35CDB / Equivalent piping length : 7.5m, level
difference : 0m. kcal/h=kW860
Btu/h=kW3412
2 Indoor temp. : 27CDB, 19.0CWB / outdoor temp. : 35CDB / Equivalent piping length : 7.5m, level cfm=m/min35.3
difference : 0m.
The Reference Number

C~: Partly corrected drawings.
J~: Original drawing is Japanese
V~: Printing Convenience
Specifications 12
Specifications Si34-804_A

kcal / h 24,300 29,000
kW 28.2 33.7
Piston Displacement m/h 13.34+10.53 13.34+10.53
Comp. Number of Revolutions r.p.m 6300, 2900 6300, 2900
Motor OutputNumber kW (1.4+4.5)1 (1.8+4.5)1
of Units
Fan
Product Mass (Machine Weight) kg 249 285
Standard Accessories Installation Manual, Operation Manual, Connection Pipes, Installation Manual, Operation Manual, Connection Pipes,
Clamps Clamps
Notes:
Conversion Formulae
Btu/h=kW3412
difference : 0m.
13 Specifications

kcal / h 34,600 39,000
kW 40.2 45.3
Piston Displacement m/h 13.34+10.53+10.53 13.34+10.53+10.53
Comp. Number of Revolutions r.p.m 6300, 29002 6300, 29002
Motor OutputNumber kW (1.4+4.5+4.5)1 (2.7+4.5+4.5)1
of Units
Fan
Product Mass (Machine Weight) kg 329 329
Clamps Clamps
Notes:
Conversion Formulae
Btu/h=kW3412
difference : 0m.
Specifications 14
Model Name (Combination Unit) RXQ18PAY1 RXQ20PAY1

Model Name (Independent Unit) RXQ8PAY1+RXQ12PAY1
kcal / h 42,000 48,300
kW 49.3 56.2
Dimensions: (HWD) mm 16801240765 (1680930765)+(16801240765)
Piston Displacement m/h 16.90+10.53+10.53 (16.90)+(13.34+10.53)
Comp. Number of Revolutions r.p.m 7980, 2900, 2900 (7980)+(6300, 2900)
Motor OutputNumber kW (2.8+4.5+4.5)1 (3.61)+((1.8+4.5)1)
of Units
Motor Output kW 0.752 (0.751)+(0.352)
Fan
Airflow Rate m/min 239 180+233
Product Mass (Machine Weight) kg 341 205+285
Refrigerant Charge kg 11.7 7.2+9.5
Clamps Clamps
Drawing No. C: 4D061692A
Notes:
Conversion Formulae
Btu/h=kW3412
difference : 0m.
15 Specifications

Model Name (Independent Unit) RXQ10PAY1+RXQ12PAY1 RXQ8PAY1+RXQ16PAY1
kcal / h 53,200 58,300
kW 61.9 67.8
Dimensions: (HWD) mm (1680930765)+(16801240765) (1680930765)+(16801240765)
Piston Displacement m/h (13.34+10.53)+(13.34+10.53) 16.90+(13.34+10.53+10.53)
Comp. Number of Revolutions r.p.m (6300, 2900)+(6300, 2900) 7980+(6300, 29002)
Motor OutputNumber kW ((1.4+4.5)1)+((1.8+4.5)1) (3.61)+((2.7+4.5+4.5)1)
of Units
Motor Output kW (0.751)+(0.352) (0.751)+(0.352)
Fan
Airflow Rate m/min 185+233 180+233
Product Mass (Machine Weight) kg 249+285 205+329
Refrigerant Charge kg 7.9+9.5 7.2+11.5
Clamps Clamps
Drawing No.
Notes:
Conversion Formulae
Btu/h=kW3412
difference : 0m.
Specifications 16

kcal / h 61,700 66,700
kW 71.8 77.5
Piston Displacement m/h (16.90)+(16.90+10.53+10.53) (13.34+10.53)+(16.90+10.53+10.53)
Comp. Number of Revolutions r.p.m (7980)+(7980, 2900, 2900) (6300, 2900)+(7980, 29002)
Motor OutputNumber kW (3.61)+((2.8+4.5+4.5)1) ((1.4+4.5)1)+((2.8+4.5+4.5)1)
of Units
Motor Output kW (0.751)+(0.752) (0.751)+(0.752)
Fan
Clamps Clamps
Drawing No.
Notes:
Conversion Formulae
Btu/h=kW3412
difference : 0m.
17 Specifications

kcal / h 71,400 77,800
kW 83 90.5
Piston Displacement m/h (13.34+10.53)+(16.90+10.53+10.53) (13.34+10.53+10.53)+(13.34+10.53+10.53)
Comp. Number of Revolutions r.p.m (6300, 2900)+(7980, 2900, 2900) (6300, 2900, 2900)+(6300, 2900, 2900)
Motor OutputNumber kW ((1.8+4.5)1)+((2.8+4.5+4.5)1) ((2.7+4.5+4.5)1)+((2.7+4.5+4.5)1)
of Units
Motor Output kW (0.352)+(0.752) (0.352)+(0.352)
Fan
Clamps Clamps
Drawing No.
Notes:
Conversion Formulae
Btu/h=kW3412
difference : 0m.
Specifications 18

kcal / h 81,400 85,100
kW 94.6 99.0
Piston Displacement m/h (13.34+10.53+10.53)+(16.90+10.53+10.53) (16.90+10.53+10.53)+(16.90+10.53+10.53)
Comp. Number of Revolutions r.p.m (6300, 2900, 2900)+(7980, 2900, 2900) (7980, 2900, 2900)+(7980, 2900, 2900)
Motor OutputNumber kW ((2.7+4.5+4.5)1)+((2.8+4.5+4.5)1) ((2.8+4.5+4.5)1)+((2.8+4.5+4.5)1)
of Units
Motor Output kW (0.352)+(0.752) (0.752)+(0.752)
Fan
Clamps Clamps
Drawing No.
Notes:
Conversion Formulae
Btu/h=kW3412
difference : 0m.
19 Specifications

Model Name (Independent Unit) RXQ8PAY1+RXQ12PAY1+RXQ18PAY1 RXQ8PAY1+RXQ16PAY1+RXQ16PAY1
kcal / h 91,200 97,200
kW 106 113
2 Cooling Capacity (19.0CWB) kW 105 112
Dimensions: (HWD) mm (1680930765)+(16801240765)+(16801240765) (1680930765)+(16801240765)+(16801240765)
Piston Displacement m/h (16.90)+(13.34+10.53)+(16.90+10.53+10.53) (16.90)+(13.34+10.53+10.53)+(13.34+10.53+10.53)
Comp. Number of Revolutions r.p.m (7980)+(6300, 2900)+(7980, 2900, 2900) (7980)+(6300, 2900, 2900)+(6300, 2900, 2900)
Motor OutputNumber kW (3.61)+((1.8+4.5)1)+((4.3+4.5+4.5)1) (3.61)+((2.7+4.5+4.5)1)+((2.7+4.5+4.5)1)
of Units
Motor Output kW (0.751)+(0.352)+(0.752) (0.751)+(0.352)+(0.352)
Fan
Airflow Rate m/min 180+233+239 180+233+233
Product Mass (Machine Weight) kg 205+285+341 205+329+329
Refrigerant Charge kg 7.2+9.5+11.7 7.2+11.5+11.5
Clamps Clamps
Drawing No.
Notes:
Conversion Formulae
Btu/h=kW3412
difference : 0m.
Specifications 20

kcal / h 101,000 104,000
kW 117 121
Piston Displacement m/h (16.90)+(13.34+10.53+10.53)+(16.90+10.53+10.53) (16.90)+(16.90+10.53+10.53)+(16.90+10.53+10.53)
Comp. Number of Revolutions r.p.m (7980)+(6300, 2900, 2900)+(7980, 2900, 2900) (7980)+(7980, 29002)+(7980, 2900, 2900)
Motor OutputNumber kW (3.61)+((2.7+4.5+4.5)1)+((2.8+4.5+4.5)1) (3.61)+((2.8+4.5+4.5)1)+((2.8+4.5+4.5)1)
of Units
Motor Output kW (0.751)+(0.352)+(0.752) (0.751)+(0.752)+(0.752)
Fan
Clamps Clamps
Drawing No.
Notes:
Conversion Formulae
Btu/h=kW3412
difference : 0m.
21 Specifications

kcal / h 109,000 114,000
kW 127 133
Piston Displacement m/h (13.34+10.53)+(16.90+10.53+10.53)+(16.90+10.53+10.53) (13.34+10.53)+(16.90+10.53+10.53)+(16.90+10.53+10.53)
Comp. Number of Revolutions r.p.m (6300, 2900)+(7980, 2900, 2900)+(7980, 2900, 2900) (6300, 2900)+(7980, 2900, 2900)+(7980, 2900, 2900)
Motor OutputNumber kW ((1.4+4.5)1)+((2.8+4.5+4.5)1)+((2.8+4.5+4.5)1) ((1.8+4.5)1)+((2.8+4.5+4.5)1)+((2.8+4.5+4.5)1)
of Units
Motor Output kW (0.751)+(0.752)+(0.752) (0.352)+(0.752)+(0.752)
Fan
Clamps Clamps
Drawing No.
Notes:
Conversion Formulae
Btu/h=kW3412
difference : 0m.
Specifications 22

kcal / h 120,000 124,000
kW 139 144
Piston Displacement m/h (13.34+10.53+10.53)+(16.90+10.53+10.53)+(16.90+10.53+10.53) (13.34+10.53+10.53)+(16.90+10.53+10.53)+(16.90+10.53+10.53)
Comp. Number of Revolutions r.p.m (6300, 29002)+(7980, 2900, 2900)+(7980, 2900, 2900) (6300, 29002)+(7980, 2900, 2900)+(7980, 2900, 2900)
Motor OutputNumber kW ((1.4+4.5+4.5)1)+((2.8+4.5+4.5)1)+((2.8+4.5+4.5)1) ((2.7+4.5+4.5)1)+((2.8+4.5+4.5)1)+((2.8+4.5+4.5)1)
of Units
Motor Output kW (0.352)+(0.752)+(0.752) (0.352)+(0.752)+(0.752)
Fan
Clamps Clamps
Drawing No.
Notes:
Conversion Formulae
Btu/h=kW3412
difference : 0m.
23 Specifications
Model Name (Combination Unit) RXQ54PAY1

Model Name (Independent Unit) RXQ18PAY1+RXQ18PAY1+RXQ18PAY1
kcal / h 127,000
1 Cooling Capacity (19.5CWB) Btu / h 505,000
kW 148
2 Cooling Capacity (19.0CWB) kW 147
Casing Color Ivory White (5Y7.5/1)
Dimensions: (HWD) mm (16801240765)+(16801240765)+(16801240765)
Heat Exchanger Cross Fin Coil
Type Hermetically Sealed Scroll Type
Piston Displacement m/h (16.90+10.53+10.53)+(16.90+10.53+10.53)+(16.90+10.53+10.53)
Comp. Number of Revolutions r.p.m (7980, 2900, 2900)+(7980, 2900, 2900)+(7980, 2900, 2900)
Motor OutputNumber kW ((2.8+4.5+4.5)1)+((2.8+4.5+4.5)1)+((2.8+4.5+4.5)1)
of Units
Starting Method Soft Start
Type Propeller Fan
Motor Output kW (0.752)+(0.752)+(0.752)
Fan
Airflow Rate m/min 239+239+239
Drive Direct Drive
Connecting Liquid Pipe mm 19.1 (Brazing Connection)
Pipes Gas Pipe mm 41.3 (Brazing Connection)
Product Mass (Machine Weight) kg 341+341+341
Safety Devices High Pressure Switch, Fan Driver Overload Protector, Overcurrent Relay, Inverter Overload Protector
Capacity Control % 3~100
Refrigerant Name R-410A
Refrigerant Charge kg 11.7+11.7+11.7
Control Electronic Expansion Valve
Refrigerator Oil Refer to the nameplate of compressor
Standard Accessories Installation Manual, Operation Manual, Connection Pipes, Clamps
Drawing No.
Notes:
Conversion Formulae
Btu/h=kW3412
difference : 0m.
Specifications 24
Cooling Only 50Hz High COP Series <RXQ-PAH>

Model Name RXQ16PAHY1 RXQ18PAHY1
kcal / h 38,800 43,600
kW 45.1 50.7
Piston Displacement m/h (16.90)+(16.90) (16.90)+(13.34+10.53)
Comp. Number of Revolutions r.p.m (7980)+(7980) (7980)+(6300,2900)
Motor OutputNumber kW (3.61)+(3.61) (3.61)+((1.4+4.5)1)
of Units
Starting Method Soft start Soft start
Motor Output kW (0.751)+(0.751) (0.751)+(0.751)
Fan
Connecting Liquid Pipe mm 12.7(Brazing Connection) 15.9(Brazing Connection)
Pipes Gas Pipe mm 28.6(Brazing Connection) 28.6(Brazing Connection)
Product Mass (Machine weight) kg 205+205 205+249
Installation Manual, Operation Manual, Connection Pipes, Installation Manual, Operation Manual, Connection Pipes,
Standard Accessories Clamps Clamps
Drawing No.
Notes:
Conversion Formulae
Btu/h=kW3412
difference : 0m.
25 Specifications

kcal / h 58,100 63,000
kW 67.6 73.2
Piston Displacement m/h (16.90)+(16.90)+(16.90) (16.90)+(16.90)+(13.34+10.53)
Comp. Number of Revolutions r.p.m (7980)+(7980)+(7980) (7980)+(7980)+(6300,2900)
Motor OutputNumber kW (3.61)+(3.61)+(3.61) (3.61)+(3.61)+((1.4+4.5)1)
of Units
Motor Output kW (0.751)+(0.751)+(0.751) (0.751)+(0.751)+(0.751)
Fan
Product Mass (Machine weight) kg 205+205+205 205+205+249
Installation Manual, Operation Manual, Connection Pipes, Installation Manual, Operation Manual, Connection Pipes,
Standard Accessories Clamps
Clamps
Drawing No.
Notes:
Conversion Formulae
Btu/h=kW3412
cfm=m/min35.3
difference : 0m.
Specifications 26

kcal / h 67,800 72,600
kW 78.8 84.4
Piston Displacement m/h (16.90)+(16.90)+(13.34+10.53) (16.90)+(13.34+10.53)+(13.34+10.53)
Comp. Number of Revolutions r.p.m (7980)+(7980)+(6300,2900) (7980)+(6300,2900)+(6300,2900)
Motor OutputNumber kW (4.51)+(4.51)+((2.5+4.5)1) (4.51)+((1.4+4.5)1)+((2.5+4.5)1)
of Units
Motor Output kW (0.751)+(0.751)+(0.352) (0.751)+(0.751)+(0.352)
Fan
Clamps Clamps
Drawing No.
Notes:
Conversion Formulae
Btu/h=kW3412
difference : 0m.
27 Specifications

kcal / h 77,300 82,200
kW 89.9 95.6
Piston Displacement m/h (16.90)+(13.34+10.53)+(13.34+10.53) (13.34+10.53)+(13.34+10.53)+(13.34+10.53)
Comp. Number of Revolutions r.p.m (7980)+(6300,2900)+(6300,2900) (6300,2900)+(6300,2900)+(6300,2900)
Motor OutputNumber kW (3.61)+((1.8+4.5)1)+((1.8+4.5)1) ((1.4+4.5)1)+((1.8+4.5)1)+((1.8+4.5)1)
of Units
Motor Output kW (0.751)+(0.352)+(0.352) (0.751)+(0.352)+(0.352)
Fan
Clamps Clamps
Drawing No.
Notes:
Conversion Formulae
Btu/h=kW3412
difference : 0m.
Specifications 28

kcal / h 87,700 92,900
kW 102 108
Piston Displacement m/h (13.34+10.53)+(13.34+10.53)+(13.34+10.53) (13.34+10.53)+(13.34+10.53)+(13.34+10.53+10.53)
Comp. Number of Revolutions r.p.m (6300,2900)+(6300,2900)+(6300,2900) (6300,2900)+(6300,2900)+(6300,2900,2900)
Motor OutputNumber kW ((1.8+4.5)1)+((1.8+4.5)1)+((1.8+4.5)1) ((1.8+4.5)1)+((1.8+4.5)1)+((1.4+4.5+4.5)1)
of Units
Motor Output kW (0.352)+(0.352)+(0.352) (0.352)+(0.352)+(0.352)
Fan
Clamps Clamps
Drawing No.
Notes:
Conversion Formulae
Btu/h=kW3412
difference : 0m.
29 Specifications

kcal / h 97,200 101,000
kW 113 117
Piston Displacement m/h (13.34+10.53)+(13.34+10.53)+(13.72+10.53+10.53) (13.34+10.53)+(13.34+10.53)+(16.90+10.53+10.53)
Comp. Number of Revolutions r.p.m (6300,2900)+(6300,2900)+(6300,2900,2900) (6300,2900)+(6300,2900)+(7980,2900,2900)
Motor OutputNumber kW ((1.8+4.5)1)+((1.8+4.5)1)+((2.7+4.5+4.5)1) ((1.8+4.5)1)+((1.8+4.5)1)+((2.8+4.5+4.5)1)
of Units
Motor Output kW (0.352)+(0.352)+(0.352) (0.352)+(0.352)+(0.752)
Fan
Clamps Clamps
Drawing No.
Notes:
Conversion Formulae
Btu/h=kW3412
difference : 0m.
Specifications 30

kcal / h 108,000 111,000
kW 125 129
Piston Displacement m/h (13.34+10.53)+(13.34+10.53+10.53)+(13.34+10.53+10.53) (13.34+10.53)+(13.34+10.53+10.53)+(16.90+10.53+10.53)
Comp. Number of Revolutions r.p.m (6300,2900)+(6300,2900,2900)+(6300,2900,2900) (6300,2900)+(6300,2900,2900)+(7980,2900,2900)
Motor OutputNumber kW ((1.8+4.5)1)+((2.7+4.5+4.5)1)+((2.7+4.5+4.5)1) ((1.8+4.5)1)+((2.7+4.5+4.5)1)+((2.8+4.5+4.5)1)
of Units
Motor Output kW (0.352)+(0.352)+(0.352) (0.352)+(0.352)+(0.752)
Fan
Clamps Clamps
Drawing No.
Notes:
Conversion Formulae
Btu/h=kW3412
difference : 0m.
31 Specifications

kcal / h 117,000 120,000
kW 136 140
Piston Displacement m/h (13.34+10.53+10.53)+(13.34+10.53+10.53)+(13.34+10.53 (13.34+10.53+10.53)+(13.34+10.53+10.53)+(16.90+10.53
+10.53) +10.53)
Comp. Number of Revolutions r.p.m (6300,2900,2900)+(6300,2900,2900)+(6300,2900,2900) (6300,2900,2900)+(6300,2900,2900)+(7980,2900,2900)
Motor OutputNumber kW ((2.7+4.5+4.5)1)+((2.7+4.5+4.5)1)+((2.7+4.5+4.5)1) ((2.7+4.5+4.5)1)+((2.7+4.5+4.5)1)+((2.8+4.5+4.5)1)
of Units
Motor Output kW (0.352)+(0.352)+(0.352) (0.352)+(0.352)+(0.752)
Fan
Clamps Clamps
Drawing No.
Notes:
Conversion Formulae
Btu/h=kW3412
difference : 0m.
Specifications 32
1.2 Indoor Units

Ceiling Mounted Cassette (Round Flow) Type
Model FXFQ25PVE FXFQ32PVE FXFQ40PVE FXFQ50PVE
kcal/h 2,500 3,200 4,000 5,000
1 Cooling Capacity (19.5CWB) Btu/h 9,900 12,600 16,000 19,800
kW 2.9 3.7 4.7 5.8
2 Cooling Capacity (19.0CWB) kW 2.8 3.6 4.5 5.6
Casing Galvanized Steel Plate Galvanized Steel Plate Galvanized Steel Plate Galvanized Steel Plate
Dimensions: (HWD) mm 246840840 246840840 246840840 246840840
Coil (Cross RowsStagesFin Pitch mm 261.2 261.2 261.2 261.2
Fin Coil) Face Area m 0.267 0.267 0.267 0.267
Model QTS48C15M QTS48C15M QTS48C15M QTS48C15M
Type Turbo Fan Turbo Fan Turbo Fan Turbo Fan
Motor Output Number W 561 561 561 561
Fan of Units
m/min 13/11.5/10 13/11.5/10 15/13/11 16/13.5/11
Airflow Rate (HH/H/L)
cfm 459/406/353 459/406/353 530/459/388 565/477/388
Drive Direct Drive Direct Drive Direct Drive Direct Drive
Temperature Control Microprocessor Thermostat Microprocessor Thermostat Microprocessor Thermostat Microprocessor Thermostat
for Cooling and Heating for Cooling and Heating for Cooling and Heating for Cooling and Heating
Sound Absorbing Thermal Insulation Material Polyurethane Form Polyurethane Form Polyurethane Form Polyurethane Form
Liquid Pipes mm 6.4 (Flare Connection) 6.4 (Flare Connection) 6.4 (Flare Connection) 6.4 (Flare Connection)
Gas Pipes mm 12.7 (Flare Connection) 12.7 (Flare Connection) 12.7 (Flare Connection) 12.7 (Flare Connection)
Piping
Connections VP25 VP25 VP25 VP25
Drain Pipe mm External Dia. 32 External Dia. 32 External Dia. 32 External Dia. 32
( )
Internal Dia. 25 ( )
Internal Dia. 25
Mass (Weight) kg 19.5 19.5 19.5 19.5
4 Sound Level (HH/H/L) (220-240V) dBA 30/28.5/27 30/28.5/27 31/29/27 32/29.5/27
Safety Devices Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse
Refrigerant Control Electronic Expansion Valve Electronic Expansion Valve Electronic Expansion Valve Electronic Expansion Valve
Connectable Outdoor Unit R-410A VRV PA Series R-410A VRV PA Series R-410A VRV PA Series R-410A VRV PA Series
Model BYCP125K-W1 BYCP125K-W1 BYCP125K-W1 BYCP125K-W1
Panel Color Fresh White Fresh White Fresh White Fresh White
Decoration
Panels Dimensions: (HWD) mm 50950950 50950950 50950950 50950950
(Option) Resin Net Resin Net Resin Net Resin Net
Air Filter (with Mold Resistant) (with Mold Resistant) (with Mold Resistant) (with Mold Resistant)
Weight kg 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5
Operation Manual. Operation Manual. Operation Manual. Operation Manual.
Installation Manual. Installation Manual. Installation Manual. Installation Manual.
Paper Pattern for Paper Pattern for Paper Pattern for Paper Pattern for
Installation. Installation. Installation. Installation.
Drain Hose. Clamp Metal. Drain Hose. Clamp Metal. Drain Hose. Clamp Metal. Drain Hose. Clamp Metal.
Standard Accessories Washer Fixing Plate. Washer Fixing Plate. Washer Fixing Plate. Washer Fixing Plate.
Sealing Pads. Clamps. Sealing Pads. Clamps. Sealing Pads. Clamps. Sealing Pads. Clamps.
Screws. Washer for Screws. Washer for Screws. Washer for Screws. Washer for
Hanging Bracket. Insulation Hanging Bracket. Insulation Hanging Bracket. Insulation Hanging Bracket. Insulation
for Fitting. for Fitting. for Fitting. for Fitting.
Installation Guide. Installation Guide. Installation Guide. Installation Guide.
Drawing No. C : 3D060255
Note:
Conversion Formulae
1 Indoor temp. : 27CDB, 19.5CWB / outdoor temp. : 35CDB / Equivalent piping length : 7.5 m, level
difference : 0 m. kcal/h=kW860
Btu/h=kW3412
2 Indoor temp. : 27CDB, 19.0CWB / outdoor temp. : 35CDB / Equivalent piping length : 7.5 m, level cfm=m/min35.3
difference : 0 m.
3 Capacities are net, including a deduction for cooling (an addition for heating) for indoor fan motor heat.
4 Anechoic chamber conversion value, measured at a point 1.5 m downward from the unit center. During
actual operation, these values are normally somewhat higher as a result of ambient conditions.
33 Specifications
Ceiling Mounted Cassette (Round Flow) Type

Model FXFQ63PVE FXFQ80PVE FXFQ100PVE FXFQ125PVE
kcal/h 6,300 8,000 10,000 12,500
kW 7.3 9.3 11.6 14.5
Model QTS48C15M QTS48C15M QTS48C15M QTS48C15M
Type Turbo Fan Turbo Fan Turbo Fan Turbo Fan
Fan of Units
m/min 19/16.5/13.5 21/18/15 32/26/20 33/28/22.5
Airflow Rate (HH/H/L)
cfm 671/583/477 742/636/530 1,130/918/706 1,165/989/794
Sound Absorbing Thermal Insulation Material Polyurethane Form Polyurethane Form Polyurethane Form Polyurethane Form
Piping
(Internal Dia. 25) ( )
Internal Dia. 25 ( Internal Dia. 25) ( )
Internal Dia. 25
Mass (Weight) kg 22 22 25 25
4 Sound Level (HH/H/L) (220-240V) dBA 34/31/28 36/33.5/31 43/37.5/32 44/39/34
Safety Devices Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse
Connectable Outdoor Unit R-410A VRV PA Series R-410A VRV PA Series R-410A VRV PA Series R-410A VRV PA Series
Model BYCP125K-W1 BYCP125K-W1 BYCP125K-W1 BYCP125K-W1
Panel Color Fresh White Fresh White Fresh White Fresh White
Decoration Dimensions: (HWD) mm 50950950 50950950 50950950 50950950
Panels
Weight kg 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5
Operation Manual. Operation Manual. Operation Manual. Operation Manual.
Installation Manual. Installation Manual. Installation Manual. Installation Manual.
Paper Pattern for Paper Pattern for Paper Pattern for Paper Pattern for
Installation. Installation. Installation. Installation.
Drain Hose. Clamp Metal. Drain Hose. Clamp Metal. Drain Hose. Clamp Metal. Drain Hose. Clamp Metal.
Standard Accessories Washer Fixing Plate. Washer Fixing Plate. Washer Fixing Plate. Washer Fixing Plate.
Sealing Pads. Clamps. Sealing Pads. Clamps. Sealing Pads. Clamps. Sealing Pads. Clamps.
Screws. Washer for Screws. Washer for Screws. Washer for Screws. Washer for
Hanging Bracket. Insulation Hanging Bracket. Insulation Hanging Bracket. Insulation Hanging Bracket. Insulation
for Fitting. for Fitting. for Fitting. for Fitting.
Installation Guide. Installation Guide. Installation Guide. Installation Guide.
Note:
Conversion Formulae
Btu/h=kW3412
difference : 0 m.
Specifications 34
Ceiling Mounted Cassette Type (Double Flow)

Model FXCQ20MVE FXCQ25MVE FXCQ32MVE FXCQ40MVE
kcal/h 2,000 2,500 3,200 4,000
kW 2.3 2.9 3.7 4.7
Model D17K2AA1 D17K2AB1 D17K2AB1 2D17K1AA1
Type Sirocco Fan Sirocco Fan Sirocco Fan Sirocco Fan
Fan of Units
m/min 7/5 9/6.5 9/6.5 12/9
Airflow Rate (H/L)
cfm 247/177 318/230 318/230 424/318
Sound Absorbing Thermal Insulation Material Glass Wool/Urethane Foam Glass Wool/Urethane Foam Glass Wool/Urethane Foam Glass Wool/Urethane Foam
Piping
( )
Internal Dia. 25 ( Internal Dia. 25)
Machine Weight (Mass) kg 26 26 26 31
4 Sound Level (H/L) (220V) dBA 32/27 34/28 34/28 34/29
Safety Devices Fuse, Thermal Protector for Fuse, Thermal Protector for Fuse, Thermal Protector for Fuse, Thermal Protector for
Fan Motor Fan Motor Fan Motor Fan Motor
Connectable outdoor unit R-410A PA Series R-410A PA Series R-410A PA Series R-410A PA Series
Model BYBC32G-W1 BYBC32G-W1 BYBC32G-W1 BYBC50G-W1
Panel Color White (10Y9/0.5) White (10Y9/0.5) White (10Y9/0.5) White (10Y9/0.5)
Decoration
Panels Dimensions: (HWD) mm 531,030680 531,030680 531,030680 531,245680
Weight kg 8 8 8 8.5
Operation Manual, Operation Manual, Operation Manual, Operation Manual,
Installation Manual, Paper Installation Manual, Paper Installation Manual, Paper Installation Manual, Paper
Pattern for Installation, Pattern for Installation, Pattern for Installation, Pattern for Installation,
Washer for Hanging Washer for Hanging Washer for Hanging Washer for Hanging
Standard Accessories Brackets, Clamp Metal, Brackets, Clamp Metal, Brackets, Clamp Metal, Brackets, Clamp Metal,
Drain Hose, Insulation for Drain Hose, Insulation for Drain Hose, Insulation for Drain Hose, Insulation for
Fitting, Washer Fixing Fitting, Washer Fixing Fitting, Washer Fixing Fitting, Washer Fixing
Plates, Sealing Pads, Plates, Sealing Pads, Plates, Sealing Pads, Plates, Sealing Pads,
Clamps, Screws, Washers. Clamps, Screws, Washers. Clamps, Screws, Washers. Clamps, Screws, Washers.
Notes:
Conversion Formulae
1 Indoor temp. : 27CDB, 19.5CWB / outdoor temp.: 35CDB / Equivalent piping length: 7.5m, level
difference: 0m. kcal/h=kW860
Btu/h=kW3412
cfm=m/min35.3
difference: 0m.
4 Anechoic chamber conversion value, measured under JISB8616 conditions. During actual operation, these
values are normally somewhat higher as a result of ambient conditions.
35 Specifications
Ceiling Mounted Cassette Type (Double Flow)

Model FXCQ50MVE FXCQ63MVE FXCQ80MVE FXCQ125MVE
kcal/h 5,000 6,300 8,000 12,500
kW 5.8 7.3 9.3 14.5
Dimensions: (HWD) mm 305990600 3051,175600 3051,665600 3051,665600
Model 2D17K1AA1 2D17K2AA1VE 3D17K2AA1 3D17K2AB1
Fan of Units
m/min 12/9 16.5/13 26/21 33/25
Airflow Rate (H/L)
cfm 424/318 582/459 918/741 1,165/883
Sound Absorbing Thermal Insulation Material Glass Wool/Urethane Foam Glass Wool/Urethane Foam Glass Wool/Urethane Foam Glass Wool/Urethane Foam
Piping
( )
Internal Dia. 25 ( Internal Dia. 25)
4 Sound Level (H/L) dBA 34/29 37/32 39/34 44/38
Safety Devices Fuse, Thermal Protector for Fuse, Thermal Protector for Fuse, Thermal Protector for Fuse, Thermal Protector for
Fan Motor Fan Motor Fan Motor Fan Motor
Connectable outdoor unit R-410A PA Series R-410A PA Series R-410A PA Series R-410A PA Series
Model BYBC50G-W1 BYBC63G-W1 BYBC125G-W1 BYBC125G-W1
Decoration
Weight kg 8.5 9.5 12 12
Pattern for Installation, Pattern for Installation, Pattern for Installation, Pattern for Installation,
Washer for Hanging Washer for Hanging Washer for Hanging Washer for Hanging
Standard Accessories Brackets, Clamp Metal, Brackets, Clamp Metal, Brackets, Clamp Metal, Brackets, Clamp Metal,
Drain Hose, Insulation for Drain Hose, Insulation for Drain Hose, Insulation for Drain Hose, Insulation for
Fitting, Washer Fixing Fitting, Washer Fixing Fitting, Washer Fixing Fitting, Washer Fixing
Plates, Sealing Pads, Plates, Sealing Pads, Plates, Sealing Pads, Plates, Sealing Pads,
Clamps, Screws, Washers. Clamps, Screws, Washers. Clamps, Screws, Washers. Clamps, Screws, Washers.
Notes:
Conversion Formulae
Btu/h=kW3412
cfm=m/min35.3
difference: 0m.
Specifications 36
Ceiling Mounted Cassette Corner Type

Model FXKQ25MAVE FXKQ32MAVE FXKQ40MAVE FXKQ63MAVE
kcal/h 2,500 3,200 4,000 6,300
kW 2.9 3.7 4.7 7.3
Dimensions: (HWD) mm 2151,110710 2151,110710 2151,110710 2151,310710
Model 3D12H1AN1V1 3D12H1AN1V1 3D12H1AP1V1 4D12H1AJ1V1
Fan of Units
m/min 11/9 11/9 13/10 18/15
Airflow Rate (H/L)
cfm 388/318 388/318 459/353 635/530
Sound Absorbing Thermal Insulation Material Polyethylene Foam Polyethylene Foam Polyethylene Foam Polyethylene Foam
Piping
( Internal Dia. 25 ) (
Internal Dia. 25 ) ( Internal Dia. 25 ) ( Internal Dia. 25 )
4 Sound Level (H/L) (220V) dBA 38/33 38/33 40/34 42/37
Safety Devices Fuse, Fuse, Fuse, Fuse,
Thermal Fuse for Fan Motor Thermal Fuse for Fan Motor Thermal Fuse for Fan Motor Thermal Fuse for Fan Motor
Connectable Outdoor Units R-410A PA Series R-410A PA Series R-410A PA Series R-410A PA Series
Model BYK45FJW1 BYK45FJW1 BYK45FJW1 BYK71FJW1
Decoration
Weight kg 8.5 8.5 8.5 9.5
Pattern for Installation, Drain Pattern for Installation, Drain Pattern for Installation, Drain Pattern for Installation, Drain
Hose, Clamp Metal, Hose, Clamp Metal, Hose, Clamp Metal, Hose, Clamp Metal,
Standard Accessories Insulation for Fitting, Sealing Insulation for Fitting, Sealing Insulation for Fitting, Sealing Insulation for Fitting, Sealing
Pads, Clamps, Screws, Pads, Clamps, Screws, Pads, Clamps, Screws, Pads, Clamps, Screws,
Washers, Positioning Jig for Washers, Positioning Jig for Washers, Positioning Jig for Washers, Positioning Jig for
Installation, Insulation for Installation, Insulation for Installation, Insulation for Installation, Insulation for
Hanger Bracket, Air Outlet Hanger Bracket, Air Outlet Hanger Bracket, Air Outlet Hanger Bracket, Air Outlet
Blocking Pad. Blocking Pad. Blocking Pad. Blocking Pad.
Drawing No. C : 3D038813A
Notes:
Conversion Formulae
Btu/h=kW3412
2 Indoor temp. : 27CDB, 19.0CWB / outdoor temp.: 35CDB / Equivalent piping length: 7.5m, level cfm=m/min35.3
difference: 0m.
4 Anechoic chamber conversion value, measured at a point 1m in front of the unit and 1m downward. During
37 Specifications
Slim Ceiling Mounted Duct Type (VE: with Drain Pump, VET: without Drain Pump)
Model FXDQ20PBVE (T) FXDQ25PBVE (T) FXDQ32PBVE (T)
kcal/h 2,000 2,500 3,200
1 Cooling Capacity (19.5CWB) Btu/h 7,800 9,900 12,600
kW 2.3 2.9 3.7
2 Cooling Capacity (19.0CWB) kW 2.2 2.8 3.6
Casing Galvanized Steel Plate Galvanized Steel Plate Galvanized Steel Plate
Dimensions: (HWD) mm 200700620 200700620 200700620
Coil (Cross RowsStagesFin Pitch mm 2121.5 2121.5 3121.5
Fin Coil) Face Area m 0.126 0.126 0.126
Model
Type Sirocco Fan Sirocco Fan Sirocco Fan
Motor Output Number W 621 621 621
Fan of Units
Airflow Rate (HH/H/L) m/min 8.0/7.2/6.4 8.0/7.2/6.4 8.0/7.2/6.4
4 External Static Pressure Pa 30-10 30-10 30-10
Drive Direct Drive Direct Drive Direct Drive
Temperature Control Microprocessor Thermostat Microprocessor Thermostat Microprocessor Thermostat
for Cooling and Heating for Cooling and Heating for Cooling and Heating
Sound Absorbing Thermal Insulation Material Foamed Polyethylene Foamed Polyethylene Foamed Polyethylene
Air Filter Removal / Washable / Mildew Proof Removal / Washable / Mildew Proof Removal / Washable / Mildew Proof
Liquid Pipes mm 6.4 (Flare Connection) 6.4 (Flare Connection) 6.4 (Flare Connection)
Piping Gas Pipes mm 12.7 (Flare Connection) 12.7 (Flare Connection) 12.7 (Flare Connection)
Connections
Drain Pipe mm VP20 VP20 VP20
(External Dia. 26 Internal Dia. 20) (External Dia. 26 Internal Dia. 20) (External Dia. 26 Internal Dia. 20)
Machine Weight (Mass) kg 23 23 23
5 Sound Pressure Level (HH/H/L) dBA 33/31/29 33/31/29 33/31/29
Safety Devices Fuse, Thermal Protector for Fan Motor Fuse, Thermal Protector for Fan Motor Fuse, Thermal Protector for Fan Motor
Refrigerant Control Electronic Expansion Valve Electronic Expansion Valve Electronic Expansion Valve
Operation Manual, Operation Manual, Operation Manual,
Installation Manual, Installation Manual, Installation Manual,
Drain Hose, Sealing Pads, Clamps, Drain Hose, Sealing Pads, Clamps, Drain Hose, Sealing Pads, Clamps,
Standard Accessories Washers, Insulation for Fitting, Washers, Insulation for Fitting, Washers, Insulation for Fitting,
Clamp Metal, Washer Fixing Plate, Clamp Metal, Washer Fixing Plate, Clamp Metal, Washer Fixing Plate,
Screws for Duct Flanges, Air Filter, Screws for Duct Flanges, Air Filter, Screws for Duct Flanges, Air Filter,
(Product Quality Certificate 6) (Product Quality Certificate 6) (Product Quality Certificate 6)
Note:
Conversion Formulae
1 Indoor temp.: 27CDB, 19.5CWB / outdoor temp.: 35CDB / Equivalent piping length: 7.5m, level
2 Indoor temp.: 27CDB, 19.0CWB / outdoor temp.: 35CDB / Equivalent piping length: 7.5m, level Btu/h=kW3412
cfm=m/min35.3
difference: 0m.
4 External static pressure is changeable to set by the remote controller. This pressure means High static
pressure - Standard static pressure. (Factory setting is 10 Pa.)
5 The operation sound levels are the conversion values in anechoic chamber. In practice, the sound tend to
be larger than the specified values due to ambient noise or reflections.
When the place of suction is changed to the bottom suction, the sound level will increase by approx. 5dBA.
6 FXDQ20 / 25 / 32PBVE only.
Specifications 38
Slim Ceiling Mounted Duct Type (VE: with Drain Pump, VET: without Drain Pump)
Model FXDQ40NBVE(T) FXDQ50NBVE(T) FXDQ63NBVE(T)
kcal/h 4,000 5,000 6,300
kW 4.7 5.8 7.3
Casing Color Galvanized Steel Plate Galvanized Steel Plate Galvanized Steel Plate
Model
Fan of Units
Airflow Rate (HH/H/L) m/min 10.5/9.5/8.5 12.5/11.0/10.0 16.5/14.5/13.0
4 External Static Pressure Pa 44-15 44-15 44-15
Temperature Control Microprocessor Thermostat Microprocessor Thermostat Microprocessor Thermostat
for Cooling and Heating for Cooling and Heating for Cooling and Heating
Sound Absorbing Thermal Insulation Material Foamed Polyethylene Foamed Polyethylene Foamed Polyethylene
Air Filter Removal / Washable / Mildew Proof Removal / Washable / Mildew Proof Removal / Washable / Mildew Proof
Connections
5 Sound Pressure Level (HH/H/L) dBA 34/32/30 35/33/31 36/34/32
Safety Devices Fuse, Thermal Protector for Fan Motor Fuse, Thermal Protector for Fan Motor Fuse, Thermal Protector for Fan Motor
Operation Manual, Operation Manual, Operation Manual,
Installation Manual, Installation Manual, Installation Manual,
Drain Hose, Sealing Pads, Clamps, Drain Hose, Sealing Pads, Clamps, Drain Hose, Sealing Pads, Clamps,
Standard Accessories Washers, Insulation for Fitting, Washers, Insulation for Fitting, Washers, Insulation for Fitting,
Clamp Metal, Washer Fixing Plate, Clamp Metal, Washer Fixing Plate, Clamp Metal, Washer Fixing Plate,
Screws for Duct Flanges, Air Filter, Screws for Duct Flanges, Air Filter, Screws for Duct Flanges, Air Filter,
(Product Quality Certificate 6) (Product Quality Certificate 6) (Product Quality Certificate 6)
Note:
Conversion Formulae
1 Indoor temp.: 27CDB, 19.5CWB / outdoor temp.: 35CDB / Equivalent piping length: 7.5m, level
2 Indoor temp.: 27CDB, 19.0CWB / outdoor temp.: 35CDB / Equivalent piping length: 7.5m, level Btu/h=kW3412
cfm=m/min35.3
difference: 0m.
4 External static pressure is changeable to set by the remote controller. This pressure means High static
pressure - Standard static pressure. (Factory setting is 15 Pa.)
5 The operation sound levels are the conversion values in anechoic chamber. In practice, the sound tend to
be larger than the specified values due to ambient noise or reflections.
When the place of suction is changed to the bottom suction, the sound level will increase by approx. 5dBA.
6 FXDQ40 / 50 / 63NBVE only.
39 Specifications
Ceiling Mounted Built-in Type

Model FXSQ20MVE FXSQ25MVE FXSQ32MVE
kcal/h 2,000 2,500 3,200
kW 2.3 2.9 3.7
Model D18H3A D18H3A D18H3A
Motor Output Number of W 501 501 501
Units
Fan
Airflow Rate (H/L) m/min 9/6.5 9/6.5 9.5/7
3 External static Pa 88-39-20 88-39-20 64-39-15
pressure
Temperature Control Microprocessor Thermostat for Microprocessor Thermostat for Microprocessor Thermostat for
Cooling and Heating Cooling and Heating Cooling and Heating
Sound Absorbing Thermal Insulation Material Glass Fiber Glass Fiber Glass Fiber
Air Filter Resin Net (with Mold Resistant) Resin Net (with Mold Resistant) Resin Net (with Mold Resistant)
Connections
5 Sound Level (H/L) (220V) dBA 37/32 37/32 38/32
Safety Devices Fuse, Fuse, Fuse,
Thermal Protector for Fan Motor Thermal Protector for Fan Motor Thermal Protector for Fan Motor
Connectable outdoor unit R-410A PA Series R-410A PA Series R-410A PA Series
Model BYBS32DJW1 BYBS32DJW1 BYBS32DJW1
Decoration Panel Color White (10Y9/0.5) White (10Y9/0.5) White (10Y9/0.5)
Panel
(Option) Dimensions: (HWD) mm 55650500 55650500 55650500
Weight kg 3 3 3
Operation Manual, Installation Operation Manual, Installation Operation Manual, Installation
Manual, Paper Pattern for Installation, Manual, Paper Pattern for Installation, Manual, Paper Pattern for Installation,
Standard Accessories Drain Hose, Clamp Metal, Insulation Drain Hose, Clamp Metal, Insulation Drain Hose, Clamp Metal, Insulation
for Fitting, Sealing Pads, Clamps, for Fitting, Sealing Pads, Clamps, for Fitting, Sealing Pads, Clamps,
Screws, Washers. Screws, Washers. Screws, Washers.
Notes:
Conversion Formulae
Btu/h=kW3412
difference: 0m.
3 External static pressure is changeable to change over the connectors inside electrical box, this pressure
means High static pressure-Standard -Low static pressure.
4 Capacities are net, including a deduction for cooling (an additional for heating) for indoor fan motor heat.
5 Anechoic chamber conversion value, measured at a point 1.5m downward from the unit center. These
values are normally somewhat higher during actual operation as a result of ambient conditions.
Specifications 40

kcal/h 4,000 5,000 6,300
kW 4.7 5.8 7.3
Dimensions: (HWD) mm 300700800 300700800 3001,000800
Model D18H2A D18H2A 2D18H2A
Units
Fan
Airflow Rate (H/L) m/min 11.5/9 15/11 21/15.5
3 External static Pa 88-49-20 88-59-29 88-49-20
pressure
Connections
5 Sound Level (H/L) dBA 38/32 41/36 42/35
Panel
(Option) Dimensions: (HWD) mm 55800500 55800500 551,100500
Weight kg 3.5 3.5 4.5
Notes:
Conversion Formulae
Btu/h=kW3412
difference: 0m.
means High static pressure-Standard -Low static pressure.
41 Specifications

kcal/h 8,000 10,000 12,500
kW 9.3 11.6 14.5
Dimensions: (HWD) mm 3001,400800 3001,400800 3001,400800
Model 3D18H2A 3D18H2A 3D18H2A
Units
Fan
Airflow Rate (H/L) m/min 27/21.5 28/22 38/28
3 External static Pa 113-82 107-75 78-39
pressure
Connections
Panel
(Option) Dimensions: (HWD) mm 551,500500 551,500500 551,500500
Weight kg 6.5 6.5 6.5
Notes:
Conversion Formulae
Btu/h=kW3412
difference: 0m.
means High static pressure-Standard.
Specifications 42
Ceiling Mounted Duct Type

Model FXMQ20PVE FXMQ25PVE FXMQ32PVE
Power supply 1 phase 50Hz 220-240V 1 phase 50Hz 220-240V 1 phase 50Hz 220-240V
kcal/h 2,000 2,500 3,200
1 *6 Cooling capacity (19.5CWB) Btu/h 7,800 9,900 12,600
kW 2.3 2.9 3.7
2 *6 Cooling capacity (19.0CWB) kW 2.2 2.8 3.6
kcal/h 2,200 2,800 3,400
3 *6 Heating capacity Btu/h 8,500 10,900 13,600
kW 2.5 3.2 4.0
Casing Galvanized steel plate Galvanized steel plate Galvanized steel plate
Coil (Cross RowsStagesFin pitch mm 3161.75 3161.75 3161.75
fin coil) Face area m 0.098 0.098 0.098
Model
Type Sirocco fan Sirocco fan Sirocco fan
Motor output Number W 901 901 901
of units
Fan m/min 9/7.5/6.5 9/7.5/6.5 9.5/8/7
Airflow rate (HH/H/L)
cfm 318/265/230 318/265/230 335/282/247
External static Pa Standard 50 (100-30 4) Standard 50 (100-30 4) Standard 50 (100-30 4)
pressure
Drive Direct drive Direct drive Direct drive
Temperature control Microprocessor thermostat for Microprocessor thermostat for Microprocessor thermostat for
cooling and heating cooling and heating cooling and heating
Air filter 5 5 5
Liquid pipes mm 6.4 (Flare connection) 6.4 (Flare connection) 6.4 (Flare connection)
Gas pipes mm 12.7 (Flare connection) 12.7 (Flare connection) 12.7 (Flare connection)
Piping
connections VP25 VP25 VP25
Drain pipe mm
( External dia. 32
Internal dia. 25 ) ( External dia. 32
Internal dia. 25 )
Mass (Weight) kg 25 25 25
220V 33/31/29 33/31/29 34/32/30
7 Sound level (HH/H/L) dBA
240V 33/31/29 33/31/29 34/32/30
Safety devices Fuse. Fuse. Fuse.
Fan driver overload protector. Fan driver overload protector. Fan driver overload protector.
Refrigerant control Electronic expansion valve Electronic expansion valve Electronic expansion valve
Connectable outdoor unit R-410A P(A) series R-410A P(A) series R-410A P(A) series
Operation manual. Installation manual. Operation manual. Installation manual. Operation manual. Installation manual.
Drain hose. Sealing pads. Clamps. Drain hose. Sealing pads. Clamps. Drain hose. Sealing pads. Clamps.
Standard accessories Washers. Screws. Insulation for fitting. Washers. Screws. Insulation for fitting. Washers. Screws. Insulation for fitting.
Clamp metal. Air discharge flange. Air Clamp metal. Air discharge flange. Air Clamp metal. Air discharge flange. Air
suction flange. suction flange. suction flange.
Drawing No. C : 3D060388E
Note:
Conversion formulae
Btu/h=kW3412
difference : 0 m.
3 Indoor temp. : 20CDB / outdoor temp. : 7CDB, 6CWB / Equivalent piping length : 7.5 m, level difference :
0 m.
4 External static pressure is changeable in 7 (FXMQ20PVE / FXMQ25PVE / FXMQ32PVE),
13 (FXMQ40PVE), 14 (FXMQ50PVE / FXMQ63PVE / FXMQ80PVE / FXMQ100PVE / FXMQ125PVE),
10 (FXMQ140PVE) stages within the ( ) range by remote controller.
5 Air filter is not standard accessory, but please mount it in the duct system of the suction side. Select its
colourimetric method (gravity method) 50% or more.
43 Specifications

Model FXMQ40PVE FXMQ50PVE FXMQ63PVE FXMQ80PVE
Power supply 1 phase 50Hz 220-240V 1 phase 50Hz 220-240V 1 phase 50Hz 220-240V 1 phase 50Hz 220-240V
kcal/h 4,000 5,000 6,300 8,000
1 *6 Cooling capacity (19.5CWB) Btu/h 16,000 19,800 24,900 31,700
kW 4.7 5.8 7.3 9.3
2 *6 Cooling capacity (19.0CWB) kW 4.5 5.6 7.1 9.0
kcal/h 4,300 5,400 6,900 8,600
3 *6 Heating capacity Btu/h 17,100 21,500 27,300 34,100
kW 5.0 6.3 8.0 10.0
Casing Galvanized steel plate Galvanized steel plate Galvanized steel plate Galvanized steel plate
Dimensions: (HWD) mm 300700700 3001,000700 3001,000700 3001,000700
Coil (Cross RowsStagesFin pitch mm 3161.75 3161.75 3161.75 3161.75
fin coil) Face area m 0.148 0.249 0.249 0.249
Model
Type Sirocco fan Sirocco fan Sirocco fan Sirocco fan
Motor output Number W 1401 3501 3501 3501
of units
Fan m/min 16/13/11 18/16.5/15 19.5/17.5/16 25/22.5/20
cfm 565/459/388 635/582/530 688/618/565 883/794/706
External static Pa Standard 100 (160-30 4) Standard 100 (200-50 4) Standard 100 (200-50 4) Standard 100 (200-50 4)
pressure
Drive Direct drive Direct drive Direct drive Direct drive
Temperature control Microprocessor thermostat Microprocessor thermostat Microprocessor thermostat Microprocessor thermostat
for cooling and heating for cooling and heating for cooling and heating for cooling and heating
Air filter 5 5 5 5
Liquid pipes mm 6.4 (Flare connection) 6.4 (Flare connection) 9.5 (Flare connection) 9.5 (Flare connection)
Gas pipes mm 12.7 (Flare connection) 12.7 (Flare connection) 15.9 (Flare connection) 15.9 (Flare connection)
Piping
connections VP25 VP25 VP25 VP25
Drain pipe mm
( External dia. 32
Internal dia. 25 )
Mass (Weight) kg 28 36 36 36
220V 39/37/35 41/39/37 42/40/38 43/41/39
240V 39/37/35 41/39/37 42/40/38 43/41/39
Fuse. Fuse. Fuse. Fuse.
Safety devices Fan driver overload Fan driver overload Fan driver overload Fan driver overload
protector. protector. protector. protector.
Refrigerant control Electronic expansion valve Electronic expansion valve Electronic expansion valve Electronic expansion valve
Connectable outdoor unit R-410A P(A) series R-410A P(A) series R-410A P(A) series R-410A P(A) series
Operation manual. Operation manual. Operation manual. Operation manual.
Installation manual. Drain Installation manual. Drain Installation manual. Drain Installation manual. Drain
hose. Sealing pads. hose. Sealing pads. hose. Sealing pads. hose. Sealing pads.
Standard accessories Clamps. Washers. Screws. Clamps. Washers. Screws. Clamps. Washers. Screws. Clamps. Washers. Screws.
Insulation for fitting. Clamp Insulation for fitting. Clamp Insulation for fitting. Clamp Insulation for fitting. Clamp
metal. Air discharge flange. metal. Air discharge flange. metal. Air discharge flange. metal. Air discharge flange.
Air suction flange. Air suction flange. Air suction flange. Air suction flange.
Note:
Conversion formulae
Btu/h=kW3412
difference : 0 m.
0 m.
Specifications 44

Model FXMQ100PVE FXMQ125PVE FXMQ140PVE
Power supply 1 phase 50Hz 220-240V 1 phase 50Hz 220-240V 1 phase 50Hz 220-240V
kcal/h 10,000 12,500 14,300
1 *6 Cooling capacity (19.5CWB) Btu/h 39,600 49,500 57,000
kW 11.6 14.5 16.7
2 *6 Cooling capacity (19.0CWB) kW 11.2 14.0 16.0
kcal/h 10,800 13,800 15,500
3 *6 Heating capacity Btu/h 42,700 54,600 61,400
kW 12.5 16.0 18.0
Casing Galvanized steel plate Galvanized steel plate Galvanized steel plate
Coil (Cross RowsStagesFin pitch mm 3161.75 3161.75 3161.5
fin coil) Face area m 0.383 0.383 0.383
Model
Type Sirocco fan Sirocco fan Sirocco fan
Motor output Number W 3501 3501 3501
of units
Fan m/min 32/27/23 39/33/28 46/39/32
cfm 1,130/953/812 1,377/1,165/988 1,624/1,377/1,130
External static Pa Standard 100 (200-50 4) Standard 100 (200-50 4) Standard 100 (140-50 4)
pressure
Drive Direct drive Direct drive Direct drive
Temperature control Microprocessor thermostat for cooling Microprocessor thermostat for cooling Microprocessor thermostat for cooling
and heating and heating and heating
Air filter 5 5 5
Liquid pipes mm 9.5 (Flare connection) 9.5 (Flare connection) 9.5 (Flare connection)
Gas pipes mm 15.9 (Flare connection) 15.9 (Flare connection) 15.9 (Flare connection)
Piping
connections VP25 VP25 VP25
Drain pipe mm
( External dia. 32
Internal dia. 25 )
Mass (Weight) kg 46 46 47
220V 43/41/39 44/42/40 46/45/43
240V 43/41/39 44/42/40 46/45/43
Safety devices Fuse. Fuse. Fuse.
Fan driver overload protector. Fan driver overload protector. Fan driver overload protector.
Refrigerant control Electronic expansion valve Electronic expansion valve Electronic expansion valve
Connectable outdoor unit R-410A P(A) series R-410A P(A) series R-410A P(A) series
Operation manual. Installation manual. Operation manual. Installation manual. Operation manual. Installation manual.
Drain hose. Sealing pads. Clamps. Drain hose. Sealing pads. Clamps. Drain hose. Sealing pads. Clamps.
Standard accessories Washers. Screws. Insulation for fitting. Washers. Screws. Insulation for fitting. Washers. Screws. Insulation for fitting.
Clamp metal. Air discharge flange. Air Clamp metal. Air discharge flange. Air Clamp metal. Air discharge flange. Air
suction flange. suction flange. suction flange.
Note:
Conversion formulae
Btu/h=kW3412
difference : 0 m.
0 m.
45 Specifications

Model FXMQ200MAVE FXMQ250MAVE
kcal/h 19,800 24,800
1 Cooling Capacity (19.5CWB) Btu/h 78,500 98,300
kW 23.0 28.8
Casing Galvanized Steel Plate Galvanized Steel Plate
Dimensions: (HWD) mm 4701,3801,100 4701,3801,100
Coil (Cross RowsStagesFin Pitch mm 3262.0 3262.0
Fin Coil) Face Area m 0.68 0.68
Model D13/4G2DA12 D13/4G2DA12
Type Sirocco Fan Sirocco Fan
Motor Output Number W 3802 3802
of Units
Fan m/min 58/50 72/62
Airflow Rate (H/L)
cfm 2,047/1,765 2,542/2,189
External Static Pa 221/270-132 3 270/191-147 3
Pressure 50Hz
Temperature Control Microprocessor Thermostat for Cooling and Heating Microprocessor Thermostat for Cooling and Heating
Sound Absorbing Thermal Insulation Material Glass Fiber Glass Fiber
Air Filter 4 4
Liquid Pipes mm 9.5 (Flare Connection) 9.5 (Flare Connection)
Piping 19.1(Brazing Connection) 22.2 (Brazing Connection)
Connections Gas Pipes mm
Drain Pipe mm PS1B PS1B
Machine Weight (Mass) kg 137 137
6 Sound Level (H/L) (220V) dBA 48/45 48/45
Safety Devices Fuse. Fuse.
Thermal Protector for Fan Motor. Thermal Protector for Fan Motor.
Refrigerant Control Electronic Expansion Valve Electronic Expansion Valve
Connectable Outdoor Unit R-410A PA Series R-410A PA Series
Standard Accessories Operation Manual. Installation Manual. Sealing Pads. Operation Manual. Installation Manual. Sealing Pads.
Connection Pipes. Screws. Clamps. Connection Pipes. Screws. Clamps.
Note:
1 Indoor temp. : 27CDB, 19.5CWB / outdoor temp. : 35CDB / Equivalent piping length : 7.5 m, level Conversion Formulae
2 Indoor temp. : 27CDB, 19.0CWB / outdoor temp. : 35CDB / Equivalent piping length : 7.5 m, level Btu/h=kW3412
difference : 0 m. cfm=m/min35.3
means "High static pressure-Standard".
colorimetric method (gravity method) 50% or more.
6 Anechoic chamber conversion value, measured at a point 1.5 m downward from the unit center. These
Specifications 46
Ceiling Suspended Type

Model FXHQ32MAVE FXHQ63MAVE FXHQ100MAVE
kcal/h 3,200 6,300 10,000
kW 3.7 7.3 11.6
Casing Color White (10Y9/0.5) White (10Y9/0.5) White (10Y9/0.5)
Dimensions: (HWD) mm 195960680 1951,160680 1951,400680
Model 3D12K1AA1 4D12K1AA1 3D12K2AA1
Fan of Units
m/min 12/10 17.5/14 25/19.5
Airflow Rate (H/L)
cfm 424/353 618/494 883/688
Sound Absorbing Thermal Insulation Material Glass Wool Glass Wool Glass Wool
Connections
Standard Accessories Manual, Paper Pattern for Installation, Manual, Paper Pattern for Installation, Manual, Paper Pattern for Installation,
Drain Hose, Clamp Metal, Insulation Drain Hose, Clamp Metal, Insulation Drain Hose, Clamp Metal, Insulation
for Fitting, Clamps, Washers. for Fitting, Clamps, Washers. for Fitting, Clamps, Washers.
Notes:
Conversion Formulae
Btu/h=kW3412
difference: 0m.
47 Specifications
Wall Mounted Type

Model FXAQ20MAVE FXAQ25MAVE FXAQ32MAVE
kcal/h 2,000 2,500 3,200
kW 2.3 2.9 3.7
Casing Color White (3.0Y8.5/10.5) White (3.0Y8.5/10.5) White (3.0Y8.5/10.5)
Model QCL9661M QCL9661M QCL9661M
Type Cross Flow Fan Cross Flow Fan Cross Flow Fan
Fan of Units
m/min 7.5/4.5 8/5 9/5.5
Airflow Rate (H/L)
cfm 265/159 282/177 318/194
Sound Absorbing Thermal Insulation Material Foamed Polystyrene / Foamed Polystyrene / Foamed Polystyrene /
Foamed Polyethylene Foamed Polyethylene Foamed Polyethylene
Air Filter Resin Net (Washable) Resin Net (Washable) Resin Net (Washable)
Connections
Safety Devices Fuse Fuse Fuse
Standard Accessories Manual, Installation Panel, Paper Manual, Installation Panel, Paper Manual, Installation Panel, Paper
Pattern for Installation, Insulation Pattern for Installation, Insulation Pattern for Installation, Insulation
Tape, Clamps, screws. Tape, Clamps, screws. Tape, Clamps, screws.
Drawing No. C : 3D039370B
Notes:
Conversion Formulae
Btu/h=kW3412
2 Indoor temp. : 27CDB, 19.0CWB / outdoor temp.: 35CDB / Equivalent piping length:7.5m, level cfm=m/min35.3
difference: 0m.
4 Anechoic chamber conversion value, measured under JISB8616 conditions. During actual operation,
these values are normally somewhat higher as a result of ambient conditions.
Specifications 48
Wall Mounted Type

Model FXAQ40MAVE FXAQ50MAVE FXAQ63MAVE
kcal/h 4,000 5,000 6,300
kW 4.7 5.8 7.3
Casing Color White (3.0Y8.5/10.5) White (3.0Y8.5/10.5) White (3.0Y8.5/10.5)
Model QCL9686M QCL9686M QCL9686M
Type Cross Flow Fan Cross Flow Fan Cross Flow Fan
Fan of Units
m/min 12/9 15/12 19/14
Airflow Rate (H/L)
cfm 424/318 530/424 671/494
Sound Absorbing Thermal Insulation Material Foamed Polystyrene / Foamed Polystyrene / Foamed Polystyrene /
Foamed Polyethylene Foamed Polyethylene Foamed Polyethylene
Air Filter Resin Net (Washable) Resin Net (Washable) Resin Net (Washable)
Connections
Safety Devices Fuse Fuse Fuse
Standard Accessories Manual, Installation Panel, Paper Manual, Installation Panel, Paper Manual, Installation Panel, Paper
Pattern for Installation, Insulation Pattern for Installation, Insulation Pattern for Installation, Insulation
Tape, Clamps, screws. Tape, Clamps, screws. Tape, Clamps, screws.
Drawing No. C : 3D039370B
Notes:
Conversion Formulae
1 Indoor temp. : 27CDB, 19.5CWB / outdoor temp; 35CDB / Equivalent piping length: 7.5m, level
Btu/h=kW3412
2 Indoor temp. : 27CDB, 19.0CWB / outdoor temp; 35CDB / Equivalent piping length: 7.5m, level cfm=m/min35.3
difference: 0m.
4 Anechoic chamber conversion value, measured under JISB8616 conditions. During actual operation,
these values are normally somewhat higher as a result of ambient conditions.
49 Specifications
Floor Standing Type

Model FXLQ20MAVE FXLQ25MAVE FXLQ32MAVE
kcal/h 2,000 2,500 3,200
kW 2.3 2.9 3.7
Casing Color Ivory White (5Y7.5/1) Ivory White (5Y7.5/1) Ivory White (5Y7.5/1)
Model D14B20 D14B20 2D14B13
Fan of Units
m/min 7/6 7/6 8/6
Airflow Rate (H/L)
cfm 247/212 247/212 282/212
Sound Absorbing Thermal Insulation Material Glass Fiber/ Urethane Foam Glass Fiber/ Urethane Foam Glass Fiber/ Urethane Foam
Piping 12.7 (Flare Connection) 12.7 (Flare Connection) 12.7 (Flare Connection)
Drain Pipe mm 21 O.D (Vinyl Chloride) 21 O.D (Vinyl Chloride) 21 O.D (Vinyl Chloride)
Connectable Outdoor Unit R-410A PA Series R-410A PA Series R-410A PA Series
Standard Accessories Manual, Insulation for Fitting, Drain Manual, Insulation for Fitting, Drain Manual, Insulation for Fitting, Drain
Hose, Clamps, Screws, Washers, Hose, Clamps, Screws, Washers, Hose, Clamps, Screws, Washers,
Level Adjustment Screw. Level Adjustment Screw. Level Adjustment Screw.
Notes:
Conversion Formulae
Btu/h=kW3412
cfm=m/min35.3
difference: 0m.
4 Anechoic chamber conversion value, measured at a point 1.5 m in front of the unit at a height of 1.5 m.
During actual operation, these values are normally somewhat higher as a result of ambient conditions.
Specifications 50
Floor Standing Type

Model FXLQ40MAVE FXLQ50MAVE FXLQ63MAVE
kcal/h 4,000 5,000 6,300
kW 4.7 5.8 7.3
Casing Color Ivory White (5Y7.5/1) Ivory White (5Y7.5/1) Ivory White (5Y7.5/1)
Model 2D14B13 2D14B20 2D14B20
Fan of Units
m/min 11/8.5 14/11 16/12
Airflow Rate (H/L)
cfm 388/300 494/388 565/424
Notes:
Conversion Formulae
Btu/h=kW3412
cfm=m/min35.3
difference: 0m.
51 Specifications
Concealed Floor Standing Type

Model FXNQ20MAVE FXNQ25MAVE FXNQ32MAVE
kcal/h 2,000 2,500 3,200
kW 2.3 2.9 3.7
Dimensions: (HWD) mm 610930220 610930220 6101,070220
Model D14B20 D14B20 2D14B13
Fan of Units
m/min 7/6 7/6 8/6
Airflow Rate (H/L)
cfm 247/212 247/212 282/212
Notes:
Conversion Formulae
Btu/h=kW3412
cfm=m/min35.3
difference: 0m.
Specifications 52
Concealed Floor Standing Type

Model FXNQ40MAVE FXNQ50MAVE FXNQ63MAVE
kcal/h 4,000 5,000 6,300
kW 4.7 5.8 7.3
Model 2D14B13 2D14B20 2D14B20
Fan of Units
m/min 11/8.5 14/11 16/12
Airflow Rate (H/L)
cfm 388/300 494/388 565/424
Sound Absorbing Thermal Insulation Material Glass Fiber / Urethane Foam Glass Fiber / Urethane Foam Glass Fiber / Urethane Foam
Notes:
Conversion Formulae
Btu/h=kW3412
cfm=m/min35.3
difference: 0m.
53 Specifications
Ceiling Suspended Cassette Type

Indoor Unit FXUQ71MAV1 FXUQ100MAV1 FXUQ125MAV1
Model
Connection Unit BEVQ71MAVE BEVQ100MAVE BEVQ125MAVE
kcal/h 7,100 10,000 12,500
kW 8.3 11.6 14.5
Casing Color White (10Y9/0.5) White (10Y9/0.5) White (10Y9/0.5)
Model QTS48A10M QTS50B15M QTS50B15M
Type Turbo Fan Turbo Fan Turbo Fan
Fan of Units
m/min 19/14 29/21 32/23
Airflow Rate (H/L)
cfm 671/494 1,024/741 1,130/812
Sound Absorbing Thermal Insulation Material Heat Resistant Foamed Polyethylene, Heat Resistant Foamed Polyethylene, Heat Resistant Foamed Polyethylene,
Regular Foamed Polyethylene Regular Foamed Polyethylene Regular Foamed Polyethylene
Connections
Drain Pipe mm I.D20O.D26 I.D20O.D26 I.D20O.D26
Safety Devices Thermal Protector for Fan Motor Thermal Protector for Fan Motor Thermal Protector for Fan Motor
Manual, Drain Hose, Clamp Metal, Manual, Drain Hose, Clamp Metal, Manual, Drain Hose, Clamp Metal,
Standard Accessories Insulation for Fitting, Sealing Pads, Insulation for Fitting, Sealing Pads, Insulation for Fitting, Sealing Pads,
Clamps, Screws, Washers, Holding Clamps, Screws, Washers, Holding Clamps, Screws, Washers, Holding
Plate. Plate. Plate.
Notes:
1 Indoor temp. : 27CDB, 19.5CWB / outdoor temp.: 35CDB / Equivalent piping length: 7.5m, level Conversion Formulae
2 Indoor temp. : 27CDB, 19.0CWB / outdoor temp.: 35CDB / Equivalent piping length: 7.5m, level Btu/h=kW3412
difference: 0m. cfm=m/min35.3
BEV Units
Model BEVQ71MAVE BEVQ100MAVE BEVQ125MAVE
Power Supply 1 Phase 50Hz 220~240V 1 Phase 50Hz 220~240V 1 Phase 50Hz 220~240V
Sound Absorbing Thermal Insulation Material Flame and Heat Resistant Foamed Flame and Heat Resistant Foamed Flame and Heat Resistant Foamed
Polyethylene Polyethylene Polyethylene
Indoor Liquid Pipes 9.5mm (Flare Connection) 9.5mm (Flare Connection) 9.5mm (Flare Connection)
Unit Gas Pipes 15.9mm (Flare Connection) 15.9mm (Flare Connection) 15.9mm (Flare Connection)
Piping
Connection Liquid Pipes 9.5mm (Flare Connection) 9.5mm (Flare Connection) 9.5mm (Flare Connection)
Outdoor
Unit Suction Gas Pipes 15.9mm (Flare Connection) 15.9mm (Flare Connection) 15.9mm (Flare Connection)
Machine Weight (Mass) kg 3.0 3.0 3.5
Installation manual, Gas piping Installation manual, Gas piping Installation manual, Gas piping
Standard Accessories connections, Insulation for fitting, connections, Insulation for fitting, connections, Insulation for fitting,
Sealing material, Clamps Sealing material, Clamps Sealing material, Clamps
Drawing No. 4D045387A 4D045387A 4D045388A
Specifications 54
Outdoor Air Processing Unit

Model FXMQ125MFV1 FXMQ200MFV1 FXMQ250MFV1
kcal/h 12,000 19,300 24,100
1 Cooling Capacity Btu/h 47,800 76,400 95,500
kW 14.0 22.4 28.0
Dimensions: (HWD) mm 4707441,100 4701,3801,100 4701,3801,100
RowsStagesFin mm 3262.0 3262.0 3262.0
Coil (Cross Pitch
Fin Coil)
Face Area m 0.28 0.65 0.65
Model D13/4G2DA1 D13/4G2DA1 D13/4G2DA1
Motor Output W 3801 3801 3801
Number of Units
Fan m/min 18 28 35
Airflow Rate (H/L)
cfm 635 988 1,236
External Static Pa 185 225 205
Pressure 4
Air Filter 2 2 2
Liquid Pipes 9.5mm 9.5mm 9.5mm

(Flare Connection) (Flare Connection) (Flare Connection)
Piping 15.9mm 19.1mm 22.2mm
Connections Gas Pipes (Flare Connection) (Brazing Connection) (Brazing Connection)
Drain Pipe (mm) PS1B (female thread) PS1B (female thread) PS1B (female thread)
Sound Level (220V) 3,4 dBA 42 47 47
Fuse Fuse Fuse
Safety Devices Thermal Protector Thermal Protector Thermal Protector
for Fan Motor for Fan Motor for Fan Motor
Operation Manual, Installation Manual, Operation Manual, Installation Manual, Operation Manual, Installation Manual,
Standard Accessories Sealing Pads, Screws, Clamps. Sealing Pads, Connection Pipes, Sealing Pads, Connection Pipes,
Screws, Clamps. Screws, Clamps.
Connectable Outdoor Units 5,6 RXQ8~54PAY1 RXQ8~54PAY1 RXQ10~54PAY1
Drawing No. C : 3D046147A C : 3D046147A C : 3D046147A
Notes:
Conversion Formulae
1. Specifications are based on the following conditions:
Cooling: Outdoor temp. of 33CDB, 28CWB (68% RH). and discharge temp. of 18CDB kcal/h=kW860
Equivalent reference piping length: 7.5m (0m Horizontal) Btu/h=kW3412
cfm=m/min35.3
At 220V
2. Air intake filter is not supplied, so be sure to install the optional long life filter or high-efficiency filter.
Please mount it in the duct system of the suction side. Select its colorimetric method (gravity method)
50% or more.
3. Anechoic chamber conversion value, measured at a point 1.5m downward from the unit center.
These values (measured at 220V) are normally somewhat higher during actual operation as a result of
ambient conditions.
4. Valves measured at 220 V.
5. Within the range that the total capacity of indoor units is 50 to 100%, it is possible to connect to the
outdoor unit.
6. It is not possible to connect to the 5 HP outdoor unit. Not available for Heat Recovery type and VRV II-S
series.
This equipment cannot be incorporated into the refrigerant piping system or remote group control of the
VRV II system.
55 Specifications
Si34-804_A
Part 3
Refrigerant Circuit
1. Refrigerant Circuit .................................................................................57

1.1 RXQ5PA.................................................................................................57
1.2 RXQ8PA.................................................................................................59
1.3 RXQ10PA, 12PA ....................................................................................61
1.4 RXQ14PA, 16PA, 18PA .........................................................................63
1.5 Outdoor Air Processing Unit FXMQ125MFV1~250MFV1 ......................65
2. Functional Parts Layout ........................................................................66
2.1 RXQ5PA.................................................................................................66
2.2 RXQ8PA.................................................................................................67
2.3 RXQ10PA...............................................................................................68
2.4 RXQ12PA...............................................................................................69
2.5 RXQ14PA, 16PA, 18PA .........................................................................70
3. Refrigerant Flow for Each Operation Mode...........................................71
Refrigerant Circuit 56
Refrigerant Circuit Si34-804_A
1. Refrigerant Circuit
1.1 RXQ5PA
No. in
refrigerant
Symbol Name Major Function
system
diagram
Inverter compressor is operated on frequencies between 52Hz and 188Hz by using
A M1C Inverter compressor (INV.) the inverter. The number of operating steps is as follows when Inverter compressor is
operated.
RXQ5PA : 18 steps
D M1F Inverter fan Since the system is of air heat exchanging type, the fan is operated at 9-step rotation
speed by using the inverter.
Electronic expansion valve
E Y1E Fully open during cooling operation.
(Main: EV1)
G Y1S Solenoid valve (Hot gas: SVP) Used to prevent the low pressure from transient falling.
J Y2S Solenoid valve (Oil return: SVO) Used to return oil from the accumulator to the compressor.
K Y4S Solenoid valve (Injection) SVT Used to cool the compressor by injecting refrigerant when the compressor discharge
temperature is high.
M Y3S Four way valve Fixed to cooling operation.
N S1NPH High pressure sensor Used to detect high pressure.
O S1NPL Low pressure sensor Used to detect low pressure.
High pressure switch (For In order to prevent the increase of high pressure when a malfunction occurs, this
P S1PH switch is activated at high pressure of 4.0 MPa or more to stop the compressor
INV. compressor) operation.
This valve opens at a pressure of 4.0 MPa for prevention of pressure increase, thus
T Pressure regulating valve 1 resulting in no damage of functional parts due to the increase of pressure in
transportation or storage.
W Capillary tube Used to return the refrigerating oil separated through the oil separator to the
compressor.
1 R1T Thermistor (Outdoor air: Ta) Used to detect outdoor temperature, correct discharge pipe temperature, and others.
2 R2T Thermistor (Suction pipe: Ts) Used to detect suction pipe temperature.
Thermistor (INV. discharge Used to detect discharge pipe temperature, make the temperature protection control of
3 R3T pipe: Tdi) compressor, and others.
4 R4T Thermistor (Heat exchanger Used to detect liquid pipe temperature of air heat exchanger, determine defrosting
deicer: Tb) operation, and others.
5 R6T Thermistor (Liquid pipe Tl) Used to detect liquid pipe temperature.
6 R7T Thermistor (Accumulator inlet Used to detect gas pipe temperature at the accumulator inlet.
Ts1)
57 Refrigerant Circuit
Si34-804_A Refrigerant Circuit
RXQ5PA
5
4
K E
6 HEAT
EXCHANGER
D
M
S1NPH
N
1
S1PH
P
J 3
A
W
G
S1NPL
2
O
C: 3D050782B
1.2 RXQ8PA
No. in
refrigerant
system Symbol Name Major Function
diagram
the inverter, while Standard compressor is operated with commercial power supply
A M1C Inverter compressor (INV.) only. The number of operating steps is as follows when Inverter compressor is
operated in combination with Standard compressor.
RXQ8PA : 24 steps
(Main: EV1)
Electronic expansion valve PI control is applied to keep the outlet superheated degree of subcooling heat
F Y2E (Subcooling: EV2) exchanger constant.
P S1PH switch is activated at high pressure of 4.0 MPa or more to stop the compressor
INV. compressor) operation.
Pressure regulating valve This valve opens at a pressure of 4.0 MPa for prevention of pressure increase, thus
T resulting in no damage of functional parts due to the increase of pressure in
(Liquid pipe) transportation or storage.
V Subcooling heat exchanger Used to subcooling liquid refrigerant from the electronic expansion valve (cooling).
Used to return the refrigerating oil separated through the oil separator to the INV.
W Capillary tube compressor.
Thermistor (INV. discharge Used to detect discharge pipe temperature, make the temperature protection control of
3 R3T
pipe: Tdi) compressor, and others.
Thermistor (Heat exchanger Used to detect liquid pipe temperature of air heat exchanger, determine defrosting
4 R4T deicer: Tb) operation, and others.
Thermistor (Subcooling heat Used to detect gas pipe temperature on the evaporation side of subcooling heat
5 R5T exchanger, keep the superheated degree at the outlet of subcooling heat exchanger
exchanger gas pipe: Tsh) constant, and others.
6 R6T Thermistor (Receiver outlet Used to detect receiver outlet liquid pipe temperature.
liquid pipe: Tl)
7 R7T Thermistor (Accumulator inlet) Used to detect gas pipe temperature at the accumulator inlet.
RXQ8PA
V
F
T
4
5
7
HEAT
EXCHANGER D
M
6 S1NPH
N
1
S1PH
P
3
W
A
O
S1NPL
J
2
C: 3D061121A
1.3 RXQ10PA, 12PA

No. in
refrigerant
diagram
A M1C Inverter compressor (INV.) Inverter compressor is operated on frequencies between 52Hz and 210Hz by using
the inverter, while Standard compressor is operated with commercial power supply
Standard compressor 1 only. The number of operating steps is as follows when Inverter compressor is
B M2C operated in combination with Standard compressor.
(STD1)
RXQ10, 12PA : 37 steps
(Main: EV1)
P S1PH High pressure switch (For

INV. compressor) In order to prevent the increase of high pressure when a malfunction occurs, this
switch is activated at high pressure of 4.0 MPa or more to stop the compressor
High pressure switch (For operation.
Q S2PH
STD compressor 1)
This valve opens at a pressure of 4.0 MPa for prevention of pressure increase, thus
Pressure regulating valve
U (Liquid pipe) resulting in no damage of functional parts due to the increase of pressure in
transportation or storage.
W Capillary tube Used to return the refrigerating oil separated through the oil separator to the INV.
compressor.
Used to return the refrigerating oil separated through the oil separator to the STD1
X Capillary tube
compressor.
3 R31T Thermistor (INV. discharge

pipe: Tdi) Used to detect discharge pipe temperature, make the temperature protection control of
Thermistor (STD1 discharge compressor, and others.
4 R32T
pipe: Tds1)
Thermistor (Heat exchanger Used to detect liquid pipe temperature of air heat exchanger, determine defrosting
5 R4T deicer: Tb) operation, and others.
Thermistor (Subcooling heat Used to detect gas pipe temperature on the evaporation side of subcooling heat
6 R5T exchanger, keep the superheated degree at the outlet of subcooling heat exchanger
exchanger gas pipe: Tsh) constant, and others.
7 R6T Thermistor (Liquid pipe: Tl) Used to detect liquid pipe temperature.
RXQ10PA, 12PA
V F
U
6 5
HEAT
D
M EXCHANGER
7 S1NPH
N
1
Q
S1PH S2PH
P
3 4
A X B
W
S1NPL
J O
2
C: 3D061122A
1.4 RXQ14PA, 16PA, 18PA

No. in
refrigerant
diagram
A M1C Inverter compressor (INV.)
Standard compressor 1 the inverter, while Standard compressor is operated with commercial power supply
B M2C
(STD1) only. The number of operating steps is as follows when Inverter compressor is
operated in combination with Standard compressor.
Standard compressor 1 RXQ14PA or 16PA : 51 steps, RXQ18PA : 55 steps
C M3C (STD2)
(Main: EV1)
P S1PH High pressure switch (For

INV. compressor)
Q S2PH switch is activated at high pressure of 4.0 MPa or more to stop the compressor
STD compressor 1) operation.
High pressure switch (For
R S3PH STD compressor 2)
Pressure regulating valve This valve opens at a pressure of 4.0 MPa for prevention of pressure increase, thus
U resulting in no damage of functional parts due to the increase of pressure in
(Liquid pipe) transportation or storage.
Used to return the refrigerating oil separated through the oil separator to the INV.
W Capillary tube compressor.
X Capillary tube Used to return the refrigerating oil separated through the oil separator to the STD1
compressor.
Used to return the refrigerating oil separated through the oil separator to the STD2
Y Capillary tube
compressor.
3 R31T Thermistor (INV. discharge

pipe: Tdi)
Thermistor (STD1 discharge Used to detect discharge pipe temperature, make the temperature protection control of
4 R32T
pipe: Tds1) compressor, and others.
Thermistor (STD2 discharge
5 R33T pipe: Tds2)
6 R4T Thermistor (Heat exchanger Used to detect liquid pipe temperature of air heat exchanger, determine defrosting
deicer: Tb) operation, and others.
Used to detect gas pipe temperature on the evaporation side of subcooling heat
Thermistor (Subcooling heat
7 R5T exchanger gas pipe: Tsh) exchanger, keep the superheated degree at the outlet of subcooling heat exchanger
constant, and others.
8 R6T Thermistor (Liquid pipe: Tl) Used to detect liquid pipe temperature.
RXQ14PA, 16PA, 18PA
E
V
F
6
9
U
M D
S1NPH
N
8
G
P Q R
S1PH S2PH S3PH
3 4 5
A X B Y C
W
J S1NPL
O
2
C: 3D061123A
1.5 Outdoor Air Processing Unit FXMQ125MFV1~250MFV1

1.5.1 Refrigerant System
Th4
Th3
Th2
Th1
4D018650B
Main Control Equipment
Code Symbol Name Main function

Electronic expansion Used to control the flow rate of refrigerant, and
A Y1E valve make the SH control while in cooling.
Used to bypass hot gas while in heating with
B Y1S Solenoid valve thermostat OFF. (close while in cooling)
Used to reduce pressure from high to low in
C Capillary tube bypassing hot gas.
SH control: Superheated control of heat exchanger outlet
SC control: Subcooling control of heat exchanger outlet
Thermistor
Code Symbol Name Main function

Suction air temperature
Th1 R1T Used to turn ON or OFF the thermostat.
thermistor
Liquid pipe temperature Used to control the opening degree of EV (Y1F)
Th2 R2T thermistor under the SC control.
Gas pipe temperature Used to control the opening degree of EV (Y1E)
Th3 R3T thermistor under the SH control.
Used to control the electronic expansion valve
Discharge air
Th4 R4T opening and thermostat ON/OFF so as to keep the
temperature thermistor discharge air temperature at the set temperature.
Si34-804_A Functional Parts Layout
2. Functional Parts Layout

2.1 RXQ5PA
Plan
ACCUMULATOR ASSY
HEAT EXCHANGER
ACCUMULATOR
FOUR
THERMISTOR
Front View
THERMISTOR PRESSURE SWITCH (HIGH PRESSURE PROTECTION)

R7T
(S1PH)
FOUR WAY VALVE

(Y3S) THERMISTOR
SOLENOID VALVE (HOT GAS BYPASS) THERMISTOR

(Y1S)
ELECTRONIC EXPANSION VALVE
THERMISTOR
SOLENOID VALVE (ACCUMULATOR OIL RETURN)
(Y2S)
THERMISTOR
(R6T)
Functional Parts Layout Si34-804_A
2.2 RXQ8PA
Plan
HEAT EXCHANGER
ACCUMULATOR
HIGH PRESSURE SENSOR

(S1NPH)
THERMISTOR
Front View
THERMISTOR
THERMISTOR
ELECTRONIC
ELECTRONIC
FOUR
THERMISTOR
THERMISTOR
THERMISTOR
THERMISTOR
2.3 RXQ10PA
Plan
ACCUMULATOR
HEAT EXCHANGER
THERMISTOR THERMISTOR
Front View
THERMISTOR
THERMISTOR
ELECTRONIC
ELECTRONIC
FOUR
THERMISTOR
THERMISTOR
THERMISTOR
THERMISTOR
Functional Parts Layout Si34-804_A
2.4 RXQ12PA
Plan
HEAT EXCHANGER
PRESSURE SWITCH (HIGH PRESSURE PROTECTION)

ACCUMULATOR (S2PH)
PRESSURE SWITCH (HIGH PRESSURE PROTECTION)

(S1PH)
THERMISTOR (MIC, DISCHARGE PIPE)

(R31T) THERMISTOR (M2C, DISCHARGE PIPE)
(R32T)
Front View
FAN MOTOR
(M2F) FAN MOTOR
(M1F)
THERMISTOR
(R5T)
THERMISTOR
(R7T)
(S1NPH)
ELECTRONIC
(Y2E)
ELECTRONIC
(Y1E)
FOUR
THERMISTOR
(Y3S)
(R1T)
(Y1S)
THERMISTOR
(R4T)
THERMISTOR
(R6T)
(S1NPL) (M1C) (E2HC)
(Y2S) (E1HC) (M2C)

THERMISTOR
(R2T) (M1C) (M2C)
2.5 RXQ14PA, 16PA, 18PA

Plan
HEAT EXCHANGER
ACCUMULATOR
THERMISTOR THERMISTOR
THERMISTOR
Front View
THERMISTOR
THERMISTOR
ELECTRONIC
ELECTRONIC
FOUR
THERMISTOR
THERMISTOR
THERMISTOR
THERMISTOR
Refrigerant Flow for Each Operation Mode Si34-804_A
3. Refrigerant Flow for Each Operation Mode

RXQ5PA
Cooling Operation
Indoor unit operation
Fan ON Fan ON
" ON " Fan OFF " OFF " " ON "
"High temperature, high pressure gas" Heat exchanger Heat exchanger Heat exchanger
"High temperature, high pressure liquid"

"Low temperature, low pressure"
Fan Fan Fan

EV:Normal
control EV:0pls EV:0pls
Filter Filter Filter Filter Filter Filter
Electronic expansion valve Electronic expansion valve Electronic expansion valve
Indoor unit Indoor unit Indoor unit
Thermostat "ON" Thermostat "OFF"
HEAT
EXCHANGER
S1NPH
S1PH
S1NPL
Si34-804_A Refrigerant Flow for Each Operation Mode
Cooling Oil Return Operation

Fan ON Fan OFF Fan ON
" ON " " OFF " " ON "

Fan Fan Fan
EV:Normal
control EV:224pls EV:Normal

HEAT
EXCHANGER
S1NPH
S1PH
S1NPL
RXQ8PA
Cooling Operation
Fan ON Fan ON

Fan Fan Fan
EV:Normal
SUBCOOLING
HEAT
EXCHANGER
HEAT
EXCHANGER
S1NPH
S1PH
S1NPL

Fan OFF
Fan ON Fan ON
" ON " " OFF " " ON "

Fan Fan Fan
EV:Normal

SUBCOOLING
HEAT
EXCHANGER
HEAT
EXCHANGER
S1NPH
S1PH
S1NPL
RXQ10PA, 12PA
Cooling Operation
Fan ON Fan ON

Fan Fan Fan
EV:Normal
SUBCOOLING
HEAT
EXCHANGER
HEAT
EXCHANGER
S1NPH
S1PH S2PH
S1NPL

Fan OFF
Fan ON Fan ON
" ON " " OFF " " ON "

Fan Fan Fan
EV:Normal

SUBCOOLING
HEAT
EXCHANGER
HEAT
EXCHANGER
S1NPH
S1PH S2PH
S1NPL
RXQ14PA, 16PA, 18PA

Cooling Operation
Fan ON Fan ON

Fan Fan Fan
EV:Normal
SUBCOOLING
HEAT
EXCHANGER
S1NPH
S1PH S2PH S3PH
S1NPL

Fan ON Fan OFF Fan ON
" ON " " OFF " " ON "

Fan Fan Fan
EV:Normal
SUBCOOLING
HEAT
EXCHANGER
S1NPH
S1PH S2PH S3PH
S1NPL
Si34-804_A
Part 4
Function
1. Function General...................................................................................80
1.1 Symbol ...................................................................................................80
1.2 Operation Mode......................................................................................81
2. Basic Control.........................................................................................82
2.1 Normal Operation ...................................................................................82
2.2 Compressor PI Control...........................................................................82
2.3 Electronic Expansion Valve PI Control.................................................101
2.4 Step Control of Outdoor Unit Fans .......................................................101
2.5 Outdoor Unit Fan Control in Cooling Operation ...................................101
3. Special Control....................................................................................102
3.1 Startup Control .....................................................................................102
3.2 Oil Return Operation ............................................................................103
3.3 Pump-down Residual Operation ..........................................................104
3.4 Standby ................................................................................................104
3.5 Stopping Operation ..............................................................................105
4. Protection Control ...............................................................................106
4.1 High Pressure Protection Control.........................................................106
4.2 Low Pressure Protection Control..........................................................107
4.3 Discharge Pipe Protection Control .......................................................108
4.4 Inverter Protection Control ...................................................................109
4.5 STD Compressor Overload Protection.................................................110
4.6 Injection Control (only for RXQ5PA).....................................................110
5. Other Control.......................................................................................111
5.1 Outdoor Unit Rotation...........................................................................111
5.2 Emergency Operation ..........................................................................112
5.3 Demand Operation ...............................................................................117
6. Outline of Control (Indoor Unit) ...........................................................118
6.1 Drain Pump Control..............................................................................118
6.2 Louver Control for Preventing Ceiling Dirt............................................120
6.3 Thermostat Sensor in Remote Controller.............................................121
6.4 Thermostat Control while in Normal Operation ....................................122
6.5 Thermostat Control in Dry Operation ...................................................122
6.6 Electronic Expansion Valve Control .....................................................123
6.7 Freeze Prevention ................................................................................123
6.8 List of Swing Flap Operations ..............................................................124
(Unique Control for Outdoor Air Processing Unit) ................................125
79 Function
Si34-804_A Function General
1. Function General
1.1 Symbol
Symbol Electric symbol Description or function
20S1 Y3S Four way valve
DSH Discharge pipe superheated degree
DSHi Discharge pipe superheat of inverter compressor
DSHs Discharge pipe superheat of standard compressor
EV Opening of electronic expansion valve
EV1 Y1E Electronic expansion valve for main heat exchanger
EV2 Y2E Electronic expansion valve for subcooling heat exchanger
Value of INV. compressor discharge pipe temperature (R31T) compensated with
HTDi outdoor air temperature
Value of STD compressor discharge pipe temperature (R32T, R33T) compensated
HTDs with outdoor air temperature
Pc S1NPH Value detected by high pressure sensor
Pe S1NPL Value detected by low pressure sensor
SH Evaporator outlet superheat
SHS Target evaporator outlet superheat
SVO Y2S Solenoid valve for oil return
SVP Y1S Solenoid valve for hot gas bypass
SVT Y4S Solenoid valve for injection
Ta R1T (A1P) Outdoor air temperature
Tb R4T Heat exchanger outlet temperature at cooling
Ts2 R2T Suction pipe temperature detected with the suction pipe thermistor (R2T)
Tsh R5T () Temperature detected with the subcooling heat exchanger outlet thermistor (R5T)
Tc High pressure equivalent saturation temperature
TcS Target temperature of Tc
Te Low pressure equivalent saturation temperature
TeS Target temperature of Te
Tfin R1T Inverter fin temperature
Tl R6T Liquid pipe temperature detected with the liquid pipe thermistor (R6T)
Tp Calculated value of compressor port temperature
Ts1 R7T Suction pipe temperature detected with the accumulator inlet thermistor
Function 80
Function General Si34-804_A
1.2 Operation Mode

Operation in
stop mode
Indoor unit stop or

Indoor unit thermostat ON
thermostat OFF
Malfunction/Standby
Restart standby
Pressure (Compressor stop)
equalization
prior to startup
Malfunction/
Standby
Indoor unit stop or
thermostat OFF
Startup control
Pump-down
Cooling startup
residual
Indoor unit thermostat ON
control operation
Outdoor unit Malfunction/Standby

rotation
Indoor unit stop or

Normal operation
thermostat OFF
Compressor PI control
Electronic expansion
valve PI control
Protection control
Cooling operation
Malfunction/
Standby
Oil return IN Yes

conditions are met. Oil return operation
No
Outdoor unit
rotation
*)
In the event indoor unit stops or the thermostat
turns OFF while in oil return operation
pump-down residual operation is performed
on completion of the oil return operation.
81 Function
Si34-804_A Basic Control
2. Basic Control
2.1 Normal Operation
2.1.1 List of Functions in Normal Operation
(Electric Function of Functional Part
Part Name Symbol Symbol) Normal Cooling
PI control, High pressure protection, Low pressure protection, Td
Compressor (M1C, M2C) protection, INV. protection,
Outdoor unit fan (M1F) Cooling fan control
Four way valve 20S1 (Y3S) OFF
Main electronic expansion EV1 (Y1E) 480 pls
valve
Subcooling heat exchanger EV2 (Y2E) PI control
electronic expansion valve
Hot gas bypass valve SVP (Y1S) OFF
Accumulator oil return valve SV0 (Y2S) ON
Indoor unit actuator Normal cooling

Thermostat ON unit Remote controller setting
Fan Stopping unit OFF
Thermostat OFF unit Remote controller setting
Electronic Thermostat ON unit Normal opening *1
expansion Stopping unit 0 pls
valve Thermostat OFF unit 0 pls
*1. PI control : Evaporator outlet superheated degree (SH) constant.

*2. PI control : Condenser outlet subcooled degree (SC) constant.
*1 and 2 : Refer 6.6 Electronic expansion valve control on page 123.
2.2 Compressor PI Control

Compressor PI Control
Carries out the compressor capacity PI control to maintain Te at constant during cooling
operation to ensure stable unit performance.
[Cooling operation]
Controls compressor capacity to adjust Te to Te : Low pressure equivalent saturation
achieve target value (TeS). temperature (C)
Te set value (Make this setting while in Setting TeS : Target Te value
mode 2.) (Varies depending on Te setting, operating
frequency, etc.)
Te setting
L M (Normal) H *On multi-outdoor-unit systems, this control is made
(factory according to values of the first-priority unit, which is
setting) detected with the pressure sensor.
3 6 9
Function 82
Basic Control Si34-804_A
Operating Priority and Rotation of Compressors (For multi standard connection system)
Each compressor operates in the following order of priority.

In the case of multi-outdoor-unit system, each compressor operates in any of Pattern 1 INV.: Inverter compressor
through Pattern 3 according to the rotation of outdoor units. STD1: Standard compressor 1
STD2: Standard compressor 2
Pattern 1 Pattern 2 Pattern 3
RXQ5PA RXQ8PA RXQ10PA RXQ12PA RXQ14PA, 16PA, 18PA
No. 1 No. 1 No. 1 No. 2 No. 1 No. 2 No. 1 No. 2 No. 3
INV. INV. INV. STD1 INV. STD1 INV. STD1 STD2
RXQ20PA RXQ22PA RXQ24PA, 26PA
No. 1 No. 2 No. 3 No. 1 No. 3 No. 2 No. 4 No. 1 No. 2 No. 4 No. 5
INV. INV. STD1 INV. STD1 INV. STD1 INV. INV. STD1 STD2
RXQ28PA, 30PA RXQ32PA, 34PA, 36PA
INV. STD1 INV. STD1 STD2 INV. STD1 STD2 INV. STD1 STD2
RXQ38PA
No. 1 No. 2 No. 4 No. 3 No. 5 No. 6

No. 3 No. 1 No. 4 No. 2 No. 5 No. 6
No. 2 No. 3 No. 5 No. 1 No. 4 No. 6
INV. INV. STD1 INV. STD1 STD2
83 Function
RXQ40PA, 42PA, 44PA
No. 1 No. 2 No. 4 No. 6 No. 3 No. 5 No. 7

No. 3 No. 1 No. 4 No. 6 No. 2 No. 5 No. 7
No. 2 No. 3 No. 5 No. 7 No. 1 No. 4 No. 6
INV. INV. STD1 STD2 INV. STD1 STD2
RXQ46PA, 48PA
No. 1 No. 4 No. 2 No. 5 No. 7 No. 3 No. 6 No. 8

INV. STD1 INV. STD1 STD2 INV. STD1 STD2
RXQ50PA, 52PA, 54PA

INV. STD1 STD2 INV. STD1 STD2 INV. STD1 STD2
*
In the case of combination of 3 outdoor units, the above diagram shows master unit, slave unit 1, and slave unit 2
from left to right.
Compressors may operate in any pattern other than those mentioned above according to the operating status.
Function 84
Compressor Step Control (Multi outdoor unit connection is available on the standard connection system)
Compressor operations vary with the following steps according to information in "2.2 Compressor PI Control".
Furthermore, the operating priority of compressors is subject to information in " Operating Priority and Rotation of
Compressors".
50Hz
Stand-alone installation
RXQ5PAY1 RXQ8PAY1 RXQ10PAY1, 12PAY1 RXQ14PAY1, 16PAY1 RXQ18PAY1
STEP STEP STEP STEP INV. STD1 STD2 STEP
INV. INV. No. INV. STD1 No. No. INV. STD1 STD2
No. No.
1 52 Hz 1 52 Hz 1 52 Hz OFF 1 52 Hz OFF OFF 1 52 Hz OFF OFF
19 202 Hz 19 202 Hz OFF 19 202 Hz OFF OFF 19 202 Hz OFF OFF
20 210 Hz 20 210 Hz OFF 20 210 Hz OFF OFF 20 210 Hz OFF OFF
21 218 Hz 21 52 Hz ON 21 52 Hz ON OFF 21 52 Hz ON OFF
25 80 Hz ON 25 80 Hz ON OFF 25 80 Hz ON OFF
38 52 Hz ON ON 38 52 Hz ON ON
43 104 Hz ON ON 43 104 Hz ON ON
44 124 Hz ON ON 44 124 Hz ON ON
45 144 Hz ON ON 45 144 Hz ON ON
46 158 Hz ON ON 46 158 Hz ON ON
47 166 Hz ON ON 47 166 Hz ON ON
48 176 Hz ON ON 48 176 Hz ON ON
49 188 Hz ON ON 49 188 Hz ON ON
50 202 Hz ON ON 50 202 Hz ON ON
51 210 Hz ON ON 51 210 Hz ON ON
52 218 Hz ON ON
53 232 Hz ON ON
54 248 Hz ON ON
55 266 Hz ON ON
Notes:
1. INV. : Inverter compressor
STD1 : Standard compressor 1
STD2 : Standard compressor 2
2. Depending on the operating conditions of compressors, the compressors may run in patterns other than those
aforementioned.
85 Function
Two-unit multi system represents the range in which Hz is not stepped up.
RXQ20PAY1 (8+12HP) RXQ22PAY1 (10+12HP)
(To increase Step No.) (To decrease Step No.) (To increase Step No.) (To decrease Step No.)
Master Slave Master Slave
STEP unit unit STD STEP unit unit STD STEP Master
unit
Slave
unit STD STEP Master Slave
No. No. No. No. unit unit STD
INV. INV. INV. INV. INV. INV. INV. INV.
1 52 Hz 52 Hz OFF 1 52 Hz OFF OFF 1 52 Hz 52 Hz OFF 1 52 Hz OFF OFF
10 110 Hz 110 Hz OFF 10 52 Hz 52 Hz OFF 10 104 Hz 104 Hz OFF 10 52 Hz 52 Hz OFF
19 80 Hz 80 Hz ON 18 92 Hz 96 Hz OFF 18 176 Hz 176 Hz OFF 18 92 Hz 92 Hz OFF
20 88 Hz 88 Hz ON 19 96 Hz 96 Hz OFF 19 80 Hz 80 Hz ON 1 19 96 Hz 96 Hz OFF
26 144 Hz 144 Hz ON 25 52 Hz 52 Hz ON 25 132 Hz 132 Hz ON 1 25 52 Hz 52 Hz ON 1
35 132 Hz 132 Hz ON 35 202 Hz 202 Hz ON 2 35 74 Hz 74 Hz ON 2
36 144 Hz 144 Hz ON 36 210 Hz 210 Hz ON 2 36 88 Hz 88 Hz ON 2
37 158 Hz 158 Hz ON 37 96 Hz 96 Hz ON 2
38 176 Hz 176 Hz ON 38 104 Hz 104 Hz ON 2
39 188 Hz 188 Hz ON 39 124 Hz 124 Hz ON 2
40 202 Hz 202 Hz ON 40 144 Hz 144 Hz ON 2
41 210 Hz 210 Hz ON 41 158 Hz 158 Hz ON 2
42 218 Hz 210 Hz ON 42 166 Hz 166 Hz ON 2
43 232 Hz 210 Hz ON 43 176 Hz 176 Hz ON 2
44 248 Hz 210 Hz ON 44 188 Hz 188 Hz ON 2
45 266 Hz 210 Hz ON 45 202 Hz 202 Hz ON 2
46 210 Hz 210 Hz ON 2
Notes:
STD : Standard compressor
Figures after ON represent the number of STD compressors in operation.
2. Master unit, and slave unit in this section are the names for control, and they will be transferred according to the
priority of rotation system.
aforementioned.
Function 86
represents the range in which Hz is not stepped up.

RXQ24PAY1 (8+16HP) RXQ26PAY1 (8+18HP)
STEP Master
unit
Slave
unit STD STEP Master
unit
Slave
unit unit STD STEP Master Slave
unit unit STD
No. INV. INV. No. INV. INV. No. INV. INV. No. INV. INV.
19 80 Hz 80 Hz ON 1 19 96 Hz 96 Hz OFF 19 80 Hz 80 Hz ON 1 19 96 Hz 96 Hz OFF
25 132 Hz 132 Hz ON 1 25 52 Hz 52 Hz ON 1 25 132 Hz 132 Hz ON 1 25 52 Hz 52 Hz ON 1
41 158 Hz 158 Hz ON 2 41 158 Hz 158 Hz ON 2
42 166 Hz 166 Hz ON 2 42 166 Hz 166 Hz ON 2
43 176 Hz 176 Hz ON 2 43 176 Hz 176 Hz ON 2
44 188 Hz 188 Hz ON 2 44 188 Hz 188 Hz ON 2
45 202 Hz 202 Hz ON 2 45 202 Hz 202 Hz ON 2
46 210 Hz 210 Hz ON 2 46 210 Hz 210 Hz ON 2
47 218 Hz 210 Hz ON 2 47 218 Hz 218 Hz ON 2
48 232 Hz 210 Hz ON 2 48 232 Hz 232 Hz ON 2
49 248 Hz 210 Hz ON 2 49 248 Hz 248 Hz ON 2
50 266 Hz 210 Hz ON 2 50 266 Hz 266 Hz ON 2
Notes:
aforementioned.
87 Function

RXQ28PAY1, 30PAY1 (10/12+18HP) RXQ 32PAY1 (16+16HP)
STEP Master
unit
Slave
unit
Slave
unit unit STD
46 158 Hz 158 Hz ON 3 46 210 Hz 210 Hz ON 4 46 96 Hz 96 Hz ON 4
47 166 Hz 166 Hz ON 3 47 104 Hz 104 Hz ON 4
48 176 Hz 176 Hz ON 3 48 116 Hz 116 Hz ON 4
49 188 Hz 188 Hz ON 3 49 124 Hz 124 Hz ON 4
50 202 Hz 202 Hz ON 3 50 144 Hz 144 Hz ON 4
51 210 Hz 210 Hz ON 3 51 158 Hz 158 Hz ON 4
52 210 Hz 218 Hz ON 3 52 166 Hz 166 Hz ON 4
53 210 Hz 232 Hz ON 3 53 176 Hz 176 Hz ON 4
54 210 Hz 248 Hz ON 3 54 188 Hz 188 Hz ON 4
55 210 Hz 266 Hz ON 3 55 202 Hz 202 Hz ON 4
56 210 Hz 210 Hz ON 4
Notes:
aforementioned.
Function 88

RXQ 34PAY1 (16+18HP) RXQ36PAY1 (18+18HP)
STEP Master
unit
Slave
unit
Slave
unit unit STD
51 158 Hz 158 Hz ON 4 51 158 Hz 158 Hz ON 4
52 166 Hz 166 Hz ON 4 52 166 Hz 166 Hz ON 4
53 176 Hz 176 Hz ON 4 53 176 Hz 176 Hz ON 4
54 188 Hz 188 Hz ON 4 54 188 Hz 188 Hz ON 4
55 202 Hz 202 Hz ON 4 55 202 Hz 202 Hz ON 4
56 210 Hz 210 Hz ON 4 56 210 Hz 210 Hz ON 4
57 210 Hz 218 Hz ON 4 57 218 Hz 218 Hz ON 4
58 210 Hz 232 Hz ON 4 58 232 Hz 232 Hz ON 4
59 210 Hz 248 Hz ON 4 59 248 Hz 248 Hz ON 4
60 210 Hz 266 Hz ON 4 60 266 Hz 266 Hz ON 4
Notes:
aforementioned.
89 Function
Three-unit multi system represents the range in which Hz is not stepped up.
RXQ38PAY1 (8+12+18HP) RXQ 40PAY1 (8+16+16HP)
STEP unit Slave
Master Slave
unit1 unit2 STD STEP unit Slave
Master Slave
Master Slave
Master Slave
unit1 unit2 STD
No. INV. INV. INV. No. INV. INV. INV. No. INV. INV. INV. No. INV. INV. INV.
1 52 Hz 52 Hz 52 Hz OFF 1 52 Hz OFF OFF OFF 1 52 Hz 52 Hz 52 Hz OFF 1 52 Hz OFF OFF OFF
10 96 Hz 96 Hz 96 Hz OFF 10 52 Hz 52 Hz OFF OFF 10 96 Hz 96 Hz 96 Hz OFF 10 52 Hz 52 Hz OFF OFF
15 80 Hz 80 Hz 80 Hz ON 1 15 74 Hz 74 Hz OFF OFF 15 80 Hz 80 Hz 80 Hz ON 1 15 74 Hz 74 Hz OFF OFF
16 88 Hz 88 Hz 88 Hz ON 1 16 52 Hz 52 Hz 52 Hz OFF 16 88 Hz 88 Hz 88 Hz ON 1 16 52 Hz 52 Hz 52 Hz OFF
26 144 Hz 144 Hz 144 Hz ON 2 26 52 Hz 52 Hz 52 Hz ON 1 26 144 Hz 144 Hz 144 Hz ON 2 26 52 Hz 52 Hz 52 Hz ON 1
42 92 Hz 92 Hz 92 Hz ON 3 42 210 Hz 210 Hz 210 Hz ON 4 42 92 Hz 92 Hz 92 Hz ON 3
47 158 Hz 158 Hz 158 Hz ON 3 47 96 Hz 96 Hz 96 Hz ON 4
57 210 Hz 210 Hz 210 Hz ON 4
58 218 Hz 210 Hz 210 Hz ON 4
59 232 Hz 210 Hz 210 Hz ON 4
60 248 Hz 210 Hz 210 Hz ON 4
61 266 Hz 210 Hz 210 Hz ON 4
Notes:
aforementioned.
Function 90

RXQ 42PAY1 (8+16+18HP) RXQ44PAY1 (8+18+18HP)
STEP Master Slave Slave
unit unit1 unit2 STD STEP Master Slave Slave
unit unit1 unit2 STD
Notes:
aforementioned.
91 Function

RXQ46PAY1, 48PAY1 (10/12+18+18HP) RXQ50PAY1, 52PAY1 (14/16+18+18HP)
STEP Master Slave Slave
unit unit1 unit2 STD
67 210 Hz 210 Hz 210 Hz ON 6
68 210 Hz 218 Hz 218 Hz ON 6
69 210 Hz 232 Hz 232 Hz ON 6
Notes: 70 210 Hz 248 Hz 248 Hz ON 6
71 210 Hz 266 Hz 266 Hz ON 6
aforementioned.
Function 92
RXQ54PAY1 (18+18+18HP)
(To increase Step No.) (To decrease Step No.)
STEP Master Slave Slave STEP Master Slave Slave
No. unit unit1 unit2 STD No. unit unit1 unit2 STD
INV. INV. INV. INV. INV. INV.
1 52 Hz 52 Hz 52 Hz OFF 1 52 Hz OFF OFF OFF
10 96 Hz 96 Hz 96 Hz OFF 10 52 Hz 52 Hz OFF OFF
15 80 Hz 80 Hz 80 Hz ON 1 15 74 Hz 74 Hz OFF OFF
16 88 Hz 88 Hz 88 Hz ON 1 16 52 Hz 52 Hz 52 Hz OFF
57 96 Hz 96 Hz 96 Hz ON 6
58 104 Hz 104 Hz 104 Hz ON 6
59 116 Hz 116 Hz 116 Hz ON 6
60 124 Hz 124 Hz 124 Hz ON 6
61 144 Hz 144 Hz 144 Hz ON 6
62 158 Hz 158 Hz 158 Hz ON 6
63 166 Hz 166 Hz 166 Hz ON 6
64 176 Hz 176 Hz 176 Hz ON 6
65 188 Hz 188 Hz 188 Hz ON 6
66 202 Hz 202 Hz 202 Hz ON 6
67 210 Hz 210 Hz 210 Hz ON 6
68 218 Hz 218 Hz 218 Hz ON 6
69 232 Hz 232 Hz 232 Hz ON 6
70 248 Hz 248 Hz 248 Hz ON 6
71 266 Hz 266 Hz 266 Hz ON 6
Notes:
aforementioned.
93 Function
50Hz High COP type
Function 94
95 Function
Function 96
97 Function
Function 98
99 Function
Function 100
2.3 Electronic Expansion Valve PI Control

Main Electronic Expansion Valve EV1 Control
Fixed to open fully.
Subcooling Electronic Expansion Valve EV2 Control

Makes PI control of the electronic expansion valve (Y2E) to keep the superheated degree of the
outlet gas pipe on the evaporator side for the full use of the subcooling heat exchanger.
SH = Tsh -Te SH : Outlet superheated degree of evaporator (C)
Tsh : Suction pipe temperature detected with the
thermistor R5T (C)
Te : Low pressure equivalent saturation
temperature (C)
2.4 Step Control of Outdoor Unit Fans

Used to control the revolutions of outdoor unit fans in the steps listed in table below, according to condition changes.
Fan revolutions (rpm)
STEP RXQ12PA RXQ16PA RXQ18PA
No. RXQ5PA RXQ8PA RXQ10PA RXQ14PA
FAN1 FAN2 FAN1 FAN2 FAN1 FAN2
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 285 350 350 230 0 230 0 395 0
2 315 370 370 380 0 380 0 460 0
3 360 400 400 290 260 290 260 570 0
4 450 450 460 375 345 375 345 385 355
5 570 540 560 570 540 570 540 550 520
6 710 670 680 720 690 720 690 800 770
7 951 760 821 1091 1061 1091 1061 1136 1106
8 951 796 821 1136 1106 1136 1106 1166 1136
* Figures listed above are all those controlled while in standard mode, which vary when the system is set to high static
pressure or capacity precedence mode.
2.5 Outdoor Unit Fan Control in Cooling Operation

While in cooling operation, if the outdoor temperature is low, this mode provides high pressure
control using the outdoor unit fan to retain appropriate liquid pressure, thus ensuring refrigerant
circulation rate to be supplied to indoor units.
Upper limit of fan

revolutions: Step 8
Pc<2.75MPa Pc>3.24MPa
*For fan revolutions in each step,
Upper limit of outdoor unit refer to 2.4 Step Control of
fan revolutions
Step 7 Outdoor Unit Fans.
PI control
Lapse of 20 sec.
PI control
-1 step on Hold the +1 step on
current step on
outdoor unit fan outdoor unit fan outdoor unit fan
PI control Lapse of 20 sec.
101 Function
Si34-804_A Special Control
3. Special Control
3.1 Startup Control
This control is used to equalize the pressure in the front and back of the compressor prior to the
startup of the compressor, thus reducing startup loads. Furthermore, the inverter is turned ON
to charge the capacitor.
In addition, to avoid stresses to the compressor due to oil return or else after the startup, the
following control is made and the position of the four way valve is also determined. To position
the four way valve, the master and slave units simultaneously start up.
3.1.1 Startup Control in Cooling Operation
Thermostat ON
Pressure equalization Startup control

control prior to startup STEP1 STEP2
124 Hz + OFF + OFF
52 Hz
Compressor 0 Hz +2 steps/20 sec.
+ OFF + OFF (until Pc - Pe>0.39MPa is achieved)
Ta<20C: OFF +1 step/15 sec. (when Pc>2.16MPa)
Outdoor unit fan STEP4 Ta20C: STEP4 -1 step/15 sec. (when Pc<1.77MPa)
Four way valve (Y3S) Holds OFF OFF
Main electronic expansion 0 pls 480 pls 480 pls
valve (EV1)
Subcooling electronic
expansion valve (EV2) 0 pls 0 pls 0 pls
(RXQ8~)
Hot gas bypass valve OFF OFF
OFF
(SVP)
Accumulator oil return valve OFF OFF OFF
(SVO)
Injection (SVT) (RXQ5PA OFF OFF OFF
model)
Ending conditions A lapse of one minute A lapse of 10 sec. A lapse of 130 sec.
OR Pc - Pe>0.39MPa
Function 102
Special Control Si34-804_A
3.2 Oil Return Operation

In order to prevent the compressor from running out of oil, the oil return operation is conducted
to recover oil flown out from the compressor to the system side.
3.2.1 Oil Return Operation in Cooling Operation
[Start conditions]
Referring to the set conditions for the following items, start the oil return operation in cooling.
Cumulative oil feed rate
Timer setting (Make this setting so as to start the oil return operation when the initial
cumulative operating time reaches two hours after power supply is turned ON and then
every eight hours.)
Furthermore, the cumulative oil feed rate is computed from Tc, Te, and compressor loads.
Oil return preparation
Outdoor unit actuator Oil return operation Post-oil-return operation
operation
5 HP: 52 Hz
( Low pressure constant
control)
Other model:
52 Hz + ON + ON
Take the current step as the ( Low pressure Same as the oil return
Compressor operation mode.
upper limit. constant control)

Maintain number of
compressors in oil
return preparation
operation ON
Outdoor unit fan Fan control (Normal cooling) Fan control (Normal cooling) Fan control (Normal cooling)
Four way valve (Y3S) OFF OFF OFF
Main electronic expansion valve 480 pls 480 pls 480 pls
(EV1)
Subcooling electronic expansion SH control 0 pls 0 pls
valve (EV2)
Hot gas bypass valve (SVP) OFF OFF OFF
Accumulator oil return valve (SVO) ON ON ON
3 min. 3 min.
Ending conditions 20 sec. or Ts - Te<5C or Pe<0.6MPa
HTdi>110C
* In the case of multi-outdoor-unit system,

Master unit: Performs the operations listed in the table above.
Slave units: Operating units perform the operations listed in the table above.
Non-operating units perform the operations listed in the table above from the oil return operation.
(Non-operating unit stops during oil return preparation operation.)
* Actuators are based on RXQ14~18PA.
Indoor unit actuator Cooling oil return operation

Thermostat ON unit Remote controller setting
Fan Stopping unit OFF
Thermostat OFF unit Remote controller setting
Thermostat ON unit Normal opening
Electronic expansion valve Stopping unit 224 pls
Thermostat OFF unit Normal opening with forced thermostat ON
103 Function
Si34-804_A Special Control
3.3 Pump-down Residual Operation

3.3.1 Pump-down Residual Operation in Cooling Operation
If the liquid refrigerant stays in the evaporator at the startup of a compressor, this liquid
refrigerant enters the compressor, thus resulting in diluted oil in the compressor and then
degraded lubrication performance.
Consequently, in order to recover the refrigerant in the evaporator while the compressor stops,
the pump-down residual operation is conducted.
Actuator Master unit operation Slave unit operation
Compressor 124 Hz + OFF + OFF OFF
Outdoor unit fan Fan control OFF
Four way valve (Y3S) OFF OFF
Main electronic expansion valve (EV1) 480 pls 0 pls
Subcooling electronic expansion valve 0 pls 0 pls
(EV2)
Hot gas bypass valve (SVP) OFF OFF
Accumulator oil return valve (SVO) ON ON
5 min.
or Master Unit Pe<0.49 MPa
Ending conditions Master Unit Td>110C
Master Unit Pc>2.94 MPa
3.4 Standby
3.4.1 Restart Standby
Used to forcedly stop the compressor for a period of 3 minutes, in order to prevent the frequent
ON/OFF of the compressor and equalize the pressure within the refrigerant system.
Actuator Operation
Compressor OFF
Ta>30C: STEP4
Outdoor unit fan Ta30C: OFF
Four way valve (Y3S) Holds
Main electronic expansion valve (EV1) 0 pls
Subcooling electronic expansion valve (EV2) 0 pls
Hot gas bypass valve (SVP) OFF
Accumulator oil return valve (SVO) OFF
Injection (SVT) (RXQ5PA model) OFF
Ending conditions 3 min.
3.4.2 Crankcase Heater Control

In order to prevent the refrigerant from melting in the compressor oil in the stopped mode, this
mode is used to control the crankcase heater.
Discharge pipe
temperature < 70C
Crankcase heater Crankcase heater
OFF ON
Discharge pipe
temperature > 75C
Function 104
Special Control Si34-804_A
3.5 Stopping Operation

3.5.1 When System is in Stop Mode (Normal operation stop)
This mode is used to define actuator operations when the system stops.
Actuator Operation
Compressor OFF
Outdoor unit fan OFF
Four way valve (Y3S) Holds
Main electronic expansion valve (EV1) 0 pls
Subcooling electronic expansion valve (EV2) 0 pls
Hot gas bypass valve (SVP) OFF
Accumulator oil return valve (SVO) OFF
Injection (SVT) (RXQ5PA model only) OFF
Ending conditions Indoor unit thermostat is turned ON.
3.5.2 Stop due to Malfunction

In order to protect compressors, if any of the following items has an abnormal value, the system
will make "stop with thermostat OFF" and the malfunction will be determined according to the
number of retry times.
Item Judgement Criteria Malfunction Code
1. Abnormal low pressure level 0.07MPa E4
2. Abnormal high pressure level 4.0MPa E3
3. Abnormal discharge pipe temperature level 135C F3
4. Abnormal power supply voltage Reverse-phase power supply U1
5. Abnormal inverter current level 16.1A: 260 sec. L8
6. Abnormal radiator fin temperature level 93C L4
3.5.3 Stopping Operation of Slave Units During Master Unit is in Operation

with Multi-Outdoor-Unit System
While the master unit is in operation, this mode is used to set the refrigerant flow rate to a
required level using a slave unit in the stopped mode.
In cooling operation: The system operates in Mode A or Mode B listed in the table below.
Actuator Mode-A operation Mode-B operation
Compressor OFF OFF
Outdoor unit fan STEP4 OFF
Main electronic expansion valve 150 pls to 300 pls 0 pls
(EV1)
Subcooling electronic expansion 0 pls 0 pls
valve (EV2)
Hot gas bypass valve (SVP) ON ON
Receiver gas discharging valve OFF OFF
(SVG)
Non-operating unit liquid pipe stop OFF ON
valve (SVSL)
To Mode A when gas shortage signal
Mode transition conditions To Mode B when Tc-Tl >0.27(Tc - Ta) +6 is sent from indoor unit
Ending conditions Slave units are required to operate.
Operating Stopping
Mode A or B operation unit unit
Mode A : Operating unit collects refrigerant.
Mode B : Stopping unit storage refrigerant.

The changeover operation for mode A and B is performed for the reason that the required refrigerant amount varies
depending on the indoor unit operation capacity.
105 Function
Si34-804_A Protection Control
4. Protection Control
4.1 High Pressure Protection Control
This high pressure protection control is used to prevent the activation of protection devices due
to abnormal increase of high pressure and to protect compressors against the transient
increase of high pressure.
[In cooling operation]

In the case of multi-outdoor-unit system, each outdoor unit performs this control
individually in the following sequence.
High pressure not limited

Pc: High pressure sensor detection
value for each outdoor unit
Pc>3.43MPa
INV. upper limit frequency:

INV. upper limit rps = max
3-step down from current
compressor rps
(Slave unit: 3-step down as well)
After 10 sec.
Pc>3.43MPa
INV. upper limit frequency:
Pc<3.24MPa
Current step maintained 1-step up from current
Pc>3.55MPa compressor frequency
After 15 sec. (Slave unit: Same as above)
After 10 sec.
STD compressor Pc>3.64MPa
standby
When occurring 3 times within

30 min., high pressure sensor is
High pressure standby activated without high pressure
standby, thus outputting the
malfunction code E3.
Function 106
Protection Control Si34-804_A
4.2 Low Pressure Protection Control

This low pressure protection control is used to protect compressors against the transient
decrease of low pressure.
[In cooling operation]

In the case of multi-outdoor-unit system, the entire system performs this control in the
following sequence.
Low pressure not limited Pe: Low pressure sensor detection

value for master unit
Pe<0.34MPa Pe>0.39MPa
Low pressure limited Hot gas SVP = OFF
All STD compressors

stop.
Pe<0.15MPa Pe>0.30MPa
Pe<0.25MPa
Hot gas SVP = ON

Master unit: 52 Hz + OFF + OFF
Slave unit: Stop
Pe<0.07MPa
Low pressure standby When occurring 4 times within 30 min.,

the malfunction code E4 is output.
107 Function
4.3 Discharge Pipe Protection Control

This discharge pipe protection control is used to protect the compressor internal temperature
against a malfunction or transient increase of discharge pipe temperature.
Each compressor performs the discharge pipe temperature protection control individually
in the following sequence.
[INV. compressor]
Normal operation HTdi : Value of INV. compressor discharge pipe

temperature (Tdi) compensated with
HTdi>115C outdoor air temperature
or Tp : Value of compressor port temperature
Tp>135C
HTdi<100C calculated by Tc and Te, and suction
&
INV. upper limit frequency: Tp<110C superheated degree.
1-step down from current
compressor rps
After 30 sec.
HTdi>115C
or
Tp>135C
HTdi<110C
&
Tp<125C
HTdi>130C In discharge pipe temp.
INV. upper limit frequency: 1-step up
HTdi>120C protection control
from current compressor frequency
or for 90 sec. After 20 sec.
or more.
Tp>130C
RXQ5PAY1: 52 Hz or HTdi>135C
Other models: HTdi>120C for 10 min. or more.
INV. 62 Hz + OFF + OFF
Discharge pipe When occurring 3 times within 100 minutes,

temperature standby (for the malfunction code F3 is output.
a period of 10 minutes)
[STD compressor]
HTds : Value of STD compressor discharge

pipe temperature ( Tds) compensated
with outdoor air temperature
Tp : Value of compressor port temperature
calculated by Tc and Te , and suction
superheated degree.
HTds>120C continues for 5 min. or more.

HTds>135C
or
Tp>135C continues for 10 min. or more.
Tp>145C
Discharge pipe temp. Applicable STD

protection control not limited compressor stops.
After 10 min.
Function 108
Protection Control Si34-804_A
4.4 Inverter Protection Control

Inverter current protection control and inverter fin temperature control are performed to prevent
tripping due to a malfunction, or transient inverter overcurrent, and fin temperature increase.
In the case of multi-outdoor-unit system, each INV. compressor performs these controls in
the following sequence.
[Inverter overcurrent protection control]
Normal operation
Inverter current >14.7A(Y1)
Inverter current <14.7A(Y1)

&
INV. upper limit frequency: 1-step down INV. upper limit frequency = max
from current compressor frequency
Inverter current >14.7A(Y1)
Inverter current<14.7A(Y1) continues
for 20 sec. or more.
Under inverter current INV. upper limit frequency: 1-step up from
protection control current compressor frequency
Inverter current > 16.1A(Y1) continues for 260 sec.
When occurring 4 times within 60 min.,

Inverter current standby the malfunction code L8 is output.
[Inverter fin temperature control]
Normal operation
Tfin>84C
Tfin<81C
INV. upper limit frequency: 1-step / &
INV. upper limit rps = max
1 min down from current compressor
rps
Tfin>84C Inverter fin temp.<81C continues

for 3 min. or more.
Under fin temperature
protection control INV. upper limit frequency: 1-step / 1 min up
from current compressor frequency Interval
Tfin>93C
Fin temp. standby When occurring 4 times within 60 min.,

the malfunction code L4 is output.
109 Function
4.5 STD Compressor Overload Protection

This control is used to prevent abnormal heating due to overcurrent to the compressor resulting
from failures of STD compressor such as locking.
STD compressor ON *If the power supply is reset while in

operation prohibition mode, the prohibition
timer will continue counting when the
power supply is turned ON.
Demand to operate. CT detection current value>15.0A(Y1)
STD compressor OFF for 30 min.*
When occurring 3 times within 90 minutes,

the malfunction code E6 is output.
4.6 Injection Control (only for RXQ5PA)

For transitional rise in discharge pipe temperature, have the liquid refrigerant flow into the
suction side to reduce the discharge pipe temperature for the compressor protection.
SVT = OFF
HTdi: Correction value of the discharge pipe

HTdi>112C HTdi<107C temperature on the INV. compressor.
SVT = ON
Function 110
Other Control Si34-804_A
5. Other Control
5.1 Outdoor Unit Rotation
In the case of multi-outdoor-unit system, this outdoor unit rotation is used to prevent the
compressor from burning out due to unbalanced oil level between outdoor units.
[Details of outdoor unit rotation]

In the case of multi-outdoor-unit system, each outdoor unit is given an operating priority for the
control.
Outdoor unit rotation makes it possible to change the operating priority of outdoor units.
Thus, the system becomes free of compressors that stop over an extended period of time at the
time of partial loading, preventing unbalanced oil level.
[Timing of outdoor unit rotation]
After oil return operation

After defrosting operation
or At the beginning of the starting control
There are outdoor units that stop operation (in cooling).
Low pressure of all outdoor units in operation is less than 0.25 MPa (in cooling).
Example) The following diagram shows outdoor unit rotation in combination of 3 outdoor units.
Starting Oil return operation

control or defrosting
Normal operation operation Normal operation
Master Slave 1 Slave 2 Master Slave 1 Slave 2
Outdoor unit Outdoor unit

rotation Priority Priority Priority rotation Priority Priority Priority
1 2 3 3 1 2
111 Function
Si34-804_A Other Control
<In Cooling>
There are outdoor
units that stop
operation.
or
Low pressure of all
outdoor units in
operation < 0.25 MPa.
Normal operation Normal operation
Master Slave 1 Slave 2 Master Slave 1 Slave 2
Outdoor unit
Priority Priority Priority rotation Priority Priority Priority
2 3 1 1 2 3
* Master unit, slave unit 1 and slave unit 2 in this section are the names for installation.
They are determined in installation work, and not changed thereafter. (These names are
different from master unit and slave unit for control.)
The outdoor unit connected the control wires (F1 and F2) for the indoor unit should be
designated as main unit.
Consequently, The LED display on the main PCB for master unit, slave unit 1 and slave
unit 2 do not change. (Refer to P.114.)
5.2 Emergency Operation

If the compressor cannot operate, this control inhibits any applicable compressor or outdoor unit
from operating to perform emergency operation only with the operative compressor or outdoor
unit.
Caution
In order to disable the compressor operation due to a failure or else, be sure to do so
in emergency operation mode.
NEVER attempt to disconnect power supply wires from magnetic contactors or else.
(Doing so will operate compressors in combination that disables oil equalization
between the compressors, thus resulting in malfunctions of other normal
compressors.)
5.2.1 Restrictions for Emergency Operation

In the case of system with 1 outdoor unit installed, only when thermostats of indoor units
having a capacity of 50% or more of the outdoor unit capacity turn ON, the emergency
operation is functional. (If the total capacity of indoor units with thermostat ON is small, the
outdoor unit cannot operate.)
If the emergency operation is set while the outdoor unit is in operation, the outdoor unit stops
once after pump-down residual operation (a maximum of 5 minutes elapsed).
Function 112
5.2.2 In the Case of 1-Outdoor-Unit System (RXQ5PA to 18PA)

[Set the system to operation prohibition mode by compressor]
In order to set an INV. compressor to operation
prohibition mode, set No. 42 of Setting mode 2 to LED display (k:ON h:OFF l:Blink)
"EMERGENCY OPERATION". H1P----H7P
(Procedure)
(1) Press and hold the MODE button (BS1) for a khhhhhh
period of 5 seconds or more.
(2) Press the SET button (BS2) 42 times. kkhkhkh
(3) Press the RETURN button (BS3) once. khhhhhl (Factory setting)
(4) Press the SET button (BS2) once. khhhhlh
(5) Press the RETURN button (BS3) twice. khhhhhh
(6) Press the MODE button (BS1) once. hhkhhhh
In order to set STD1 and STD2 compressors to
operation prohibition mode, set No. 19 of Setting LED display (k:ON h:OFF l:Blink)
mode 2 to "STD1, 2 OPERATION PROHIBITION". H1P----H7P
(RXQ10PA to 18PA)
(Procedure)
(2) Press the SET button (BS2) 19 times. khkhhkk
(3) Press the RETURN button (BS3) once. khhhhhh (Factory setting)
(4) Press the SET button (BS2) once. khhhhhl
In order to set the STD 2 compressor to operation
prohibition mode, set No. 19 of Setting mode 2 to "STD2 LED display (k:ON h:OFF l:Blink)
OPERATION PROHIBITION". (RXQ14PA, 16PA, H1P----H7P
18PA)
(Procedure)
(1) Press and hold the MODE button (BS1) for a period khhhhhh
of 5 seconds or more.
(3) Press the RETURN button (BS3) once. khhhhhh (Factory setting)
(4) Press the SET button (BS2) twice. khhhhlh
For RXQ14PA, 16PA and 18PA, if the INV. compressor is set to operation prohibition mode,
only a single STD compressor will operate for the convenience of oil equalization.
For RXQ14PA, 16PA and 18PA, only the STD1 compressor cannot be put into operation
prohibition mode for the convenience of oil equalization.
For the system with a single outdoor unit (RXQ5PA to 18PA), automatic backup operation is
not functional.
5.2.3 In The Case of Multi-Outdoor-Unit System (RXQ20PA to 54PA)

[Automatic backup operation]
With multi-outdoor-unit system, if a certain outdoor unit system malfunctions (i.e., the system
stops and indoor unit remote controller displays the malfunction), by resetting the system with
the indoor unit remote controller, the applicable outdoor unit is inhibited from operating for 8
hours, thus making it possible to perform emergency operation automatically.
However, in the event any of the following malfunctions occurs, automatic backup operation
can be performed.
Malfunctions under which automatic backup operation can be performed:
E3, E4, E5, E7
F3
H7, H9
J2, J3, J5, J6, J7, J9, JA, JC
L4, L5, L8, L9, LC
U2, UJ
113 Function
Note : In order to forcedly clear the automatic backup operation, reset the power
supply with the outdoor unit in the stopped state.
[Emergency operation with settings in service mode]

Inhibition of operation is set with each outdoor unit.
Make the following settings with the master unit. (Setting with the slave unit becomes disabled.)
Discriminate the operating status of the master unit / slave units through the following LED
display.
LED display (k:ON h:OFF l:Blink)
H1P----H7P H8P
Master: hhkhhhh k
Slave 1: hhhhhhh l
Slave 2: hhhhhhh h
(Factory setting)
In order to set the master unit to operation

prohibition mode, set No. 38 of Setting mode 2 to
"MASTER OPERATION PROHIBITION". LED display (k:ON h:OFF l:Blink)
H1P----H7P
(Procedure)
(2) Press the SET button (BS2) 38 times. kkhhkkh
In order to set the slave unit 1 to operation
"SLAVE 1 OPERATION PROHIBITION".
H1P----H7P
(Procedure)
(2) Press the SET button (BS2) 39 times. kkhhkkk
In order to set the slave unit 2 to operation
"SLAVE 2 OPERATION PROHIBITION". LED display (k:ON h:OFF l:Blink)
H1P----H7P
(Procedure)
(2) Press the SET button (BS2) 40 times. kkhkhhh

In the case of multi-outdoor-unit system, Inhibition of operation is not set with each
compressor individually.
In the case of multi-outdoor-unit system, when the above Inhibition of operation is set,
outdoor unit rotation is not functional.
Function 114
[Cancel of Emergency Operation]

To cancel the emergency operation, conduct the following setting. (Return to Factory setting.)
<RXQ8PA to 18PA>
Cancel to set an INV. compressor from operation
prohibition mode, set No. 42 of Setting mode 2 to LED display (k:ON h:OFF l:Blink)
"Normal operation". H1P----H7P
(Procedure)
(2) Press the SET button (BS2) 42 times. kkhkhkh
(3) Press the RETURN button (BS3) once. khhhhlh
(4) Press the SET button (BS2) once. khhhhhl (Factory setting)
Cancel to set STD1 and STD2 compressors from
operation prohibition mode, set No. 19 of Setting LED display (k:ON h:OFF l:Blink)
mode 2 to "OFF". (RXQ10PA to 18PA) H1P----H7P
(Procedure)
(3) Press the RETURN button (BS3) once. khhhhhl
(4) Press the SET button (BS2) twice. khhhhhh (Factory setting)
Cancel to set the STD 2 compressor from operation

prohibition mode, set No. 19 of Setting mode 2 to "STD2 LED display (k:ON h:OFF l:Blink)
OPERATION PROHIBITION". (RXQ14PA, 16PA, H1P----H7P
18PA)
(Procedure)
(4) Press the SET button (BS2) twice. khhhhhh (Factory setting)
115 Function
<RXQ20PA to 54PA>
Cancel to set the master unit from operation
"OFF". LED display (k:ON h:OFF l:Blink)
H1P----H7P
(Procedure)
(2) Press the SET button (BS2) 38 times. kkhhkkh
Cancel to set the slave unit 1 from operation
"OFF".
H1P----H7P
(Procedure)
(2) Press the SET button (BS2) 39 times. kkhhkkk
Cancel to set the slave unit 2 from operation
"OFF". LED display (k:ON h:OFF l:Blink)
H1P----H7P
(Procedure)
(2) Press the SET button (BS2) 40 times. kkhkhhh
Function 116
5.3 Demand Operation

In order to save the power consumption, the capacity of outdoor unit is saved with control
forcibly by using Demand 1 Setting or Demand 2 Setting.
To operate the unit with this mode, additional setting of Continuous Demand Setting or
external input by external control adaptor is required.
Set item Condition Content

Demand 1 Mode 1 The compressor operates at approx. 60% or less of rating.
Mode 2 The compressor operates at approx. 70% or less of rating.
Demand 2 The compressor operates at approx. 40% or less of rating.
117 Function
Si34-804_A Outline of Control (Indoor Unit)
6. Outline of Control (Indoor Unit)

6.1 Drain Pump Control
1. The drain pump is controlled by the ON/OFF buttons (4 button (1) - (4) given in the figure
below).
6.1.1 When the Float Switch is Tripped While the Cooling Thermostat is
ON:
1. (Normal operation):
The objective of residual operation is to completely drain any moisture adhering to the fin of the
indoor unit heat exchanger when the thermostat goes off during cooling operation.
2. (Malfunction residual):
The remote controller will display "A3" and the air conditioner will come to an abnormal stop in 5
minutes if the float switch is turned OFF while the cooling thermo. is ON.
6.1.2 When the Float Switch is Tripped while the Cooling Thermostat is
OFF:
*3. (Malfunction residual):

The remote controller will display "A3" and the air conditioner will come to an abnormal stop if
the float switch is turned OFF and not turned ON again within 5 minutes while the cooling
thermo. is OFF.
Function 118
Outline of Control (Indoor Unit) Si34-804_A
6.1.3 When the Float Switch is Tripped and AF is Displayed on the

Remote Controller:

If the float switch is tripped five times in succession, a drain malfunction is determined to have
occurred. AF is then displayed as operation continues.
The remote controller will display "A3" and the air conditioner will come to an abnormal stop if
the float switch is OFF for more than 5 minutes in the case of *4.
119 Function
6.2 Louver Control for Preventing Ceiling Dirt

We have added a control feature that allows you to select the range of in which air direction can
be adjusted in order to prevent the ceiling surrounding the air discharge outlet of ceiling
mounted cassette type units from being soiled. (This feature is available on double flow, multi-
flow and corner types.)
Existing position
P0
P1
P2
P3
P4
Draft prevention position Standard Setting Ceiling soiling prevention

position position
(Not for Multi flow type)
P0 P0 P0
P1 P1
P0' P2
P2
P3 P1' P4 P0''
P4 P1''
P4 P2'
P2''
P3'
P4' P4'' P3''
Draft
prevention P0 P1 P2 P3 P4 Same as existing position
position
Range of direction adjustment
Standard Separated into 5 positions

position
Prohibited P0' P1' P2' P3' P4' (P1 - 4)
Range of direction adjustment

Dirt
Separated into 5 positions
prevention Prohibited P0'' P1'' P2'' P3'' P4'' (P2 - 4)
position
The factory setting position is standard position.
Function 120
6.3 Thermostat Sensor in Remote Controller

Temperature is controlled by both the thermostat sensor in remote controller and air suction
thermostat in the indoor unit. (This is however limited to when the field setting for the thermostat
sensor in remote controller is set to Use. )
Cooling If there is a significant difference in the preset temperature and the suction temperature, fine
adjustment control is carried out using a body thermostat sensor, or using the sensor in the
remote controller near the position of the user when the suction temperature is near the preset
temperature.
Ex: When cooling

Assuming the preset temperature in the figure above is 24C, and the suction
temperature has changed from 18C to 30C (A F):
(This example also assumes there are several other air conditioners, the VRV system is off, and
that temperature changes even when the thermostat sensor is off.)
Body thermostat sensor is used for temperatures from 18C to 23C (A C).
Remote controller thermostat sensor is used for temperatures from 23C to 27C (C E).
Body thermostat sensor is used for temperatures from 27C to 30C (E F).
And, assuming suction temperature has changed from 30C to 18C (F A):
Body thermostat sensor is used for temperatures from 30C to 25C (F D).
Remote controller thermostat sensor is used for temperatures from 25C to 21C (D B).
Body thermostat sensor is used for temperatures from 21C to 18C (B A).
121 Function
6.4 Thermostat Control while in Normal Operation

VRV multi systems are set at factory to thermostat control mode using the remote controller.
While in normal thermostat differential control mode (i.e., factory setting mode), the thermostat
turns OFF when the system reaches a temperature of -1C from the set temperature while in
cooling operation.
Tr < Set temperature -1C

Normal Tr: Temperature detected with the suction
Cooling operation: operation Thermostat OFF
air thermistor (R1T)
While in a single remote controller group control, the body thermostat is only used fro this
control.
(Through field settings, the thermostat differential setting can be changed from 1C to 0.5C.
For details on the changing procedure, refer to information on page onward.)
6.5 Thermostat Control in Dry Operation

While in dry operation, the thermostat control is conducted according to a suction temperature
at the time of starting the dry operation.
Assuming that the suction air temperature at the time of starting the dry operation is Tro and the
suction air temperature in operation is Tr,
Tr < Tro - 1C
In dry operation Tro: Suction air temperature at the
when Tro 24.5C: Thermostat OFF
time of starting the dry operation
Tr < Tro - 1.5C

In dry operation Tr: Temperature detected with the
when Tro > 24.5C: Thermostat OFF
suction air thermistor (R1T)
Furthermore, while in dry operation mode, fans operate at L flow rate, stops for a period of six
minutes while the thermostat is OFF, and then return to operation at L flow rate. (This control is
used to prevent a rise in indoor humidity while in thermostat OFF mode.)
Function 122
6.6 Electronic Expansion Valve Control

Electronic Expansion Valve Control
In cooling, to maximize the capacity of indoor unit heat exchanger (evaporator), operate the
electronic expansion valve under PI control so that the evaporator outlet superheated degree
(SH) will become constant.
Cooling SH=TH2-TH1 SH : Evaporator outlet superheated degree

TH1: Temperature (C) detected with the liquid thermistor
TH2: Temperature (C) detected with the gas thermistor
Furthermore, the default value of the optimal evaporator outlet superheated degree (condenser
outlet subcooled degree) is 5 deg. However, this default value varies with the operating
performance.
6.7 Freeze Prevention

Freeze When the temperature detected by liquid pipe temperature thermistor (R2T) of the indoor unit
Prevention by Off heat exchanger drops too low, the unit enters freeze prevention operation in accordance with
Cycle (Indoor the following conditions, and is also set in accordance with the conditions given below.
Unit)
Conditions for starting freeze prevention: Temperature is -1C or less for total of 40 min., or
temperature is -5C or less for total of 10 min.
Conditions for stopping freeze prevention: Temperature is +7C or more for 10 min.
continuously
Ex: Case where temperature is -5C or less for total of 10 min.
123 Function
6.8 List of Swing Flap Operations

Swing flaps operate as shown in table below.
Flap
Fan FXCQ
FXFQ FXHQ FXAQ
FXKQ
Thermostat ON in dry Swing L*1 Swing Swing Swing
operation using micro-
computer Wind direction set L*1 Set Set Set
Thermostat OFF in dry Swing Swing Swing Swing

operation using micro- OFF or L
computer Wind direction set Horizontal or Set Set Set
Swing Set Swing Swing Swing

Thermostat OFF in
Cooling cooling
Wind direction set Set Set Set Set
Swing OFF Horizontal Horizontal Totally closed

Stop
Wind direction set OFF Horizontal Horizontal Totally closed
Micro-computer control Swing L Swing Swing Swing

(including cooling
operation) Wind direction set L Set Set Set
*1. L or LL only on FXFQ models
Function 124

(Unique Control for Outdoor Air Processing Unit)
6.9.1 Selection of Operation Mode (by suction air thermostat)
Objective To select cooling or fan operation mode according to the suction air (outdoor air) temperature.
Details [Outdoor air processing unit]
Suction temperature (T1) C

5 5 15 19 43
Cooling mode Fan operation (with thermostat OFF) Cooling
Cooling
"Low outdoor air protection control"
Fan operation
Fan stop
18
125 Function
6.9.2 Discharge Air Temperature Control

Used to control the EV (electronic expansion valve) opening and thermostat ON/OFF so as to
keep the discharge air temperature at the set temperature.
(1) Cooling operations
T3
Refrigerant
Discharge
air
CPU
T1 Ts
T4
T2 Temp.
Setting
EV
Refrigerant
T1: Temperature detected by suction air thermistor Th1

T2: Temperature detected by liquid pipe temp. thermistor Th2
T3: Temperature detected by gas pipe temp. thermistor Th3
T4: Temperature detected by discharge air thermistor Th4
EV: Electronic expansion valve opening
Calculate superheat degree.

SH=T3T2
If the discharge temperature T4

If the discharge temperature
is lower than the discharge
T4 is higher than the discharge
setting temperature Ts
setting temperature Ts
Yes No
T4 > Ts?
Is
No No
Is EV possible EV possible to
to open? close?
Judge if the superheat degree
Judge if the superheat degree Yes Yes is not too large when the EV is
is not too small when the EV is closed.
opened. If yes, If yes,
EV is opened. EV is closed.
EV=EV+EV EV=EVEV
Function 126
(2) Thermostat OFF by discharge air temperature
<Cooling>
Target discharge air temp. Ts Discharge air temp. T4
>5 degree continue for 5 minutes.
Thermostat stops for 1 minute. Thermostat ON
6.9.3 Low Outdoor Air Temperature Protection Control
Objective In cooling (or fan operation), if outdoor air is low in temperature, stop the fan forcibly.
Details [Cooling and fan operation]

Turn OFF the fan for a period of 60 minutes at a suction temperature of 5C or lower.
In order to monitor the outdoor air temperature, however, turn ON the fan for a period of one
minute and turn OFF the fan again at a temperature of 5C or lower after the said timer
completes the operative period.
Reset the 60-minute timer when the fan stops running.
127 Function
Si34-804_A
Part 5
Test Operation
1. Test Operation ....................................................................................129

1.1 Installation Process ..............................................................................129
1.2 Procedure and Outline .........................................................................130
1.3 Operation when Power is Turned On ...................................................145
2. Outdoor Unit PCB Layout....................................................................146
3. Field Setting ........................................................................................147
3.1 Field Setting from Remote Controller ...................................................147
3.2 Field Setting from Outdoor Unit............................................................164
Test Operation 128

Test Operation Si34-804_A
1. Test Operation
1.1 Installation Process
Below figure shows the installation process. Install in the order of the steps shown.
Selection of Location
Inspecting and Handling the Unit
Placing the Unit
Field Wiring Refrigerant Piping
Air tight Test and Vacuum Drying
Pipe Insulation
Checking of Device and Installation Conditions
Additional Refrigerant Charge and Check Operation

Operations which require the
power to be turned on.
Test Run
129 Test Operation

Si34-804_A Test Operation
1.2 Procedure and Outline

Follow the following procedure to conduct the initial test operation after installation.
1.2.1 Check Work Prior to Turn Power Supply On

Is the wiring performed as specified?
Check the below items.
Is the designated wire used?
Power wiring
Is the wiring screw of wiring not loose?
Control transmission wiring
Is the grounding work completed?
between units
Is the insulation of the main power supply circuit deteriorated?
Earth wire
Use a 500V megger tester to measure the insulation. (*1)
Do not use a megger tester for other circuits than 200V (or
240V) circuit.
*1:Measure to be taken against decreased insulation resistance in
the compressor
If the compressor is left to stand for
Terminal
an extended period of time after the
refrigerant charge with the stop valve
open and the power supply OFF, the Dryer
refrigerant may be mixed in the (1000W)
compressor, thus decreasing the

insulation resistance.
Heat the compressor as shown on
the right and then recheck the
insulation.
Check on refrigerant piping / Is the pipe size proper?

insulation materials Is the pipe insulation material installed securely?
Liquid and gas pipes need to be insulated. (Otherwise causes
water leak.)
Check air tight test and vacuum Have the air tight test and the vacuum drying been conducted
drying. according to the procedure in the Installation Manual?
Check on amount of refrigerant Is a proper quantity of refrigerant refilled?

charge The following two methods are available for refilling of the
refrigerant.
(1) Use the automatic refrigerant refilling function.
(2) Calculate a refrigerant refilling quantity.
Check the stop valves for Check to be sure the stop valves are under the following
conditions. conditions.
Liquid side stop valve Gas side stop valve
Open Open
Test Operation 130

1.2.2 Turn Power On

Turn outdoor unit and indoor Be sure to turn the power on 6 hours before starting operation to protect
unit power on. compressors. (to power on crankcase heater)
Check the LED display of the Check to be sure the transmission is normal.
outdoor unit PCB. The transmission is normal if the LEDs display conditions as shown in
table below.
LED display k ON h OFF l Blinking
Micro- COOL / HEAT select
LED display computer Low
MODE TEST Demand Multi
(Default status before operation IND MASTER SLAVE
noise
monitor
delivery)
HAP H1P H2P H3P H4P H5P H6P H7P H8P
One outdoor unit installed l h h k h h h h h
l h h k h h h h k
When multiple Master
outdoor unit Slave 1 l h h h h h h h l
installed (*)
Slave 2 l h h h h h h h h
(*) The master unit is the outdoor unit to which the transmission wiring for
the indoor units is connected.
The other outdoor units are slave units.
Make field settings if needed.

Make field settings with outdoor
(For the setting procedure, refer to information in "3.2. Field Setting
unit PCB.
from Outdoor Unit" on page 164 onward.)
For the outdoor-multi system, make field settings with the master unit.
(Field settings made with the slave unit will be all invalid.)
Conduct check operations. The check operations shown below will be automatically initiated.
Check for erroneous wirings
Check for failure to open stop valves
Check for excessive refrigerant refilling
Automatic judgement of piping length
Before starting the normal operation after the completion of check

Check for normal operation.
operations, make sure indoor and outdoor units normally operate.
131 Test Operation

1.2.3 Air Tight Test and Vacuum Drying

Note:
Always use nitrogen gas for the air tight test.
Absolutely do not open the shutoff valve until the main power circuit insulation measurement
has been completed. (measuring after the shutoff valve is opened will cause the insulation
value to drop.)
1.2.3.1 Preparations
<Needed tools>
To prevent entry of any impurities and insure sufficient
pressure resistance, always use the special tools
Gauge manifold dedicated for R-410A.
Charge hose valve Use charge hose that have pushing stick for connecting
to service port of shutoff valves or refrigerant charge
port.
The vacuum pump for vacuum drying should be able to
lower the pressure to 100.7kPa
Vacuum pump (5 Torr 755mm Hg).
Take care the pump oil never flow backward into the
refrigerant pipe during the pump stops.
<The system for air tight test and vacuum drying>
Referring to figure 28, connect an nitrogen tank, refrigerant tank, and a vacuum pump to the
outdoor unit.
The refrigerant tank and the charge hose connection to refrigerant charge port or the valve A,
C in figure 28 are needed in 1.2.4 Additional Refrigerant Charge and Check Operation.
The shutoff valve and valve A~C in figure 28 should be open or closed as shown in the table
below.
Liquid side
shutoff valve
Refrigerant charge port
Gas side
shutoff valve Outdoor Outdoor
Charge Shutoff valve unit unit
hose service port
Measuring device
Gouge manifold
Valve B
Nitrogen
Valve C
To indoor unit
R-410A cylinder Vacuum pump Valve A
(with siphon) Interunit pipings
Gas flow
fig. 28
Valve Shutoff valve

State of valve A, B and C and shutoff valves
A B C Liquid side Gas side
Air tight test, Vacuum drying
(Close valve A and shutoff valves certainly. Otherwise the Close Open Open Close Close
refrigerant in the unit are released.)
Note:
The air tight test and vacuum drying should be done using the liquid side
and gas side shutoff valve service ports.
See the [R-410A] Label attached to the front plate of the outdoor unit for
details on the location of the service port (see figure at right).
See [Shutoff valve operation procedure] in 1.2.4.1 Before Working for
details on handling the shutoff valve. (Refer to page 134)
The refrigerant charge port is connected to unit pipe. [R-410A] Label
When shipped, the unit contains refrigerant, so use caution when
attaching the charge hose.
Test Operation 132

1.2.3.2 Air Tight Test and Vacuum Drying Method

After finished piping work, carry out air tight test and vacuum drying.
<Air tight test>
Pressurize the liquid and gas pipes to 4.0MPa (40bar) (do not pressurize more than 4.0MPa
(40bar)). If the pressure does not drop within 24 hours, the system passes the test.
If there is a pressure drop, check for leaks, make repairs, and perform the airtight test again.
<Vacuum drying>
Evacuate the system from the liquid and gas pipes by using a vacuum pump for more than 2
hours and bring the system to 100.7kPa or less. After keeping the system under that condition
for more than 1 hour, check if the vacuum gauge rises or not. If it rises, the system may either
contain moisture inside or have leaks.
Note:
If moisture might enter the piping, follow below.
(I.e., if doing work during the rainy season, if the actual work takes long enough that
condensation may form on the inside of the pipes, if rain might enter the pipes during
work, etc.)
1. After performing the vacuum drying for two hours, pressurize to 0.05 MPa (i.e., vacuum
breakdown) with nitrogen gas, then depressurize down to 100.7 kPa for an hour using the
vacuum pump (vacuum drying).
2. If the pressure does not reach 100.7 kPa even after depressurizing for at least two hours,
repeat the vacuum breakdown - vacuum drying process.
After vacuum drying, maintain the vacuum for an hour and make sure the pressure does not rise
by monitoring with a vacuum gauge.
1.2.4 Additional Refrigerant Charge and Check Operation

The outdoor unit is charged with refrigerant when shipped from the factory, but depending on
the size and length of the piping when installed, it may require additional charging.
For charging the additional refrigerant, follow the procedure in this chapter.
And then carry out the check operation.
Note: Total amount of refrigerant should be 100 kg or less
1.2.4.1 Before Working

[About the refrigerant tank]
Check whether the tank has a siphon pipe before charging and place the tank so that the
refrigerant is charged in liquid form. (See the figure below.)
With siphon pipe
Stand the tank upright and charge.
(The siphon pipe goes all the way inside,
so the tank does not need be put
upside-down charge in liquid form.)
Other tanks
Stand the tank upside-down and charge.
Caution Always use the proper refrigerant (R-410A). If charged with the refrigerant containing an
improper material, it may cause an explosion or accident.
R-410A is a mixed refrigerant, so charging it as a gas will cause the refrigerant composition
to change, which may prevent normal operation.
133 Test Operation

[Shutoff Valve Operation Procedure]

When operating the shutoff valve, follow the procedure instructed below.
Note:
Do not open the shutoff valve until 1.2.1 Check work prior to turn power supply on in page
130 are completed. If the shutoff valve is left open without turning on the power, it may cause
refrigerant to buildup in the compressor, leading insulation degradation.
Be sure to use the correct tools.
The shutoff valve is not a back-seat type. If forced it to open, it might break the valve body.
When using a service port, use the charge hose.
After tightening the cap, make sure no refrigerant gas is leaking.
[Tightening torque]
The sizes of the shutoff valves on each model and the tightening torque for each size are listed
in the table below.
<Size of Shutoff Valve>
5HP type 8HP type 10HP type 12HP type 14HP type 16HP type 18HP type
12.7
9.5
Liquid side The 12HP type corresponds The 18HP type corresponds to the
to the 12.7-diameter 15.9-diameter onsite
shutoff valve onsite piping using the included piping using the
piping. accessory pipe.
25.4
The 10HP type corresponds to the 22.2-diameter onsite
Gas side 15.9 19.1 piping using the accessory pipe.
shutoff valve The 12 ~ 18HP type corresponds to the 28.6-diameter onsite
piping using the accessory pipe.
<Tightening torque>
Tightening torque Nm (Turn clockwise to close)
Shutoff valve size Cap
Shaft (valve body) Service port
(valve lid)
9.5 5.4 - 6.6 13.5 - 16.5
Hexagonal wrench
4 mm
12.7 8.1 - 9.9 18.0 - 22.0
Hexagonal wrench 11.5 - 13.9
15.9 13.5 - 16.5 6 mm
19.1 22.5 - 27.5
Hexagonal wrench
27.0 - 33.0
25.4 8 mm
Service port
Cap
Seal section Hex holes

Shaft (valve body)
fig 34
[To open]
1. Remove the cap and turn the shaft counterclockwise with the hexagon wrench (JISB4648).
2. Turn it until the shaft stops.
3. Make sure to tighten the cap securely.
(For the tightening torque, refer to the item <Tightening Torque>.)
[To close]
1. Remove the cap and turn the shaft clockwise with the hexagon wrench (JISB4648).
2. Securely tighten the valve until the shaft contacts the main body seal.
3. Make sure to tighten the cap securely.
(For the tightening torque, refer to the item <Tightening Torque>.)
Test Operation 134

[How to Check How Many Units are Connected]

It is possible to find out how many indoor or outdoor unit in the system are turned on by
operating the push button on the PCB (A1P) of outdoor unit (In case of multi system master
unit).
Follow the procedure below to check how many indoor or outdoor units are turned on.
LED display
(LED display: h ...OFF k ...ON l ...Blinking ...Uncertain) H H H H H H H
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
P P P P P P P
1. Press the MODE button (BS1) once, and set the MONITOR MODE
(H1P: Blinking). l hhhhhh
2. Press the SET button (BS2) the number of For checking the
times until the LED display matches that at number of outdoor units: l hhkhhh
right. eight times
For checking the
number of indoor units: l hhhkhk
five times
3. Press the RETURN button (BS3) and read the number of units from the
display of H2P through H7P.
[Reading Method] l
The display of H2P through H7P should be read as a binary number,
with l standing for 1 and h standing for 0.
Ex: For the LED display at right, this would be 0 1 0 1 1 0 ,

which would mean 22 units are connected.
l h l h l l h
32 0 + 16 1 + 8 0 + 4 1 + 2 1 + 1 0 = 22 units
Note: 000000 indicates 64 units.
4. Press the MODE button (BS1) once. This returns to Setting Mode 1
(default). hhkhhhh
Note:
Press the MODE button (BS1) if you get confused while operating.
This returns to Setting Mode 1 (default).
135 Test Operation

1.2.4.2 Procedure of Adding Refrigerant Charging and Check Operation
Warning Electric Shock Warning

Make sure to close the EL. COMPO. BOX lid before turning on the power when performing
the refrigerant charging operation.
Perform the setting on the PCB (A1P) of the outdoor unit and check the LED display after the
power is on via the inspection door which is in the EL. COMPO. BOX lid.
Use an insulated rod to operate the push buttons via the EL. COMPO. BOXs inspection
door.
There is a risk of electric shock if you touch any live parts, since this operation must be
performed with the power on.
Caution Make sure to use the protect tool (protective groves and goggles) when charging the
refrigerant.
Due to a danger of liquid hammer, the refrigerant must not be charged over the allowable
maximum amount when charging the refrigerant.
Do not perform the refrigerant charging operation under working for the indoor unit.
When opening the front panel, make sure to take caution to the fan rotation during the
working.
After the outdoor unit stops operating, the fan may keep rotation for a while.
Note:
If operation is performed within 12 minutes after the indoor and outdoor units are turned on,
H2P will be lit on and the compressor will not operate.
In order to ensure uniform refrigerant distribution, it may take up to around 10 minutes for the
compressor to start up after the unit starting operating. This is not a malfunction.
<About refrigerant charging>
The refrigerant charge port is connected to the piping inside the unit.
When the unit is shipped from the factory, the units internal piping is already charged with
refrigerant, so be careful when connecting the charge hose.
After adding the refrigerant, make sure to close the lid of the refrigerant charging port.
The tightening torque for the lid is 11.5 to 13.9 Nm.
See [Shutoff valve operation procedure] in 1.2.4.1 for details on how to handle shutoff
valves.
When done or when pausing the refrigerant charging operation, close the valve of the
refrigerant tank immediately. If the tank is left with the valve open, the amount of refrigerant
which is properly charged may be off the point. More refrigerant may be charged by any
remaining pressure after the machine is stopped.
<About check operation>
Make sure to perform the check operation after installation. Otherwise, the malfunction code
U3 will be displayed and normal operation cannot be performed.
And the failure of Check of wrong-wiring may also cause abnormal operation. Performance
may drop due to the failure of Judgement of piping length.
Check operation must be performed for each refrigerant piping system.
Checking is impossible if plural systems are being done at once.
The individual problems of indoor units can not be checked.
About these problems check by test run after the check operation is completed. (See page
144)
The check operation cannot be performed in recovery or other service modes.
1. Make sure the following works are complete in accordance with the installation manual.
Piping work
Wiring work
Air tight test
Vacuum drying
Installation work for indoor unit
2. Calculate the additional charging amount using How to calculate the additional refrigerant
to be charged in 6 Example of connection on P.356.
Test Operation 136

3. Open the valve C (See the figure 31. The valve A, B and the liquid pipe, suction gas pipe
shutoff valves must be left closed), and charge the refrigerant of the additional charging
amount from the liquid side shutout valve service port.
Liquid side Outdoor unit Outdoor unit
shutoff valve Refrigerant
Charge hose Gas side charge port
shutoff valve
Shutoff valve
service port
Valve B
Measuring device
Valve C
To indoor unit
Valve A Field pipings
R-410A tank
Refrigerant flow
(with siphon)
fig 31
4. If the additional charging amount was charged fully, close the valve C and go to step 6.
If the additional charging amount was not charged fully, close the valve C and go to step 5.
5. Perform the refrigerant charging following [Automatic refrigerant charging operation
procedure] as shown below. And charge the remaining refrigerant of the additional charging
amount.
Note:
For performing the automatic refrigerant charging operation, the push button on the PCB (A1)
of outdoor unit are used. (See figure 33.)
And the refrigerant are charged from the refrigerant charge port via the valve A. (See figure
32.) For operating the push button and opening or closing the valves, follow the procedure.
During Automatic refrigerant charging operation, the system will select charging mode by the
temperature condition as follows.
Outdoor temp. : 0C DB ~ 43C DB
Cooling mode
Indoor temp. : 10C DB ~ 32C DB
When charging in cooling mode, the system will stop operation when the required amount of
refrigerant is charged.
The refrigerant will be charged about 22kg in one hour at outdoor temp. 30C DB (about 6kg
at outdoor temp. 0C DB).
If you need to speed-up in case of multi system, connect the refrigerant tanks to each outdoor
unit as shown in the figure 34.
During Automatic refrigerant charging operation, you can stop the operation forcedly by
pushing MODE button (BS1).
Liquid side Outdoor unit Outdoor unit
shutoff valve Refrigerant
Charge hose Gas side charge port
shutoff valve
Shutoff valve
service port
Valve B
Measuring device
Valve C
To indoor unit
Valve A Field pipings
R-410A tank
Refrigerant flow
(with siphon)
fig 32
Refrigerant
charge port
Liquid side In case of multi system if you need to speedup.
Charge hose shutoff valve
Gas side
shutoff valve
Outdoor Outdoor Outdoor
Shutoff valve unit unit unit
service port
valve B
Measuring
device valve C
valve A
valve A
Refrigerant flow
R-410A tank : Field pipings
(with siphon) : Refrigerant flow
fig 34
Lift the protruding
EL.COMPO.BOX lid part to open the cover
Inspection door LED (H1~8P)
Label Push button
EL.COMPO.BOX lid Service Precaution (BS1-5)
Inspection door
Pipe intake
fig 33
137 Test Operation

[Automatic Refrigerant Charging Operation Procedure]

Note:
The marks of LED mean as follows.
h : OFF k : ON l : Blinking : OFF, ON or Blinking
(1) Open the liquid pipe, suction gas pipe shutoff valves. (The valve A~C must be closed. See
figure 32.)
(2) Close the EL. COMPO. BOX (1) lid and all front panel except on the EL. COMPO. BOX
(1) side. (*1) And turn the power to the outdoor unit and all connected indoor units. (*2)
After H2P stop blinking (about 12 minutes after turning on the power), check H2P is OFF.
If H2P is ON. check the malfunction code in the remote controller of indoor unit and
correct the malfunction in accordance with [Remote controller display malfunction code]
on P.142.
(3) Check the LED. And push the MODE button (BS1) once if the LED displays is not as below.
H1P H2P H3P H4P H5P H6P H7P
h h k h h h h
(4) Push the TEST button (BS4) once. (The LED displays will change as below.)
k k k k k k k
(5) Hold the TEST button (BS4) down for 5 seconds or more.
(The LED displays will change as below and fan of outdoor unit will start rotation.)
h l h h h
(6) When the compressor start working and the LED displays change any state in below (*3),
go to In case of cooling mode in accordance with the LED displays.
l l l h k h k Go to In case of cooling mode
In case of cooling mode

(7) Push the TEST button (BS4) once within 5 minutes after procedure (5) (*4) and close the all
front panels (*5).
After that, open the valve A immediately (See figure 32) (*6) and watch the remote
controller display of indoor unit.
(8) If the remote controller display shows PE code (*7), ready to close the valve A.
And go to procedure (9).
If the remote controller display shows other code, close the valve A immediately and refer to
[Remote controller cooling mode malfunction code]
Beware the fan running when open the front panel.
The fan may continue rotation after the system stop the operation.
(9) When the compressor stop working (the fan may continue rotation.), close the valve A
immediately (*8).
And check the LED displays are as below and the remote controller display shows P9
code.
k l l k k k k
After checking, push the MODE button (BS1) once and the charging is complete.
Test Operation 138

Notes (*1)~(*8)
(*1) Lead the refrigerant charge hose etc. from the pipe intake.
All front panels must be closed at the procedure (7).
(*2) If you perform the refrigerant charging operation within the refrigerant system that have
the power off unit, the operation cannot finish properly.
Check the number of outdoor and indoor units that is powered.
For checking, see [How to check how many units are connected] in page 135.
To energize the crankcase heater, make sure to turn on for 6 hours before starting
operation.
(*3) It takes about 2~10 minutes for getting stability of refrigerant state.
If the additional refrigerant is little and operation is started before getting stability, the
system can not judge the charging amount precisely and it cause over charge.
(*4) If the TEST button (BS4) is not pushed within 5 minutes, P2 code will displayed in the
remote controller. In this case, refer [Remote controller cooling mode malfunction code].
(*5) If the front panel is opened during the operation, the system cannot operate properly.
(*6) If you leave the system without connecting the refrigerant tank or opening the valve A for
30 minutes or more, the system stop operation and P2 code are displayed in remote
controller.
In this case, refer [Remote controller cooling mode malfunction code].
(*7) Depending on the situation of operation such as the charging amount is little, the PE code
may not be displayed and the P9 code may be displayed.
(*8) Always close the valve A and take the tank off.
The refrigerant charge port of this unit have electric expansion valve and the valve are
closed when charging is finished. However, the valve will opened when after operation
(Check operation, normal operation, etc.). If you leave the tank connected, the refrigerant
will charged and it cause over charge.
[Remote controller cooling mode malfunction code]

Code The work contents
PE Charging is almost finished. Ready to close the valve A.
The refrigerant tank is empty. Close the valve A and replace empty tank to the new tank.
PA After changing the tank, open the valve A again.
PH
Beware the fan running. The outdoor unit does not stop operation.
P8 Close the valve A immediately, and restart the operation from procedure (3).
Operation is interrupted. Close the valve A immediately
and check the below items.
Check if suction gas pipe or liquid pipe shutoff
valve is opened.
P2 Check the refrigerant tank is connected and the
valve A was opened. After correcting the abnormality,
Check if the air inlet and outlet of the indoor unit restart the operation from
procedure (3).
are not closed by an obstruction.
Operation is stopped abnormally. Close the valve A
immediately. Confirm the malfunction code and
correct the abnormality following the [Remote
controller displays malfunction code] in page 142.
P9 Charging is finished. Close the valve A and take the refrigerant tank off.
If the additional charging amount was not charged fully, follow the directions below to charge
additional refrigerant.
139 Test Operation

[Refrigerant Charging Operation Procedure]

(1) Open the liquid and gas side shutoff valves (The valve A~C must be closed. The valve A~C
means the valves in the figure 34.)
[Display of normal system]
SERV. C/H SELECTOR
MONI- MODE TEST/ L.N.O.P DEMA-
LED display HWL IND MASTER SLAVE ND MULTI
(Default status of shipped) TOR
Single system l h h k h h h h h
Master unit l h h k h h h h k
Multi
system Sub unit 1 l h h h h h h h l
(*)
Sub unit 2 l h h h h h h h h
LED display: h...OFF, k...ON, l...Blinking
(*)How to distinguish the master unit, sub unit 1, and sub unit 2 in the multi system.
Method 1: By the H8P (MULTI) LED display
k (ON): Master unit l (Blinking): Sub unit 1 h (OFF): Sub unit 2
Method 2: By the transmission wiring to indoor unit
Transmission wiring is connected: Master unit
Transmission wiring is not connected : Sub unit 1 or Sub unit 2
(2) If necessary, set the field setting by using the dip switch on the outdoor unit PCB (A1P).
(For how to set, see 1.2.5.1 Onsite Settings with the Power Off)
(3) Close the EL. COMPO. BOX lid and all front panel except on the side of the EL. COMPO.
BOX (*1) and turn the power to the outdoor unit and all connected indoor units. (*2)
After H2P stop blinking (about 12 minutes after turning on the power), check LED displays
as shown in the table [Display of normal system] and the system is normal state.
If H2P is blinking, check the malfunction code in the remote controller, and correct the
malfunction in accordance with [Remote controller display malfunction code] in page 142.
(*1) Lead the refrigerant charge hose etc. from the pipe intake. All front panels must be closed at
the procedure (9).
(*2) If you perform the refrigerant charging operation within the refrigerant system that have the
power off unit, the operation cannot finish properly.
For confirming the number of the outdoor and indoor units with the power on, see [How to
check how many units are connected] in chapter 1.2.4.1. In case of a multi system, turn on
the power to all outdoor units in the refrigerant system.
To energize the crankcase heater, make sure to turn on for 6 hours before starting
operation.
(4) Start the additional refrigerant charge operation.
(About the system settings for additional refrigerant charge operation, refer to the [Service
Precaution] label attached on the EL. COMPO. BOX lid in the outdoor unit.)
Open valve A immediately after starting the compressor.
(5) Close the valve A if the additional charging amount of refrigerant was charged, and push
the RETURN button (BS3) once.
(6) Record the charging amount on the accessory REQUEST FOR THE INDICATION label
and attach it to the back side of the front panel.
6. After completing the additional refrigerant charging perform the check operation following
below
Test Operation 140

NOTE:
For check operation, the following work will be performed.
Check of shutoff valve opening
Check of wrong-wiring
Judgement of piping length
Check of refrigerant overcharge
It takes about 40 minutes to complete the check operation.
[Check Operation Procedure]

(1) Make the onsite setting as needed using the dip switches on the outdoor unit PCB (A1P)
with the power off (See 1.2.5.1 Onsite Settings with the Power Off)
(2) Close the EL. COMPO. BOX lid and all front panels except as the side of the EL. COMPO.
BOX and turn on the power to the outdoor unit and all connected indoor units.
(Be sure to turn the power on at least 6 hours before operation in order to have power
running to the crank case heater.)
(3) Check the LED display on the outdoor unit PCB (A1P) is as shown in the table below and
transmission is normal.
SERV. C/H SELECTOR

MONI- MODE TEST/ L.N.O.P DEMA-
LED display HWL IND MASTER SLAVE ND MULTI
(Default status of shipped) TOR
Single system l h h k h h h h h
Master unit l h h k h h h h k
Multi
system Sub unit 1 l h h h h h h h l
(*)
Sub unit 2 l h h h h h h h h
LED display: h...OFF, k...ON, l...Blinking
(*)How to distinguish the master unit, sub unit 1, and sub unit 2 in the multi system.
Method 1: By the H8P (MULTI) LED display
k (ON): Master unit l (Blinking): Sub unit 1 h (OFF): Sub unit 2
Method 2: By the transmission wiring to indoor unit
Transmission wiring is connected: Master unit
Transmission wiring is not connected : Sub unit 1 or Sub unit 2
(4) Make the onsite settings as needed using the push button (BS1-BS5) on the outdoor unit
PCB (A1P) with the power on. (See 1.2.5.2 Onsite Settings with the Power On)
(5) Perform the check operation following the Check Operation Method of the [Service
Precautions] label on the EL. COMPO. BOX lid. The system operation for about 40 minutes
and automatically stops the check operation.
If the malfunction code is not displayed in the remote controller after the system stop, check
operation is completed. Normal operation will be possible after 5 minutes. If the malfunction
code is displayed in the remote controller, correct the malfunction following [Remote
controller displays malfunction code] and perform the check operation again.
141 Test Operation

[Remote controller displays malfunction code]

Malfunction Installation error Remedial action
code
E3, E4 The shutoff valve of the outdoor
F3, F6 Open the shutoff valve.
unit is left closed.
UF
The phases of the power to the Exchange two of the three phases (L1, L2, L3) to
U1 outdoor unit is reversed. make a proper connection.
U1 No power is supplied to an outdoor Make sure the power source wire is properly
U4 or indoor unit (including phase connected to the outdoor unit and revise if
LC interruption). necessary.
There is conflict on the connection Check if the refrigerant piping line and the
UF of transmission wiring in the transmission wiring are consistent with each other.
system.
Recalculate the additional amount refrigerant from
E3 the piping length and correct the refrigerant charge
F6 Refrigerant overcharge. level by recovering any excessive refrigerant with
UF a refrigerant recovery machine.
Check if the additional refrigerant charge has
been finished correctly.
E4 Insufficient refrigerant. Recalculate the additional amount refrigerant
F3 from the piping length and add the adequate
amount.
If the outdoor unit terminal is
U7, U4 Remove the line from the outdoor multi terminals
connected when there is one
UF, UH (Q1 and Q2).
outdoor unit installed.
If any malfunction codes other than the above are displayed, check the service manual for how
to respond.
Test Operation 142

1.2.5 Onsite Settings

NOTE:
In the case of a multi system, all onsite settings should be made on the master unit. Settings
made on sub units are invalid.
The outdoor unit to which the indoor unit transmission wire are connected is the master unit,
and all other units are sub units.
1.2.5.1 Onsite Settings with the Power Off

If the COOL/HEAT selector was connected to the outdoor unit,
set the dip switch (DS1) on the outdoor unit PCB (A1P) to ON (it Inspection
is set to OFF when shipped from the factory). door
EL.COMPO. [Service Precautions]
For the position of the dip switch (DS1), see the Service BOX lid label
Precautions label (see at right) which is attached to the EL.
COMPO. BOX lid.
Never perform with the power on.

There is a serious risk of electric shock if any live part is touched.
1.2.5.2 Onsite Settings with the Power On

Use the push button switches (BS1 through BS5) on the outdoor unit PCB (A1P) to make the
necessary onsite settings.
See the Service Precautions label on the EL. CONPO. BOX lid for details on the positions and
operating method of the push button switches and on the onsite setting.
Make sure to record the setting on the accessory REQUEST FOR THE INDICATION label.
Use an insulated rod to operate the push buttons via the inspection door of EL. COMPO. BOX
lid.
There is a risk of electric shock if you touch any live parts, since this operation must be
performed with the power on.
143 Test Operation

1.2.6 Test Run

1.2.6.1 Before Test Run
Make sure the following works are completed in accordance with the installation manual.
Piping work
Wiring work
Air tight test
Vacuum drying
Additional refrigerant charge
Check that all work for the indoor unit are finished and there are no danger to operate.
1.2.6.2 Test Run
After check operation is completed, operate the unit normally and check the following.
(1) Make sure the indoor and outdoor units are operating normally.
(2) Operate each indoor unit one by one and make sure the corresponding outdoor unit is also
operating.
(3) Check to see if cold air is coming out from the indoor unit.
(4) Push the fan direction and strength buttons on the remote controller to see if they operate
properly.
NOTE:
Heating is not possible if the outdoor temperature is 24C or higher. Refer to the Operation
manual.
If a knocking sound can be heard in the liquid compression of the compressor, stop the unit
immediately and then energize the crank case heater for a sufficient length of time before
restarting the operation.
Once stopping, the compressor will not restart in about 5 minutes even if the On/Off button of
the remote controller is pushed.
When the system operation is stopped by the remote controller, the outdoor units may
continue operating for further 5 minutes at maximum.
The outdoor unit fan may rotate at low speeds if the Night-time low noise setting or the
External low noise level setting is made, but this is not a malfunction.
1.2.6.3 Checks after Test Run

Perform the following checks after the test run is complete.
Record the contents of field setting.
Record them on the accessory REQUEST FOR THE INDICATION label.
And attach the label on the back side of the front panel.
Record the installation date.
Record the installation date on the accessory REQUEST FOR THE INDICATION label in
accordance with the IEC60335-2-40.
And attach the label on the back side of the front panel.
NOTE:
After the test run, when handing the unit over to the customer, make sure the EL.COMPO.BOX
lid, the inspection door, and the unit casing are all attached.
Test Operation 144

1.3 Operation when Power is Turned On

1.3.1 When Turning On Power First Time
The unit cannot be run for up to 12 minutes to automatically set the master power and address
(indoor-outdoor address, etc.).
Status
Outdoor unit Test lamp H2P .... Blinks
Can also be set during operation described above.
Indoor unit If ON button is pushed during operation described above, the "UH"
malfunction indicator blinks.
(Returns to normal when automatic setting is complete.)
1.3.2 When Turning On Power the Second Time and Subsequent

Tap the RESET button on the outdoor unit PCB. Operation becomes possible for about 2
minutes. If you do not push the RESET button, the unit cannot be run for up to 10 minutes to
automatically set master power.
Status
Outdoor unit Test lamp H2P .... Blinks
Indoor unit If ON button is pushed during operation described above, the operation lamp
lights but the compressor does not operate. (Returns to normal when
automatic setting is complete.)
1.3.3 When an Indoor Unit or Outdoor Unit has been Added, or Indoor or
Outdoor Unit PCB has been Changed
Be sure to push and hold the RESET button for 5 seconds. If not, the addition cannot be
recognized. In this case, the unit cannot be run for up to 12 minutes to automatically set the
address (indoor-outdoor address, etc.)
Status
Outdoor unit Test lamp H2P .... ON
Indoor unit If ON button is pushed during operation described above, the "UH" or "U4"
malfunction indicator blinks. (Returns to normal when automatic setting is
complete.)
Service cover
[Service Precautions] label
Switch box cover
Switch box
(the upper right)
Caution When the 400 volt power supply is applied to "N" phase by mistake,
replace Inverter PCB (A2P) and control transformer (T1R, T2R) in
switch box together.
145 Test Operation

Si34-804_A Outdoor Unit PCB Layout
2. Outdoor Unit PCB Layout

Outdoor unit PCB
(2) Set mode display (LED)
HAP
(3) Mode setting switch H1P H2P H3P H4P H5P H6P H7P H8P
BS1 BS2 BS3 BS4 BS5 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
DS1 DS2
MODE SET RETURN TEST RESET
(1) Microcomputer normal monitor

(4) Local setting switch
Connection terminal for transmission use
F1 F2 F1 F2 Q1 Q2
Indoor Outdoor
Outdoor Outdoor Multi outdoor
(1) Microcomputer normal monitor

This monitor blinks while in normal operation, and turns on or off when a malfunction occurs.
(2) Set mode display (LED)

LEDs display mode according to the setting.
(3) Mode setting switch

Used to change mode.
(4) Local setting switch

Used to make field settings.
Test Operation 146

Field Setting Si34-804_A
3. Field Setting
3.1 Field Setting from Remote Controller
Individual function of indoor unit can be changed from the remote controller. At the time of
installation or after service inspection / repair, make the local setting in accordance with the
following description.
Wrong setting may cause malfunction.
(When optional accessory is mounted on the indoor unit, setting for the indoor unit may be
required to change. Refer to information in the option handbook.)
3.1.1 Wired Remote Controller <BRC1E61>
<Basic screen>
1 Press and hold Cancel button for
4 seconds or more .
Field setting menu is displayed.
2 Select Field setting list in the

field setting menu, and press
Menu/Enter button.
Field setting list screen is
displayed.
3 Highlight the mode, and select

desired Mode No. by using
(Up/Down) button.
<Field setting menu screen>
4 In the case of setting per indoor
unit during group control (When
Mode No. such as 20 , 21 ,
22 , 23 , 25 are selected),
highlight the unit No. and select
Indoor unit No. to be set by
using (Up/Down) button.
(In the case of group total setting,
this operation is not needed.)
In the case of individual setting
per indoor unit, current settings
are displayed. And, SECOND
Press Menu/Enter button. CODE NO. - means no
function.
<Field setting screen>
In the case of individual In the case of group total 5 Highlight SECOND CODE NO. of
setting per indoor unit setting the FIRST CODE NO. to be
changed, and select desired

SECOND CODE NO. by using
(Up/Down) button. Multiple
identical mode number settings
are available.
In the case of group total
setting, all of SECOND CODE
NO. which may be set are
SECOND CODE NO. displayed as . is
changed to SECOND CODE
FIRST CODE (SW) NO.
NO. to be set. And, SECOND
CODE NO. - means no
function.
Press Menu/Enter button.
147 Test Operation

Si34-804_A Field Setting
6 Press Menu/Enter button. Setting

<Setting confirmation screen>
confirmation screen is displayed.

7 Select Yes and press Menu/
Enter button. Setting details are
determined and field setting list
screen returns.
8 In the case of multiple setting

changes, repeat to .
9 After all setting changes are com-

pleted, press Cancel button
twice.
10 Backlight goes out, and
Connection under check
Please wait for a moment is
Setting confirmation
displayed for initialization. After
the initialization, the basic screen
returns.
CAUTION
When an optional accessory is installed on the indoor unit, settings of the indoor unit may be
changed. See the manual of the optional accessory.
For field setting details of the outdoor unit, see installation manual attached to the outdoor unit.
Test Operation 148

3.1.2 Wireless Remote Controller - Indoor Unit

BRC7C type
BRC7E type
BRC4C type
1. When in the normal mode, push the button for 4 seconds or more, and operation
then enters the field set mode.
2. Select the desired mode No. with the button.
3. Pushing the button, select the first code No.
4. Pushing the button, select the second code No.
5. Push the timer button and check the settings.
6. Push the button to return to the normal mode.
(Example)
When setting the filter sign time to Filter Dirtiness-High in all group unit setting, set the Mode
No. to 10, Mode setting No. to 0 and setting position No. to 02.
149 Test Operation

3.1.3 Simplified Remote Controller

BRC2A51
BRC2C51
1. Remove the upper part of remote controller.

2. When in the normal mode, press the [BS6] BUTTON () (field set), and the FIELD SET
MODE is entered.
3. Select the desired MODE No. with the [BS2] BUTTON () (temperature setting ) and the
[BS3] BUTTON () (temperature setting ).
4. During group control, when setting by each indoor unit (mode No. 20, 22, and 23 have been
selected), push the [BS8] () BUTTON (unit No.) and select the INDOOR UNIT NO. to be
set. (This operation is unnecessary when setting by group.)
5. Push the [BS9] BUTTON () (set A) and select FIRST CODE NO.
6. Push the [BS10] BUTTON () (set B) and select SECOND CODE NO.
7. Push the [BS7] BUTTON () (set/cancel) once and the present settings are SET.
8. Push the [BS6] BUTTON () (field set) to return to the NORMAL MODE.
9. (Example) If during group setting and the time to clean air filter is set to FILTER
CONTAMINATION - HEAVY, SET MODE NO. to 10, FIRST CODE NO. to 0, and
SECOND CODE NO. to 02.
Test Operation 150

3.1.4 Setting Contents and Code No. VRV Indoor unit

Mode First Second Code No.(Note 3) Details
No. Code Setting Contents
Note 2 No. 01 02 03 04 No.
Ultra Approx. Approx.
Filter contamination
heavy/light (Setting for long life 10,000 5,000
filter hrs. hrs.
display time to clean air
filter) Approx. Approx.
0 (Sets display time to clean Long life Light 2,500 Heavy 1,250 (1)
filter
air filter to half when there hrs. hrs.
is heavy filter
10 contamination.) Standard Approx. Approx.
(20) filter 200 hrs. 100 hrs.
Ultra long life
1 Long life filter type Long life filter filter (2)
Thermostat sensor in remote

2 Use No use (3)
controller
3 Display time to clean air filter calculation Display No display (4)

(Set when filter sign is not to be displayed.)
Completion of
11 7 Airflow adjustment OFF airflow Start of airflow (5)
(21) adjustment
adjustment
0 Optional accessories output selection (field Indoor unit turned Operation Malfunction (6)
selection of output for adaptor for wiring) ON by thermostat output output
ON/OFF input from outside (Set when ON/ External protection
1 Forced OFF ON/OFF control (7)
OFF is to be controlled from outside.) device input
VRV 12 2 Thermostat differential changeover 1C 0.5C (8)
system (Set when remote sensor is to be used.)
(22)
indoor 3 OFF by thermostat fan speed LL Set fan speed (9)
unit
settings 4 Automatic mode differential 01:0 02:1 03:2 04:3 05:4 06:5 07:6 08:7 (10)
5 Power failure automatic reset Not equipped Equipped (11)
6 Airflow When Cooling Thermostat is OFF LL airflow Preset airflow (12)
High air outlet velocity
0 (Set when installed in place with N H S (13)
ceiling higher than 2.7 m.)
1 Selection of airflow direction (Set when a F (4 directions) T (3 directions) W (2 directions) (14)

blocking pad kit has been installed.)
Airflow direction adjustment (Set at
13 3 installation of decoration panel.) Equipped Not equipped (15)
(23) Ceiling Soiling
4 Field set airflow position setting Draft prevention Standard (16)
prevention
5 Setting of the Static Pressure Standard High static (17)

Selection pressure
01:30 02:50 03:60 04:70 05:80 06:90 07:100 08:110
6 External Static Pressure Settings (18)
09:120 10:130 11:140 12:150 13:160 14:180 15:200 *7
1 Thermostat OFF excess humidity Not equipped Equipped (19)
Direct duct connection
(when the indoor unit and heat
2 Not equipped Equipped (20)
15 reclaim ventilation unit are
(25) connected by duct directly.) Note 6
3 Drain pump humidifier interlock selection Not equipped Equipped (21)
Field set selection for individual
5 ventilation setting by remote controller Not equipped Equipped (22)
Notes : 1. Settings are made simultaneously for the entire group, however, if you select the mode No.
inside parentheses, you can also set by each individual unit. Setting changes however
cannot be checked except in the individual mode for those in parentheses.
2. The mode numbers inside parentheses cannot be used by wireless remote controllers, so
they cannot be set individually. Setting changes also cannot be checked.
3. Marked are factory setting.
4. Do not make settings other than those described above. Nothing is displayed for functions
the indoor unit is not equipped with.
5. 88 may be displayed to indicate the remote controller is resetting when returning to the
normal mode.
6. If the setting mode to Equipped, heat reclaim ventilation fan conducts the fan residual
operation by linking to indoor unit.
7. The FXMQ506380100125140PVE cannot be set to 30Pa.
The FXMQ20253240PVE cannot be set to 180 or 200Pa.
151 Test Operation

3.1.5 Applicable Range of Field Setting
Ceiling mounted Slim Ceiling Ceiling Ceiling Ceiling Wall Floor Concealed New Outdoor Details
cassette type Ceiling mounted Mounted mounted suspended mounted standing Floor Ceiling air No.
mounted built-in duct type duct type type type standing suspended processing
Round Double Corner duct type (Middle type type cassette unit
flow flow type type and high type
static
pressure)
FXMQ- FXMQ- FXMQ-
FXFQ FXCQ FXKQ FXDQ FXSQ P MA FXHQ FXAQ FXLQ FXNQ FXUQ MF
Filter sign { { { { { { { { { { { { { (1)
Ultra long life filter

sign { { (2)
Remote controller
thermostat sensor { { { { { { { { { { { { (3)
Set fan speed when { { { { { { { { { { { { (9) (12)

thermostat OFF
Airflow auto { (5)
adjustment
Airflow adjustment { { { (13)
Ceiling height
Airflow direction { { (14)
Airflow direction
adjustment
(Down flow { (15)
operation)
Airflow direction
adjustment range { { { (16)
Field set fan speed (17)

selection { {1 {1 { (18)
Discharge air temp.
(Cooling) { 3.1.72
1 Static pressure selection

2 Refer to 3.1.7 Outdoor Air Processing Unit-Field Setting (Remote Controller) on P.159.
Test Operation 152

3.1.6 Detailed Explanation of Setting Modes

(1) Filter Sign Setting
If switching the filter sign ON time, set as given in the table below.
Set Time
Filter Specs. Standard Long Life Ultra Long Life Filter
Setting
Contamination Light 200 hrs. 2,500 hrs. 10,000 hrs.
Contamination Heavy 100 hrs. 1,250 hrs. 5,000 hrs.
(2) Ultra Long Life Filter Sign Setting

When a Ultra long life filter is installed, the filter sign timer setting must be changed.
Setting Table
Mode No. First Code No. Second Code No. Setting
01 Long Life Filter
10 (20) 1
02 Ultra Long Life Filter
(3) Selection of Thermistor

Select the thermistor to control room temperature.
Mode No. First Code No. Second Code No. Thermistor that controls room temperature
Indoor air thermistor for remote controller
01 and suction air thermistor for indoor unit
10 (20) 2 02 Suction air thermistor for indoor unit
03 Thermistor for remote controller
The factory setting for the Second Code No. is "01" and room temperature is controlled by the
indoor unit suction air thermistor and remote controller thermistor.
When the Second Code No. is set to "02", room temperature is controlled by the suction air
thermistor.
When the Second Code No. is set to "03", room temperature is controlled by the remote
controller thermistor.
(4) "Filter Cleaning" Displayed or Not Displayed

Whether or not to display "Filter Cleaning" after operation of certain duration can be selected.
Mode No. First Code No. Second Code No. "Filter Cleaning" display
01 Display
10 (20) 3
02 No display
153 Test Operation

(5) Airflow Adjustment (AUTO)

External Static Pressure Settings
Make settings in either method (a) or method (b) as explained below.
(a) Use the airflow auto adjustment function to make settings.
Airflow auto adjustment: The volume of blow-off air is automatically adjusted to the rated
quantity.
(b) Select External Static Pressure with Remote Controller Check that 01 (OFF) is set for the
SECOND CODE NO. in MODE NO. 21 for airflow adjustment on an indoor unit basis in
Table 4. The SECOND CODE NO. is set to 01 (OFF) at factory setting. Change the
SECOND CODE NO. as shown in Table according to the external static pressure of the
duct to be connected.
Mode No. First Code No. Second Code No. Airflow adjustment
01 OFF
11 (21) 7 02 Completion of airflow adjustment
03 Start of airflow adjustment
(6) Optional Output Switching

Using this setting, "operation output signal" and "abnormal output signal" can be provided.
Output signal is output between terminals K1 and K2 of "customized wiring adaptor," an optional
accessory.
Mode No. First Code No. Second Code No. Remarks
Indoor unit thermostat ON/OFF signal is
01 provided.
Output linked with "Start/Stop" of remote
03
12 (22) 0 controller is provided.
In case of "Malfunction Display" appears
04 on the remote controller, output is
provided.
(7) External ON/OFF Input

This input is used for "ON/OFF operation" and "Protection device input" from the outside. The
input is performed from the T1-T2 terminal of the operation terminal block (X1A) in the electric
component box.
F2 T1 T2
Forced stop
Input A
Setting Table
First Code Second
Mode No. Operation by input of the signal A
No. Code No.
ON: Forced stop (prohibition of using the remote
01 controller)
OFF: Permission of using the remote controller
OFF ON: Permission of operation
12 (22) 1 02 ON OFF: Stop
ON: Operation
03 OFF: The system stops, then the applicable unit
indicates "A0". The other indoor units indicate "U9".
Test Operation 154

(8) Thermostat Switching

Differential value during thermostat ON/OFF control can be changed. (For details, refer to "6.4
Thermostat Control while in Normal Operation" on page 122.)
Mode No. First Code No. Second Code No. Differential value
01 1C
12(22) 2
02 0.5C
(9) Airflow Setting when Heating Thermostat is OFF

This setting is used to set airflow when heating thermostat is OFF.
When thermostat OFF airflow volume up mode is used, careful consideration is required
before deciding installation location.
Mode No. First Code No. Second Code No. Contents
01 LL airflow
12 (22) 3
02 Preset airflow
(10) Setting of Operation Mode to "AUTO"

This setting makes it possible to change differential values for mode selection while in automatic
operation mode.
Second Code No.
Mode No. First Code No.
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08
12 (22) 4 0C 1C 2C 3C 4C 5C 6C 7C
The automatic operation mode setting is made by the use of the "Operation Mode Selector"
button.
(11) Auto Restart after Power Failure Reset

For the air conditioners with no setting for the function (same as factory setting), the units will be
left in the stop condition when the power supply is reset automatically after power failure reset
or the main power supply is turned on again after once turned off. However, for the air
conditioners with the setting, the units may start automatically after power failure reset or the
main power supply turned on again (return to the same operation condition as that of before
power failure).
For the above reasons, when the unit is set enabling to utilize Auto restart function after power
failure reset, utmost care should be paid for the occurrence of the following situation.
Caution 1. The air conditioner starts operation suddenly after power failure reset or
the main power supply turned on again. Consequently, the user might be
surprised (with question for the reason why).
2. In the service work, for example, turning off the main power switch during
the unit is in operation, and turning on the switch again after the work is
completed start the unit operation (the fan rotates).
(12) Airflow when Cooling Thermostat is OFF

This is used to set airflow to "LL airflow" when cooling thermostat is OFF.
01 LL airflow
12 (22) 6
02 Preset airflow
155 Test Operation

(13) Setting of Normal Airflow

Make the following setting according to the ceiling height. The setting position No. is set to 01
at the factory.
In the Case of FXAQ
Second Code
Mode No. First Code No. Setting
No.
01 Wall mounted type: Standard
13(23) 0 02 Wall mounted type: Slight increase
03 Wall mounted type: Normal increase
In the Case of FXHQ

Second code
Mode No. First code No. Ceiling height (m)
No.
01 2.7 or less
13(23) 0
02 2.7-3.5
In the Case of FXFQ25~80 (All round outlet)

First Second
Mode code code Setting Ceiling height (m)
No. No. No.
Standard All
01 2.7
round outlet
13 (23) 0 02 High Ceiling (1) 2.7-3
03 Higher Ceiling (2) 3-3.5
In the Case of FXFQ100~125 (All round outlet)

First Second
Mode code code Setting Ceiling height (m)
No. No. No.
Standard All
01 3.2
round outlet
13 (23) 0 02 High Ceiling (1) 3.2-3.6
03 Higher Ceiling (2) 3.6-4.2
In the Case of FXFQ25~80 (*24-Way, 3-Way, 2-Way Outlets)

First Second Ceiling height
Mode code code Setting
No. 4-way Outlets 3-way Outlets 2-way Outlets
No. No.
01 Standard (N) Lower than 3.1 m Lower than 3.0 m Lower than 3.5 m
13 (23) 0 02 High Ceiling (H) Lower than 3.4 m Lower than 3.3 m Lower than 3.8 m
03 Higher Ceiling (S) Lower than 4.0 m Lower than 3.5 m
In the Case of FXFQ100~125 (*24-Way, 3-Way, 2-Way Outlets)

No. No.
*1 Mode No. setting is done in a batch for the group. To make or confirm settings for an
individual unit, set the internal mode number in parentheses.
*2 The figure of the ceiling height is for the all round outlet. For the settings for four-direction
(part of corner closed off), three-direction and two-direction outlets, see the installation
manual and technical guide supplied with the separately sold closure material kit.
Test Operation 156

In the Case of FXUQ71~125

No. No.
(14) Airflow Direction Setting

Set the airflow direction of indoor units as given in the table below. (Set when optional air outlet
blocking pad has been installed.) The second code No. is factory setting to 01.
Setting Table
Second Code
Mode No. First Code No. Setting
No.
01 F : 4-direction airflow
13 (23) 1 02 T : 3-direction airflow
03 W : 2-direction airflow
(15) Operation of Downward Flow Flap: Yes/No

Only the model FXKQ has the function.
When only the front-flow is used, sets yes/no of the swing flap operation of down-flow.
Setting Table
01 Down-flow operation: Yes
13 (23) 3
02 Down-flow operation: No
(16) Setting of Airflow Direction Adjustment Range

Make the following airflow direction setting according to the respective purpose.
Setting Table
Upward (Draft
01 prevention)
13 (23) 4 02 Standard
Downward (Ceiling
03 soiling prevention)
Some indoor unit models are not equipped with draft prevention (upward) function.
(17) Setting of the Static Pressure Selection

In the Case of FXDQ20~32PB, FXDQ40~63NB
Model No. First Code No. Second Code No. External static pressure
01 Standard (10Pa)
13 (23) 5
02 High static pressure (30Pa)
157 Test Operation

(18) External Static Pressure Settings (for FXMQ-P model)

Mode No. First Code No. Second Code No. External Static Pressure
01 30Pa (*1)
02 50Pa
03 60Pa
04 70Pa
05 80Pa
06 90Pa
07 100Pa
13 (23) 06 08 110Pa
09 120Pa
10 130Pa
11 140Pa
12 150Pa
13 160Pa
14 180Pa (*2)
15 200Pa (*2)
The SECOND CODE NO. is set to 07 (an external static pressure of 100 Pa) at factory set.
*1 The FXMQ50 63 80 100 125 140PVE cannot be set to 30 Pa.
*2 The FXMQ20 25 32 40PVE cannot be set to 180 or 200 Pa.
(19) Humidification when Heating Thermostat is OFF

Setting to "Humidification Setting" turns ON the humidifier if suction temperature is 20C or
above and turns OFF the humidifier if suction temperature is 18C or below when the heating
thermostat is OFF.
01
15 (25) 1
02 Setting of humidifier
(20) Setting of Direct Duct Connection

This is used when "fresh air intake kit equipped with fan" is connected. The indoor fan carries
out residual operation for one minute after the thermostat is stopped. (For the purpose of
preventing dust on the air filter from falling off.)
Without direct duct
01 connection
15 (25) 2 With direct duct
02 connection equipped
with fan
(21) Interlocked Operation between Humidifier and Drain Pump

This is used to interlock the humidifier with the drain pump. When water is drained out of the
unit, this setting is unnecessary.
Individual operation of
01 humidifier
15 (25) 3 Interlocked operation
02 between humidifier and
drain pump
Test Operation 158

(22) Individual Setting of Ventilation

This is set to perform individual operation of heat reclaim ventilation using the remote controller/
central unit when heat reclaim ventilation is built in.
(Switch only when heat reclaim ventilation is built in.)
01
15 (25) 5 Individual operation of
02 ventilation
3.1.7 Outdoor Air Processing Unit-Field Setting (Remote Controller)
Mode First Setting Second Code No.

Code
No. No. contents 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15
0 Stain of filter 2500hr 1250hr
10 Filtering
(20) No
3 time Display
display
cumulation
External Forced ON-OFF
1 ON/OFF
stop control
input
12
(22) Power
failure Not
5 Equipped
automatic equipped
reset
Discharge
14 3 temperature 13C 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 25 25
(24) (cooling)
Note) Bold face in indicates the default setting.
159 Test Operation

3.1.8 Centralized Control Group No. Setting

BRC1E Type In order to conduct the centralized remote control using the centralized remote controller and
the unified ON/OFF controller, Group No. settings should be made by group using the operating
remote controller.
Make Group No. settings for centralized remote control using the operating remote controller.
(1) <Basic screen>
1. Press and hold Cancel button for 4 seconds or more.
Field setting menu in displayed.
(2) <Field setting menu screen>

2. Select Group No. settingin the field setting menu, and press
Menu/Enter button.
Group No. setting screen is displayed.
(3) <Group No. setting>

3. Select Group No. setting (Group), and press Menu/Enter
button.
Group No. setting (Group) screen is displayed.
(3) <Group No. setting (Group)>

4. Select the group No. by using ST (Up/Down) button.
Note:
For wireless remote controller, see the following.
For setting group No. of HRV and wiring adaptor for other air conditioners, etc., refer to the
instruction manual attached.
NOTICE
Enter the group No. and installation place of the indoor unit into the attached installation table.
Be sure to keep the installation table with the operation manual for maintenance.
Test Operation 160

BRC7C Type Group No. setting by wireless remote controller for centralized control
BRC7E Type 1. When in the normal mode, push button for 4 seconds or more, and operation then
BRC4C Type enters the field set mode.
2. Set mode No. 00 with button.
3. Set the group No. for each group with button (advance/backward).
4. Enter the selected group numbers by pushing button.
5. Push button and return to the normal mode.
Group No. Setting

Example
Centralized Remote
Controller
Indoor/Outdoor Outdoor/Outdoor Indoor/Outdoor Outdoor/Outdoor
F1 F2
F1 F2 F1 F2 F1 F2 F1 F2
F1 F2 P1 P2 F1 F2 P1 P2 F1 F2 P1 P2 F1 F2 P1 P2
RC
Group Control by Remote Controller
1-00 Main RC RC Sub RC
(automatic unit address)
1-01 1-02
F1 F2 P1 P2 F1 F2 P1 P2 F1 F2 P1 P2 F1 F2 P1 P2
No Remote Controller
RC
1-03
1-04
Caution When turning the power supply on, the unit may often not accept any operation while "88" is
displaying after all indications were displayed once for about 1 minute on the liquid crystal
display. This is not an operative fault.
161 Test Operation

3.1.9 Setting of Operation Control Mode from Remote Controller

(Local Setting)
The operation control mode is compatible with a variety of controls and operations by limiting
the functions of the operation remote controller. Furthermore, operations such as remote
controller ON/OFF can be limited in accordance with the combination conditions. (Refer to
information in the next page.)
Centralized remote controller is normally available for operations. (Except when centralized
monitor is connected)
3.1.10 Contents of Control Modes

Twenty modes consisting of combinations of the following five operation modes with
temperature and operation mode setting by remote controller can be set and displayed by
operation modes 0 through 19.
ON/OFF control impossible by remote controller
Used when you want to turn on/off by centralized remote controller only.
(Cannot be turned on/off by remote controller.)
OFF control only possible by remote controller
Used when you want to turn on by centralized remote controller only, and off by remote
controller only.
Centralized
Used when you want to turn on by centralized remote controller only, and turn on/off freely
by remote controller during set time.
Individual
Used when you want to turn on/off by both centralized remote controller and remote
controller.
Timer operation possible by remote controller
Used when you want to turn on/off by remote controller during set time and you do not want
to start operation by centralized remote controller when time of system start is programmed.
Test Operation 162

How to Select Whether operation by remote controller will be possible or not for turning on/off, controlling
Operation Mode temperature or setting operation mode is selected and decided by the operation mode given on
the right edge of the table below.
Example
ON by remote OFF by remote
Temperature Operation mode Control
controller controller OFF by control by setting by mode is "1."
(Unified ON by (Unified OFF by remote remote controller remote controller
centralized remote centralized remote controller
controller) controller)

Rejection Rejection Rejection Acceptance Acceptance
Control by remote controller

Operation
Unified operation,
Control mode Unified OFF,
individual operation individual stop by Temperature Operation Control mode
by centralized remote OFF
centralized remote control mode setting
controller, or controller, or timer
operation controlled stop
by timer
Acceptance 0
Rejection
ON/OFF control Rejection 10
Rejection
impossible by (Example) Acceptance
remote controller Acceptance 1(Example)
(Example)
(Example)
Rejection (Example) Rejection 11
Acceptance 2
Rejection
OFF control only Rejection (Example) Rejection 12
possible by
remote controller Acceptance 3
Acceptance
Rejection 13
Acceptance 4
Rejection
Rejection 14
Centralized
Acceptance 5
Acceptance
Rejection 15
Acceptance Acceptance
Acceptance 6
Rejection
Rejection 16
Individual Acceptance
Acceptance 7 1
Acceptance
Rejection 17
Acceptance 8
Rejection
Timer operation Acceptance Acceptance Rejection 18
possible by (During timer at ON (During timer at ON
remote controller position only) position only) Acceptance 9
Acceptance
Rejection 19
Do not select timer operation possible by remote controller if not using a remote controller.
Operation by timer is impossible in this case.
1. Factory setting
163 Test Operation

3.2 Field Setting from Outdoor Unit

3.2.1 Field Setting from Outdoor Unit
List of Field Setting Items
This following section indicates the list of field setting items. For the lists of dip switch contents,
Setting mode 1, and Setting mode 2, refer to information in tables shown on the following page
onward.
For setting items of (*1), refer to detailed information provided on page 176 onward.
Setting item Content and objective of setting Overview of setting procedure
A. Use external input to step down the upper Use the "External control adaptor for
limit of the fan (factory setting to Step 8), outdoor unit".
providing low noise level. Set to "External control adaptor for outdoor
(1) Mode 1: Step 6 or lower unit" with No. 12 of "Setting mode 2" and
(2) Mode 2: Step 5 or lower select the mode with No. 25.
(3) Mode 3: Step 4 or lower If necessary, set the "Capacity priority
setting" to ON with No. 29.
Setting of low noise B. The low noise operation aforementioned is
1 enabled in nighttime automatic low noise Make this setting while in "Setting mode 2".
operation (*1)
operation mode. Select a mode with No. 22 of "Setting mode
Start time: Possible to select in the range of 2".
20:00 to 24:00 hours. Select the start time with No. 26 and the
End time: Possible to select in the range of end time with No. 27.
06:00 to 08:00 hours. If necessary, set the "Capacity priority
(Use the said time as a guide since the setting" to ON with No. 29.
Function setting
start time and the end time are estimated

according to outdoor temperatures.)
Used to place limits on the compressor For setting with the use of "external control
operating frequency to control the upper adaptor":
limit of power consumption. Set the system to "External control adaptor
(1) Mode 1 of Demand 1: 60% or less of for outdoor unit" with No. 12 of Setting
Setting of demand rating mode 2" and select the mode with No. 30.
2 operation (*1) (2) Mode 2 of Demand 1: 70% or less of
rating For setting only in "Setting mode 2":
(3) Mode 3 of Demand 1: 80% or less of Set the system to Normal demand mode
rating with No. 32 of "Setting mode 2" and select
(4) Demand 2: 40% or less of rating the mode with No. 30.
Setting of AIRNET Used to make address setting with Set the AIRNET to an intended address
3 AIRNET connected. using binary numbers with No. 13 of
address "Setting mode 2".
Make this setting to operate a system with
diffuser duct while in high static pressure
Setting of high mode. (Use this setting mode when shields Set No. 18 of "Setting mode 2" to ON.
4 static pressure are installed on upper floors or balconies.)
* In order to mount the diffuser duct, remove
the cover from the outdoor unit fan.
Test Operation 164

Setting item Content and objective of setting Overview of setting procedure

Indoor unit fan
forced H operation Used to operate the indoor unit in the Set No. 5 of "Setting mode 2" to indoor unit
1 stopped state in forced H operation mode. forced fan H.
Indoor unit forced Used to operate the indoor unit in forced Set No. 6 of "Setting mode 2" to indoor unit
2 operation operation mode. forced operation mode.
Change of targeted In cooling operation, used to change the
evaporating Select high side or low side with No. 8 of
3 targeted evaporating temperature for
temperature "Setting mode 2".
compressor capacity control.
(in cooling)
Setting of Used to start units not in sequence but
4 Set No. 11 of "Setting mode 2" to NONE.
sequential startup simultaneously.
If the compressor has a failure, used to Make this setting while in "Setting mode 2".
prohibit the operation of compressor(s) For system with a single outdoor unit: Set
Emergency concerned or outdoor unit(s) concerned
5 with No. 19 or 42.
operation (*1) and to conduct emergency operation of the For system with multiple outdoor units: Set
system only with operable compressor(s) with No. 38, 39, or 40.
or outdoor unit(s).
If a necessary amount of refrigerant cannot
Additional
Service setting
be charged due to the stop of outdoor unit, Set No. 20 of "Setting mode 2" to ON and
6 refrigerant operate the outdoor unit and then refill then charge refrigerant.
charging (*1) refrigerant.
Used to recover refrigerant on site.
Refrigerant With operations of indoor and outdoor units
7 Set No. 21 of "Setting mode 2" to ON.
recovery mode (*1) prohibited, fully open the expansion valve
of the indoor and outdoor units.
Used to conduct vacuuming on site.
Fully open the expansion valves of the
Vacuuming mode
8 indoor and outdoor units, and energize part Set No. 21 of "Setting mode 2" to ON.
(*1) of solenoid valves. Use a vacuum pump to
conduct vacuuming.
Used to forcedly turn ON the ENECUT.
ENECUT test (Be noted this mode is not functional with
9 Set No. 24 of "Setting mode 2" to ON.
operation the indoor unit remote controller turned
ON.)
Used for the troubleshooting of DC
compressors.
Power transistor
10 Inverter waveform output makes it possible Set No. 28 of "Setting mode 2" to ON.
check mode to judge whether a malfunction results from
the compressor or the PCB.
In order to replace the PCB by a spare one, For this setting, set the DS2-2, -3, and-4
Setting of model
11 switches on the PCB to the model
with spare PCB be sure to make model setting. concerned.
165 Test Operation

Setting by Dip Switches

Using dip switches on the PCB enables field setting shown below. However, make no changes
of factory settings except for DS1-1.
Dip switch
Setting item Description
No. Setting
ON
Cool / Heat select Used to set cool / heat select by Cool/Heat selector
DS1-1
OFF (Factory setting) equipped with outdoor unit.
DS1-2 ON
Not used Do not change the factory settings.
~DS1-4 OFF (Factory setting)
DS2-1 ON
Not used Do not change the factory settings.
~4 OFF (Factory setting)
Setting at replacement by spare PCB
Caution Dip switch setting after changing the main PCB (A1P) to spare parts PCB
After the replacement by the spare PCB, be sure to make settings shown below.
When you change the main PCB (A1P) to spare parts PCB, please carry out the following setting.
ON ON
Initial conditions of dip switches OFF OFF
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
DS1 DS2
Dip Switch Detail

DS No. Item Contents
DS1-1 Cool/Heat change ON Do not set.
over setting
OFF (Factory Do not set.
setting of spare
PCB)
DS1-2 Power supply ON 200V class (220V)
specification
OFF (Factory 400V class (380V)
setting of spare
PCB)
DS1-3 Cooling Only/Heat ON Cooling Only setting
Pump setting
OFF (Factory Heat Pump setting
setting of spare
PCB)
DS1-4 Unit allocation ON Make the following settings according to allocation of
DS2-1 setting unit. (All models are set to OFF at factory.)
OFF (Factory Domestic Overseas

Europe
setting of spare Japan General
PCB) DS1-4 OFF OFF ON
DS2-1 OFF ON OFF
DS2-2 Model setting Make the following settings according to models of outdoor units.
(All models are set to OFF at factory.)
RXQ5PA RXQ8PA RXQ10PA RXQ12PA RXQ14PA RXQ16PA RXQ18PA
DS2-3
DS2-2 OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON
DS2-3 OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON
DS2-4 DS2-4 OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON
If the DS1-1~1-4, DS2-2~2-4 setting has not been carried out, error code UA are displayed
and unit can not be operated.
Refer DS1-1~4, DS2-1~4 setting detail on next page.
Test Operation 166

Detail of DS1-1~4, DS2-1~4 setting (for Overseas general)

Unit Setting method ( represents the position of switches)
Cooling Only(5HP) Set DS2-1 to ON.

RXQ5PAY1
Cooling Only(8HP) Set DS2-1 and DS2-3 to ON.

RXQ8PAY1
Cooling Only(10HP) Set DS2-1, DS2-2 and DS2-3

RXQ10PAY1 to ON.
Cooling Only(12HP) Set DS2-1 and DS2-4 to ON.

RXQ12PAY1

RXQ14PAY1 to ON.

RXQ16PAY1 to ON.
Cooling Only(18HP) Set DS2-1, DS2-2, DS2-3, and DS2-4

RXQ18PAY1 to ON.
167 Test Operation

Setting by push button switches

The following settings are made by push button switches on PCB.
In case of multi-outdoor unit system, various items should be set with the master unit.
(Setting with the slave unit is disabled.)
The master unit and slave unit can be discriminated with the LED display as shown below.
LED display COOL/HEAT select Low Demand Multi;
MODE TEST
H1P IND MASTER SLAVE noise
H2P
H3P H4P H5P H6P H7P H8P
Single-outdoor-unit
system h h k h h h h h
Master h h k h h h h k
Outdoor-
multi Slave 1 h h h h h h h l
system
Slave 2 h h h h h h h h
(Factory setting)
BS1 BS2 BS3 BS4 BS5
MODE SET RETURN TEST RESET
There are the following three setting modes.

c Setting mode 1 (H1P off)
Initial status (when normal) : Used to select the cool/heat setting. Also indicates during
abnormal, low noise control and demand control.
d Setting mode 2 (H1P on)
Used to modify the operating status and to set program addresses, etc. Usually used in
servicing the system.
e Monitor mode (H1P blinks)
Used to check the program made in Setting mode 2.
Mode changing procedure 1
Using the MODE button, the modes can be changed as follows.
Push and hold the BS1 (Normal) Push the BS1(MODE button)
(MODE button) for 5 seconds. one time.
Setting mode 2 Setting mode 1 Monitor mode
MODE Push the BS1(MODE button) one time. MODE MODE
On Off Blinking
H1P H1P H1P
Mode changing procedure 2

(Set): Select mode with BS2 (SET button) in each selection step.
Press BS1 (MODE button) for more than 5 sec. Setting mode 1 Press BS1(MODE button) one time.
(Initial condition)
Setting mode 2 Monitor mode
Setting item selection Check item selection

(Set) (Set)
Press BS3 Press BS3
(RETURN button) (RETURN button)
one time. one time.
Setting condition
Contents display
selection (Set)
Press BS3 Press BS3
(RETURN button) (RETURN button)
one time. one time.
Setting condition
(Contents) display
Press BS3
(RETURN button)
one time. Press BS1
(MODE button)
one time.
Press BS1
(MODE button)
one time.
Test Operation 168

a. Setting mode 1
This mode is used to set and check the following items.
1. Check items The following items can be checked.
(1) Current operating conditions (Normal / Abnormal / In check operation)
(2) Setting conditions of COOL/HEAT selection (Individual / Batch master / Batch slave)
(3) Low noise operating conditions (In normal operation / In low noise operation)
(4) Demand operating conditions (In normal operation / In demand operation)
Procedure for checking check items
The system is normally set to "Setting

mode 1".
Should the system be set to any
COOL/HEAT select Low
mode other than that, push the MODE TEST Demand
MODE (BS1) button to set the IND MASTER SLAVE noise
H1P H2P H7P
H3P H4P H5P H6P
system to "Setting mode 1".
h h k h h h h
Current operating conditions

hNormal kAbnormal
lIn preparation or in check
operation
Check the system for each condition
Setting of COOL/HEAT selection
through LED displays. (Refer to
khh By individual outdoor unit
information in table on the right.)
hkh In a batch of outdoor unit
group with master unit
hhk In a batch of outdoor unit
group with slave unit
Low noise operating conditions
hIn normal operation
Pushing the RETURN (BS3) button
will bring the system to the initial kIn low noise operation
state of "Setting mode 1". Demand operating conditions
hIn normal operation
(V2763) kIn demand operation
169 Test Operation

No. Setting item Description

b. Setting mode 2
Digital pressure Used to make setting of contents to display on the digital
0 gauge kit display pressure gauges (e.g. pressure sensors and temperature
Push and hold the MODE (BS1) sensors)
button for 5 seconds and set to Cool/Heat unified
Setting mode 2. 1 address Sets address for cool/heat unified operation.
2 Low noise/demand Address for low noise/demand operation

address
Test operation Used to conduct test operation without making changes
3 settings to the PCB and replacing the refrigerant, after the
completion of maintenance.
<Selection of setting items> Indoor unit forced Allows forced operation of indoor unit fan while unit is
5 fan H stopped. (H tap)
Push the SET (BS2) button and set
the LED display to a setting item 6 Indoor unit forced Allows forced operation of indoor unit.
shown in the table on the right. operation
8 Te setting Target evaporation temperature for cooling
Push the RETURN (BS3) button and
11 Sequential Sets sequential operation
decide the item. (The present setting operation setting (Factory setting to ON)
condition is blinked.)
External low noise
12 setting / Demand Reception of external low noise or demand signal
setting
13 AIRNET address Set address for AIRNET.
Make this setting in the case of operating in high static
18 High static pressure pressure mode with diffuser duct mounted.
setting (In order to mount the diffuser duct, remove the cover
from the outdoor unit fan.)
Emergency Used to operate system only with inverter compressor
<Selection of setting conditions> when STD compressor malfunctions. This is a temporary
operation operation extremely impairing comfortable environment.
Push the SET (BS2) button and set 19 (STD compressor Therefore, prompt replacement of the compressor is
to the setting condition you want. operation required.
prohibited) (This operation, however, is not set with RXQ5, 8PA.)
decide the condition. Additional
20 refrigerant charge Carries out additional refrigerant charge operation.
operation setting
Refrigerant recovery/
21 vacuuming mode Sets to refrigerant recovery or vacuuming mode.
setting
Sets automatic nighttime low noise operation in a simple
22 Night-time low way.
noise setting The operating time is based on Starting set and Ending
set.
ENECUT test Used to forcedly turn ON the ENECUT. (Be noted that the
set to the initial status of Setting 24 ENECUT is only functional with outdoor unit in the
mode 2. operation stopped state - Japanese domestic model only.)
25 Setting of external Sets low noise level when the low noise signal is input
low noise level from outside.
If you become unsure of how to Night-time low Sets starting time of nighttime low noise operation.
proceed, push the MODE (BS1) 26 noise operation (Night-time low noise setting is also required.)
button and return to setting mode 1.
start setting
Night-time low Sets ending time of nighttime low noise operation.
27 noise operation end (Night-time low noise setting is also required.)
setting
Power transistor Used for trouble diagnosis of DC compressor. Since the
check mode waveform of inverter is output without wiring to the
28 Check after compressor, it is convenient to probe whether the trouble
disconnection of comes from the compressor or PCB.
compressor wires
Capacity If the capacity control is required, the low noise control is
29 precedence setting automatically released by this setting during carrying out
low noise operation and nighttime low noise operation.
30 Demand setting 1 Changes target value of power consumption when
demand control 1 is input.
Normal demand Normally enables demand control 1 without external
32 setting input. (Effective to prevent a problem that circuit breaker
of small capacity is shut down due to large load.)
Test Operation 170

No. Setting item Description

Emergency
operation
(Setting for the
master unit
38 operation
prohibition in multi-
outdoor-unit
system)
Emergency
operation Used to temporarily prohibit the applicable outdoor unit
(Setting for the from operating should there be any faulty part in multi-
slave unit 1
39 outdoor-unit system. Since the comfortable environment
operation is extremely impaired, prompt replacement of the part is
prohibition in multi- required.
outdoor-unit
system)
Emergency
operation
(Setting for the
slave unit 2
40 operation
outdoor-unit
system)
If the INV. compressor has a failure, used to run the
system only with STD compressor(s). This is a temporary
Emergency running of the system until the compressor is replaced,
operation thus making comfort extremely worse. Therefore, it is
42 (prohibition of INV. recommended to replace the compressor as soon as
compressor possible.
operation) (Be noted this setting is not available on model RXQ5,
8PAY1.)
171 Test Operation

Setting item display

No. C/H selection Low Setting condition display
MODE TEST Demand
Setting item H1P H2P IND Master Slave noise H7P
H3P H4P H5P H6P Factory setting
Address 0 khhhhhh
Binary number 1 khhhhhk
0 Digital pressure
gauge kit display k h h h h h h
(4 digits) ~
15 khhkkkk
Address 0 khhhhhh
1
Cool / Heat
k h h h h h k
Unified address (6 digits) ~
31 khkkkkk
Address 0 khhhhhh
2
Low noise/demand
k h h h h k h
address (6 digits) ~
31 khkkkkk
3 Test operation
k h h h h k k
Test operation: OFF khhhhhk
settings Test operation: ON khhhhkh
5 Indoor unit forced
k h h h k h k
Normal operation khhhhhk
fan H Indoor forced fan H khhhhkh
6
Indoor unit forced
k h h h k k h
operation Indoor forced operation khhhhkh
Low (Level L) khhhhhk
Normal (Level M) khhhhkh
High khhhhkk
8 Te setting k h h k h h h High khhhkhh
High (Level H) khhhkhk
High khhhkkh
High khhhkkk
Sequential operation
11 setting k h h k h k k
OFF khhhhhk
ON khhhhkh
External low noise
External low noise/demand:
NO khhhhhk
12 setting/Demand k h h k k h h
setting External low noise/demand:
YES
khhhhkh
Address 0 khhhhhh
13 AIRNET address k h h k k h k
(6 digits) ~
63 kkkkkkk
High static pressure setting:
OFF khhhhhk
18 High static pressure
setting k h k h h k h High static pressure setting:
ON
khhhhkh
Emergency OFF khhhhhh
operation
19 (STD compressor is k h k h h k k STD 1, 2 operation: Inhibited khhhhhk
prohibited.) STD 2 operation: Inhibited khhhhkh
Additional refrigerant
20 charging operation k h k h k h h
Refrigerant charging: OFF khhhhhk
setting Refrigerant charging: ON khhhhkh
Refrigerant
21 recovery/Vacuuming k h k h k h k
Refrigerant recovery / vacuuming: OFF khhhhhk
mode setting Refrigerant recovery / vacuuming: ON khhhhkh
Test Operation 172

Setting item display

No. C/H selection Low Setting condition display
MODE TEST Demand
Setting item H1P H2P IND Master Slave noise H7P
H3P H4P H5P H6P Factory setting
OFF khhhhhh
22 Night-time low noise k h k h k k h
Level 1 (outdoor fan with 6 step or lower) khhhhhk
setting Level 2 (outdoor fan with 5 step or lower) khhhhkh
Level 3 (outdoor fan with 4 step or lower) khhhhkk
ENECUT test
24 operation (Domestic k h k k h h h
ENECUT output OFF khhhhhk
Japan only) ENECUT output forced ON khhhhkh
Level 1 (outdoor fan with 6 step or lower) khhhhhk
Setting of external
25 low noise setting k h k k h h k Level 2 (outdoor fan with 5 step or lower) khhhhkh
Level 3 (outdoor fan with 4 step or lower) khhhkhh
Night-time low noise
About 20:00 khhhhhk
26 operation start k h k k h k h About 22:00 (factory setting) khhhhkh
setting
About 24:00 khhhkhh
Night-time low noise
About 6:00 khhhhhk
27 operation end k h k k h k k About 7:00 khhhhkh
setting
About 8:00 (factory setting) khhhkhh
28 Power transistor k h k k k h h
OFF khhhhhk
check mode ON khhhhkh
Capacity
29 precedence setting k h k k k h k
OFF khhhhhk
ON khhhhkh
60 % demand khhhhhk
30 Demand setting 1 k h k k k k h 70 % demand khhhhkh
80 % demand khhhkhh
Normal demand
32 setting k k h h h h h
OFF khhhhhk
ON khhhhkh
Emergency operation
(Setting for the master
OFF khhhhhk
38 unit operation k k h h k k h
outdoor-unit-system) Master unit operation: Inhibited khhhhkh
Emergency operation
(Setting for the slave
OFF khhhhhk
39 unit 1 operation k k h h k k k
outdoor-unit system) Slave unit 1 operation: Inhibited khhhhkh
Emergency operation
(Setting for the slave
OFF khhhhhk
40 unit 2 operation k k h k h h h
outdoor-unit system) Slave unit 2 operation: Inhibited khhhhkh
Emergency
operation
42 (prohibition of INV. k k h k h k h Emergency operation
compressor
operation) (prohibition of INV. compressor khhhhkh
operation)
173 Test Operation

c. Monitor mode No. Setting item

LED display
Data display
To enter the monitor mode, push the 0 Various settings l h h h h h h Lower 4 digits
MODE (BS1) button when in
Setting mode 1. 1 C/H unified address l h h h h h k
2 Low noise/demand address l h h h h k h
3 Not used l h h h h k k
4 AIRNET address l h h h k h h
Lower 6 digits
5 Number of connected indoor units
*1 l h h h k h k
<Selection of setting item> 6 Number of connected BS units *2 l h h h k k h
the LED display to a setting item. 7
Number of connected zone units
(Fixed to "0") l h h h k k k
8 Number of outdoor units *3 l h h k h h h
9 Number of BS units *4 l h h k h h k Lower 4 digits:
upper
10 Number of BS units *4 l h h k h k h Lower 4 digits:

lower
<Confirmation on setting contents>

11 Number of zone units l h h k h k k Lower 6 digits
Push the RETURN (BS3) button to

12 Number of terminal units *5 l h h k k h h Lower 4 digits:
upper
display different data of set items.
13 Number of terminal units *5 l h h k k h k Lower 4 digits:
lower
14 Contents of malfunction (the

latest) l h h k k k h Malfunction
code table
15
Contents of malfunction
(1 cycle before) l h h k k k k Refer to
P.202.
16
Contents of malfunction
(2 cycle before) l h k h h h h
20 Contents of retry (the latest) l h k h k h h
21 Contents of retry (1 cycle before) l h k h k h k
switches to the initial status of 22 Contents of retry (2 cycle before) l h k h k k h
Monitor mode.
25 Number of multi connection
outdoor units l h k k h h k Lower 6 digits
The numbers in the "No." column represent the number of times to press the
Push the MODE (BS1) button and SET (BS2) button.
returns to Setting mode 1.
*1: Number of connected indoor units
Used to make setting of the number of indoor units connected to an outdoor
unit.
*2: Number of connected BS units
Used to make setting of the number of BS units connected to an outdoor
unit.
*3: Number of outdoor units
Used to make setting of the number of outdoor units connected to DIII-NET
that is one of the communication lines.
*4: Number of BS units
Used to make setting of the number of BS units connected to DIII-NET that is
one of the communication lines.
*5: Number of terminal units
Used to make setting of the number of indoor units connected to DIII-NET
that is one of the communication lines.
(Only available for VRV indoor units)
Test Operation 174

Setting item 0 Display contents of Number of units for various settings

EMG operation / ON l h h k h h h
backup operation
setting OFF l h h h h h h
Te setting L l h h h h h h
M l h h h h l h
H ~ l h h h h k h
Tc setting L l h h h h h h
M l h h h h h l
H l h h h h h k
Data such as addresses and number of units is expressed as binary numbers; the two
ways of expressing are as follows:
The No. 1 cool/heat unified address is expressed as a binary

number consisting of the lower 6 digits. (0 - 63)
16 4 1
32 8 2
In c the address is 010110 (binary number), which translates to
16 + 4 + 2 = 22 (base 10 number). In other words, the address is
22.
The number of terminal blocks for No. 12 and 13 is expressed as

64 16
No.12 128 32 an 8-digit binary number, which is the combination of four upper,
and four lower digits for No. 12 and 13 respectively. (0 - 128)
In d the address for No. 12 is 0101, the address for No. 13 is
4 1 0110, and the combination of the two is 01010110 (binary
No.13 8 2 number), which translates to 64 + 16 + 4 + 2 = 86 (base 10
number). In other words, the number of terminal block is 86.
See the preceding page for a list of data, etc. for No. 0 - 25.
175 Test Operation

3.2.2 Setting of Low Noise Operation and Demand Operation

Setting of Low Noise Operation
By connecting the external contact input to the low noise input of the outdoor unit external
control adaptor (optional), you can lower operating noise by 2-3 dB.
Setting Content
Mode 1 Set the outdoor unit fan to Step 6 or lower.
A. When the low noise operation is carried out by external contact (with the use of the
external control adaptor for outdoor unit)
1. While in "Setting mode 2", set the setting condition for set item No. 12 (Setting of external
low noise/demand operation) to "YES".
2. If necessary, while in "Setting mode 2", select the setting condition (i.e., "Mode 1", "Mode 2",
or "Mode 3") for set item No. 25 (Setting of external low noise level).
3. If necessary, while in "Setting mode 2", set the setting condition for the set item No. 29
(Setting of capacity precedence) to "ON".
(If the condition is set to "ON", when the air conditioning load reaches a high level, the low
noise operation command will be ignored to put the system into normal operation mode.)
B. When the low noise operation is carried out automatically at night (The external
control adaptor for outdoor unit is not required)
1. While in "Setting mode 2", select the setting condition (i.e., "Mode 1", "Mode 2", or "Mode 3")
for set item No. 22 (Setting of nighttime low noise level).
2. If necessary, while in "Setting mode 2", select the setting condition (i.e., "20:00", "22:00", or
"24:00") for set item No. 26 (Setting of start time of nighttime low noise operation).
(Use the start time as a guide since it is estimated according to outdoor temperatures.)
3. If necessary, while in "Setting mode 2", select the setting condition (i.e., "06:00", "07:00", or
"08:00") for set item No. 27 (Setting of end time of nighttime low noise operation).
(Use the end time as a guide since it is estimated according to outdoor temperatures.)
4. If necessary, while in "Setting mode 2", set the setting condition for set item No. 29 (Setting
of capacity precedence) to "ON".
(If the condition is set to "ON", when the air conditioning load reaches a high level, the
system will be put into normal operation mode even during nighttime.)
Test Operation 176

Image of operation in the case of A
Image of operation in the case of B
Image of operation in the case of A and B
177 Test Operation

Setting of Demand Operation

By connecting the external contact input to the demand input of the outdoor unit external control
adaptor (optional), the power consumption of unit operation can be saved suppressing the
compressor operating condition.
Set item Condition Content

Demand 1 Mode 1 The compressor operates at approx. 60% or less of rating.
Demand 2 The compressor operates at approx. 40% or less of rating.
A. When the demand operation is carried out by external contact (with the use of the
external control adaptor for outdoor unit).
1. While in "Setting mode 2", set the setting condition for set item No. 12 (Setting of external
low noise/demand operation) to "YES".
2. If necessary, while in "Setting mode 2", select the set item No. 30 (Setting of Demand 1
level) and then set the setting condition to targeted mode.
B. When the normal demand operation is carried out. (Use of the external control
adaptor for outdoor unit is not required.)
1. While in "Setting mode 2", make setting of the set item No. 32 (Setting of alternate demand)
to "ON".
2. While in "Setting mode 2", select the set item No. 30 (Setting of Demand 1 level) and then
set the setting condition to targeted mode.
Test Operation 178

Image of operation in the case of A

Power consumption
Rated power consumption The power

consumption during
80 % of rated power consumption Demand level 1 instructing Demand level 2 instructing Demand level 3 instructing the demand level 1
70 % of rated power consumption instructing can be
60 % of rated power consumption set with the
Power consumption set by "Demand 1 level
40 % of rated power consumption "Demand 1 level setting". setting".
("70 % of rated
power consumption"
Forced thermostat OFF has been set at
(Fan operation) factory.)
Image of operation in the case of B

Power consumption When the "Normal
demand setting" is
set to ON ("OFF"
has been set at
Rated power consumption factory.) , the power
consumption can be
80 % of rated power consumption set with the
70 % of rated power consumption "Demand 1 level
60 % of rated power consumption setting". ("70 % of
The power consumption set with "Demand 1 level setting". rated power
consumption" has
been set at factory.)
Image of operation in the case of A and B

Power consumption The power
consumption can be
set with the
"Demand 1 level
Rated power consumption setting". ("70 % of
rated power
80 % of rated power consumption consumption" has
70 % of rated power consumption been set at factory.)
60 % of rated power consumption
The power consumption set with "Demand 1 level setting".
40 % of rated power consumption +Demand level 2 instructing +Demand level 3 instructing
+During continuous demand operation,
when the external demand instruction is
Forced thermostat OFF received repeatedly, the instruction with
(Fan operation) higher demand level has the precedence.
179 Test Operation

Detailed Setting Procedure of Low Noise Operation and Demand Control
1. Setting mode 1 (H1P off)

c In setting mode 2, push the BS1 (MODE button) one time. Setting mode 1 is entered and
H1P lights off.
During the setting mode 1 is displayed, In low noise operation and In demand control are
displayed.
2. Setting mode 2 (H1P on)

c In setting 1, push and hold the BS1 (MODE button) for more than 5 seconds. Setting
mode 2 is entered and H1P lights.
d Push the BS2 (SET button) several times and match the LED display with the Setting No.
you want.
e Push the BS3 (RETURN button) one time, and the present setting content is displayed.
Push the BS2 (SET button) several times and match the LED display with the setting
content (as shown below) you want.
f Push the BS3 (RETURN button) two times. Returns to c.
g Push the BS1 (MODE button) one time. Returns to the setting mode 1 and turns H1P off.
Test Operation 180

{: ON z: OFF l: Blink
c d e
Setting Setting Setting No. indication Setting No. indication Setting Setting contents indication (Initial setting)
No. contents contents
H1P H2P H3P H4P H5P H6P H7P H1P H2P H3P H4P H5P H6P H7P H1P H2P H3P H4P H5P H6P H7P
12 External NO
low noise / { z z z z z z { z z { { z z (Factory { z z z z z l
Demand setting)
setting
YES { z z z z l z
22 Night-time OFF
low noise { z { z { { z (Factory { z z z z z z
setting setting)
Mode 1 { z z z z z l
Mode 2 { z z z z l z
Mode 3 { z z z z l l
25 External { z { { z z { Mode 1 { z z z z z l
low noise
setting Mode 2
(Factory { z z z z l z
setting)
Mode 3 { z z z l z z
26 Night-time { z { { z { z PM 8:00 { z z z z z l
low noise
start setting PM 10:00
(Factory { z z z z l z
setting)
PM 0:00 { z z z l z z
27 Night-time { z { { z { { AM 6:00 { z z z z z l
low noise
end setting AM 7:00 { z z z z l z
AM 8:00
(Factory { z z z l z z
setting)
29 Capacity Low noise
precedence precedence
setting { z { { { z { (Factory { z z z z z l
setting)
Capacity
precedence { z z z z l z
30 Demand 60 % of
setting 1 { z { { { { z rated power { z z z z z l
consumption
70 % of
rated power
consumption { z z z z l z
(Factory
setting)
80 % of
rated power { z z z l z z
consumption
32 Normal OFF
demand { z z z z z z (Factory { z z z z z l
setting setting)
ON { z z z z l z
Setting mode indication section Setting No. indication section Set contents indication section
181 Test Operation

3.2.3 Setting of Refrigerant Recovery Mode

When carrying out the refrigerant collection on site, fully open the respective expansion valve of
indoor and outdoor units.
All indoor and outdoor units operation are prohibited.
[Operation procedure]
c In setting mode 2 with units in stop mode, set Refrigerant Recovery / Vacuuming mode to
ON. The respective expansion valve of indoor and outdoor units are fully opened. (H2P turns
to display TEST OPERATION (blinks), TEST OPERATION and UNDER CENTRALIZED
CONTROL are displayed on the remote controller, and the all indoor / outdoor unit
operation is prohibited.
After setting, do not cancel Setting Mode 2 until completion of refrigerant recovery
operation.
d Collect the refrigerant using a refrigerant recovery unit. (See the instruction attached to the
refrigerant recovery unit for more detail.)
e Press Mode button BS1 once and reset Setting Mode 2.
Test Operation 182

3.2.4 Setting of Vacuuming Mode

In order to perform vacuuming operation at site, fully open the expansion valves of indoor and
outdoor units and turn on some solenoid valves.
[Operating procedure]
c With Setting Mode 2 while the unit stops, set Refrigerant recovery / Vacuuming mode to
ON. The expansion valves of indoor and outdoor units fully open and some of solenoid
valves open.
(H2P blinks to indicate the test operation, and the remote controller displays "Test
Operation" and "Under centralized control", thus prohibiting operation.)
After setting, do not cancel Setting Mode 2 until completion of Vacuuming operation.
d Use the vacuum pump to perform vacuuming operation.
e Press Mode button BS1 once and reset Setting Mode 2.
3.2.5 Check Operation Detail

CHECK OPERATION FUNCTION
(Press the MODE button BS1 once and set to SETTING MODE 1 (H1P: OFF))
LED display (H1P~H7P) (k:ON h:OFF l:BLINK)
Unit stopping
hhkhhhh
Press the TEST button for 5 seconds.
Step 1 Pressure equalizing hlhhhhk
10 sec. to 10 minutes
Step 2 Cooling start control hlhhhkh

20 sec. to 2 minutes
Step 3 Stability waiting operation hlhhhkk
10 minutes
Step4~8 Judgement function
Stop valve close check
hlhhkhh
Wrong wiring check hlhhkhk
Correct Refrigerant charge check
Piping length check hlhhkkh
hlhhkkk
hlhkhhh
Step 9 Pump-down residual operation hlhkhhk
5 minutes
Step 10 Standby for restarting hlhkhkh

5 minutes
Completion
183 Test Operation

Si34-804_A
Part 6
Troubleshooting
1. Symptom-based Troubleshooting .......................................................187
2. Troubleshooting by Remote Controller ...............................................190
2.1 The INSPECTION / TEST Button.........................................................190
2.2 Self-diagnosis by Wired Remote Controller .........................................191
2.3 Self-diagnosis by Wireless Remote Controller .....................................192
2.4 Operation of the Remote Controllers Inspection /
Test Operation Button ..........................................................................195
2.5 Remote Controller Service Mode .........................................................196
2.6 Remote Controller Self-Diagnosis Function .........................................199
3. Troubleshooting by Indication on the Remote Controller ....................206
3.1 A0 Indoor Unit: Error of External Protection Device............................206
3.2 A1 Indoor Unit: PCB Defect ................................................................207
3.3 A3 Indoor Unit: Malfunction of Drain Level Control System (S1L) ......208
3.4 A6 Indoor Unit: Fan Motor (M1F) Lock, Overload...............................210
3.5 A7 Indoor Unit: Malfunction of Swing Flap Motor (M1S).....................214
3.6 A8Abnormal Power Supply Voltage....................................................216
Electronic Expansion Valve (Y1E)........................................................217
3.8 AF Indoor Unit: Drain Level above Limit .............................................219
3.9 AJ Indoor Unit: Malfunction of Capacity Determination Device ..........220
3.10 C1 Indoor Unit: Failure of Transmission
Heat Exchanger....................................................................................223
Gas Pipes.............................................................................................224
3.13 C6 Indoor Unit: Failure of Combination
3.14 C9 Indoor Unit: Malfunction of Thermistor (R1T) for Suction Air.........226
3.15 CC Indoor Unit: Malfunction of Humidity Sensor System ....................227
Remote Controller ................................................................................228
3.17 E1 Outdoor Unit: PCB Defect .............................................................229
3.18 E3 Outdoor Unit: Actuation of High Pressure Switch..........................230
3.19 E4 Outdoor Unit: Actuation of Low Pressure Sensor..........................232
3.20 E5 Outdoor Unit: Inverter Compressor Motor Lock.............................234
3.21 E6 Outdoor Unit: STD Compressor Motor Overcurrent/Lock..............236
3.22 E7 Outdoor Unit: Malfunction of Outdoor Unit Fan Motor ...................237
Electronic Expansion Valve (Y1E, Y2E)...............................................240
3.24 F3 Outdoor Unit: Abnormal Discharge Pipe Temperature..................242
3.25 F6 Outdoor Unit: Refrigerant Overcharged.........................................243
3.26 H7 Outdoor Unit: Abnormal Outdoor Fan Motor Signal ......................244
Outdoor Air ...........................................................................................245
Troubleshooting 184
Si34-804_A
3.28 J2 Outdoor Unit: Current Sensor Malfunction ....................................246

3.29 J3 Outdoor Unit: Malfunction of Discharge Pipe Thermistor
(R3, R31~33T) .....................................................................................247
3.30 J5 Outdoor Unit: Malfunction of Thermistor (R2T, R7T) for
Suction Pipe .........................................................................................248
Outdoor Unit Heat Exchanger ..............................................................249
3.32 J7 Outdoor Unit: Malfunction of Liquid Pipe Thermistor (R6T)...........250
3.33 J9 Outdoor Unit: Malfunction of
Subcooling Heat Exchanger Gas Pipe Thermistor (R5T).....................251
3.34 JA Outdoor Unit: Malfunction of High Pressure Sensor......................252
3.35 JC Outdoor Unit: Malfunction of Low Pressure Sensor ......................253
3.36 L4 Outdoor Unit: Malfunction of
Inverter Radiating Fin Temperature Rise .............................................254
3.37 L5 Outdoor Unit: Inverter Compressor Abnormal ...............................256
3.38 L8 Outdoor Unit: Inverter Current Abnormal.......................................258
3.39 L9 Outdoor Unit: Inverter Start up Error .............................................260
3.40 LC Outdoor Unit: Malfunction of Transmission Between
Inverter and Control PCB .....................................................................262
3.41 P1 Outdoor Unit: Inverter Over-Ripple Protection...............................265
3.42 P4 Outdoor Unit: Malfunction of Inverter Radiating
Fin Temperature Rise Sensor ..............................................................266
Main PCB or Faulty Combination of PCB.............................................268
3.44 U0 Outdoor Unit: Low Pressure Drop Due to
Refrigerant Shortage or Electronic Expansion Valve Failure ...............269
3.45 U1 Reverse Phase, Open Phase ........................................................270
Instantaneous Failure...........................................................................271
3.47 U3 Outdoor Unit: Check Operation not Executed ...............................274
3.48 U4 Malfunction of Transmission Between Indoor Units ......................275
Between Remote Controller and Indoor Unit........................................277
Between Outdoor Units ........................................................................278
Between Main and Sub Remote Controllers ........................................280
Indoor and Outdoor Units in the Same System....................................281
Indoor Units and Remote Controller.....................................................282
3.54 UC Address Duplication of Centralized Controller...............................284
Controller and Indoor Unit ....................................................................285
3.56 UF System is not Set yet.....................................................................288
3.57 UH Malfunction of System, Refrigerant System
Address Undefined...............................................................................289
4. Troubleshooting (OP: Centralized Remote Controller) .......................291
4.1 M1 PCB Defect ...................................................................................291
4.2 M8 Malfunction of Transmission Between Optional
Controllers for Centralized Control .......................................................292
185 Troubleshooting
Si34-804_A

4.4 MC Address Duplication, Improper Setting .........................................296
5. Troubleshooting (OP: Unified ON/OFF Controller) .............................299
5.1 Operation Lamp Blinks .........................................................................299
5.2 Display Under Centralized Control Blinks
(Repeats Single Blink)..........................................................................301
5.3 Display Under Centralized Control Blinks
(Repeats Double Blink) ........................................................................304
Troubleshooting 186
Symptom-based Troubleshooting Si34-804_A
1. Symptom-based Troubleshooting
Symptom Supposed Cause Countermeasure
1 The system does not start operation at all. Blowout of fuse(s) Turn Off the power supply and
then replace the fuse(s).
Cutout of breaker(s) If the knob of any breaker is in
its OFF position, turn ON the
power supply.
If the knob of any circuit
breaker is in its tripped position,
do not turn ON the power
supply.
ON
Knob
Tripped
OFF
Circuit breaker
Power failure After the power failure is reset,

restart the system.
2 The system starts operation but makes an Blocked air inlet or outlet of indoor Remove obstacle(s).
immediate stop. or outdoor unit
Clogged air filter(s) Clean the air filter(s).
3 The system does not cool air well. Blocked air inlet or outlet of indoor Remove obstacle(s).
or outdoor unit
Clogged air filter(s) Clean the air filter(s).
Enclosed outdoor unit(s) Remove the enclosure.
Improper set temperature Set the temperature to a proper
degree.
Airflow rate set to "LOW" Set it to a proper airflow rate.
Improper direction of air diffusion Set it to a proper direction.
Open window(s) or door(s) Shut it tightly.
[In cooling] Direct sunlight received Hang curtains or shades on
windows.
[In cooling] Too many persons staying in a
room
[In cooling] Too many heat sources (e.g. OA
equipment) located in a room
4 The system does The system stops and If the OPERATION lamp on the Normal operation. The system will
not operate. immediately restarts operation. remote controller turns ON, the automatically start operation after
Pressing the TEMP ADJUST system will be normal. These a lapse of five minutes.
button immediately resets the symptoms indicate that the
system is controlled so as not to
system. put unreasonable loads on the
system.
The remote controller displays The system is controlled with Operate the system using the
"UNDER CENTRALIZED centralized controller. Blinking COOL/HEAT centralized remote
CONTROL", which blinks for a display indicates that the system controller.
period of several seconds cannot be operated using the
when the OPERATION button remote controller.
is depressed.
The system stops immediately The system is in preparation Wait for a period of approximately
after turning ON the power mode of micro-computer one minute.
supply. operation.
5 The system The remote controller displays The system stops due to an Remove causes of electrical
makes malfunction codes "U4" and interruption in communication noises.
intermittent "U5", and the system stops but between units caused by If these causes are removed, the
stops. restarts after a lapse of several electrical noises coming from system will automatically restart
minutes. equipment other than air operation.
conditioners.
6 The system This symptom occurs The system is in preparation Wait for a period of approximately
conducts fan immediately after turning ON mode of operation. 10 minutes.
operation but not the power supply.
cooling
operation.
187 Troubleshooting
Si34-804_A Symptom-based Troubleshooting

7 The airflow rate Even pressing the AIRFLOW The fan LL operation is also Normal operation.
is not RATE SET button makes no enabled while in oil return mode in
reproduced changes in the airflow rate. cooling operation.
according to the
setting.
8 The airflow The airflow direction is not Automatic control Normal operation.
direction is not corresponding to that
reproduced displayed on the remote
according to the controller.
setting. The flap does not swing.
9 A white mist <Indoor unit> Uneven temperature distribution Clean the inside of the indoor unit.
comes out from In cooling operation, the due to heavy stain of the inside of
the system. ambient humidity is high. the indoor unit
(This indoor unit is installed in
a place with much oil or dust.)
<Indoor unit> Hot gas (refrigerant) flown in the Normal operation.
Immediately after cooling indoor unit results to be vapor
operation stopping, the from the unit.
ambient temperature and
humidity are low.
10 The system <Indoor unit> These are operating sounds of Normal operation.
produces Immediately after turning ON the electronic expansion valve ofThis sound becomes low after a
sounds. the power supply, indoor unit the indoor unit. lapse of approximately one
produces "ringing" sounds. minute.
<Indoor and outdoor units> These sounds are produced from Normal operation.
"Hissing" sounds are gas (refrigerant) flowing
continuously produced while in respectively through the indoor
cooling or defrosting operation. and outdoor units.
<Indoor and outdoor units> These sounds are produced Normal operation.
"Hissing" sounds are produced when the gas (refrigerant) stops
immediately after the startup or or changes flowing.
stop of the system, or the
startup or stop of defrosting
operation.
<Indoor unit> These sounds are produced from Normal operation.
Faint sounds are continuously the drain discharge device in
produced while in cooling operation.
operation or after stopping the
operation.
<Indoor unit> These sounds are produced from Normal operation.
"Creaking" sounds are resin parts expanding and
produced after stopping the contracting with temperature
operation. changes.
<Indoor unit> On VRV systems, these sounds Normal operation.
Sounds like "trickling" or the are produced when other indoor
like are produced from indoor units in operation. The reason is
units in the stopped state. that the system runs in order to
prevent oil or refrigerant from
dwelling.
<Outdoor unit> The reason is that the compressor Normal operation.
Pitch of operating sounds changes the operating frequency.
changes.
11 Dust comes out Dust comes out from the Dust, which has deposited on the Normal operation.
from the system. system when it restarts after inside of indoor unit, is blown out
the stop for an extended period from the system.
of time.
12 Odors come out In operation Odors of room, cigarettes or else The inside of the indoor unit
from the system. adsorbed to the inside of indoor should be cleaned.
unit are blown out.
13 Outdoor unit fan In operation The reason is that fan revolutions Normal operation.
does not rotate. are controlled to put the operation
to the optimum state.
14 LCD display "88" Immediately after turning ON The reason is that the system is Normal operation.
appears on the the power supply checking to be sure the remote This code is displayed for a period
remote controller is normal. of approximately one minute at
controller. maximum.
15 The outdoor unit After stopping operation It stops in order to prevent oil or Normal operation.
compressor or refrigerant from dwelling. It stops after a lapse of
the outdoor unit approximately 5 to 10 minutes.
fan does not
stop.
Troubleshooting 188
Symptom-based Troubleshooting Si34-804_A

16 The outdoor gets While stopping operation The reason is that the compressor Normal operation.
hot. is warmed up to provide smooth
startup of the system.
17 The system does The system is in dry operation. The reason is that the dry Change the system to cooling
not cool air well. operation serves not to reduce operation.
the room temperature where
possible.
189 Troubleshooting
Si34-804_A Troubleshooting by Remote Controller
2. Troubleshooting by Remote Controller

2.1 The INSPECTION / TEST Button
The following modes can be selected by using the [Inspection/Test Operation] button on the
remote control.
On power-up, the message "Connection under check. Please wait for a moment" will be
displayed on the remote controller screen. Then that message will disappear and the basic
screen will be displayed. To access a mode from the basic screen, refer to the figure below.
When any of the operation buttons is pressed, the backlight will come on and remains lit for
about 30 seconds. Be sure to press a button while the backlight is on (this does not apply to the
On/Off button.)
<Main Menu>
Main Menu Set temp. mode changeover
Mode Airflow direction
<Basic Screen> Quick Cool/Heat On/Off
Operation mode changeover Ventilation
Fan speed control Timer setting
Menu display Service Contact/Model Info
Confirmation of each setting Convenient functions
Press Cancel
On button once. Setting status list
Off Press Clock setting
Cancel Menu/Enter Language changeover
button once.
Operation lamp
Basic
Screen
Press Cancel button
for 4 seconds or more. Press Cancel
button once.
Press Cancel
button once.
Press Cancel button
Field Setting for 4 seconds or more.
Service Mode
Mode
<Field Setting Menu> <Service Menu>

Test operation ON/OFF Model name display
Register Service Contract Operating hours display
Field setting list Indoor status display
Group No. setting Outdoor status display
Indoor unit AIRNET No. set Forced defrost
Outdoor unit AIRNET No. set Error display selection
Error record Unit No. transfer
Indoor status display Sensor address display
Outdoor status display
Fan forced operation ON
Main/Sub changeover
Filter element sign OFF
Troubleshooting 190
Troubleshooting by Remote Controller Si34-804_A
2.2 Self-diagnosis by Wired Remote Controller

Explanation The following will be displayed on the screen when a malfunction (or a warning) occurs during
operation.
Check the malfunction code and take the corrective action specified for the particular model.
Screen
Operation lamp
(1) Checking a malfunction or warning

Operation Status Display
The operation lamp (green)

starts to blink. The message
Abnormal The system stops operating. "Malfunction: Press Menu
shutdown button" will appear and blink
at the bottom of the screen.

remains on. The message
The system continues its
Warning "Warning: Press Menu
operation. button" will appear and blink
191 Troubleshooting
2.3 Self-diagnosis by Wireless Remote Controller

In the Case of If equipment stops due to a malfunction, the operation indicating LED on the light reception
BRC7C Type section flashes.
BRC7E Type The malfunction code can be determined by following the procedure described below. (The
BRC4C Type malfunction code is displayed when an operation error has occurred. In normal condition, the
malfunction code of the last problem is displayed.)
1. Press the INSPECTION/TEST button to select Inspection.
The equipment enters the inspection mode. The Unit indication lights and the Unit No.
display shows flashing 0 indication.
2. Set the Unit No.
Press the UP or DOWN button and change the Unit No. display until the buzzer (*1) is
generated from the indoor unit.
*1 Number of beeps
3 short beeps : Conduct all of the following operations.
1 short beep : Conduct steps 3 and 4.
Continue the operation in step 4 until a buzzer remains ON. The continuous buzzer indicates
that the malfunction code is confirmed.
Continuous beep : No abnormality.
3. Press the MODE selector button.
The left 0 (upper digit) indication of the malfunction code flashes.
4. Malfunction code upper digit diagnosis
Press the UP or DOWN button and change the malfunction code upper digit until the
malfunction code matching buzzer (*2) is generated.
The upper digit of the code changes as shown below when the UP and DOWN buttons are
pressed.
*2 Number of beeps
Continuous beep : Both upper and lower digits matched. (Malfunction code confirmed)
2 short beeps : Upper digit matched.
1 short beep : Lower digit matched.
5. Press the MODE selector button.
The right 0 (lower digit) indication of the malfunction code flashes.
6. Malfunction code lower digit diagnosis
Press the UP or DOWN button and change the malfunction code lower digit until the
continuous malfunction code matching buzzer (*2) is generated.
Troubleshooting 192
The lower digit of the code changes as shown below when the UP and DOWN buttons are
pressed.
193 Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting 194
2.4 Operation of the Remote Controllers Inspection / Test

Operation Button
Unit 0
Malfunction code L0
Inspection
Normal display (No display) Malfunction code blinks when a malfunction occurs.
Inspection/test Push the button.

operation
Unit 0 Example of capacity code display

Malfunction code L0 0 7 1... Capacity code
Inspection F... Indoor unit system code Example model Display
C... Indoor unit type code
Inspection mode FXCQ25 028
J... Progression code
FXFQ63 071
operation
Indoor unit system code
Display Product classification System classification
1 VRV system (VAV indoor unit)
071
FCJ 2 VRV system Outdoor air processing unit
F VRV system Standard indoor unit
Indoor unit model code display H VRV system New ceiling suspended cassette
Indoor unit type code
Inspection/test Push the button. Display Type Model
operation
A Wall mounted FXAQ
C Double flow FXCQ
E Corner FXKQ

AA1 F Round flow FXFQ-P
H Ceiling suspended FXHQ
Outdoor unit model code display J Built-in FXSQ
P Floor standing FXLQ
Inspection/test Push the button. U Ceiling mounted duct FXMQ-P, MA
operation
L Concealed floor standing type FXNQ
3 Slim Ceiling mounted duct FXDQ
5 New ceiling suspended cassette FXUQ
Test operation
Outdoor model code
Test operation mode
Display Type Model
AA1 VRV System Inverter K Series RSXYP
operation AA3 R-407C VRV PLUS Series RXYP
A92 VRV Heat Recovery Series RSEYP
AA5 High COP type R-407C L Series RSXYP-L
AAA VRV II RXYQ-M
AAC VRV II M/C RXYQ-MA
AAE VRV III RX(Y)Q-P(A)
195 Troubleshooting
2.5 Remote Controller Service Mode

How to Enter the
Service Mode
Service Mode 1. Select the mode No.

Operation Select the desired item from the Service menu, and then press Menu/Enter button.
Method 2. Select the Item 2.
Select the desired Unit No. using the S/T (Up/Down) buttons. The corresponding data will be
displayed.
For details, refer to the table in next page.
Troubleshooting 196
Service Menu Item 2 Remarks

1. Model Name Display 1. Unit No. Select the Unit No. you want to check.
2. Indoor unit
3. Outdoor unit
2. Operating Hours 1. Unit No. Select the Unit No. you want to check.
Display 2. Indoor unit operating All of these are displayed in hours.
time
3. Indoor fan operation
4. Indoor unit energized
time
5. Outdoor operating
time
6. Outdoor fan 1
operation
7. Outdoor fan 2
operation
8. Outdoor comp. 1
operation
9. Outdoor comp. 2
operation
3. Indoor Status Display 1. Unit No. Select the Unit No. you want to check.
1/2 2. FAN Tap, speed (rpm)
3. FLAP Swing, fixed
4. Speed Fan speed (rpm)
5. EV Degree that electronic expansion valve is open
(pls)
6. MP Drain pump ON/OFF
7. 52H Electric heater ON/OFF
8. Hu Humidifier ON/OFF
9. Anti-freezing Anti-freezing control ON/OFF
3. Indoor Status Display 1. Unit No. Select the Unit No. you want to check.
2/2 SkyAir VRV
2. Th1 Suction air thermistor Suction air thermistor
3. Th2 Heat exchanger Heat exchanger liquid
thermistor pipe thermistor
4. Th3 Heat exchanger gas
pipe thermistor
5. Th4 Discharge air Discharge air
thermistor thermistor
6. Th5
7. Th6
4. Outdoor Status 1. Unit No. Select the Unit No. you want to check.
Display 2. FAN Tap 1 Fan tap
3. COMP Compressor power supply frequency (Hz)
4. EV1 Degree that electronic expansion valve is open
(pls)
5. SV1 Solenoid valve ON/OFF
SkyAir VRV
6. Th1 Outdoor air thermistor
7. Th2 Heat exchanger
thermistor
8. Th3 Discharge pipe
thermistor
5. Forced Defrost 1. Forced defrost ON Enables the forced defrost operation.
(SkyAir only) 2. Forced defrost OFF Disables the forced defrost operation.
197 Troubleshooting
Service Menu Item 2 Remarks

6. Error Display 1. Warning display ON Displays a warning on the screen if an error
Selection occurs.
2. Warning display OFF No warning is displayed.
3. Error display ON Displays the error on the screen.
4. Error display OFF Displays neither errors nor warnings.
7. Unit No. Transfer 1. Current Unit No. A unit No. can be transferred to another.
2. Transfer Unit No.
8. Sensor Address { Unit No.: 0 - 15 Select the Unit No. you want to check.
Display { Code
0: Remote controller thermistor (C)
1: Suction air thermistor (C)
2: Heat exchanger liquid pipe thermistor (C)
3: Heat exchanger gas thermistor (C)
4: Indoor unit address No.
5: Outdoor unit address No.
6: BS unit address No.
7: Zone control address No.
8: Cooling/hearing batch address No.
9: Demand/low-noise address No.
{ Data The corresponding data will be displayed, based
on the Unit No. and Code selected.
Troubleshooting 198
2.6 Remote Controller Self-Diagnosis Function

The following will be displayed on the screen when a malfunction (or a warning) occurs during
operation.
Check the malfunction code and take the corrective action specified for the particular model.
Screen
Operation lamp
(1) Checking a malfunction or warning

Operation Status Display

starts to blink. The message
Abnormal The system stops operating. "Malfunction: Press Menu
shutdown button" will appear and blink

remains on. The message
The system continues its
Warning "Warning: Press Menu
operation. button" will appear and blink
(2) Taking corrective action
Press the Menu/Enter button to check the malfunction code. Malfunction

code
Applicable
model names
Take the corrective action specific to the model.
199 Troubleshooting
k: ON h: OFF l: Blink
Malfunction Operation Malfunction contents Page
code lamp Referred
Indoor Unit A0 l Error of external protection device 206
A1 l PCB defect, E2 PROM defect 207
A3 l Malfunction of drain level control system (S1L) 208
A6 l Fan motor (M1F) lock, overload 210,
211
A7 k Malfunction of swing flap motor (M1S) 214
A8 l Abnormal power supply voltage 216
A9 l Malfunction of moving part of electronic expansion valve (Y1E) 217
AF k Drain level above limit 219
AH k Malfunction of air filter maintenance
AJ l Malfunction of capacity Determination Device 220
C1 l Failure of transmission (between indoor unit PCB and fan PCB) 221
C4 l Malfunction of thermistor (R2T) for heat exchange (loose connection, 223
disconnection, short circuit, failure)
C5 l Malfunction of thermistor (R3T) for gas pipes (loose connection, 224
C6 l Failure of combination (between indoor unit PCB and fan PCB) 225
C9 l Malfunction of thermistor (R1T) for suction air (loose connection, 226
CC k Malfunction of humidity sensor system 227
CJ k Malfunction of thermostat sensor in remote controller 228
Outdoor Unit E1 l PCB defect 229
E3 l Actuation of high pressure switch 230
E4 l Actuation of low pressure sensor 232
E5 l Inverter compressor motor lock 234
E6 l STD compressor motor overcurrent/lock 236
E7 l Malfunction of outdoor unit fan motor 237
E9 l Malfunction of moving part of electronic expansion valve (Y1E, Y2E) 240
F3 l Abnormal discharge pipe temperature 242
F6 l Refrigerant overcharged 243
H7 l Abnormal outdoor fan motor signal 244
H9 l Malfunction of thermistor (R1T) for outdoor air (loose connection, 245
J2 l Current sensor malfunction 246
J3 l Malfunction of discharge pipe thermistor (R3, R31~33T) (loose connection, 247
J5 l Malfunction of thermistor (R2T,R7T) for suction pipe (loose connection, 248
J6 l Malfunction of thermistor (R4T) for outdoor unit heat exchanger (loose 249
connection, disconnection, short circuit, failure)
J7 l Malfunction of liquid pipe thermistor (R6T) 250
J9 l Malfunction of subcooling heat exchanger gas pipe thermistor (R5T) 251
JA l Malfunction of high pressure sensor 252
JC l Malfunction of low pressure sensor 253
L0 l Inverter system error
L4 l Malfunction of inverter radiating fin temperature rise 254
L5 l Inverter compressor abnormal 256
L8 l Inverter current abnormal 258
Troubleshooting 200
k: ON h: OFF l: Blink
Malfunction Operation Malfunction contents Page
code lamp Referred
Outdoor Unit L9 l Inverter start up error 260
LA l Malfunction of power unit
LC l Malfunction of transmission between inverter and control PCB 262
P1 l Inverter over-ripple protection 265
P4 l Malfunction of inverter radiating fin temperature rise sensor 266
PJ l Faulty field setting after replacing main PCB or faulty combination of PCB 268
System U0 k Low pressure drop due to refrigerant shortage or electronic expansion valve 269
failure
U1 l Reverse phase / open phase 270
U2 l Power supply insufficient or instantaneous failure 271
U3 l Check operation is not executed 274
U4 l Malfunction of transmission between indoor units 275
U5 l Malfunction of transmission between remote controller and indoor unit 277
U5 h Failure of remote controller PCB or setting during control by remote 277
controller
U7 l Malfunction of transmission between outdoor units 278
U8 l Malfunction of transmission between main and sub remote controllers 280
(malfunction of sub remote controller)
U9 l Malfunction of transmission between indoor and outdoor units in the same 281
system
UA l Improper combination of indoor and outdoor units, indoor units and remote 282
controller
UC k Address duplication of centralized controller 284
UE l Malfunction of transmission between centralized controller and indoor unit 285
UF l System is not set yet 288
UH l Malfunction of system, refrigerant system address undefined 289
Centralized M1 k or h PCB defect 291
Remote M8 k or h Malfunction of transmission between optional controllers for centralized 292
Controller control
and
Schedule MA k or h Improper combination of optional controllers for centralized control 294
Timer MC k or h Address duplication, improper setting 296
Heat 64 k Indoor units air thermistor error
Reclaim 65 k Outside air thermistor error
Ventilation
6A k Damper system alarm
6A l Damper system + thermistor error
6F k Malfunction of simplified remote controller
6H k Malfunction of door switch or connector
94 l Internal transmission error
The system operates for malfunction codes indicated in black squares, however, be sure to check and repair.
201 Troubleshooting
Malfunction code indication by outdoor unit PCB

<Monitor mode>
Contents of malfunction Malfunction
To enter the monitor mode, push the code
MODE (BS1) button when in
Setting mode 1. PCB malfunction PCB malfunction E1
Faulty PCB
Abnormal discharge pressure High pressure switch activated E3
Abnormal suction pressure Abnormal Pe E4
* Refer to P.174 for Monitor mode.
Compressor lock Detection of INV. compressor lock E5
Activation of OC Detection of STD1 compressor lock E6
<Selection of setting item>
Detection of STD2 compressor lock
Push the SET (BS2) button and set Over load, overcurrent, Instantaneous overcurrent of DC fan 1 motor E7
the LED display to a setting item. abnormal lock of outdoor unit fan motor
Detection of DC fan 1 motor lock
Instantaneous overcurrent of DC fan 2 motor
Detection of DC fan 2 motor lock
* Refer to P.174 for Monitor mode.
Malfunction of electronic expansion EV1 E9
valve
EV2
<Confirmation of malfunction 1> EV3
Push the RETURN (BS3) button Abnormal position signal of outdoor Abnormal position signal of DC fan 1 motor H7
unit fan motor
once to display "First digit" of Abnormal position signal of DC fan 2 motor
malfunction code. Faulty sensor of outdoor air Faulty Ta sensor (short) H9
temperature
Faulty Ta sensor (open)
Abnormal discharge pipe temperature Abnormal Td F3
Abnormal heat exchanger temperature Refrigerant over charge F6
Faulty current sensor Faulty CT1 sensor J2
<Confirmation of malfunction 2> Faulty CT2 sensor
Faulty sensor of discharge pipe Faulty Tdi sensor (short) J3
Push the SET (BS2) button once to Detail temperature
Faulty Tds1 sensor (short)
display "Second digit" of malfunction description
code. Faulty Tds2 sensor (short)
on next
page. Faulty Tdi sensor (open)
Faulty Tds1 sensor (open)
Faulty Tds2 sensor (open)
Faulty sensor of suction pipe Faulty Ts1 sensor (short) J5
temperature
Faulty Ts1 sensor (open)
<Confirmation of malfunction 3>
Faulty Ts2 sensor (short)
Push the SET (BS2) button once to Faulty Ts2 sensor (open)
display "malfunction location".
Faulty sensor of heat exchanger Faulty Tb sensor (short) J6
temperature
Faulty Tb sensor (open)
Malfunction of the liquid pipe Faulty TI sensor (short) J7
temperature sensor
Faulty TI sensor (open)
Faulty sensor of subcooling heat Faulty Tsh sensor (short) J9
exchanger temperature
Faulty Tsh sensor (open)
<Confirmation of malfunction 4>
Faulty sensor of discharge pressure Faulty Pc sensor (short) JA
Push the SET (BS2) button once to Faulty Pc sensor (open)
display "master or slave 1 or slave 2" Faulty sensor of suction pressure Faulty Pe sensor (short) JC
and "malfunction location". Faulty Pe sensor (open)
Instantaneous power failure NO display on remote controller (L2)
(Judge during compressor operation)
Inverter radiation fin temperature rising Over heating of inverter radiation fin temperature L4
DC output overcurrent Inverter instantaneous overcurrent L5
IGBT malfunction L5
Electronic thermal Electronic thermal switch 1 L8
Push the RETURN (BS3) button and Electronic thermal switch 2
switches to the initial status of
Out-of-step
Monitor mode.
Speed down after startup
Lightening detection
Stall prevention (Limit time) Stall prevention (Current increasing) L9
Push the MODE (BS1) button and
returns to Setting mode 1. Stall prevention (Faulty start up)
Abnormal wave form in startup
Out-of-step
Transmission error between inverter Inverter transmission error LC
and outdoor unit
Troubleshooting 202
k: ON h: OFF l:Blink
Malfunction Confirmation of malfunction 1 Confirmation of malfunction 2 Confirmation of malfunction 3 Confirmation of malfunction 4
code H1P H2P H3P H4P H5P H6P H7P H1P H2P H3P H4P H5P H6P H7P H1P H2P H3P H4P H5P H6P H7P H1P H2P H3P H4P H5P H6P H7P
E1 l h h l l l h h h l l h h h h l h h l l
l h h h l l h h h h l h l l l
E3 l h h l l l h h h h l h h
E4 l h l h h l h h h h l h h
E5 l h l h l l h h h h l h h
E6 l h l l h l h h h h l h h
l h h h h l h l
E7 l h l l l l h h h h l h h
1
l h h h h l h l
l h h h l l h h
l h h h l l h l
E9 l l h h l l h h h h l h h
l h h h h l h l
l h h h h l l h
H7 l h l h h l h l l l l h h h h l h h
l h h h l l h h
1
H9 l l h h l l h h h h l h h
l h h h l l h h
F3 l h l h l l h h l l l h h h h l h h 1
F6 l h l l h l h h h h l h h l l
J2 l h l l h l h h l h l h h h h l h h
l h h h h l h l
J3 l h h l l l h h h h l h h
l h h h h l h l
l h h h h l l h
l h h h l l h h
l h h h l l h l
l h h h l l l h
J5 l h l h l l h h h h l h h
l h h h l l h h
l h h h h l h l
1
l h h h l l h l
J6 l h l l h l h h h h l h h
l h h h l l h h
J7 l h l l l l h h h h l h h
l h h h l l h h
J9 l l h h l l h h h h l h h
l h h h l l h h
JA l l h l h l h h h h l h h
l h h h l l h h
JC l l l h h l h h h h l h h
l h h h l l h h
(L2) l h l l l l h h l h l h h h h l h h
L4 l h l h h l h h h h l h h
L5 l h l h l l h h h h l h h
L5 l h h h h l h l
L8 l l h h h l h h h h l h h
l h h h h l h l
1
l h h h h l l h
l h h h l l h h
L9 l l h h l l h h h h l h h
l h h h h l h l
l h h h h l l h
LC l l l h h l h h h h l h l
Display of contents of Display of contents of Display 1 of Display 2 of

malfunction (first digit) malfunction (second digit) malfunction in detail malfunction in detail
1 h h Master
h l Slave1
l h Slave2
l l System
203 Troubleshooting
<Monitor mode>
Contents of malfunction Malfunction
To enter the monitor mode, push the code
MODE (BS1) button when in Open phase/Power supply imbalance Imbalance of inverter power supply P1
Setting mode 1. voltage
Faulty temperature sensor inside Faulty thermistor of inverter box P3
switch box
Faulty temperature sensor of inverter Faulty thermistor of inverter fin P4
* Refer to P.174 for Monitor mode. radiation fin
Incorrect combination of Inverter and Incorrect combination of inverter PJ
fan driver
<Selection of setting item> Incorrect combination of fan driver 1
Incorrect combination of fan driver 2
the LED display to a setting item. Gas shortage Gas shortage alarm U0
Reverse phase Reverse phase error U1
Abnormal power supply voltage Insufficient Inverter voltage U2
* Refer to P.174 for Monitor mode. Inverter open phase (phase T)
Charging error of capacitor in inverter
main circuit
<Confirmation of malfunction 1> No implementation of test-run U3
Push the RETURN (BS3) button
once to display "First digit" of Transmission error between indoor I/O transmission error U4
malfunction code. and outdoor unit
I/O transmission error
Transmission error between outdoor Sequential startup ADP alarm U7
units, transmission error between
thermal storage units, duplication of IC Sequential startup ADP malfunction U7
address Malfunction of transmission between
multi units (Multi 1)
Malfunction of transmission between
<Confirmation of malfunction 2> multi units (Multi 2)
Push the SET (BS2) button once to Abnormal multi horsepower setting
Detail
display "Second digit" of malfunction description Abnormal multi address setting
code. on next Excessive multi connections
page. Multi system malfunction
Transmission error of other system Indoor unit system abnormal in other U9
system or other indoor unit system
abnormal in own system
Erroneous field setting System transmission malfunction UA
<Confirmation of malfunction 3> Over connection malfunction of indoor units
Push the SET (BS2) button once to Malfunction of field setting
display "malfunction location". Refrigerant abnormal
Multi-ID abnormal
Alarm of TSS field setting UA
Alarm of CT address setting
Faulty system malfunction Wiring error (Auto-address error) UH
Transmission error in accessory Malfunction of multi-level connection UJ
devices
<Confirmation of malfunction 4> Alarm of multi-level connection UJ
Conflict in wiring and piping, no setting Conflict in wiring and piping UF
Push the SET (BS2) button once to for system
display "master or slave 1 or slave 2"
and "malfunction location".

switches to the initial status of
Monitor mode.
Push the MODE (BS1) button and

returns to Setting mode 1.
Troubleshooting 204
k: ON h: OFF l:Blink
Malfunction Confirmation of malfunction 1 Confirmation of malfunction 2 Confirmation of malfunction 3 Confirmation of malfunction 4
code H1P H2P H3P H4P H5P H6P H7P H1P H2P H3P H4P H5P H6P H7P H1P H2P H3P H4P H5P H6P H7P H1P H2P H3P H4P H5P H6P H7P
P1 l l h h h l h h h l l h h h h l h h
P3 l h h l l l h h h h l h h
P4 l h l h h l h h h h l h h 1
PJ l l l h l l h h h h l h h
l h h h h l h l
l h h h h l l h
U0 l l h h l l h h h h l h h h h l h h l l
U1 l h h h l l h h h h l h h
U2 l h h l h l h h h h l h h
l h h h h l h l
U3 l h h l l l h h h h l h h l l
l h h h h l h l l l
U4 l h l h h l h h h h l h h l l
l h h h h l h l l l
U7 l h l l l l h h h h l h l l l
U7 l h h h h l h h l l
l h h h h l l h l l
l h h h h l l l l l
l h h h l l h h l l
l h h h l l h l l l
l h h h l l l h l l
l h h h l l l l l l
U9 l l h h l l h h h h l h h l l
UA l l h l h l h h h h l h h l l
l h h h h l h l l l
l h h h h l l h l l
l h h h l l h h l l
l h h h l l h l l l
UA l h h h l l l h l l
l h h h l l l l l l
UH l l h l l l h h h h l h h l l
UJ l l l h l l h h h h l h h
1
UJ l h h h h l h l
UF l l l l l l h h h h l h h l l
Display of contents of Display of contents of Display 1 of Display 2 of

malfunction (first digit) malfunction (second digit) malfunction in detail malfunction in detail
1 h h Master
h l Slave1
l h Slave2
l l System
205 Troubleshooting
Si34-804_A Troubleshooting by Indication on the Remote Controller
3. Troubleshooting by Indication on the Remote

Controller
3.1 A0 Indoor Unit: Error of External Protection Device
Remote A0
Controller
Display
Applicable All indoor unit models

Models
Method of Detect open or short circuit between external input terminals in indoor unit.
Malfunction
Detection
Malfunction When an open circuit occurs between external input terminals with the remote controller set to
Decision "external ON/OFF terminal".
Conditions
Supposed Actuation of external protection device

Causes Improper field set
Defect of indoor unit PCB
Troubleshooting
Be sure to turn off power switch before connect or disconnect connector,
Caution or parts damage may be occurred.
External
protection device is
connected to terminals T1 YES
Actuation of external protection
and T2 of the indoor device.
unit terminal Check the setting state of the
block. ON/OFF input from outside by
remote controller.
NO
Check the setting state of the
ON/OFF input from outside by
remote controller.
ON/OFF
input from
outside (mode No. 12,
first code No. 1) has been YES
set to external protection Change the second code No. to
device input (second "01" or "02" .
code No. 03)
by remote
controller.
NO
Replace the indoor unit PCB.
Troubleshooting 206
Troubleshooting by Indication on the Remote Controller Si34-804_A
3.2 A1 Indoor Unit: PCB Defect

Remote A1
Controller
Display

Models
Method of Check data from EPROM.

Malfunction
Detection
Malfunction When data could not be correctly received from the EPROM
Decision EPROM : Type of nonvolatile memory. Maintains memory contents even when the power
Conditions supply is turned off.
Supposed Defect of indoor unit PCB

Causes Noise
Troubleshooting
Turn power supply OFF, then

power ON again.
Does
the system return YES
The indoor unit PCB is
to normal? normal.
External factor other than
NO malfunction (for example,
noise etc.).
Replace the indoor unit
PCB.
207 Troubleshooting
3.3 A3 Indoor Unit: Malfunction of Drain Level Control

System (S1L)
Remote A3
Controller
Display
Applicable FXCQ, FXFQ, FXSQ, FXKQ, FXDQ, FXMQ, FXUQ, FXHQ (Option), FXMQ200,250M (Option),
Models FXAQ (Option), FXMQ-MF (Option)
Method of By float switch OFF detection

Malfunction
Detection
Malfunction When rise of water level is not a condition and the float switch goes OFF.
Decision
Conditions
Supposed 220~240V power supply is not provided

Causes Defect of float switch or short circuit connector
Defect of drain pump
Drain clogging, upward slope, etc.
Loose connection of connector
Troubleshooting 208
Troubleshooting
Is power supply NO
220~240V provided? Provide 220~240V power
supply.
YES
The float A short
switch is connected to NO circuit connector is NO
X8A or X15A of the indoor connected to X8A Connect either a short circuit
unit PCB. or X15A. connector or float switch and
turn on again.
YES YES
The float
switch contact is Becomes
forming a short circuit. YES normal when X8A NO
(continuity check or X15A of the indoor unit Defect of indoor unit PCB.
with X8A or X15A PCB is short
disconnected) circuited.
NO YES
Loose connection of connector.
Water builds up NO The float switch NO

in the drain pan. functions normally. Replace the float switch.
YES YES Modify the float switch's

connection and turn on again.
The drain
pump is connected NO
to X25A or terminals Y1 Connect the drain pump and
and Y2 of the turn on again.
indoor unit
PCB.
YES
The drain
pump works when YES
the power supply is reset Check the drain piping for
for the indoor clogging or upward slope, etc.
unit.
NO
The voltage
of terminals Y1
and Y2 or X25A is NO
220~240 V (within Replace the indoor unit PCB.
5minutes of resetting
the power
supply).
YES
Replace the drain pump or
check for dirt, etc.
209 Troubleshooting
3.4 A6 Indoor Unit: Fan Motor (M1F) Lock, Overload

Remote A6
Controller
Display
Applicable All indoor units (except FXMQ-P)

Models
Method of Detection by failure of signal for detecting number of turns to come from the fan motor
Malfunction
Detection
Malfunction When number of turns cant be detected even when output voltage to the fan is maximum
Decision
Conditions
Supposed Fan motor lock

Causes Disconnected or faulty wiring between fan motor and PCB
Troubleshooting
Is the
wiring from the fan
motor securely connected NO
Connect the wiring and turn on
to connectors on the again.
indoor unit
PCB?
YES
Wiring
between the
indoor unit PCB and YES
Fix the wiring and turn on again.
fan motor is
disconnected.
NO
YES
Does the fan motor run? Replace the indoor unit PCB.
NO
Replace the fan motor.
Troubleshooting 210
Remote A6
Controller
Display
Applicable FXMQ20~140P
Models
Method of Detection from the current flow on the fan PCB

Malfunction Detection from the RPM of the fan motor in operation
Detection Detection from the position signal of the fan motor
Detection from the current flow on the fan PCB when the fan motor starting operation
Malfunction An overcurrent flows

Decision The RPM is less than a certain level for 6 seconds
Conditions A position error in the fan rotor continues for 5 seconds or more
An overcurrent flows
Supposed The clogging of a foreign matter

Causes The disconnection of the fan motor connectors (X1A and X2A)
The disconnection of the connectors between the indoor PCB (A1P) and fan PCB (A2P)
A failure in fan PCB (A2P)
A failure in the fan motor
211 Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
Turn off the power and wait for

10 minutes.
There is a
foreign matter around YES
Remove the foreign matter.
the fan.
NO
The fan
motor connectors (X1A YES
and X2A) of the fan PCB (A2P) are Connect correctly.
disconnected.
NO
The connectors
between the indoor YES
PCB (A1P) and the fan Connect correctly.
PCB (A2P) are
disconnected.
NO
The fuse
(F3U, white) on the fan NO
Replace the fan
PCB (A2P) has PCB (A2P).
no continuity.
YES
The fan can be

moved lightly by hand after NO
the fan motor connector of the Replace the fan motor.
fan PCB (A2P) is
removed.
YES
The resistance
between the power wire YES
terminals of the fan motor and Replace the fan motor.
motor frame (meal part) is
1 M or below.
NO
Remove the power wire

connector from the fan motor
and measure the resistance
between U and V, V and W, and
W and U phases (*1).
Troubleshooting 212
The resistors among NO

U, V, and W are unbalanced or Replace the fan motor.
short-circuited.
YES
Remove the signal connector

from the fan motor and check
the resistance (*2).
Between VCC and GND YES

terminals, and between GND Replace the fan motor.
and HW, HV, or HU terminals
are short-circuited.
NO
Turn on the power.
The HAP
lamp of the indoor
YES
PCB (A1P) blinks and the HAP Replace the fan PCB
lamp of the fan PCB (A2P).
(A2P) is off.
NO
*1. Measurement of power wire connector.

Remove the X1A connector from the fan PCB (A2P) and measure
the resistance between the U and V, V and W, and W and U
phases of the motor connector (with five conductors) and check
that each phase are balanced (within a permissible dispersion
range of 20%).
*2. Measurement of signal wire connector.
Remove the X2A connector and measure the resistance between
GND and VCC, HW, HV, or HU terminals of the motor connector
(with five conductors).
Connector power wire use (X1A) Connector signal wire use (X2A)
5 Red U 5 Gray GND
4 4 Pink Vcc
3 White V 3 Orange Hw
2 2 Blue HV
1 Black W 1 Yellow HU
213 Troubleshooting
3.5 A7 Indoor Unit: Malfunction of Swing Flap Motor (M1S)

Remote A7
Controller
Display
Applicable FXCQ, FXHQ, FXKQ

Models
Method of Utilizes ON/OFF of the limit switch when the motor turns.
Malfunction
Detection
Malfunction When ON/OFF of the micro-switch for positioning cannot be reversed even though the swing
Decision flap motor is energized for a specified amount of time (about 30 seconds).
Conditions
Supposed Defect of swing motor

Causes Defect of connection cable (power supply and limit switch)
Defect of airflow direction adjusting flap-cam
Troubleshooting 214
Troubleshooting
Is power supply NO
220~240V provided? Provide 220~240V power
supply.
YES
Indoor unit
is a model equipped NO
with a swing flap Replace indoor unit PCB.
function.
YES
The swing
motor works when YES The connector NO
the power supply is turned is connected to X9A of Connect the connector to X9A
off and then back the indoor unit and turn on again.
on. PCB.
NO YES
The limit switch NO

functions normally. Replace the swing motor.
YES
The connecting YES

cable is short-circuited Replace the limit switch
After or disconnected.
turning connecting cable.
the swing-flap
ON and then NO
stopping with the
remote controller, the
voltage of X6A of the indoor NO
unit PCB is 220 VAC
(50 Hz) when turned on
again (within 30
seconds of
turning on
again).
YES
The connecting cable YES

has no continuity. Replace the power supply
connecting cable.
NO
When
the airflow
direction flap-cam
mechanism is disconnected NO
from the swing motor, Replace the swing motor.
operation is normal
when turned
on again.
YES
Take the cam mechanism
apart, reassemble and turn on
again.
215 Troubleshooting
3.6 A8Abnormal Power Supply Voltage

Remote A8
Controller
Display
Models
Method of Detect malfunction checking the input voltage of fan motor.

Malfunction
Detection
Malfunction When the input voltage of fan motor is 150V and below, or 386V and above.
Decision
Conditions
Supposed The possible causes are:

Causes Power-supply voltage malfunction.
Connection defect on signal line.
Wiring defect.
Instantaneous blackout, others.
Troubleshooting
Check the condition of
the power source.
Check if power-supply
voltage is 220V - 240V
10%.
Check if there is power
open phase or faulty
wiring.
Check if power-supply
voltage unbalance is
within 6V.
There
are problems on YES
the condition of power Correct any fault.
source described
above.
NO
"A8"
Reoccurrence YES
Check and correct each wiring.
of malfunction.
NO
It is possible to have external

factor, such as brownout and
instantaneous blackout.
Troubleshooting 216

Electronic Expansion Valve (Y1E)
Remote A9
Controller
Display

Models
Method of Use a microcomputer to check the electronic expansion valve for coil conditions.
Malfunction
Detection
Malfunction When the pin input of the electronic expansion valve is not normal while in the initialization of
Decision the microcomputer.
Conditions
Supposed Malfunction of moving part of electronic expansion valve

Causes Defect of indoor unit PCB
Defect of connecting cable
Troubleshooting
The
electronic
expansion valve is NO
connected to X7A of the After connecting, turn the power
indoor unit supply off and then back on.
PCB.
YES
Normal
when coil check
(1) of the moving part of NO
Replace the moving part of the
the electronic expansion electronic expansion valve.
valve is
checked.
YES
The connecting YES

cable is short-circuited or Replace the connecting cable.
disconnected.
NO
If you turn the power supply off
and turn on again, and it still does
not help, replace the indoor unit
PCB.
217 Troubleshooting
1: Coil check method for the moving part of the electronic expansion valve
Disconnect the electronic expansion valve from the PCB and check the continuity between the
connector pins.
(Normal)
Pin No. 1. White 2. Yellow 3. Orange 4. Blue 5. Red 6. Brown
1. White { {
Approx. Approx.
300 150
2. Yellow { {
Approx. Approx.
300 150
3. Orange {
Approx.
150
4. Blue {
Approx.
150
5. Red
6. Brown
{: Continuity
: No continuity
Troubleshooting 218
3.8 AF Indoor Unit: Drain Level above Limit

Remote AF
Controller
Display
Applicable FXCQ, FXFQ, FXSQ, FXKQ, FXMQ, FXDQ, FXMQ-MF, FXUQ

Models
Method of Water leakage is detected based on float switch ON/OFF operation while the compressor is in
Malfunction non-operation.
Detection
Malfunction When the float switch changes from ON to OFF while the compressor is in non-operation.
Decision
Conditions
Supposed Humidifier unit (optional accessory) leaking

Causes Defect of drain pipe (upward slope, etc.)
Troubleshooting
Field drain
piping has a defect such as YES
Modify the drain piping.
upward sloping.
NO
A humidifier
unit (optional accessory) YES
Check if the humidifier unit is
is installed on the leaking.
indoor unit.
NO
Defect of indoor unit PCB.
219 Troubleshooting
3.9 AJ Indoor Unit: Malfunction of Capacity Determination

Device
Remote AJ
controller display

Models
Method of Capacity is determined according to resistance of the capacity setting adaptor and the memory
Malfunction inside the IC memory on the indoor unit PCB, and whether the value is normal or abnormal is
Detection determined.
Malfunction Operation and:

Decision When the capacity code is not saved to the PCB, and the capacity setting adaptor is not
Conditions connected.
Supposed You have forgotten to install the capacity setting adaptor.

Troubleshooting

The indoor NO
unit PCB was replaced Replace the indoor unit PCB.
with a replacement
PCB.
YES
The capacity
setting adaptor need to NO
be installed when Replace the indoor unit PCB.
replacing the
PCB.
YES Install a capacity setting adaptor.
Troubleshooting 220
3.10 C1 Indoor Unit: Failure of Transmission (Between

Indoor unit PCB and Fan PCB)
Remote C1
Controller
Display
Models
Method of Check the condition of transmission between indoor PCB (A1P) and PCB for fan (A2P) using
Malfunction computer.
Detection
Malfunction When normal transmission is not conducted for certain duration.

Decision
Conditions
Supposed Connection defect of the connecter between indoor PCB (A1P) and PCB for fan (A2P)
Causes Malfunction of indoor PCB (A1P)
Malfunction of PCB for fan (A2P)
External factor, such as instantaneous blackout
221 Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
Is the connector
between indoor PCB (A1P) and NO
Connect the connector accurately.
PCB for fan (A2P) accurately
connected? (*1)
YES
Confirm the condition
of transmission on
indoor PCB using
local installation
mode. (*2)
Under above local NO

installation mode, installation Replace the indoor PCB (A1P).
position is "01".
YES
Connect the
connecter X70A and
turn on the power
again.
"C1"
Malfunction YES
Replace the PCB for fan (A2P).
breaks out
again.
NO
Connect it and operate. (It is
possible to have a cause, such
as instantaneous blackout)
1. Pull out and insert the connecter once and check it is absolutely connected.
2. Method to check transmission part of indoor PCB.
Turn off the power and remove the connecter X70A of indoor PCB (A1P).
Short-circuit X70A.
After turning on the power, check below numbers under local setting remote control.
(Confirmation: Setting position NO. at the condition of setting switch No. 21 on mode No.
41)

Determination 01: Normal
Other than 01: Transmission defect on indoor PCB
After confirmation, turn off the power, take off the short-circuit and connect X70A back to
original condition.
Troubleshooting 222

Heat Exchanger
Remote C4
Controller
Display

Models
Method of Malfunction detection is carried out by temperature detected by heat exchanger thermistor.
Malfunction
Detection
Malfunction When the heat exchanger thermistor becomes disconnected or shorted while the unit is running.
Decision
Conditions
Supposed Defect of thermistor (R2T) for liquid pipe

Troubleshooting
Remove the thermistor from

the indoor unit PCB, and then
insert it again.
Is the YES
thermistor normal? Normal (The malfunction is
caused by faulty contact.)
NO
make resistance
measurement of the thermistor
using a multiple meter.
NO
5 k to 90 k Replace the thermistor (R2T).
YES
Refer to Thermistor Resistance / Temperature Characteristics table on P.358.
223 Troubleshooting

Gas Pipes
Remote C5
Controller
Display

Models
Method of Malfunction detection is carried out by temperature detected by gas pipe thermistor.
Malfunction
Detection
Malfunction When the gas pipe thermistor becomes disconnected or shorted while the unit is running.
Decision
Conditions
Supposed Defect of indoor unit thermistor (R3T) for gas pipe

Troubleshooting

insert it again.
Is the YES
NO
the indoor unit PCB, and
then make resistance
NO
YES
Troubleshooting 224
3.13 C6 Indoor Unit: Failure of Combination (Between

Indoor unit PCB and Fan PCB)
Remote C6
Controller
Display
Models
Method of Conduct open line detection with PCB for fan (A2P) using indoor PCB (A1P).
Malfunction
Detection
Malfunction When the communication data of PCB for fan (A2P) is determined as incorrect.
Decision
Conditions
Supposed Malfunction of PCB for fan (A2P)

Causes Connection defect of capacity setting adaptor
Setting mistake on site
Troubleshooting
Is the
type of PCB NO
for fan (A2P) Replace it with correct PCB for fan
correct? (A2P).
YES
Was
NO indoor PCB
(A1P) replaced with
supplementary
PCB?
YES
Was
correct capacity setting NO
adaptor installed when replacing it Install correct capacity setting
with supplementary adaptor.
PCB?
YES
After establishing transmission
for indoor and outdoor,
diagnose the operation again.
225 Troubleshooting

Suction Air
Remote C9
Controller
Display

Models
Method of Malfunction detection is carried out by temperature detected by suction air temperature
Malfunction thermistor.
Detection
Malfunction When the suction air temperature thermistor becomes disconnected or shorted while the unit is
Decision running.
Conditions
Supposed Defect of indoor unit thermistor (R1T) for air inlet

Troubleshooting

then insert it again.
Is the YES
NO
then make resistance
NO
YES
Troubleshooting 226
3.15 CC Indoor Unit: Malfunction of Humidity Sensor

System
Remote CC
Controller
Display
Applicable FXFQ
Models
Method of Even if a malfunction occurs, operation still continues.

Malfunction Malfunction is detected according to the moisture (output voltage) detected by the moisture
Detection sensor.
Malfunction When the moisture sensor is disconnected or short-circuited

Decision
Conditions
Supposed Faulty sensor

Causes Disconnection
Troubleshooting
Remove the humidity sensor

from the indoor PCB and
insert it again.
Does it YES
function normally? It is normal.
(Poor connector contact)
NO
Delete the malfunction code

record from the remote
controller. (*1)
Is "CC"
displayed on YES
the remote Replace the humidity sensor
controller? (*2) PCB assy (A2P).
*3
NO
It is believed that external factors

(noise or else) other than failure
caused the malfunction.
*1: To delete the record, the ON/OFF button of the remote controller must be pushed and
held for 5 seconds in the check mode.
*2: To display the code, the Inspection/Test Operation button of the remote controller must be
pushed and held in the normal mode.
*3: If "CC" is displayed even after replacing the humidity sensor PCB assy (A2P) and taking
the steps *1 and 2, replace the indoor PCB assy (A1P).
227 Troubleshooting

Remote Controller
Remote CJ
Controller
Display

Models
Method of Malfunction detection is carried out by temperature detected by remote controller air
Malfunction temperature thermistor. (Note:)
Detection
Malfunction When the remote controller air temperature thermistor becomes disconnected or shorted while
Decision the unit is running.
Conditions
Supposed Defect of remote controller thermistor

Causes Defect of remote controller PCB
Troubleshooting
Clear the malfunction code

history. (While in inspection
mode, press and hold the
ON/OFF button for a period of
4 seconds or more.)
Is "CJ" YES
displayed on the remote Replace the remote
controller? controller.
NO
External factor other than
equipment malfunction.
(for example, noise etc.)
Note: In case of remote controller thermistor malfunction, unit is still operable by suction air thermistor
on indoor unit.
Troubleshooting 228
3.17 E1 Outdoor Unit: PCB Defect

Remote E1
Controller
Display
Applicable RXQ5PA~54PA
Models
Method of Check data from EPROM

Malfunction
Detection
Malfunction When data could not be correctly received from the EPROM
Decision EPROM : Type of nonvolatile memory. Maintains memory contents even when the power
Conditions supply is turned off.
Supposed Defect of outdoor unit PCB (A1P)

Causes
Troubleshooting
Turn off the power once and

turn on again.
YES External factor other than

Return to normal?
malfunction (for example,
noise etc.).
NO
Check
if inside / outside
relay wires of outdoor YES
Connect the inside/ outside
main PCB is relay wires correctly.
disconnected.
NO
Replace the outdoor main

PCB (A1P).
229 Troubleshooting
3.18 E3 Outdoor Unit: Actuation of High Pressure Switch

Remote E3
Controller
Display
Models
Method of Abnormality is detected when the contact of the high pressure protection switch opens.
Malfunction
Detection
Malfunction Error is generated when the high pressure switch activation count reaches the number specific
Decision to the operation mode.
Conditions (Reference) Operating pressure of high pressure switch
Operating pressure: 4.0MPa
Reset pressure: 2.85MPa
Supposed Actuation of outdoor unit high pressure switch

Causes Defect of High pressure switch
Defect of outdoor unit PCB
Instantaneous power failure
Faulty high pressure sensor
Troubleshooting 230
Troubleshooting
Check for the points shown below.

Is the stop valve open?
Is the high pressure switch connector properly
connected to the main PCB?
Does the high pressure switch have continuity?
Are the NO
three points above Rectify defective points, if any.
OK?
YES
Mount a pressure gauge on the high pressure service port.
Connect the Service Checker.
Reset the operation using the remote controller,
and then restart the operation.
Is the
Does the stop YES high pressure NO
due to malfunction (E3) switch operating value normal Replace the high pressure switch.
recur? (i.e., 4.0MPa)?
NO YES
Are the
characteristics of the high NO
Replace the high pressure sensor.
pressure sensor normal?
(See *1.)
YES
Is the
pressure detected with NO
the PCB normal? Replace the main PCB.
(See *2.)
YES
The high pressure sensor is normal, and the pressure detected with the PCB is also normal.
The high pressure has really become high.
Referring to information on page 306, remove the causes by

CHECK 3 which the high pressure has become high.
*1: Make a comparison between the voltage of the pressure sensor and that read by the
pressure gauge.
(As to the voltage of the pressure sensor, make measurement of voltage at the connector,
and then convert it to pressure according to information on page 360.)
*2: Make a comparison between the high pressure value checked with the Service Checker
and the voltage of the pressure sensor (see *1).
*3: Make measurement of voltage of the pressure sensor.
+5V
Connector for high
pressure sensor (Red)
(4) Red
High
(3) Black
pressure
sensor
(2)
Micro-controller
A/D input (1) White
Make measurement of DC
voltage between these wires.
231 Troubleshooting
3.19 E4 Outdoor Unit: Actuation of Low Pressure Sensor

Remote E4
Controller
Display
Models
Method of Abnormality is detected by the pressure value with the low pressure sensor.
Malfunction
Detection
Malfunction Error is generated when the low pressure is dropped under specific pressure.
Decision Operating pressure:0.07MPa
Conditions
Supposed Abnormal drop of low pressure (Lower than 0.07MPa)

Causes Defect of low pressure sensor
Stop valve is not opened.
Troubleshooting 232
Troubleshooting
Is the stop NO
Open the stop valve.
valve open?
YES
Mount a pressure gauge on the low pressure service port.
Connect the Service Checker.
Reset the operation using the remote controller, and then
restart the operation.
Are the
characteristics of the NO
low pressure sensor Replace the low pressure sensor.
normal?
(See *1.)
YES
Is the
pressure detected NO
with the PCB Replace the main PCB.
normal?
(See *2.)
YES
The low pressure sensor is normal, and the pressure
detected with the PCB is also normal.
The low pressure has really become low.
CHECK 4 Referring to information on page 307, remove the

causes by which the low pressure has become low.
*1: Make a comparison between the voltage of the pressure sensor and that read by the
pressure gauge.
(As to the voltage of the pressure sensor, make measurement of voltage at the connector,
and then convert it to pressure according to information on page 360.)
*2: Make a comparison between the low pressure value checked with the Service Checker
and the voltage of the pressure sensor (see *1).
*3: Make measurement of voltage of the pressure sensor.
+5V
Connector for low pressure sensor
(Blue)
(4) Red
(3) Black Low

pressure
Micro-controller
(2) White sensor
A/D input
(1)
Make measurement of DC voltage between these wires.
233 Troubleshooting
3.20 E5 Outdoor Unit: Inverter Compressor Motor Lock

Remote E5
Controller
Display
Models
Method of Inverter PCB takes the position signal from UVW line connected between the inverter and
Malfunction compressor, and the malfunction is detected when any abnormality is observed in the phase-
Detection current waveform.
Malfunction This malfunction will be output when the inverter compressor motor does not start up even in
Decision forced startup mode.
Conditions
Supposed Inverter compressor lock

Causes High differential pressure (0.5MPa or more)
Incorrect UVW wiring
Faulty inverter PCB
Stop valve is left in closed.
Troubleshooting 234
Troubleshooting
NO
Is the stop valve open? Onsite causes.
Power OFF YES
Check the compressor cable
for disconnection and flaws.
The compressor cable YES

Replace the cable, and
has a defect. then securely connect
the connectors.
NO
Are wire
connections made to NO
phases U, V, and W in the Make wire connections
proper order and without a mistake.
manner? W
YES
U
Are wire
connections properly V
NO
made (according to the Make wire connections
Wiring Diagram)? Are the wire connections without a mistake.
mixed up with those for
non-inverter compressor?
YES
Disconnect the cable from the
compressor, and then check
the compressor for the
The insulation YES

resistance is low (i.e., not Replace the
more than compressor.
100k.)
NO
Check the compressor motor
coil for any broken wire.
Some phase has a YES

broken wire.
NO
Restart the
compressor, and then NO
check whether or not End of work
the malfunction Faulty pressure
recurs. equalization or else
may have occurred.
Power ON YES Check the refrigerant
system.
Has the
compressor started YES
up at high differential Faulty pressure
pressure (not less equalization:
than 0.5MPa)? Check the refrigerant
system.
NO
Replace the
compressor.
Conduct checks and
diagnosis of the
compressor.
235 Troubleshooting
3.21 E6 Outdoor Unit: STD Compressor Motor Overcurrent/

Lock
Remote E6
Controller
Display
Models
Method of Detects the overcurrent with current sensor (CT).

Malfunction
Detection
Malfunction Malfunction is decided when the detected current value exceeds the below mentioned value for
Decision 2 seconds.
Conditions 400 V class unit : 15.0 A
200 V class unit : 28.8 A
Supposed Closed stop value

Causes Obstacles at the air outlet
Improper power voltage
Faulty magnetic switch
Faulty compressor
Faulty current sensor (A6P, A7P)
Troubleshooting
NO
Is the stop valve open? Open the stop valve.
YES
Obstacle
exists around the air YES
Remove the obstacle.
outlet.
NO
Is the power NO
supply voltage Correct the power voltage.
normal?
YES
Is the
magnetic switch NO
(K2M, K3M) Replace the magnetic
normal? switch.
YES
Check the wiring from power supply ~ current sensor (A6P, A7P) ~
MgS (K2M, K3M) ~ compressor
Is NO
above wiring Correct wiring.
correct?
YES
Is
current sensor NO
Replace the corresponding
correct? 1 current sensor
(A6P or A7P).
YES
Replace the compressor.
Note: 1 Abnormal case

The current sensor value is 0 during STD compressor operation.
The current sensor value is more than 15.0A during STD compressor stop.
Troubleshooting 236
3.22 E7 Outdoor Unit: Malfunction of Outdoor Unit Fan

Motor
Remote E7
Controller
Display
Models
Method of Malfunction of fan motor system is detected from the fan speed detected by hall IC while the fan
Malfunction motor is in operation.
Detection
Malfunction When the fan runs with speed less than a specified one for 6 seconds or more when the fan
Decision motor running conditions are met
Conditions When connector detecting fan speed is disconnected
When malfunction is generated 4 times, the system shuts down.
Supposed Malfunction of fan motor

Causes The harness connector between fan motor and PCB is left in disconnected, or faulty
connector
Fan does not run due to foreign matters tangled
Clearing condition: Operate for 5 minutes (normal)
237 Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
Turn OFF the power supply,

and then wait for a period of
10 minutes.
Are there YES

any foreign matters around Remove the foreign matters.
the fan?
NO
Any of
the fan motor
connectors X1A and YES
X3A or the relay harness Insert the connector
connectors Z5C, Z9C, disconnected.
and X1A is
disconnected.
NO
Different
power supply
cable connector and
signal cable connector YES
have been connected to the Use connectors of the same
relay harness. (Power supply color in combination for the
and signal cable connectors power supply and signal
of different colors are cables for the relay harness
connected for one
and the same (e.g. natural color to natural
motor.) color, or red to red).
NO
Connectors
of harness between
the compressor inverter YES
PCB and the fan Insert the connectors in the
inverter PCB (A4P harness.
and A8P) are
disconnected.
NO
The fuse
(white tubular fuse) YES
on the fan inverter PCB has a Replace the fan inverter
broken wire (has no PCB.
continuity).
NO
With
the connector
disconnected from the YES
fan motor, the fan Replace the outdoor unit fan
cannot be rotated motor.
by hand.
NO
Resistance
between the fan motor
power supply cable terminal YES
Replace the outdoor unit fan
and the motor frame motor.
(metal part) is not
more than
1M.
NO
A
Troubleshooting 238
Troubleshooting
CHECK 1
Check for the fan motor
connector (Power supply cable)
Resistance
of the U, V, and W
phases of the fan motor YES
has got imbalanced or short Replace the outdoor unit fan
circuits have been established motor.
among the U, V,
and W
phases.
NO
CHECK 2
Check for the fan motor
connector (Signal cable)
Has a
short circuit been
established between
the fan motor signal cables YES
Vcc and GND, and UVW motor.
and GND,
respectively?
NO
Turn ON the power supply.
The LED
(HAP) on the
compressor inverter PCB YES
is blinking, but the LED (HAP) Replace the fan inverter
on the fan inverter PCB.
PCB is not
blinking.
NO
motor.
Note: Refer to CHECK 1 and CHECK 2 on P.305.
239 Troubleshooting

Electronic Expansion Valve (Y1E, Y2E)
Remote E9
Controller
Display
Applicable RXQ5PA~54PAY1
Models
Method of Check disconnection of connector

Malfunction Check continuity of expansion valve coil
Detection
Malfunction Error is generated under no common power supply when the power is on.
Decision
Conditions
Supposed Defect of moving part of electronic expansion valve

Causes Defect of outdoor unit PCB (A1P)
Defect of connecting cable
Troubleshooting 240
Troubleshooting
Turn power supply off, and

turn power supply on again.
YES
Return to normal? External factor other than
malfunction (for example, noise
NO etc.).
Electronic
expansion valve is
connected to X21A and NO
After connecting, turn the power
X23A of outdoor unit off and then back on again.
PCB * X26A only for RXYQ5M
(A1P).
YES
Normal
when coil
check (1) of the moving NO
part of the electronic Replace the moving part of the
expansion valve is electronic expansion valve.
checked.
YES
The connecting YES

cable is short-circuited or Replace the connecting cable.
disconnected.
NO
Replace the outdoor unit PCB
(A1P).
Make measurement of resistance

between the connector pins, and
then make sure the resistance
falls in the range of 40 to 50.
(Orange) 1
(Red) 2
Measuring points
(Yellow) 3 1-6
2-6
(Black) 4
3-6
5 4-6
(Gray) 6
241 Troubleshooting
3.24 F3 Outdoor Unit: Abnormal Discharge Pipe

Temperature
Remote F3
Controller
Display
Models
Method of Abnormality is detected according to the temperature detected by the discharge pipe
Malfunction temperature sensor.
Detection
Malfunction When the discharge pipe temperature rises to an abnormally high level
Decision When the discharge pipe temperature rises suddenly
Conditions
Supposed Faulty discharge pipe temperature sensor

Causes Faulty connection of discharge pipe temperature sensor
Faulty outdoor unit PCB
Troubleshooting
Discharge
pipe temperature is 115C YES
or higher when the unit stop Refrigerant shortage, compression
by malfunction. defect, etc. Defect of the
refrigerant system.
NO
Pull out the discharge pipe
thermistor from the outdoor
PCB, and then make
measurement of resistance
Are
the characteristics
of the discharge pipe NO
Replace the discharge pipe
thermistor normal? thermistor.
(3.5~400k)

YES
(A1P).
Troubleshooting 242
3.25 F6 Outdoor Unit: Refrigerant Overcharged

Remote F6
Controller
Display
Models
Method of Excessive charging of refrigerant is detected by using the outside air temperature, heat
Malfunction exchanging deicer temperature and liquid pipe temperature during a check run.
Detection
Malfunction When the amount of refrigerant, which is calculated by using the outside air temperature, heat
Decision exchanging deicer temperature and liquid pipe temperature during a check run, exceeds the
Conditions standard.
Supposed Refrigerant overcharge

Causes Misalignment of the outside air thermistor
Misalignment of the heat exchanging deicer thermistor
Misalignment of the liquid pipe thermistor
Troubleshooting
Check the mounting condition of

the temperature sensors of the
outside air thermistor, heat
exchanging deicer thermistor and
liquid pipe thermistor in the piping.
Are the
above thermistor NO
installed on pipes Install the thermistor correctly.
correctly?
YES
Remove the outside air thermistor,
heat exchanging deicer thermistor
and the liquid pipe thermistor from
the outdoor PCB and measure
resistance with a tester.
Is the
characteristic of the NO
above thermistor Replace the thermistor.
normal?
YES
Rectify the overcharge of the
refrigerant.
243 Troubleshooting
3.26 H7 Outdoor Unit: Abnormal Outdoor Fan Motor Signal

Remote H7
Controller
Display
Models
Method of Detection of abnormal signal from fan motor.

Malfunction
Detection
Malfunction In case of detection of abnormal signal at starting fan motor.

Decision
Conditions
Supposed Abnormal fan motor signal (circuit malfunction)

Causes Broken, short or disconnection connector of fan motor connection cable
Fan Inverter PCB malfunction
Troubleshooting
Turn power off.
Is the fan
motor connector NO
X2A connected to PCB Connect correctly.
for Fan inverter
correctly?
YES
Check connector of fan motor.
(+1)
The
resistance of
fan motor read wire
connector pins between NO
Vcc-UVW and
GND-UVW
balanced?
YES
Replace the fan inverter PCB.
(A3P)
1: Disconnect connector (X2A) and measure the following resistance.

X2A
5 Gray GND
4 Pink Vcc Measure the

resistance
between Vcc-
UVW and
3 Orange W GND-UVW.
2 Blue V
1 Yellow U
Troubleshooting 244

Outdoor Air
Remote H9
Controller
Display
Models
Method of Malfunction is detected from the temperature detected by the outdoor air thermistor.
Malfunction
Detection
Malfunction When the outside air temperature thermistor has short circuit or open circuit.
Decision
Conditions
Supposed Defect of thermistor (R1T) for outdoor air

Troubleshooting
Connector is
connected to X18A of NO
Connect the connector and turn on
outdoor PCB again.
(A1P).
YES
Resistance
is normal when
measured after
disconnecting the thermistor NO
Replace the thermistor (R1T)
(R1T) from the outdoor
unit PCB.
(1.8k to
800k)
YES
(A1P).
245 Troubleshooting
3.28 J2 Outdoor Unit: Current Sensor Malfunction

Remote J2
Controller
Display
Models
Method of Malfunction is detected according to the current value detected by current sensor.
Malfunction
Detection
Malfunction When the current value detected by current sensor becomes 5A or lower, or 40A or more during
Decision standard compressor operation.
Conditions
Supposed Faulty current sensor (A6P, A7P)

Causes Faulty outdoor unit PCB
Troubleshooting
Is the
connector for
current sensor NO
connected to X25A, X26A Connect the connector, and
on outdoor unit operate unit again.
PCB
(A1P)?
YES
Are the
current sensors inversely YES
connected to two STD Correct the connections between
compressors? the current sensors and the STD
compressors.
NO
Is the
current sensor
mounted on the T-phase NO
Mount the current sensor
(A6P) and R-phase correctly, and operate unit again.
(A7P) wire?
YES
Replace the current sensor and
outdoor unit PCB.
Troubleshooting 246
3.29 J3 Outdoor Unit: Malfunction of Discharge Pipe

Thermistor (R3, R31~33T)
Remote J3
Controller
Display
Models
Method of Malfunction is detected from the temperature detected by discharge pipe temperature
Detection
Malfunction When a short circuit or an open circuit in the discharge pipe temperature thermistor is detected.
Decision
Conditions
Supposed Defect of thermistor (R31T, R32T or R33T) for outdoor unit discharge pipe
Defect of thermistor connection
Troubleshooting
Confirm which discharge

thermistor is abnormal using
outdoor unit "monitor mode".
(Refer to P.202 and 204)
Connector
is connected to X29A NO
of outdoor unit Connect the connector and turn on
PCB again.
(A1P).
YES
Resistance
is normal when
measured after
disconnecting the thermistor NO
R31, 32T or R33T from the Replace the thermistor (R31, 32T
outdoor unit PCB. or R33T)
(2.5k to
1.3k)
YES
(A1P).
The alarm indicator is displayed when the fan is being used also.
Note: 5 HP class R3T

8~12 HP class R31T, R32T
14, 16 HP class R31T, R32T and R33T
247 Troubleshooting
3.30 J5 Outdoor Unit: Malfunction of Thermistor (R2T, R7T)

for Suction Pipe
Remote J5
Controller
Display
Models
Method of Malfunction is detected from the temperature detected by the suction pipe temperature
Detection
Malfunction When a short circuit or an open circuit in the suction pipe temperature thermistor is detected.
Decision
Conditions
Supposed Defect of thermistor (R2T), (R7T) for outdoor unit suction pipe
Troubleshooting
Connector
is connected to NO
X30A, of outdoor unit Connect the connector and turn on
PCB. again.
(A1P)
YES
Resistance
is normal when
measured after dis- NO
connecting the thermistor Replace the thermistor R2T.
(R2T), (R7T) from the
outdoor unit PCB.
(1.8k to
800k)
YES
(A1P).
Troubleshooting 248

Outdoor Unit Heat Exchanger
Remote J6
Controller
Display
Models
Method of Malfunction is detected from the temperature detected by the heat exchanger thermistor.
Malfunction
Detection
Malfunction When a short circuit or an open circuit in the heat exchange thermistor is detected.
Decision
Conditions
Supposed Defect of thermistor (R4T) for outdoor unit coil

Troubleshooting
Connector
is connected to X30A NO
Connect the connector and turn on
of outdoor unit PCB
(A1P). again.
YES
Resistance
is normal when
measured after NO
disconnecting the thermistor Replace the thermistor R4T.
R4T from the indoor
unit PCB.
(1.8k to
800k)
YES
(A1P).
249 Troubleshooting
3.32 J7 Outdoor Unit: Malfunction of Liquid Pipe

Thermistor (R6T)
Remote J7
Controller
Display
Models
Method of Malfunction is detected according to the temperature detected by liquid pipe thermistor.
Malfunction
Detection
Malfunction When the liquid pipe thermistor is short circuited or open.

Decision
Conditions
Supposed Faulty liquid pipe thermistor (R6T)

Troubleshooting
Is
the connector
for liquid pipe
thermistor connected to NO
Connect the connector and
X30A on outdoor operate unit again.
unit PCB
(A1P)?
YES
Is the
resistance
measured after
removing the thermistor NO
(R6T) from outdoor unit Replace thermistor (R6T).
PCB normal?
(1.8k to
800k)
YES Replace the outdoor unit PCB

(A1P).
Troubleshooting 250
3.33 J9 Outdoor Unit: Malfunction of Subcooling Heat

Exchanger Gas Pipe Thermistor (R5T)
Remote J9
Controller
Display
Models
Method of Malfunction is detected according to the temperature detected by subcooling heat exchanger
Malfunction gas pipe thermistor.
Detection
Malfunction When the subcooling heat exchanger gas pipe thermistor is short circuited or open.
Decision
Conditions
Supposed Faulty subcooling heat exchanger gas pipe thermistor (R5T)

Troubleshooting
Is
the connector
for subcooling heat
exchanger gas pipe NO
Connect the connector and
thermistor connected to operate unit again.
X30A on outdoor
unit PCB
(A1P)?
YES
Is the
resistance
measured after
removing the thermistor NO
(R5T) from outdoor unit Replace the thermistor (R5T).
PCB normal?
(1.8k to
800k)
YES Replace the outdoor unit PCB

(A1P).
251 Troubleshooting
3.34 JA Outdoor Unit: Malfunction of High Pressure Sensor

Remote JA
Controller
Display
Models
Method of Malfunction is detected from the pressure detected by the high pressure sensor.
Malfunction
Detection
Malfunction When the high pressure sensor is short circuit or open circuit.
Decision
Conditions
Supposed Defect of high pressure sensor system

Causes Connection of low pressure sensor with wrong connection
Troubleshooting
The high
pressure sensor is NO
connected to X32A of Connect the high pressure sensor
outdoor unit PCB and turn on again.
(A1P).
YES
The
relationship
between the 1
VH and high pressure
is normal (see 2) when YES
voltage is measured between Replace the outdoor unit PCB
X32A pins (1) and (3) of (A1P).
outdoor unit PCB
(A1P)
(see 1).
NO Replace the high pressure sensor.

1: Voltage measurement point
2: Refer to Pressure Sensor, Pressure / Voltage Characteristics table on P.360.
Troubleshooting 252
3.35 JC Outdoor Unit: Malfunction of Low Pressure Sensor

Remote JC
Controller
Display
Models
Method of Malfunction is detected from pressure detected by low pressure sensor.

Malfunction
Detection
Malfunction When the low pressure sensor is short circuit or open circuit.
Decision
Conditions
Supposed Defect of low pressure sensor system

Causes Connection of high pressure sensor with wrong connection
Troubleshooting
The low
pressure sensor is NO
connected to X31A of Connect low pressure sensor
outdoor unit PCB
(A1P). property and restart system.
YES
The
relationship
between the 1
VL and low pressure is
normal (see 2) when voltage YES
is measured between X31A pins Replace the outdoor unit PCB
(2) and (3) of outdoor unit (A1P).
PCB (A1P)
(see 1).
NO
Replace the low pressure sensor.
1: Voltage measurement point
253 Troubleshooting
3.36 L4 Outdoor Unit: Malfunction of Inverter Radiating Fin

Temperature Rise
Remote L4
Controller
Display
Models
Method of Fin temperature is detected by the thermistor of the radiation fin.

Malfunction
Detection
Malfunction When the temperature of the inverter radiation fin increases above 93C.
Decision
Conditions
Supposed Actuation of fin thermal (Actuates above 93C)

Causes Defect of inverter PCB
Defect of fin thermistor
Troubleshooting
Fin temperature YES

of the compressor Faulty radiation from the
inverter is high. If the fin reaches a switch box:
Power OFF temperature of 93C, the Conduct the checks
NO malfunction will occur. shown below.
Radiation fin for stains
Remove and insert the fin thermistor Airflow for interference
connector "X111A" (A3P). Fan propeller for damage
Whether or not outdoor
temperature is too high
Turn ON
the power supply, YES
and then check whether or Replace the inverter
Power ON not the malfunction PCB.
recurs.
NO
End of measures
It is supposed that
radiation fin
temperature has risen
due to onsite causes.
Conduct the checks
shown below.
Radiation fin for stains
Airflow for interference
Fan propeller for
damage
Whether or not
outdoor temperature
is too high
Troubleshooting 254
Inverter PCB for compressor
255 Troubleshooting
3.37 L5 Outdoor Unit: Inverter Compressor Abnormal

Remote L5
Controller
Display
Models
Method of Malfunction is detected from current flowing in the power transistor.

Malfunction
Detection
Malfunction When an excessive current flows in the power transistor.

Decision (Instantaneous overcurrent also causes activation.)
Conditions
Supposed Defect of compressor coil (disconnected, defective insulation)

Causes Compressor start-up malfunction (mechanical lock)
Defect of inverter PCB
Troubleshooting
Compressor inspection
NO
Is the stop valve open? Onsite causes.
YES
Power OFF
Check the compressor cable
for disconnection and flaws.
The YES
compressor cable has Replace the cable, and
a defect. then securely connect the
connectors.
NO
Troubleshooting 256
Troubleshooting
A
Power OFF The insulation YES

resistance is low (i.e., Replace the compressor.
not more than
100k.)
NO
Check the compressor motor
coil for any broken wire.
Some phase has a YES

broken wire.
NO
Check the power transistor on

the inverter PCB using a
multiple tester. [For details,
refer to information in the
"Check for power transistor"
on P.361.
The power YES

transistor has an A3P: Replace the inverter
abnormality. PCB.
NO
Make wire connections according
to the Wiring Diagram.
Restart the NO
compressor, and then Normal
Power ON check whether or not
the malfunction Onsite causes such as
recurs. instantaneous power
failure or open phase
YES Conduct checks and
diagnosis of the
Replace the inverter PCB. compressor.
Power OFF
Restart the
compressor, and then NO End of work
Power ON
check whether or not
the malfunction
recurs.
YES Replace the compressor.
Conduct checks and
diagnosis of the
compressor.
257 Troubleshooting
3.38 L8 Outdoor Unit: Inverter Current Abnormal

Remote L8
Controller
Display
Models
Method of Malfunction is detected by current flowing in the power transistor.

Malfunction
Detection
Malfunction When overload in the compressor is detected. (Inverter secondary current 16.1A (Y1))
Decision
Conditions
Supposed Compressor overload

Causes Compressor coil disconnected
Faulty compressor
Troubleshooting Output current check

Power ON A current
of not less than 15A flows YES
through the compressor. Overcurrent:
Check the compressor
and refrigerant system
NO (in the same manner as
that for E3).
Is the stop valve NO
open?
YES
Are wire
connections properly NO
made (according to the Rectify the wire
Wiring Diagram)? Check the compressor cable for connections.
any disconnection or flaws.
YES
Power OFF
The insulation YES

resistance is low, i.e., Replace the
not more than compressor.
100k.)
NO
multiple tester.
Does the YES

power transistor have any Replace the inverter
abnormalities? PCB.
The inverter is likely to
NO have got faulty due to
the malfunction of the
Connect the compressor cable, compressor.
and then restart the operation. After the completion of
replacement, be sure
A to check the
compressor.
Troubleshooting 258
Troubleshooting
Is a difference
between high pressure NO
and low pressure prior Faulty pressure
to startup equalization:
0.2MPa? Check the refrigerant
system.
YES
Power ON NO
Does the malfunction End of measures:
L8 recur? It can take a maximum of 60 minutes Check the refrigerant
to determine the malfunction. system.
YES
Check of compressor:
for abnormal sounds,
vibration, operating
conditions, and others
according to the
Compressor Diagnosis
Procedure.
259 Troubleshooting
3.39 L9 Outdoor Unit: Inverter Start up Error

Remote L9
Controller
Display
Models
Method of This malfunction code will be output if overcurrent occurs at the time of startup.
Malfunction
Detection
Malfunction When the startup control is failed.

Decision When an overcurrent is passed to the inverter due to the malfunction of a compressor or
Conditions electrical system.
Supposed Defect of compressor Failure to open the stop valve

Causes Pressure differential start Faulty compressor connection
Troubleshooting
Is the stop valve NO

open?
YES
Are wire
connections properly NO
made (according to the Rectify the wire
Wiring Diagram)? Check the compressor cable for connections.
any disconnection or flaws.
YES
Power OFF
The insulation YES

resistance is low. (i.e., Replace the
not more than compressor.
100k.)
NO
multiple tester.
Does the YES

power transistor have any Replace the inverter
abnormalities? PCB.
The inverter is likely to
NO have got faulty due to
the malfunction of the
Connect the compressor cable, compressor.
and then restart the operation. After the completion of
replacement, be sure
A to check the
compressor.
Troubleshooting 260
Troubleshooting
A
Is a difference
between high pressure NO
and low pressure prior Faulty pressure
to startup equalization:
0.2MPa? Check the refrigerant
system.
YES
Power ON NO
Does the malfunction End of measures:
L9 recur? It can take a maximum of 60 minutes Check the refrigerant
to determine the malfunction. system.
YES
Check of compressor:
for abnormal sounds,
vibration, operating
conditions, and others
according to the
Compressor Diagnosis
Procedure.
261 Troubleshooting
3.40 LC Outdoor Unit: Malfunction of Transmission

Between Inverter and Control PCB
Remote LC
Controller
Display
Models
Method of Check the communication state between inverter PCB and control PCB by micro-computer.
Malfunction
Detection
Malfunction When the correct communication is not conducted in certain period.

Decision
Conditions
Supposed Malfunction of connection between the inverter PCB and outdoor control PCB
Causes Defect of outdoor control PCB (transmission section)
Defect of noise filter
Faulty fan inverter
Incorrect type of fan inverter
Faulty compressor
Faulty fan motor
Troubleshooting 262
Troubleshooting
Are the fan

transmission wire
connectors (X3A: Black, NO Connect the connectors
X4A: Yellow) wrongly to the corresponding
connected? color (black or yellow).
YES
Power ON
Check
whether or not
the power supply voltage NO
between L2 and N falls in Onsite cause.
the range of 220 to Correct the wiring.
240VAC?
YES
Is the type NO
(PC No.) of the fan Mount the correct type
inverter correct? of fan inverter.
FAN1 FAN2
YES RXQ5PA PC0511-3 -
Disconnect the cable from the RXQ8PA PC0511-1 -
RXQ10PA PC0511-1 -
compressor, and then check RXQ12PA PC0511-3 PC0511-4
Power OFF insulation resistance.
RXQ16PA PC0511-3 PC0511-4
RXQ18PA PC0511-1 PC0511-2
The insulation YES

resistance is low. (i.e., not Replace the
more than compressor.
100k.)
NO
fan, and then check the fan
motor for the insulation
resistance.
The insulation YES

resistance is low. (i.e., not Replace the fan motor.
more than Replace the fan driver
1M.) PCB.
NO
Check for connector connections: Remove and insert the connectors shown below.
RXQ-PA
[Fan 1] [Fan 2]
A1P X28A X6A A3P A4P X51A X5A A8P
A1P X20A X4A A3P A4P X4A X3A A8P
A3P X61A X402A A2P A8P X4A Short connector
A3P X1A X403A A2P
A3P X5A X5A A4P Note) X3A: black
A3P X41A X3A A4P X4A: yellow
A4P X4A Short connector
F400U of the YES Replace the noise

A2P has been filter of the A2P.
molten.
NO
A F400U
RXQ-PA
263 Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
A
Is the micro-controller NO
normal monitor (green) of This is not LC.
the A1P blinking? Recheck for the
malfunction code.
YES Check 10 or more seconds after
the power supply is turned ON.
Power ON Are the
micro-controller YES
normal monitor (green) of A3P: Replace the
the A3P, A4P and A8P inverter PCB.
blinking? If the PCB replaced is
badly damaged, the
NO compressor is likely to
get faulty. To make
sure, recheck the
compressor.
Is the
micro-controller normal YES
A4P/A8P: Replace the
monitor of the A4P or fan driver
A8P blinking? PCB.
NO
YES
The LC malfunction recurs. Replace the control
PCB.
NO
End of measures:
The malfunction may
temporarily result from
onsite causes.
Causes:
Instantaneous power
failure (open phase),
noises, or else.
Troubleshooting 264
3.41 P1 Outdoor Unit: Inverter Over-Ripple Protection

Remote P1
Controller
Display
Models
Method of Imbalance in supply voltage is detected in PCB.

Malfunction Imbalance in the power supply voltage causes increased ripple of voltage of the main circuit
Detection capacitor in the inverter. Consequently, the increased ripple is detected.
Malfunction When the resistance value of thermistor becomes a value equivalent to open or short circuited
Decision status.
Conditions Malfunction is not decided while the unit operation is continued.
"P1" will be displayed by pressing the inspection button.
When the amplitude of the ripple exceeding a certain value is detected for consecutive 4
minutes.
Supposed Open phase

Causes Voltage imbalance between phases
Defect of main circuit capacitor
Defect of K2 relay in inverter PCB
Improper main circuit wiring
Troubleshooting
Imbalance
in supplied voltage is YES YES
Open phase? Open phase
in excess of 14 V Normalize field cause.
(Y1). 1
NO NO
Fix power supply voltage
imbalance.
Part or wiring defect
Is After turning the power supply
the voltage OFF, check and repair the
imbalance applied to the YES
main circuit wiring or parts.
inverter in excess of (1) Loose or disconnected
14 V (Y1)? wiring between power
2 supply and inverter
(2) K2 contact disposition,
NO <When voltage monitoring is possible:> fusion or contact is poor.
(3) Loose or disconnected
Using a device capable of noise filter
constant recording of power
supply voltage record
power supply voltage 1. Measure voltage at the X1M power supply
between 3 phases (L1 ~ L2, terminal block.
L2 ~ L3, L3~L1) for about 2. Measure voltage at terminals RED, BLACK
one continuous week. and WHITE wires of the diode module inside
the inverter while the compressor is running.
No abnormalities are
observed in the power Power supply voltage imbalance
supply, but the imbalance
in voltage recurs. measure
Replace the inverter PCB.
Explanation for users In accordance with "notification of inspection results" accompanying spare parts.
Give the user a copy of "notification of inspection results" and leave Be sure to explain to the user that
it up to him to improve the imbalance. there is a "power supply imbalance"
for which DAIKIN is not responsible.
265 Troubleshooting
3.42 P4 Outdoor Unit: Malfunction of Inverter Radiating Fin

Temperature Rise Sensor
Remote P4
Controller
Display
Models
Method of Resistance of radiation fin thermistor is detected when the compressor is not operating.
Malfunction
Detection
Malfunction When the resistance value of thermistor becomes a value equivalent to open or short circuited
Decision status.
Conditions Malfunction is not decided while the unit operation is continued.
"P4" will be displayed by pressing the inspection button.
Supposed Defect of radiator fin temperature sensor

Causes Defect of inverter PCB
Troubleshooting

Power OFF compressor, and then check
The insulation YES

resistance is low (i.e., not more than Replace the
100k.) compressor.
NO
resistance.
The insulation YES

resistance is low (i.e., not more than Replace the fan motor.
1M.) Replace the fan driver
PCB.
NO
Remove and insert the fin thermistor

connector "X111A" (A3P).
Turn ON the YES

Power ON power supply, and then check whether Replace the inverter
or not the malfunction PCB.
recurs.
NO
End
Troubleshooting 266
Inverter PCB for compressor
267 Troubleshooting

Main PCB or Faulty Combination of PCB
Remote PJ
Controller
Display
Models
Method of The faulty (or no) field setting after replacing PCB or faulty PCB combination is detected through
Malfunction communications with the inverter.
Detection
Malfunction Whether or not the field setting or the type of the PCB is correct through the communication
Decision date is judged.
Conditions
Supposed Faulty (or no) field setting after replacing main PCB
Causes Mismatching of type of PCB
Troubleshooting
Has the PCB NO

been replaced?
YES
When
replacing the NO
main PCB, were field Correct the field
setting properly settings.
made?
YES
Is the type of NO
PCB correct? Replace with a correct
PCB.
YES
Reset, and then restart.
Note) Type of PCB mismatching includes;

Main PCB
Inverter PCB (for compressor)
Fan driver PCB
Troubleshooting 268
3.44 U0 Outdoor Unit: Low Pressure Drop Due to

Refrigerant Shortage or Electronic Expansion Valve
Failure
Remote U0
Controller
Display
Models
Method of Short of gas malfunction is detected by discharge pipe temperature thermistor.

Malfunction
Detection
Malfunction Microcomputer judge and detect if the system is short of refrigerant.

Decision Malfunction is not decided while the unit operation is continued.
Conditions
Supposed Out of gas or refrigerant system clogging (incorrect piping)

Causes Defect of low pressure sensor
Defect of outdoor unit PCB (A1P)
Defect of thermistor R7T or R4T
Troubleshooting
YES Low pressure YES

Cooling is 0.1 MPa Out of gas, closing of stop
or less. valve or refrigerant system is
clogged. Requires check of
NO NO refrigerant system.
The
voltage
of X31A pins (2)
and (3) on main
outdoor unit PCB YES
Replace the main outdoor
(A1P) is 0.8 VDC or less. unit PCB (A1P).
(Low pressure
sensor output
voltage)
2
NO Replace the low pressure
A difference sensor.
between suction pipe and YES
outdoor unit heat exchanger Out of gas or refrigerant
temperature is 20 C system is clogged. Requires
or higher. check of refrigerant system.
NO
Resistance
is normal when
measured with the
suction pipe thermistor NO
(R7T) and coil thermistor Replace the thermistor.
(R4T) disconnected
from the outdoor
unit PCB.
1
YES
(A1P).
1: Refer to Thermistor Resistance / Temperature Characteristics table on P.358.

269 Troubleshooting
3.45 U1 Reverse Phase, Open Phase

Remote U1
Controller
Display
Models
Method of The phase of each phase are detected by reverse phase detection circuit and right phase or
Malfunction reverse phase are judged.
Detection
Malfunction When a significant phase difference is made between phases.

Decision
Conditions
Supposed Power supply reverse phase

Causes Power supply open phase
Defect of outdoor PCB (A1P)
Troubleshooting
There
is an open phase
at the power supply YES
terminal section (X1M) Fix the open phase. Requires
of the outdoor inspection of field power supply
unit. section.
NO
Operation
is normal if one YES
place of power supply Reverse phase.
line phase is Counter measure of the problem is
replaced. completed by phase replacement.
NO
(A1P).
Troubleshooting 270

Instantaneous Failure
Remote U2
Controller
Display
Models
Method of Detection of voltage of main circuit capacitor built in the inverter and power supply voltage.
Malfunction
Detection
Malfunction When the voltage aforementioned is not less than 780V or not more than 320V, or when the
Decision current-limiting voltage does not reach 200V or more or exceeds 740V.
Conditions
Supposed Power supply insufficient

Causes Instantaneous power failure
Open phase
Defect of outdoor control PCB
Main circuit wiring defect
Faulty compressor
Faulty fan motor
Faulty connection of signal cable
271 Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
Check for
power supply voltage. NO
Voltage between phases: Onsite causes.
380 to 415V (Y1) Make proper wire connections
without open phase, erroneous
connections, or erroneous order of
YES phases.
Power ON
Unbalanced
power supply? (Not more NO
than 2%: Phase voltage of Onsite causes.
not more than Correct the unbalanced loads to
approx. 5V) eliminate the unbalanced state.
YES Unbalanced voltage will cause
extremely unbalanced current,
Disconnect the cable from the thus impairing the service life of or
compressor, and then check resulting in the malfunction of the
Power OFF the compressor for the equipment.
The insulation YES

resistance is low. (i.e., not more than Replace the compressor.
100k.)
NO
resistance.
The
insulation resistance is YES
low (i.e., not more than Replace the fan motor.
1M.) Replace the fan driver.
NO
Check the inverter power
transistor.
Has the YES

power transistor Replace the inverter PCB.
got faulty? Observe the conditions of the
NO PCB.
In the case of a serious failure, a
compressor failure may cause
the failure of the PCB. Even if
the PCB is replaced, it may
cause failure again.
To avoid that, recheck the
compressor for ground and for
Check the fan driver power any broken wires. Furthermore,
transistor. even after the completion of
PCB replacement, check the
compressor.
Has the YES
power transistor Replace the fan driver PCB.
got faulty? Observe the conditions of the
NO PCB.
Troubleshooting 272
Troubleshooting
A
Check for connector connections: Remove

and insert the connectors shown below.
Furthermore, check the connectors for
terminal conditions and continuity.
RXQPAY1:
X1M power receiving terminal X400A A2P If any wiring has damage, replace
A2P X401A X10A A3P the harness.
Power OFF A1P X28A X6A A3P
A3P X61A X402A A2P
A3P X1A X403A A2P
A3P P1, P2 Reactor terminal L1R
A3P P3, N3 P1, N1 A4P
A4P P2, N2 P1, N1 A8P
Has the YES

inverter PCB caused A3P: Replace the inverter PCB.
damage? If the PCB replaced is badly
damaged, the compressor is
NO likely to get faulty. To make sure,
recheck the compressor.
Has the YES
fan driver caused A4P/A8P: Replace the fan driver
damage? PCB.
If the PCB replaced is badly
NO damaged, the fan motor is likely
to get faulty. To make sure,
recheck the compressor.
Turn ON the power supply.
Stop (standby) YES Recheck for the power supply. If

before the fan rotates. there is no problem with the power
supply, replace the A2P noise filter
PCB.
NO If the malfunction recurs, replace
the inverter PCB.
Power ON Stop (standby) YES

when the compressor Recheck for the power supply. If
starts up. there is no problem with the power
supply, replace the A3P inverter
NO PCB.
If the PCB replaced is badly
damaged, compressor is likely to
get faulty. To make sure, recheck
the compressor.
The U2 YES
malfunction recurs. Check the harness, and then
replace it if necessary.
NO
End of measures:
The malfunction may temporarily
result from onsite causes.
Causes: Instantaneous power
failure (open phase), noises, or
else.
273 Troubleshooting
3.47 U3 Outdoor Unit: Check Operation not Executed

Remote U3
Controller
Display
Models
Method of Check operation is executed or not

Malfunction
Detection
Malfunction Malfunction is decided when the unit starts operation without check operation.
Decision
Conditions
Supposed Check operation is not executed.

Causes
Troubleshooting
Has the
check operation NO
performed on Outdoor Press and hold BS4 on the
unit PCB? outdoor master PCB for 5
seconds or more, or turn ON the
YES local setting mode 2-3 to conduct
a check operation.
Performs the check operation
again and completes the check
operation.
When a leakage detection
function is needed, normal
operation of charging refrigerant
must be completed. And then,
start once again and complete a
check operation.
Troubleshooting 274
3.48 U4 Malfunction of Transmission Between Indoor Units

Remote U4
Controller
Display
Applicable All model of indoor unit

Models RXQ5PA~54PA
Method of Microcomputer checks if transmission between indoor and outdoor units is normal.
Malfunction
Detection
Malfunction When transmission is not carried out normally for a certain amount of time
Decision
Conditions
Supposed Indoor to outdoor, outdoor to outdoor transmission wiring F1, F2 disconnection, short circuit
Causes or wrong wiring
Outdoor unit power supply is OFF
System address does not match
275 Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
Has
the indoor
or outdoor unit
PCB been replaced,
or has the indoor - outdoor YES
Push and hold the RESET
or outdoor - outdoor unit button on the master outdoor
transmission wiring unit PCB for 5 seconds.
been The unit will not operate for
modified? up to 12 minutes.
NO
All
indoor unit Is indoor
remote controllers of the NO - outdoor and outdoor - YES
same refrigerant system outdoor unit transmission Replace the indoor unit PCB
display wiring normal? indicated by the malfunction
"U4." code U4.
NO Fix the indoor/outdoor or
YES
outdoor/outdoor unit
Reset the power supply. transmission wiring.
Outdoor The
unit PCB voltage between
NO terminals L1 and N of the NO
microcomputer monitor Supply 220~240 V.
outdoor unit PCB
(HAP) blinks. is 220~240 V
10%.
YES
YES
The fuse on YES
the outdoor unit's Replace the fuse.
PCB is burnt.
NO Replace the outdoor unit

PCB.
NO Operation
ready lamp (H2P) is
blinking.
YES
Lamp does YES

not go off for 12 minutes Push and hold the RESET
or more. button on the outdoor unit
PCB for 5 seconds.
NO
Is
indoor - outdoor
and outdoor - outdoor unit NO
Fix the indoor/outdoor or
transmission wiring outdoor/outdoor unit
normal? transmission wiring.
YES
Disconnect
the outdoor-outdoor
unit transmission wiring, and NO
then check with a single (A1P).
system whether or
not it
is normal.
YES
Mount the DIII-NET extended
adaptor.
Troubleshooting 276

Remote Controller and Indoor Unit
Remote U5
Controller
Display
Applicable All models of indoor units

Models
Method of In case of controlling with 2-remote controller, check the system using microcomputer is signal
Malfunction transmission between indoor unit and remote controller (main and sub) is normal.
Detection
Malfunction Normal transmission does not continue for specified period.

Decision
Conditions
Supposed Malfunction of indoor unit remote controller transmission

Causes Connection of two main remote controllers (when using 2 remote controllers)
Defect of remote controller PCB
Malfunction of transmission caused by noise
Troubleshooting
Using SS1 of
YES both remote controllers YES
2-remote controllers Set one remote controller to
control. is set to "MAIN." "SUB"; turn the power supply
off once and then back on.
NO NO
All indoor Operation

PCB microcomputer NO returns to normal when NO
the power is turned off Replace the indoor unit
monitors blink. momentarily. PCB.
YES YES
There is possibility of
Replace the remote controller. malfunction caused by noise.
Check the surrounding area
and turn on again.
YES
Normal Normal
NO
YES
Normal Normal
NO
There is possibility of
malfunction caused by noise.
Check the surrounding area
and turn on again.
277 Troubleshooting

Outdoor Units
Remote U7
Controller
Display

Models
Method of Microcomputer checks if transmission between outdoor units.

Malfunction
Detection
Decision
Conditions
Supposed Improper connection of transmission wiring between outdoor unit and external control
Causes adaptor for outdoor unit
Improper connection of transmission wiring between outdoor units.
Improper cool/heat selection
Improper cool/heat unified address (outdoor unit, external control adaptor for outdoor unit)
Defect of external control adaptor for outdoor unit
Troubleshooting 278
Troubleshooting
Is there any
broken wire or erroneous NO
wire connection in the Fix the outdoor units multi
communication wiring of connection transmission
multi outdoor unit wiring and reset power.
system?
YES
YES
C/H SELECT is set to "IND". Replace the outdoor unit PCB
(A1P).
NO
Cool/Heat selection NO
Set C/H SELECT to "IND."
is unified.
YES
C/H SELECT YES
is set to The cool/heat unified
"MASTER." address for outdoor units in
outdoor - outdoor unit
NO transmission is duplicated.
Check Set the address correctly.
C/H SELECT YES NO
is set to and see if the following items Fix the problem.
"SLAVE." are normal.
NO
External control adaptor for outdoor unit
Is this PCB energized?
Does the cool/heat unified address match?
Outdoor unit (unified master unit)
Is this energized?
Does the cool/heat unified address match?
YES
Does a
malfunction occur when NO
the cool/heat selector is Replace the external control
set to "IND?" adaptor for outdoor unit.
YES
(A1P).
279 Troubleshooting

Main and Sub Remote Controllers
Remote U8
Controller
Display

Models
Method of In case of controlling with 2-remote controller, check the system using microcomputer if signal
Malfunction transmission between indoor unit and remote controller (main and sub) is normal.
Detection
Malfunction Normal transmission does not continue for specified period.

Decision
Conditions
Supposed Malfunction of transmission between main and sub remote controller

Causes Connection between sub remote controllers
Defect of remote controller PCB
Troubleshooting
Using 2-remote SS1 NO

NO of remote controller PCBs
controllers control. Set SS1 to "MAIN"; the
is set to "MAIN." power supply off once and
then back on.
YES YES
SS1 NO
of both remote controllers is Turn the power off and then
set to "SUB." back on. If a malfunction
occurs, replace the remote
controller PCB.
YES
Set one remote controller to
"MAIN"; the power supply
off once and then back on.
Troubleshooting 280

Indoor and Outdoor Units in the Same System
Remote U9
Controller
Display

Models
Method of Detect the malfunction signal of any other indoor unit within the system concerned.
Malfunction
Detection
Malfunction When the malfunction decision is made on any other indoor unit within the system concerned.
Decision
Conditions
Supposed Malfunction of transmission within or outside of other system

Causes Malfunction of electronic expansion valve in indoor unit of other system
Defect of PCB of indoor unit in other system
Improper connection of transmission wiring between indoor and outdoor unit
Troubleshooting
Turn on all indoor units.
"U9" NO
has been displayed for 2 Re-diagnose by display after
minutes or more. passage of 2 minutes or more.
YES
The outdoor unit PCB indicated
by the malfunction code U9 is
normal.
Check for the indoor unit of other
system, and then conduct
troubleshooting by diagnosis
according to the Malfunction
Code Flowchart.
281 Troubleshooting

Indoor Units and Remote Controller
Remote UA
Controller
Display
Applicable All models of indoor unit

Models RXQ5PA~54PA
Method of A difference occurs in data by the type of refrigerant between indoor and outdoor units.
Malfunction The number of indoor units is out of the allowable range.
Detection
Malfunction The malfunction decision is made as soon as either of the abnormalities aforementioned is
Decision detected.
Conditions
Supposed Excess of connected indoor units

Mismatching of the refrigerant type of indoor and outdoor unit.
Setting of outdoor PCB was not conducted after replacing to spare parts PCB.
Troubleshooting 282
Troubleshooting
Reset all power supplies for

indoor and outdoor units
connected to one and the
same system.
Is the NO
malfunction code "UA" Normal
displayed? (It is assumed that the code is
displayed due to temporary
YES external cause (e.g. noises).
Is the
malfunction code
"UA" displayed for all indoor YES
units connected to one and
the same
system?
Is the outdoor
NO PCB replaced YES
The setting after replacing spare
to spare parts PCB? PCB has not been set yet. Please
Is
the type of set as per page 166, 167.
refrigerant for the
indoor units with "UA" NO NO
displayed corresponding Correct the combination of indoor
to that for the units with "UA" displayed.
outdoor
units? The total
of indoor units
YES displaying "UA" and
indoor units connected to the NO The number of indoor units that
same refrigerant system is can be connected to a single
within connectable outdoor unit system is excess of
number of allowable range.
unit
YES
Does the
refrigerant type of indoor NO
Matches the refrigerant type of
and outdoor unit indoor and outdoor unit.
match?
YES
Is it a multi NO
outdoor unit connection Replace the outdoor unit main
system? PCB.
YES
Is the
combination of master NO
Change to a correct combination.
unit and slave unit
correct?
YES
Replace the outdoor unit main
PCB.
The number of indoor units that can be connected to a single outdoor unit system depends on
the model of outdoor unit.
283 Troubleshooting
3.54 UC Address Duplication of Centralized Controller

Remote UC
Controller
Display
Applicable All models of indoor unit

Models Centralized controller
Method of The principal indoor unit detects the same address as that of its own on any other indoor unit.
Malfunction
Detection
Malfunction The malfunction decision is made as soon as the abnormality aforementioned is detected.
Decision
Conditions
Supposed Address duplication of centralized controller

Causes
Troubleshooting
The centralized address is

duplicated. Make setting change so that
the centralized address will
not be duplicated.
Troubleshooting 284

Controller and Indoor Unit
Remote UE
Controller
Display
Applicable All models of indoor units intelligent Touch Controller

Models Centralized controller
Schedule timer
Method of Microcomputer checks if transmission between indoor unit and centralized controller is normal.
Malfunction
Detection
Decision
Conditions
Supposed Malfunction of transmission between optional controllers for centralized control and indoor
Causes unit
Connector for setting master controller is disconnected.
(or disconnection of connector for independent / combined use changeover switch.)
Failure of PCB for centralized remote controller
285 Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
Check
the indoor
unit for which
UE is displayed.
Is the the transmission YES
Continued to A
malfunction (UE) (on the following
caused on page)
all indoor
units?
NO
Is the
power supply of NO
the indoor unit, on which Make sure there are no
the UE occurred, hazardous situations, and
turned ON? then turn ON the power
supply.
YES
Has
the setting of Can
central control group No. NO the setting of YES
been made with the central control group Make correct setting of the
indoor unit on which No be made? central control group No.
the UE
occurred?
NO
YES
For VRV
systems, can the
setting of central control group NO
Check outdoor units to which
No. be made in one and the refrigerant system is
the same refrigerant connected.
system?
Was YES
the central Check whether or not there
NO are no problems with the
control group No.
for indoor unit transmission wiring length,
changed? types of cables and wires,
number of units connected,
YES and others. If no problems,
replace the indoor unit PCB.
Reset the power supplies of

every central equipment.
For the intelligent Touch
controller, register the air
conditioner again while in
DIII-NET test run menu.
Troubleshooting 286
Troubleshooting
A
Check the
transmission
wiring between central
equipment for any broken Abnormal
wire. For details, refer to Correct the wiring.
information in the Procedure
for checking broken
wires section.
(Refer to P.298)
Normal
Has the
master unit central NO
setting connector been Correct the connection of the
connected? connector.
YES
Disconnect the transmission
wiring of the master unit
central equipment, and then
check the voltage between the
transmission terminals (F1 and
F2) of the master unit
transmission equipment using
a multiple meter.
Is the
voltage between
the terminals F1 (+) NO
and F2 (-) in the range of Replace the central
15.2 to 17.6 equipment.
VDC?
YES
Central equipment: Normal
It is supposed that the

malfunction results from
external factors (e.g. noises)
from other equipment.
287 Troubleshooting
3.56 UF System is not Set yet

Remote UF
Controller
Display

Models RXQ5PA~54PA
Method of On check operation, the number of indoor units in terms of transmission is not corresponding to
Malfunction that of indoor units that have made changes in temperature.
Detection
Malfunction The malfunction is determined as soon as the abnormality aforementioned is detected through
Decision checking the system for any erroneous connection of units on the check operation.
Conditions
Supposed Improper connection of transmission wiring between indoor-outdoor units and outdoor-
Causes outdoor units
Failure to execute check operation
Stop valve is left in closed
Troubleshooting
Are the stop NO

valves opened? Open stop valve.
YES
Is the Is indoor
NO -outdoor and outdoor- YES
check operation Replace the indoor unit PCB.
carried out? outdoor unit transmission
wiring normal?
YES
NO
Is
indoor - outdoor NO
and outdoor - outdoor unit After fixing incorrect wiring,
transmission wiring push and hold the RESET
normal? button on the master outdoor
unit PCB for 5 seconds.
YES The unit will not run for up to
12 minutes.
Wiring check operation may

not have been carried out
successfully.
Note: Wiring check operation may not be successful if carried out after the outdoor unit has been off
for more than 12 hours, or if it is not carried out after running all connected indoor units in the
fan mode for at least an hour.
Troubleshooting 288
3.57 UH Malfunction of System, Refrigerant System

Address Undefined
Remote UH
Controller
Display

Models RXQ5PA~54PA
Method of Detect an indoor unit with no address setting.

Malfunction
Detection
Malfunction The malfunction decision is made as soon as the abnormality aforementioned is detected.
Decision
Conditions
Supposed Improper connection of transmission wiring between indoor-outdoor units and outdoor-
Causes outdoor units
289 Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
Is
electricity Does
being introduce for a malfunction
the first time after occur even after 12
YES minutes elapses from the NO
installation or after an indoor Normal
or outdoor unit PCB time when electricity is
has been introduced to indoor
replaced? and outdoor
units?
NO YES
Is
indoor - outdoor and NO
outdoor - outdoor unit After fixing incorrect wiring,
transmission wiring push and hold the RESET
normal? button on the master outdoor
unit PCB for 5 seconds.
YES The unit will not run for up to
12 minutes.
Push and hold the RESET
button on the outdoor unit
PCB for 5 seconds
NO
Does a malfunction occur? Normal
YES
Disconnect
the outdoor-outdoor
unit transmission
wiring to create the one- YES
Mount the DIII-NET extension
system status, and then adaptor.
check whether or not
the system is
normal.
NO
Does
a "UH" malfunction occur NO
for all indoor units in
the system?
YES
(A1P).
Troubleshooting 290
Troubleshooting (OP: Centralized Remote Controller) Si34-804_A
4. Troubleshooting (OP: Centralized Remote

Controller)
4.1 M1 PCB Defect
Remote M1
Controller
Display
Applicable Centralized remote controller

Models Schedule timer
Method of Detect an abnormality in the DIII-NET polarity circuit.

Malfunction
Detection
Malfunction When + polarity and - polarity are detected at the same time.
Decision
Conditions
Supposed Defect of centralized remote controller PCB

Causes Defect of Schedule timer PCB
Troubleshooting Replace the centralized remote controller.

Turn ON the power supply of

the central equipment with M1
displayed once again.
With M1 displayed
Is the M1 displayed again? Replace the central
equipment.
Without M1 displayed
Central equipment: Normal

291 Troubleshooting
Si34-804_A Troubleshooting (OP: Centralized Remote Controller)
4.2 M8 Malfunction of Transmission Between Optional

Controllers for Centralized Control
Remote M8
Controller
Display
Applicable Centralized remote controller intelligent Touch Controller

Method of Detect the malfunction according to DIII-NET transmission data. (The system will be
Malfunction automatically reset.)
Detection
Malfunction When no master controller is present at the time of the startup of slave controller.
Decision When the centralized controller, which was connected once, shows no response.
Conditions
Supposed Malfunction of transmission between optional controllers for centralized control

Causes Defect of PCB of optional controllers for centralized control
Troubleshooting 292
Troubleshooting
Were
any changes
made to the number
of units of central
equipment? (The central YES Reset the power supplies of
equipment was connected once, every central equipment.
and then disconnected, or
additional central
equipment was
installed.)
NO
Have power
supplies to every central NO Turn ON the power supply of
equipment been the central equipment.
turned ON?
YES If the screen is not appearing
Is the even tough the intelligent
NO YES Touch Controller screen is
Is the display of LCD OK? intelligent Touch
Controller used? touched or the contrast
volume is operated, replace
the intelligent Touch
YES NO Controller.
Has the Reset Set the Reset switch (located
switch (located inside of NO inside of equipment)
equipment) SS1 been set SS1 been set to the Normal
to the Normal side.
side?
YES
Replace the central
equipment.
Check
the transmission
wiring of the equipment,
on which the M8 occurred, for
any broken wires.(To check for Abnormal
broken wires, refer to information Correct the wiring.
in the Procedure for
checking broken wires
section. (Refer to
P.298)
Normal Some central equipment gets

faulty. Conduct RUN/STOP
operations on every central
equipment, and then replace
the central equipment that
cannot control the indoor unit.
293 Troubleshooting

Centralized Control
Remote MA
Controller
Display
Applicable Centralized remote controller intelligent touch controller

Method of Detect the malfunction according to DIII-NET transmission data.

Malfunction
Detection
Malfunction When the schedule timer is set to individual use mode, other central component is present.
Decision When multiple master controller are present.
Conditions When the wiring adaptor for electrical appendices is present.
Supposed Improper combination of optional controllers for centralized control

Causes More than one master controller is connected
Defect of PCB of optional controller for centralized control
Troubleshooting 294
Troubleshooting
Not available for combined

use with the wiring adaptor
Has the for electrical appendices.
wiring adaptor for electrical YES
Dismount the wiring adaptor
appendices (KRP2A series) for electrical appendices, and
been connected? then reset power supplies of
NO
Has use of the schedule timer and
Has the YES the Interface for YES
schedule timer been the Interface for BACnet.
BACnet been Dismount either of them, and
connected? connected? then reset power supplies of
NO every central equipment.
NO
Has the use of the schedule timer and
YES the Interface for LONWORKS.
Interface for LONWORKS
been connected? Dismount either of them, and
then reset power supplies of
NO
use of the schedule timer and
Has the parallel YES the parallel interface.
interface been Dismount either of them, and
connected? then reset power supplies of
NO every central equipment.
Has the Dismount the Independent/

Independent/ Combined use connector
Combined use YES (CN1/X1A) of the schedule
connector(CN1/X1A) of the timer, and then reset power
schedule timer been supplies of every central
connected? equipment.
NO
Are there Integrate every central

two or more units equipment to which the
of central equipment YES Be sure to refer to the Master master unit central connector
with master unit setting unit central setting table. is connected, and then reset
connectors (CN1/X1A) power supplies of every
connected? central equipment.
NO Disconnect the master unit

central setting connector and
The MA malfunction code is connect this connector to
Reset the displayed again. different central equipment,
power supplies of every and then reset power
central equipment. supplies of every central
equipment. Central
equipment, to which the
The "MA" error code has master unit central setting
been cleared. connector is connected at the
It is supposed that the time when the malfunction
malfunction results from code is cleared, is faulty.
Central equipment: Normal external factors (e.g. noises) Replace this equipment.
295 Troubleshooting
4.4 MC Address Duplication, Improper Setting

Remote MC
Controller
Display
Applicable Centralized remote controller intelligent Touch Controller


Malfunction
Detection
Malfunction Two or more units of centralized remote controllers and intelligent Touch Controllers are
Decision connected, and all of them are set to master unit central setting or slave unit central setting.
Conditions Two units of schedule timers are connected.
Supposed Address duplication of centralized controller

Causes
Troubleshooting
Did the
malfunction Is the
occur while in the first test NO NO
Master/Slave setting of the
run using the intelligent central equipment
Touch controller? correct?
Be sure to
YES YES refer to the
Master/
Slave
setting
table.
(Refer to
P.297.) Correct the setting of the
combination of master and
slave units, and then reset
the power supplies of every
Was the central equipment.
Is the central equipment connected YES
Master/Slave setting of the YES once, and then disconnected, Reset the power supplies of
central equipment or was additional central every central equipment.
correct? equipment
NO installed?
NO
Turn ON the power supply of
the central equipment with
"MC" displayed once again.
If the intelligent Touch
controller is used, correct the
setting of the combination of With "MC"
master and slave units again displayed
while in DIII-NET test run
mode, referring to the Is the "MC"
Master/Slave setting table. displayed again? Replace the central
(Refer to P.297.) equipment.
Without "MC"
displayed
Reset the power supplies of Central equipment: Normal

Troubleshooting 296
Master-Slave Unit Combination of intelligent Touch Controller and Centralized Remote Controller
Setting Table
Master Slave
#1 #2 #3 #4
#1 #2 #3 #4
Pattern 1-00~4-15 Master/ 5-00~8-15 Master/ 1-00~4-15 Master/ 5-00~8-15 Master/
Slave Slave Slave Slave
CRC Master CRC Master CRC Slave CRC Slave
CRC Master CRC Slave
intelligent intelligent
Touch Master Touch Slave
Controller Controller
intelligent
CRC Master Touch Slave
Controller
intelligent
Touch Master CRC Slave
Controller
CRC Master
intelligent
Touch Master
Controller
CRC: Centralized remote controller <DCS302C1>
intelligent Touch Controller: < DCS601C51 >
The patterns marked with have nothing to do with those described in the list of Setting of master unit central setting connector.
Master Unit The master unit central setting connector (CN1/X1A) is mounted at the factory.
Central To independently use a single unit of the intelligent Touch controller or a single unit of the
Connector centralized remote controller, do not dismount the master unit central setting connector (i.e.,
Setting Table use the connector with the factory setting unchanged).
To independently use the schedule timer, insert an independent-use setting connector.
No independent-use setting connector has been mounted at the factory. Insert the
connector, which is attached to the casing of the main unit, in the PCB (CN1/X1A).
(Independent-use connector=Master unit central setting connector)
To use two or more central equipment in combination, make settings according to the table
shown below.
Central equipment connection pattern Setting of master unit central setting connector(*2)
Pattern intelligent Centralized Unified Schedule intelligent Centralized Unified
Schedule
Touch remote ON/OFF Touch remote ON/OFF
timer timer
Controller controller controller Controller controller controller
Only a
single unit:
1 to 2
units (*1) "Provided",
Others: "Not
provided"
(*1)
1 unit 1 unit Provided Not provided
(*1)
1 to 8 Only a All "Not

units single unit: provided"
1 to 2 (*1) "Provided",
units Others: "Not
provided"
Only a
1 unit single unit: Not provided
1 to 4 1 to 16 "Provided", All "Not
units units Others: "Not provided"
1 unit provided" Not provided
Only a
single unit:
1 to 16 "Provided",

units 1 unit Others: "Not Not provided
provided"

1 unit Provided
(*1) The intelligent Touch Controller and the schedule timer are not available for combined use.
(*2) The intelligent Touch Controller, centralized remote controller, and the unified ON/OFF controller have been set to "Provided with the
master unit central setting connector" at the factory. The schedule timer has been set to "Not provided with the master unit central
setting connector" at the factory, which is attached to the casing of the main unit.
297 Troubleshooting
Procedures for 1. Procedure for checking outdoor-outdoor unit transmission wiring for broken wires
Detecting Broken On the system shown below, turn OFF the power supply to all equipment, short-circuit
Wires in between the outdoor-outdoor unit terminal parts F1 and F2 in the "Outdoor Unit A" that is
Transmission farthest from the centralized remote controller, and then conduct continuity checks between
Wiring for Control the transmission wiring terminal blocks F1 and F2 of the centralized remote controller using
a multiple meter. If there is continuity between the said terminal blocks, the outdoor-outdoor
unit transmission wiring has no broken wires in it.
If there is no continuity, the transmission wiring may have broken wires. With the outdoor-
outdoor unit terminal parts of the "Outdoor Unit A" short-circuited, conduct continuity checks
between the transmission wiring terminal blocks F1 and F2 of the unified ON/OFF controller.
If there is no continuity as well, conduct continuity checks between the outdoor-outdoor unit
terminal parts of the "Outdoor Unit E", between the outdoor-outdoor unit terminal parts of the
"Outdoor Unit D", between the outdoor-outdoor unit terminal parts of the "Outdoor Unit C",
in the order described, thus identifying the place with continuity.
If the place with continuity can be identified, there may be broken wires in places before the
said place with continuity.
2. Procedure for checking indoor-outdoor unit transmission wiring for broken wires (for
checking the indoor-outdoor unit transmission wiring of the "Outdoor Unit C" for broken
wires)
Turn OFF the power supply to all equipment, short-circuit between the indoor-outdoor unit
terminal parts F1 and F2 in the "Outdoor Unit C, and then conduct continuity checks
between the transmission wirings F1 and F2 of the "Indoor Unit a" that is farthest from the
"Outdoor Unit C" using a multiple meter. If there is continuity between the said transmission
wirings, the indoor-outdoor unit transmission wiring has no broken wires in it.
If there is no continuity, the transmission wiring may have broken wires. With the indoor-
outdoor unit terminal parts of the "Outdoor Unit C" short-circuited, identify the place with
continuity in the transmission wiring of the "Indoor Unit b", transmission wiring of the "Indoor
Unit c", and transmission wiring of the "Indoor Unit d" in the order described.
If the place with continuity can be identified, there may be broken wires in places before the
said place with continuity.
Short-circuit
between the
outdoor-outdoor
unit terminal
parts.
Short-circuit between Outdoor-outdoor Unit

Transmission Wiring
Check the transmission the indoor-outdoor unit
wiring for continuity. Indoor-outdoor Unit terminal parts.
If there is continuity, the Transmission Wiring
indoor-outdoor unit
transmission has no
broken wires in it.
Check the transmission

wiring for continuity.
If there is continuity, the
outdoor-outdoor unit
transmission has no broken
wires in it.
Unified ON/OFF controller Central remote controller
Troubleshooting 298
Troubleshooting (OP: Unified ON/OFF Controller) Si34-804_A
5. Troubleshooting (OP: Unified ON/OFF Controller)

5.1 Operation Lamp Blinks
Remote Operation lamp blinks
Controller
Display
Applicable All model of indoor units

Models Unified ON/OFF controller

Malfunction
Detection
Malfunction
Decision
Conditions
Supposed Malfunction of transmission between optional central controller and indoor unit
Causes Connector for setting master controller is disconnected
Defect of unified ON/OFF controller PCB
Malfunction of air conditioner
299 Troubleshooting
Si34-804_A Troubleshooting (OP: Unified ON/OFF Controller)
Troubleshooting
Is a
malfunction YES
code displayed on the Diagnose the cause with the
remote controller? air conditioner's failure
diagnosis manual.
NO
Has a
once connected
indoor unit been removed YES
Reset power supply for all
or its address optional controllers for
changed? centralized control
simultaneously.
NO
Is the
power supply for
the indoor unit displaying NO
Turn the power supply of the
a malfunction indoor unit on.
turned
on?
YES
Is
transmission wiring YES
disconnected or wired Fix the wiring correctly.
incorrectly?
NO
Is Is
transmission NO the group NO
with all indoor units No. of malfunctioning Set the group No.
malfunctioning? indoor units correctly.
set?
YES YES
Is the Replace the central PCB.
transmission
wiring with the master NO
controller disconnected or Fix the wiring correctly.
wired incorrectly?
YES
Is the
master
controller's connector for YES
Connect the connector
setting master controller correctly.
disconnected.
NO
Replace the central PCB.
Troubleshooting 300
5.2 Display Under Centralized Control Blinks (Repeats

Single Blink)
Remote under centralized control (Repeats single blink)
Controller
Display
Applicable Unified ON/OFF controller

Models Centralized remote controller, Schedule timer

Malfunction
Detection
Malfunction When the centralized controller, which was connected once, shows no response.
Decision The control ranges are overlapped.
Conditions When multiple master central controller are present.
When the schedule timer is set to individual use mode, other central controller is present.
When the wiring adaptor for electrical appendices is present.
Supposed Address duplication of optional controllers for centralized control

Causes Improper combination of optional controllers for centralized control
Connection of more than one master controller
Malfunction of transmission between optional controllers for centralized control
Defect of PCB of optional controllers for centralized control
301 Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
Has a once
connected optional
controller for centralized YES
Reset power supply
control been disconnected simultaneously for all optional
or its address controllers for centralized
changed? control.
NO
Is the
power supply
turned on for all NO
optional controllers for Turn on power supply for
centralized all optional controllers for
control? centralized control.
YES
Is the
reset switch
of all optional controllers NO
for centralized Set reset switch to
control set to "normal."
"normal"?
YES
Is
transmission wiring YES
disconnected or wired Fix the wiring correctly.
incorrectly?
NO
Is Is the
a centralized remote centralized remote YES
YES controller or schedule
controller or schedule timer Refer to failure diagnosis for
connected? timer displaying a centralized remote controller
malfunction? or schedule timer.
NO
NO
Is the setting
Are of the unified
two or more unified YES ON/OFF controller's NO
ON/OFF controllers switch for setting Correct the setting of the
connected? each address unified ON/OFF controller's
duplicated? switch for setting each
NO address and reset the power
supply of the unified ON/OFF
YES controller.
Troubleshooting 302
Is the
wiring adaptor for YES
electrical appendices Cannot be used in
connected? combination with a wiring
adaptor for electrical
NO appendices. Remove the
wiring adaptor for electrical
appendices and reset the
power supply for all optional
controllers for centralized
control simultaneously.
Is a schedule timer YES
connected?
NO
YES
Is a parallel interface Schedule timer and parallel
connected? interface cannot be used in
combination. Disconnect
NO either the schedule timer or
parallel interface and reset the
power supply for all optional
Is the controllers for centralized
schedule timer's control simultaneously.
YES
individual/combined Disconnect the schedule
connector timer's individual / combined
connected? connector and reset the power
supply for all optional
NO controllers for centralized
control simultaneously.
Are
there two or
more optional
controllers for centralized YES
control connected with the Arrange so that the connector
connector for setting for setting master controller is
master connected to one controller for
controller? centralized control and reset
the power supply for all
NO optional controllers for
centralized control
Reset the power supply simultaneously.
for all optional controllers
for centralized control
simultaneously.
If the malfunction is still not cleared:

Disconnect the connector for
setting master controller from
the master controller, connect
to another optional controller
for centralized control and
simultaneously reset all
optional controllers for
centralized control again. The
controller connected by the
connector for setting master
controller when the
malfunction is cleared is
defective and must be
replaced.
303 Troubleshooting
5.3 Display Under Centralized Control Blinks (Repeats

Double Blink)
Remote under centralized control (Repeats double blink)
Controller
Display
Applicable Unified ON/OFF controller

Models

Malfunction
Detection
Malfunction When no central control addresses are set to indoor units.

Decision When no indoor units are connected within the control range.
Conditions
Supposed Central control address (group No.) is not set for indoor unit.
Causes Improper control range setting switch
Improper wiring of transmission wiring
Troubleshooting
Is the central
control address (group No.) NO
Set by remote controller the
set for the central control address for all
indoor unit? indoor units connected to the
central control line.
YES
Is the control NO
range setting switch Set the control range setting
set correctly? switch correctly and
simultaneously reset the power
YES supply for all optional controllers
Is
the transmission YES
wiring disconnected or Fix the wiring correctly.
wired incorrectly?
NO
Replace the unified ON/OFF
controller.
Troubleshooting 304
CHECK 1 Check on connector of fan motor (Power supply cable)

(1) Turn off the power supply.
Measure the resistance between phases of U,V,W at the motor side connectors (three-core
wire) to check that the values are balanced and there is no short circuiting, while connector
or relay connector is disconnected.
Red U
Measure the resistance

White V values between phases
U,V,W.
Black W
CHECK 2 (1) Turn off the power supply.

(2) Measure the resistance between Vcc and each phase of U,V,W, and GND and each phase
at the motor side connectors (five-core wire) to check that the values are balanced within the
range of 20 %, while connector or relay connector is disconnected.
Furthermore, to use a multiple meter for measurement, connect the probe of negative pole
to Vcc and that of positive pole to GND.
5 Gray GND
4 Pink Vcc
Measure the resistance
3 Orange W values between Vcc
and U,V,W, and GND
and U,V,W.
2 Blue V
1 Yellow U
305 Troubleshooting
CHECK 3 Check for causes of rise in high pressure

Referring to the Fault Tree Analysis (FTA) shown below, probe the faulty points.
Stop valve closed Check to be sure the stop valve is open.

Local High pipe
pressure Bent or crashed pipe Conduct visual checks for pipe conditions.
rise resistance
Clogging of foreign Is there any temperature difference caused before
particles and after the filter or branch pipe.
[In cooling]
If the outdoor unit electronic Are the coil resistance and insulation normal?
Rise in high expansion valve is throttled: Faulty valve coil
Faulty outdoor
pressure (See *1.) unit electronic
expansion valve Faulty valve body
A temperature difference in excess of 10C
Faulty high between the inlet and the outlet is deemed to be abnormal.
pressure Faulty high pressure sensor Are the electrical characteristics normal?
control Faulty
control Is the pressure value checked with the Service Checker
Faulty control PCB
corresponding to the measurement of the pressure sensor?
[In cooling]
Is the suction air temperature not more than
High suction High suction air Short circuit
air 43C?
temperature
temperature of outdoor unit High ambient temperature Is the outdoor temperature not more than 43C?
of the
condenser
Degradation Dirty condenser

in condensing Is the heat exchanger clogged? (In cooling)
capacity
Mixing of non-condensable gas Is air or else mixed in the refrigerant system?
Faulty fan Can the fan motor be rotated with hands?

Decreased motor Are the motor coil resistance and
fan insulation normal?
Decreased output Faulty control
fan airflow PCB If a spare PCB is mounted, is the capacity
rate (Including
capacity setting) setting properly made?
High air Dirty filter Is the air filter clogged?

passage
resistance
Obstacle Is there any obstacle in the air passage?
Excessive refrigerant charging Refer to P.243.

Is the indoor unit too small compared to
the large-sized outdoor unit?
*1: In cooling, it is normal if the outdoor unit electronic expansion valve (EV1) is fully open.
Troubleshooting 306
CHECK 4 Check for causes of drop in low pressure

Referring to the Fault Tree Analysis (FTA) shown below, probe the faulty points.
[In cooling]
(See *1.) Faulty Faulty low pressure sensor Are the electrical characteristics normal?
Faulty low compressor Is the pressure value checked with the Service Checker
capacity Faulty control PCB
pressure corresponding to the measurement of the pressure sensor?
control control
Faulty low pressure sensor Are the electrical characteristics normal?
Faulty low
pressure Are the coil resistance and insulation normal?
protection Faulty hot gas solenoid valve
[In both cooling control
and heating] Is the pressure value checked with the Service Checker
Faulty control PCB
(See *2.) corresponding to the measurement of the pressure sensor?
Abnormally low
pressure [In cooling]
(Low evaporating If the indoor unit
temperature) electronic
expansion valve is
throttled too much: Faulty indoor
(See *3.) unit electronic Faulty valve coil Are the coil resistance and insulation normal?
expansion valve
Faulty valve body
Faulty electronic
expansion valve
Faulty gas pipe Check for the thermistor resistance and connection.
control
Faulty thermistor of indoor unit
control
Faulty liquid pipe thermistor Check for the thermistor resistance and connection.
of indoor unit
Is the pressure value checked with the Service Checker
[In cooling] Faulty control PCB corresponding to the measurement of the pressure sensor?
Low suction Low suction air Short circuit Is the suction air temperature not less than 14C
air temperature temperature of
of the indoor unit Low ambient temperature Is the indoor temperature not more than 14C
evaporator
Is the connector properly connected?
Faulty suction air thermistor of indoor unit
Are the thermistor resistance characteristics normal?
Abnormal piping length Does the piping length fall in the permissible range?
High pipe Conduct visual checks for pipe conditions.
Bent or crashed pipe
resistance
Clogging of foreign particles Is there any temperature difference caused before
and after the filter or branch pipe?
Stop valve closed
Less Check to be sure the stop valve is open.
circulation
quantity of Inadequate refrigerant quantity Refer to P.269.
refrigerant
Moisture choke Eliminate moisture by vacuum operation.
Dirty Is the heat exchanger clogged?
evaporator
Degradation
in condensing Faulty fan motor Can the fan motor be rotated with hands?
capacity Decreased Are the motor coil resistance and insulation normal?
fan output
Decreased Faulty control PCB If a spare PCB is mounted, is the capacity
fan airflow (Including capacity setting) setting properly made?
rate High air
passage Dirty filter Is the air filter clogged?
resistance
Obstacle Is there any obstacle in the air passage?
*1: For details of the compressor capacity control while in cooling, refer to Compressor PI Control on P.82.
*2: The low pressure protection control includes low pressure protection control and hot gas bypass control. Refer to P.107.
*3: In cooling, the indoor unit electronic expansion valve is used for superheated degree control. Refer to P.123.
307 Troubleshooting
Si34-804_A
Part 7
Appendix
1. Piping Diagrams..................................................................................309
1.1 Outdoor Unit .........................................................................................309
1.2 Indoor Unit............................................................................................313
2. Wiring Diagrams for Reference...........................................................317
2.1 Outdoor Unit .........................................................................................317
2.2 Field Wiring ..........................................................................................322
2.3 Indoor Unit............................................................................................325
3. List of Electrical and Functional Parts .................................................340
3.1 Outdoor Unit .........................................................................................340
3.2 Indoor Side ...........................................................................................343
4. Option List ...........................................................................................350
4.1 Option List of Controllers......................................................................350
4.2 Option Lists (Outdoor Unit)...................................................................352
5. Piping Installation Point.......................................................................354
5.1 Piping Installation Point ........................................................................354
5.2 The Example of a Wrong Pattern .........................................................355
6. Example of Connection (R-410A Type) ..............................................356
7. Thermistor Resistance / Temperature Characteristics........................358
8. Pressure Sensor .................................................................................360
9. Method of Checking the Inverters Power Transistors and
Diode Modules ....................................................................................361
9.1 Method of Checking the Inverters Power Transistors and
Diode Modules .....................................................................................361
Appendix 308
Piping Diagrams Si34-804_A
1. Piping Diagrams
1.1 Outdoor Unit
RXQ5PAY1
HEAT
EXCHANGER
S1NPH
S1PH
S1NPL
3D050782B
309 Appendix
Si34-804_A Piping Diagrams
RXQ8PAY1
3D061121A
Appendix 310
RXQ10PA / 12PAY1
SUBCOOLING
HEAT
EXCHANGER
HEAT
EXCHANGER
S1NPH
S1PH S2PH
S1NPL
3D061122A
311 Appendix
RXQ14PA / 16PA / 18PAY1
SUBCOOLING
HEAT
EXCHANGER
S1NPH
S1PH S2PH S3PH
S1NPL
3D061123A
Appendix 312
1.2 Indoor Unit

FXCQ, FXFQ, FXKQ, FXSQ, FXMQ, FXHQ, FXAQ, FXLQ, FXNQ
Gas piping connection port

Heat exchanger
Flare connection : 15.9 or less
(4) Attached piping : Above 19.1
Fan
(2)
(3)
Liquid piping connection port
(Flare connection)
(1)
Filter Electronic Filter
expansion valve
DU220-602K
Code Name Code Main function

Used for gas superheated degree control while in
(1) Electronic expansion valve Y1E cooling operation.
Suction air temperature
(2) R1T Used for thermostat control.
thermistor
Liquid pipe temperature Used for gas superheated degree control while in
(3) R2T
thermistor cooling operation.
Gas pipe temperature Used for gas superheated degree control while in
(4) R3T
thermistor cooling operation.
(mm)
Capacity GAS Liquid
20 / 25 / 32 / 40 / 50M(A) 12.7 6.4
63 / 80 / 100 / 125M(A) 15.9 9.5
200M(A) 19.1 9.5
250M(A) 22.2 9.5
313 Appendix
FXDQ
Gas side
Liquid side
Filter Filter
Fan
Indoor heat exchanger
4D060927
Refrigerant pipe connection port diameters

(mm)
Model Gas Liquid
FXDQ20PB / 25PB / 32PB / 40NB / 12.7 6.4
50NBVE(T)
FXDQ63NBVE(T) 15.9 9.5
FXMQ20P / 25P / 32P / 40P / 50P / 63P / 80P / 100P / 125P / 140PVE
4D034245C

(mm)
Model Gas Liquid
FXMQ20P / 25P / 32P / 40P / 50PVE 12.7 6.4
FXMQ63P / 80P / 100P / 125P / 140PVE 15.9 9.5
Appendix 314
FXMQ125MF / 200MF / 250MFV1
4D018650B

(mm)
Model Gas Liquid
FXMQ125MFV1 15.9 9.5
FXMQ200MFV1 19.1 9.5
FXMQ250MFV1 22.2 9.5
315 Appendix
FXUQ + BEVQ
Indoor unit
4D037995H
Connection Unit
4D034127B
Appendix 316
317
2.1
L1 L2 L3 N POWER SUPPLY
Y1:3N~380-415V 50Hz TERMINAL OF M1C
C1 A1P
W
RED X1A F1U
U
PS H1P H2P H3P H4P H5P H6P H7P H8P
RXQ5PAY1
BLU
F2U Q1RP V
BLK
LAYOUT OF M1C, M1F
Z1C P< BS1 BS2 BS3 BS4 BS5 HAP
S1PH EL. COMPO. BOX
K3R
K4R
K5R
K11R
K7R
RED
GRN
WHT
BLU
BLK
A2P ON DS1 M1F
X2A X37A
X400A X7A X8A X9A X15A X11A
OFF NOTE) 4 M1C
X1M L1 L2 L3 N 1234
Z1F
X3A E1HC X18A t R1T
Y1S Y2S Y3S Y4S
RED
WHT
BLK
BLU
F400U S1NPL OUTER SHELL
X31A
K4M K3R X402A X4A R3T R2T R4T R5T R6T
X401A X403A S1NPH EL. COMPO. BOX
Wiring Diagrams for Reference
t t t t t X32A
V1CP
RED
WHT
BLK
Outdoor Unit
X1A A1P
X21A Y1E X2A X1M
1 X29A 1 X30A 5 M
A3P A5P
X10A X1A A5P X1M
X61A Z2C TO IN/D UNIT TO OUT/D UNIT X1M
K2M X1A F1 F2 F1 F2
X6A X28A X66A
V2R (FRONT)
+ - PS X4A X20A
P1 L1R
WHT K1R A3P
L1R N3 Z4C BLK NOTE) 5 A4P
WHT R95 RED
P2 P3
A4P A2P
C66 C63
+ + P1 N1 outdoor (F1) (F2)
R50 R59 X5A indoor (F1) (F2) (BACK)
X5A F1U R10
X3A + - X4A A1P PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD (MAIN) K3R MAGNETIC RELAY (Y1S) S1PH PRESSURE SWITCH (HIGH)
+ - X41A V1R
V1R A2P PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD (NOISE FILTER) K4R MAGNETIC RELAY (Y2S) V1CP SAFETY DEVICES INPUT
X2A
X111A X1A A3P PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD (INV) K5R MAGNETIC RELAY (Y3S) V1R POWER MODULE (A3P, A4P)
X11A
Z3C t Z5C A4P PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD (FAN) K7R MAGNETIC RELAY (E1HC) V2R DIODE BRIDGE (A3P)
N=5 5
R1T A5P PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD (ABC I/P) K11R MAGNETIC RELAY (Y4S) X1A, X2A CONNECTOR (M1F)
X1A X2A
RED
WHT
BLK
BS1~5 PUSH BUTTON SWITCH L1R REACTOR X1M TERMINAL STRIP (POWER SUPPLY)
2. Wiring Diagrams for Reference
RED
WHT
BLK
U V W (MODE, SET, RETURN, TEST, RESET) M1C MOTOR (COMPRESSOR) X1M TERMINAL STRIP (CONTROL) (A1P)
MS MS
3~ 3~ 5 C1 CAPACITOR M1F MOTOR (FAN) Y1E ELECTRONIC EXPANSION VALVE (MAIN)
M1C M1F C63, C66 CAPACITOR PS SWITCHING POWER SUPPLY (A1P, A3P) Y1S SOLENOID VALVE (HOT GAS)
NOTES) DS1 DIP SWITCH Q1RP PHASE REVERSAL DETECT CIRCUIT Y2S SOLENOID VALVE (OIL)
1. THIS WIRING DIAGRAM IS APPLIED ONLY TO THE OUTDOOR UNIT. E1HC CRANKCASE HEATER R10 RESISTOR (CURRENT SENSOR) (A4P) Y3S SOLENOID VALVE (FOUR WAY VALVE)
2. : FIELD WIRING. F1U FUSE (8A, DC650V) (A4P) R50, R59 RESISTOR Y4S SOLENOID VALVE (INJECTION)
3. : TERMINAL STRIP : CONNECTOR : TERMINAL
F1U, F2U FUSE (T, 3.15A, 250V) (A1P) R95 RESISTOR (CURRENT LIMITING) Z1C~5C NOISE FILTER (FERRITE CORE)
: PROTECTIVE EARTH (SCREW)
4. WHEN USING THE OPTIONAL ADAPTOR, REFER TO THE F400U FUSE (T, 6.3A, 250V) (A2P) R1T THERMISTOR (AIR) (A1P) Z1F NOISE FILTER (WITH SURGE ABSORBER)
INSTALLATION MANUAL OF THE OPTIONAL ADAPTOR. H1P~8P PILOT LAMP (SERVICE MONITOR-ORANGE) R1T THERMISTOR (FIN) (A3P)
5. FOR CONNECTION WIRING TO INDOOR-OUTDOOR TRANSMISSION [H2P] PREPARE, TEST ------------------- FLICKERING
R2T THERMISTOR (SUCTION)
F1 F2, OUTDOOR-OUTDOOR TRANSMISSION F1 F2, REFER TO MALFUNCTION DETECTION --- LIGHT UP
R3T THERMISTOR (M1C DISCHARGE)
THE INSTALLATION MANUAL. HAP PILOT LAMP (SERVICE MONITOR-GREEN) R4T THERMISTOR (HEAT EXC. DEICER)
6. HOW TO USE BS1~5 AND DS1 SWITCH, REFER TO "SERVICE K1R MAGNETIC RELAY (A3P) R5T THERMISTOR (LIQ. PIPE)
PRECAUTION" LABEL ON EL. COMPO. BOX COVER.
K3R MAGNETIC RELAY (A2P) R6T THERMISTOR (ACCUMULATOR)
7. WHEN OPERATING, DON'T SHORT CIRCUIT THE PROTECTION
K2M MAGNETIC CONTACTOR (M1C) (A3P) S1NPH PRESSURE SENSOR (HIGH)
DEVICE (S1PH).
8. COLORS BLK : BLACK RED : RED BLU : BLUE WHT : WHITE K4M MAGNETIC CONTACTOR (M1C) (A2P) S1NPL PRESSURE SENSOR (LOW)
PNK : PINK YLW : YELLOW BRN : BROWN GRY : GRAY 3D061668
GRN : GREEN ORG : ORANGE.
Appendix
Si34-804_A
Appendix
Si34-804_A
RXQ8PAY1
L1 L2 L3 N POWER SUPPLY TERMINAL OF M1C

Y1: 3N~380-415V 50Hz C1 A1P
W
RED X1A F1U U
BLU PS H1P H2P H3P H4P H5P H6P H7P H8P
BLK F2U Q1RP V
LAYOUT OF M1C, M1F
S1PH EL. COMPO. BOX
K3R
K4R
K5R
K7R
RED
GRN
WHT
BLU
BLK
A2P ON DS1 M1F M1C
X2A X37A
X400A X7A X8A X9A X11A
OFF 1234 NOTE)4
X1M L1 L2 L3 N Z1F
X3A E1HC X18A t R1T
Y1S Y2S Y3S
BLK
BLU
S1NPL
RED
F400U OUTER SHELL
WHT
X31A
K4M K3R X402A X4A R3T R2T R4T R5T R6T R7T
X401A X403A t t t t t t S1NPH EL. COMPO. BOX
V1CP X32A
BLK
RED
WHT
X1A A1P
X21A Y1E X2A X1M
1 X29A 1 X30A 5 M
A3P A5P
X10A X1A A5P X1M
X61A Z2C TO IN/D UNIT TO OUT/D UNIT TO MULTI UNIT X23A BLU Y2E X1M
K2M X66A X1A F1 F2 F1 F2 Q1 Q2 5 M
X6A X28A
V2R (FRONT)
+ - PS X20A WHT BLU
X4A
P1 L1R
WHT K1R A3P
N3 Z4C BLK NOTE)5
L1R A4P
WHT R95 RED
P2 P3
C66 C63 A4P outdoor(Q1)(Q2) A2P
+ + P1 N1 outdoor(F1)(F2)
R50 R59 X5A indoor(F1)(F2) (BACK)
X5A F1U R10
X3A + - X4A PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD (MAIN)
A1P K3R MAGNETIC RELAY (Y1S) S1PH PRESSURE SWITCH (HIGH)
+ -
X41A V1R PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD (NOISE FILTER)
A2P K4R MAGNETIC RELAY (Y2S) V1CP SAFETY DEVICES INPUT
V1R
X2A PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD (INV)
A3P K5R MAGNETIC RELAY (Y3S) V1R POWER MODULE (A3P, A4P)
X111A X1A PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD (FAN) MAGNETIC RELAY (E1HC) DIODE BRIDGE (A3P)
X11A A4P K7R V2R
Z3C t Z5C PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD (ABC I/P)
A5P L1R REACTOR X1A, X2A CONNECTOR (M1F)
N=5
5
R1T PUSH BUTTON SWITCH
BS1~5 M1C MOTOR (COMPRESSOR) X1M TERMINAL STRIP (POWER SUPPLY)
X1A X2A (MODE, SET, RETURN, TEST, RESET) M1F MOTOR (FAN) X1M TERMINAL STRIP (CONTROL) (A1P)
RED
WHT
BLK
RED
WHT
BLK
U V W C1 CAPACITOR PS SWITCHING POWER SUPPLY (A1P, A3P) Y1E ELECTRONIC EXPANSION VALVE (MAIN)
MS MS C63, C66 CAPACITOR Q1RP PHASE REVERSAL DETECT CIRCUIT Y2E ELECTRON ICEXPANSION VALVE (SUBCOOLING)
3~ 3~
5 DS1 DIP SWITCH R10 RESISTOR (CURRENT SENSOR) (A4P) Y1S SOLENOID VALVE (HOT GAS)
NOTES) M1C M1F E1HC CRANKCASE HEATER R50, R59 RESISTOR Y2S SOLENOID VALVE (OIL)
1. THIS WIRING DIAGRAM IS APPLIED ONLY TO THE OUTDOOR UNIT. F1U FUSE (8A, DC650V) (A4P) R95 RESISTOR (CURRENT LIMITING) Y3S SOLENOID VALVE (FOUR WAY VALVE)
2. : FIELD WIRING. F1U, F2U FUSE (T, 3.15A, 250V) (A1P) R1T THERMISTOR (AIR) (A1P) Z1C~5C NOISE FILTER (FERRITE CORE)
3. : TERMINAL STRIP : CONNECTOR : TERMINAL : PROTECTIVE EARTH (SCREW) F400U FUSE (T, 6.3A, 250V) (A2P) R1T THERMISTOR (FIN) (A3P) Z1F NOISE FILTER (WITH SURGE ABSORBER)
4. WHEN USING THE OPTIONAL ADAPTOR, REFER TO THE INSTALLATION MANUAL OF THE H1P~8P PILOT LAMP (SERVICE MONITOR-ORANGE) R2T THERMISTOR (SUCTION)
OPTIONAL ADAPTOR. [H2P] PREPARE,TEST--------------------FLICKERING THERMISTOR (M1C DISCHARGE)
R3T
5. FOR CONNECTION WIRING TO INDOOR-OUTDOOR TRANSMISSION F1 F2, OUTDOOR-OUTDOOR
TRANSMISSION F1 F2, OUTDOOR-MULTI TRANSMISSION Q1 Q2, REFER TO THE INSTALLATION
MALFUNCTION DETECTION---LIGHT UP R4T THERMISTOR (HEAT EXC.DEICER)
MANUAL. HAP PILOT LAMP (SERVICE MONITOR-GREEN) R5T THERMISTOR (HEAT EXC.OUTLET)
6. HOW TO USE BS1~5 AND DS1 SWITCH, REFER TO "SERVICE PRECAUTION" LABEL ON EL.COMPO. K1R MAGNETIC RELAY (A3P) R6T THERMISTOR (LIQ.PIPE)
BOX COVER. K3R MAGNETIC RELAY (A2P) R7T THERMISTOR (ACCUMULATOR)
7. WHEN OPERATING, DON'T SHORT CIRCUIT THE PROTECTION DEVICE (S1PH). K2M MAGNETIC CONTACTOR (M1C) (A3P) S1NPH PRESSURE SENSOR (HIGH)
8. COLORS BLK: BLACK RED: RED BLU: BLUE WHT: WHITE PNK: PINK YLW: YELLOW BRN: BROWN K4M MAGNETIC CONTACTOR (M1C) (A2P) S1NPL PRESSURE SENSOR (LOW)
GRY: GRAY GRN: GREEN ORG: ORANGE.
3D061706
318
319
RXQ10PAY1
L1 L2 L3 N POWER SUPPLY TERMINAL OF M1C, M2C

Y1:3N~380-415V 50Hz C1 A1P
W
RED X1A F1U U
BLU PS H1P H2P H3P H4P H5P H6P H7P H8P
F2U Q1RP V
BLK LAYOUT OF M1C, M2C, M1F
S1PH EL. COMPO. BOX
K3R
K4R
K5R
K7R
K8R
M1F
RED
GRN
WHT
BLU
BLK
A2P ON DS1 X37A M1C
X400A X2A X7A X8A X9A X11A X12A M2C
P<
OFF 1234 NOTE) 4

X1M L1 L2 L3 N Z1F S2PH
X3A E1HC E2HC X18A t R1T
BLK
BLU
Y1S Y2S Y3S
RED
WHT
: IS CONNECTOR COLOR FOR X31A
K4M K3R X402A X4A R31T R32T R2T R4T R5T R6T R7T PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD.
X401A X403A t t t t t t t : IS CONNECTOR COLOR FOR COMPONENT. S1NPH EL. COMPO. BOX
Z6C V1CP : IS DISCRIMINATION COLOR FOR X32A
BLK
COMPONENT LEAD WIRE.
RED
WHT
K1R
X26A A1RED X1A A1P
X21A Y1E X2A X1M
K2M X5A 1 X29A 1 X30A 5
WHT M
A3P A2 A6P A5P
X10A X1A A5P X1M
X61A Z2C TO IN/D UNIT TO OUT/D UNIT TO MULTI UNIT X1M K2M
K2M X23A BLU Y2E
X1A X6A X28A X66A X1A F1 F2 F1 F2 Q1 Q2 5 M
T1A (FRONT)
V2R PS WHT BLU
A6P + - X4A X20A
P1 L1R
R S T WHT K1R A3P
NOTE) 5
K2M L1R N3 Z4CBLK A4P
WHT R95 RED
U VW P2 P3
Z7C C66 C63 A4P outdoor (Q1) (Q2) A2P
N=5 + + P1 N1 outdoor (F1) (F2)
BLK
X5A indoor (F1) (F2) (BACK)
RED
R50 R59
WHT
X5A F1U R10 A1P
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD (MAIN) K1R MAGNETIC RELAY (K2M) S1PH, S2PH PRESSURE SWITCH (HIGH)
U VW X3A + - X4A A2P
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD (NOISE FILTER) K3R MAGNETIC RELAY (Y1S) T1A CURRENT SENSOR (A6P)
M + -
3~ X41A V1R A3P
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD (INV) K4R MAGNETIC RELAY (Y2S) V1CP SAFETY DEVICES INPUT
V1R
M2C X2A A4P
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD (FAN) K5R MAGNETIC RELAY (Y3S) V1R POWER MODULE (A3P, A4P)
X111A X1A
X11A A5P
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD (ABC I/P) K7R MAGNETIC RELAY (E1HC) V2R DIODE BRIDGE (A3P)
t Z5C A6P
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD (CURRENT SENSOR) K8R MAGNETIC RELAY (E2HC) X1A, X2A CONNECTOR (M1F)
Z3C 5
N=5 R1T PUSH BUTTON SWITCH BS1~5 L1R REACTOR X1M TERMINAL STRIP (POWER SUPPLY)
X1A X2A (MODE, SET, RETURN, TEST, RESET) M1C, M2C MOTOR (COMPRESSOR) X1M TERMINAL STRIP (CONTROL) (A1P)
BLK
RED
WHT
C1 CAPACITOR M1F MOTOR (FAN) Y1E ELECTRONIC EXPANSION VALVE (MAIN)
BLK
RED
WHT
U VW
C63, C66 CAPACITOR PS SWITCHING POWER SUPPLY (A1P, A3P) Y2E ELECTRONIC EXPANSION VALVE (SUBCOOLING)
MS MS
3~ 3~ DS1 DIP SWITCH Q1RP PHASE REVERSAL DETECT CIRCUIT Y1S SOLENOID VALVE (HOT GAS)
5
E1HC, E2HC CRANKCASE HEATER R10 RESISTOR (CURRENT SENSOR) (A4P, A5P) Y2S SOLENOID VALVE (OIL)
M1C M1F
NOTES) F1U FUSE (8A, DC650V) (A4P) R50, R59 RESISTOR Y3S SOLENOID VALVE (FOUR WAY VALVE)
1. THIS WIRING DIAGRAM IS APPLIED ONLY TO THE OUTDOOR UNIT. F1U, F2U FUSE (T, 3.15A, 250V) (A1P) R95 RESISTOR (CURRENT LIMITING) Z1C~7C NOISE FILTER (FERRITE CORE)
2. : FIELD WIRING. F400U FUSE (T, 6.3A, 250V) (A2P) R1T THERMISTOR (AIR) (A1P) Z1F NOISE FILTER (WITH SURGE ABSORBER)
3. : TERMINAL STRIP : CONNECTOR : TERMINAL : PROTECTIVE EARTH (SCREW) H1P~8P PILOT LAMP (SERVICE MONITOR-ORANGE) R1T THERMISTOR (FIN) (A3P)
[H2P] PREPARE, TEST-------------------FLICKERING R2T THERMISTOR (SUCTION)
4. WHEN USING THE OPTIONAL ADAPTOR, REFER TO THE INSTALLATION MANUAL OF THE
MALFUNCTION DETECTION---LIGHT UP R31T, R32T THERMISTOR (M1C, M2C DISCHARGE)
OPTIONAL ADAPTOR.
HAP PILOT LAMP (SERVICE MONITOR-GREEN) R4T THERMISTOR (HEAT EXC. DEICER)
5. FOR CONNECTION WIRING TO INDOOR-OUTDOOR TRANSMISSION F1 F2, OUTDOOR-
K1R MAGNETIC RELAY (A3P) R5T THERMISTOR (HEAT EXC. OUTLET)
OUTDOOR TRANSMISSION F1 F2, OUTDOOR-MULTI TRANSMISSION Q1 Q2, REFER TO THE
K3R MAGNETIC RELAY (A2P) R6T THERMISTOR (LIQ. PIPE)
INSTALLATION MANUAL.
K2M MAGNETIC CONTACTOR (M1C) (A3P) R7T THERMISTOR (ACCUMULATOR)
6. HOW TO USE BS1~5 AND DS1 SWITCH, REFER TO "SERVICE PRECAUTION" LABEL ON EL.
K4M MAGNETIC CONTACTOR (M1C) (A2P) S1NPH PRESSURE SENSOR (HIGH)
COMPO. BOX COVER.
K2M MAGNETIC CONTACTOR (M2C) S1NPL PRESSURE SENSOR (LOW)
7. WHEN OPERATING, DON'T SHORT CIRCUIT THE PROTECTION DEVICE (S1PH, S2PH).
8. COLORS BLK: BLACK RED: RED BLU: BLUE WHT: WHITE PNK: PINK YLW: YELLOW
3D061707
BRN: BROWN GRY: GRAY GRN: GREEN ORG: ORANGE.
Appendix
Si34-804_A
L1 L2 L3 N POWER SUPPLY TERMINAL OF M1C, M2C
Y1:3N ~ 380-415N 50Hz C1 A1P
Appendix
W
RED X1A F1U U
Si34-804_A
BLU PS H1P H2P H3P H4P H5P H6P H7P H8P V

RXQ12PAY1
BLK F2U Q1RP

LAYOUT OF M1C, M2C, M1F, M2F
S1PH EL. COMPO. BOX
K3R
K4R
K5R
K7R
K8R
RED
GRN
WHT
BLU
BLK
A2P ON DS1 X37A
M2F M1F M1C
X400A X2A
X7A X8A X9A X11A X12A M2C
P< OFF 1234 NOTE) 4
X3A E1HC E2HC X18A t R1T
Y1S Y2S Y3S
RED
WHT
BLK
BLU
:* IS CONNECTOR COLOR FOR X31A
K4M K3R X402A X4A R31T R32T R2T R4T R5T R6T R7T * PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD.
X401A X403A IS CONNECTOR COLOR FOR COMPONENT. S1NPH EL. COMPO. BOX
Z6C t t t t t t t * :* X32A
V1CP * :* IS DISCRIMINATION COLOR FOR
COMPONENT LEAD WIRE.
RED
WHT
BLK
X26A A1RED K1R X1A X3A A1P
X21A Y1E X2A X4A X1M
K2M X5A 1 X29A 1 X30A 5 M
WHT
A3P A6P A5P
A2 A5P X1M
X10A X1A K2M
X61A Z2C TO IN/D UNIT TO OUT/D UNIT TO MULTI UNIT X23A BLU Y2E X1M
X1A K2M X1A F1 F2 F1 F2 Q1 Q2
X6A X28A X66A 5 M
T1A V2R (FRONT)
+ - PS X20A WHT BLU
A6P X4A
P1 L1R
R S T WHT K1R Z4C NOTE) 5 A3P
K2M L1R N3 BLK BLK A4P
WHT R95 RED RED
U VW
P2 P3
Z7C C66 C63 A4P A8P outdoor (Q1) (Q2) A2P A8P
N=5 + + P1 P2 N1 N2 P1 N1 outdoor (F1) (F2)
R50 R59 X5A X51A X5A indoor (F1) (F2) (BACK)
RED
WHT
BLK
X5A F1U R10 F1U R10
U V W X3A + - X4A X3A + - X4A A1P PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD (MAIN) K1R MAGNETIC RELAY (K2M) S1PH, S2PH PRESSURE SWITCH (HIGH)
M + -
3~ X41A V1R V1R A2P PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD (NOISE FILTER) K3R MAGNETIC RELAY (Y1S) T1A CURRENT SENSOR (A6P)
V1R A3P PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD (INV) K4R MAGNETIC RELAY (Y2S) V1CP SAFETY DEVICES INPUT
M2C X2A X2A
X111A X1A X1A A4P, A8P PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD (FAN) K5R MAGNETIC RELAY (Y3S) V1R POWER MODULE (A3P, A4P, A8P)
X11A A5P PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD (ABC I/P) K7R MAGNETIC RELAY (E1HC) V2R DIODE BRIDGE (A3P)
t Z5C Z9C
Z3C 5 5 A6P PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD (CURRENT SENSOR) K8R MAGNETIC RELAY (E2HC) X1A~4A CONNECTOR (M1F, M2F)
R1T RED RED
N=5 BS1~5 PUSH BUTTON SWITCH L1R REACTOR X1M TERMINAL STRIP (POWER SUPPLY)
X1A X2A X3A X4A (MODE, SET, RETURN, TEST, RESET) M1C, M2C MOTOR (COMPRESSOR) X1M TERMINAL STRIP (CONTROL) (A1P)
RED
WHT
BLK
WHT WHT
RED
WHT
BLK
RED
WHT
BLK
U VW C1 CAPACITOR M1F, M2F MOTOR (FAN) Y1E ELECTRONIC EXPANSION VALVE (MAIN)
MS MS RED MS C63, C66 CAPACITOR PS SWITCHING POWER SUPPLY (A1P, A3P) Y2E ELECTRONIC EXPANSION VALVE (SUBCOOLING)
3~ 3~ 3~ DS1 DIP SWITCH Q1RP PHASE REVERSAL DETECT CIRCUIT Y1S SOLENOID VALVE (HOT GAS)
5 5
M1C M1F M2F E1HC, E2HC CRANKCASE HEATER R10 RESISTOR (CURRENT SENSOR) (A4P, A8P) Y2S SOLENOID VALVE (OIL)
F1U FUSE (8A, DC650V) (A4P, A8P) R50, R59 RESISTOR Y3S SOLENOID VALVE (FOUR WAY VALVE)
F1U, F2U FUSE (T, 3.15A, 250V) (A1P) R95 RESISTOR (CURRENT LIMITING) Z1C~7C, Z9C NOISE FILTER (FERRITE CORE)
NOTES) F400U FUSE (T, 6.3A, 250V) (A2P) R1T THERMISTOR (AIR) (A1P) Z1F NOISE FILTER (WITH SURGE ABSORBER)
1. THIS WIRING DIAGRAM IS APPLIED ONLY TO THE OUTDOOR UNIT. H1P~8P PILOT LAMP (SERVICE MONITOR-ORANGE) R1T THERMISTOR (FIN) (A3P)
2. : FIELD WIRING. [H2P] PREPARE, TEST-----FLICKERING R2T THERMISTOR (SUCTION)
MALFUNCTION DETECTION---LIGHT UP R31T, R32T THERMISTOR (M1C, M2C DISCHARGE)
3. : TERMINAL STRIP : CONNECTOR : TERMINAL HAP PILOT LAMP (SERVICE MONITOR-GREEN) R4T THERMISTOR (HEAT EXC. DEICER)
: PROTECTIVE EARTH (SCREW) K1R MAGNETIC RELAY (A3P) R5T THERMISTOR (HEAT EXC. OUTLET)
4. WHEN USING THE OPTIONAL ADAPTOR, REFER TO THE INSTALLATION K3R MAGNETIC RELAY (A2P) R6T THERMISTOR (LIQ. PIPE)
MANUAL OF THE OPTIONAL ADAPTOR. K2M MAGNETIC CONTACTOR (M1C) (A3P) R7T THERMISTOR (ACCUMULATOR)
5. FOR CONNECTION WIRING TO INDOOR-OUTDOOR TRANSMISSION F1 F2, K4M MAGNETIC CONTACTOR (M1C) (A2P) S1NPH PRESSURE SENSOR (HIGH)
K2M MAGNETIC CONTACTOR (M2C) S1NPL PRESSURE SENSOR (LOW)
OUTDOOR-OUTDOOR TRANSMISSION F1 F2, OUTDOOR-MULTI
TRANSMISSION Q1 Q2, REFER TO THE INSTALLATION MANUAL.
6. HOW TO USE BS1~5 AND DS1 SWITCH, REFER TO "SERVICE PRECAUTION"
LABEL ON EL. COMPO. BOX COVER.
7. WHEN OPERATING, DON'T SHORT CIRCUIT THE PROTECTION DEVICE (S1PH, S2PH).
8. COLORS BLK : BLACK RED : RED BLU : BLUE WHT : WHITE PNK : PINK YLW : YELLOW BRN : BROWN GRY : GRAY GRN : GREEN ORG : ORANGE.
3D061708
320
321
L1 L2 L3 N TERMINAL OF M1C ~ M3C
POWER SUPPLY A1P W
C1
Y1 : 3N~380-415V 50Hz
RED X1A F1U U
BLU PS H1P H2P H3P H4P H5P H6P H7P H8P V
BLK F2U Q1RP LAYOUT OF M1C ~ M3C, M1F, M2F
Z1C < BS1 BS2 BS3 BS4 BS5 HAP EL. COMPO. BOX
M2F M1F
RED
S1PH P
K3R
K4R
K5R
K7R
K8R
K9R
M1C
GRN
BLU
BLK
WHT
A2P ON DS1 X37A
X400A X2A M2C
X7A X8A X9A X11A X12A X13A
P< OFF 1234 NOTE) 4 M3C
X3A E1HC E2HC E3HC X18A t R1T
Y1S Y2S Y3S
RED
WHT
BLK
BLU
< S1NPL OUTER SHELL
F400U S3PH P * : * IS CONNECTOR COLOR FOR X31A
K4M K3R X402A X4A R31T R32T R33T R2T R4T R5T R6T R7T PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD. EL. COMPO. BOX
X401A X403A t t t t t t t t * : * IS CONNECTOR COLOR FOR COMPONENT. X32A S1NPH
RXQ14PA / 16PA / 18PAY1
Z6C V1CP * : * IS DISCRIMINATION COLOR FOR

RED
WHT
BLK
COMPONENT LEAD WIRE. X1A X3A A1P
X26A A1RED K1R X1M
X21A Y1E X2A X4A
X25A K2M X5A 1 X29A 1 X30A 5
WHT M
A3P A6P A7P A5P
A2 X1M
X10A X1A K2R A5P X1M K2M K3M
X61A Z2C A1RED TO IN/D UNIT TO OUT/D UNIT TO MULTI UNIT X23A BLU Y2E
X1A X1A K2M X1A X1M F1 F2 F1 F2 Q1 Q2 5
X6A X28A K3M X6A X66A C/H SELECTOR M (FRONT)
T1A T1A WHT
V2R A2 A B C WHT BLU
A6P A7P + - PS X4A X20A L1R
P1 A3P
R S T R S T WHT K1R NOTE) 5
L1R N3 Z4CBLK BLK A4P
K2M K3M R95
U V W U V W WHT RED RED
P2 P3 COOL HEAT S1S
Z7C Z8C COOL A2P A8P
C66 C63 A4P A8P outdoor (Q1) (Q2)
N=5 N=5 + + S2S HEAT FAN
P1 P2 N1 N2 P1 N1 outdoor (F1) (F2)
(BACK)
R50 R59 X5A X51A X5A COOL/HEAT SELECTOR indoor (F1) (F2)
RED
WHT
BLK
RED
WHT
BLK
X5A F1U R10 F1U R10 NOTES) (OPTIONAL ACCESSORY)
U V W U V W X3A + - X4A X3A + - X4A 1. THIS WIRING DIAGRAM IS APPLIED ONLY TO THE OUTDOOR UNIT.
M M + - X41A
3~ 3~ V1R V1R 2. : FIELD WIRING.
V1R
M2C M3C X2A X2A 3. : TERMINAL STRIP : CONNECTOR : TERMINAL : PROTECTIVE EARTH (SCREW)
X111A X1A X1A
X11A 4. WHEN USING THE OPTIONAL ADAPTOR, REFER TO THE INSTALLATION MANUAL OF THE OPTIONAL ADAPTOR.
Z3C t Z5C Z9C
5 5 5. FOR CONNECTION WIRING TO INDOOR-OUTDOOR TRANSMISSION F1 F2, OUTDOOR-OUTDOOR
N=5 R1T RED RED
X1A X2A X3A X4A TRANSMISSION F1 F2 OUTDOOR-MULI TRANSMISSION Q1 Q2, REFER TO THE INSTALLATION MANUAL.
RED
WHT
BLK
WHT WHT 6. HOW TO USE BS1~5 AND DS1 SWITCH, REFER TO "SERVICE PRECAUTION" LABEL ON EL. COMPO. BOX COVER.
RED
WHT
BLK
RED
WHT
BLK
U V W
MS MS RED MS 7. WHEN OPERATING, DON' T SHORT CIRCUIT THE PROTECTION DEVICE (S1PH~S3PH).
3~ 3~ 5 3~ 5 8. COLORS BLK : BLACK RED : RED BLU : BLUE WHT : WHITE PNK : PINK YLW : YELLOW BRN : BROWN
M1C M1F M2F GRY : GRAY GRN : GREEN ORG : ORANGE.
A1P PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD (MAIN) K2M, K3M MAGNETIC CONTACTOR (M2C, M3C) R7T THERMISTOR (ACCUMULATOR)
A2P PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD (NOISE FILTER) K1R, K2R MAGNETIC RELAY (K2M, K3M) S1NPH PRESSURE SENSOR (HIGH)
A3P PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD (INV) K3R MAGNETIC RELAY (Y1S) S1NPL PRESSURE SENSOR (LOW)
A4P, A8P PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD (FAN) K4R MAGNETIC RELAY (Y2S) S1PH~3PH PRESSURE SWITCH (HIGH)
A5P PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD (ABC I/P) K5R MAGNETIC RELAY (Y3S) T1A CURRENT SENSOR (A6P, A7P)
A6P, A7P PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD (CURRENT SENSOR) K7R MAGNETIC RELAY (E1HC) V1CP SAFETY DEVICES INPUT
BS1~5 PUSH BUTTON SWITCH (MODE, SET, RETURN, TEST, RESET) K8R MAGNETIC RELAY (E2HC) V1R POWER MODULE (A3P, A4P, A8P)
C1 CAPACITOR K9R MAGNETIC RELAY (E3HC) V2R DIODE BRIDGE (A3P)
C63, C66 CAPACITOR L1R REACTOR X1A~4A CONNECTOR (M1F, M2F)
DS1 DIP SWITCH M1C~3C MOTOR (COMPRESSOR) X1M TERMINAL STRIP (POWER SUPPLY)
E1HC~3HC CRANKCASE HEATER M1F, M2F MOTOR (FAN) X1M TERMINAL STRIP (CONTROL) (A1P)
F1U FUSE (8A, DC650V) (A4P, A8P) PS SWITCHING POWER SUPPLY (A1P, A3P) X1M TERMINAL STRIP (ABC I/P) (A5P)
F1U, F2U FUSE (T, 3.15A, 250V) (A1P) Q1RP PHASE REVERSAL DETECT CIRCUIT Y1E ELECTRONIC EXPANSION VALVE (MAIN)
F400U FUSE (T, 6.3A, 250V) (A2P) R10 RESISTOR (CURRENT SENSOR) (A4P, A8P) Y2E ELECTRONIC EXPANSION VALVE (SUBCOOLING)
H1P~8P PILOT LAMP (SERVICE MONITOR-ORANGE) R50, R59 RESISTOR Y1S SOLENOID VALVE (HOT GAS)
[H2P] PREPARE, TEST-------------------FLICKERING R95 RESISTOR (CURRENT LIMITING) Y2S SOLENOID VALVE (OIL)
MALFUNCTION DETECTION---LIGHT UP R1T THERMISTOR (AIR) (A1P) Y3S SOLENOID VALVE (FOUR WAY VALVE)
R1T THERMISTOR (FIN) (A3P) Z1C~9C NOISE FILTER (FERRITE CORE)
HAP PILOT LAMP (SERVICE MONITOR-GREEN) R2T THERMISTOR (SUCTION) Z1F NOISE FILTER (WITH SURGE ABSORBER)
K1R MAGNETIC RELAY (A3P) R31~33T THERMISTOR (M1C~3C DISCHARGE)
K3R MAGNETIC RELAY (A2P) R4T THERMISTOR (HEAT EXC. DEICER) COOL/HEAT SELECTOR
K2M MAGNETIC CONTACTOR (M1C) (A3P) R5T THERMISTOR (HEAT EXC. OUTLET) S1S SELECTOR SWITCH (FAN/COOL HEAT) 3D060911A
K4M MAGNETIC CONTACTOR (M1C) (A2P) R6T THERMISTOR (LIQ. PIPE) S2S SELECTOR SWITCH (COOL/HEAT)
Appendix
Si34-804_A
2.2
Appendix
Si34-804_A
Notes 1) All wiring, components and materials to be procured on the site must comply with the 6) Unit shall be grounded in compliance with the applicable local and national codes.
applicable local and national codes. 7) Wiring shown are general points-of-connection guides only and are not intended for or to
2) Use copper conductors only. include all details for a specific installation.
3) As for details, see wiring diagram. 8) Be sure to install the switch and the fuse to the power line of each equipment.
4) Install circuit breaker for safety. 9) Install the main switch that can interrupt all the power sources in an integrated manner
5) All field wiring and components must be provided by licensed electrician. because this system consists of the equipment utilizing the multiple power sources.
10) If there exists the possibility of reversed phase, lose phase, momentary blackout or the
power goes on and off while the product is operating, attach a reversed phase protection
circuit locally.
POWER SUPPLY Running the product in reversed phase may break the compressor and other parts.
Field Wiring
L1 L2 L3 N
MAIN SWITCH
OUTDOOR UNITS
L1 L2 L3 N
SWITCH
FUSE
RXQ5PA / 8PA / 10PA / 12PA / 14PA / 16PA / 18PAY1
POWER SUPPLY
LN
MAIN
SWITCH
2 WIRES CABLE
(TRANSMISSION LINE)
2 WIRES CABLE 2 WIRES CABLE 2 WIRES CABLE

2 WIRES CABLE (TRANSMISSION LINE) (TRANSMISSION LINE) (TRANSMISSION LINE)
(POWER LINE)
L N L N L N L N
SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH
FUSE FUSE FUSE FUSE

2 WIRES CABLE 2 WIRES CABLE 2 WIRES CABLE 2 WIRES CABLE
(POWER LINE) (POWER LINE) (POWER LINE) (POWER LINE)
INDOOR UNITS
3D051452J
322
323
Notes 1) All wiring, components and materials to be procured on the site must comply with the 7) Wiring shown are general points-of-connection guides only and are not intended for or to
applicable local and national codes. include all details for a specific installation.
2) Use copper conductors only. 8) Be sure to install the switch and the fuse to the power line of each equipment.
3) As for details, see wiring diagram. 9) Install the main switch that can interrupt all the power sources in an integrated manner because
4) Install circuit breaker for safety. this system consists of the equipment utilizing the multiple power sources.
5) All field wiring and components must be provided by licensed electrician. 10) The capacity of UNIT1 must be larger than UNIT2 when the power source is connected in
6) Unit shall be grounded in compliance with the applicable local and national codes. series between the units.
11) If there exists the possibility of reversed phase, lose phase, momentary blackout or the power
goes on and off while the product is operating, attach a reversed phase protection circuit locally.
Running the product in reversed phase may break the compressor and other parts.
When the power source is supplied to each When the power source is connected in
POWER SUPPLY outdoor unit individually. POWER SUPPLY series between the units.
L1L2L3 N L1L2L3 N
MAIN OUTDOOR UNITS MAIN OUTDOOR UNITS
SWITCH 2 WIRES CABLE SWITCH 2 WIRES CABLE
(TRANSMISSION LINE) (TRANSMISSION LINE)
[UNIT 1] [UNIT 2] [UNIT 1] [UNIT 2]
RXQ20PA / 22PA / 24PA / 26PA / 28PA / 30PA / 32PAY1
L1 L2 L3 N L1 L2 L3 N L1 L2 L3 N
SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH
FUSE FUSE FUSE
POWER SUPPLY POWER SUPPLY
LN LN
MAIN MAIN
SWITCH SWITCH
2 WIRES CABLE
2 WIRES CABLE (TRANSMISSION LINE)
(TRANSMISSION LINE) 2 WIRES CABLE 2 WIRES CABLE 2 WIRES CABLE 2 WIRES CABLE
2 WIRES CABLE (TRANSMISSION LINE) (TRANSMISSION LINE) (TRANSMISSION LINE) (TRANSMISSION LINE) (TRANSMISSION LINE) (TRANSMISSION LINE)
(POWER LINE) (POWER LINE)
L N L N L N L N L N L N L N L N
SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH
FUSE FUSE FUSE FUSE FUSE FUSE FUSE FUSE
2 WIRES CABLE
(POWER LINE)
2 WIRES CABLE 2 WIRES CABLE 2 WIRES CABLE 2 WIRES CABLE 2 WIRES CABLE 2 WIRES CABLE 2 WIRES CABLE
(POWER LINE) (POWER LINE) (POWER LINE) (POWER LINE) (POWER LINE) (POWER LINE) (POWER LINE)
INDOOR UNITS INDOOR UNITS
3D052261E
Appendix
Si34-804_A
Appendix
Si34-804_A
Notes 1) All wiring, components and materials to be procured on the site must comply with 7) Wiring shown are general points-of-connection guides only and are not intended for or to
the applicable local and national codes. include all details for a specific installation.
2) Use copper conductors only. 8) Be sure to install the switch and the fuse to the power line of each equipment.
3) As for details, see wiring diagram. 9) Install the main switch that can interrupt all the power sources in an integrated manner
4) Install circuit breaker for safety. because this system consists of the equipment utilizing the multiple power sources.
5) All field wiring and components must be provided by licensed electrician. 10) The capacity of UNIT1 must be larger than UNIT2 when the power source is connected in
6) Unit shall be grounded in compliance with the applicable local and national codes. series between the units.
11) If there exists the possibility of reversed phase, lose phase, momentary blackout or the power
goes on and off while the product is operating, attach a reversed phase protection circuit
locally.
Running the product in reversed phase may break the compressor and other parts.
When the power source is supplied to each When the power source is connected in
POWER SUPPLY outdoor unit individually. POWER SUPPLY series between the units.
L1L2 L3N L1L2 L3N
MAIN OUTDOOR UNITS MAIN OUTDOOR UNITS
SWITCH 2 WIRES CABLE 2 WIRES CABLE SWITCH 2 WIRES CABLE 2 WIRES CABLE
(TRANSMISSION LINE) (TRANSMISSION LINE) (TRANSMISSION LINE) (TRANSMISSION LINE)
[UNIT 1] [UNIT 2] [UNIT 3] [UNIT 1] [UNIT 2] [UNIT 3]
L1 L2 L3 N L1 L2 L3 N L1 L2 L3 N L1 L2 L3 N
SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH
FUSE FUSE FUSE FUSE
POWER SUPPLY POWER SUPPLY
LN LN
MAIN MAIN
SWITCH SWITCH
2 WIRES CABLE
(TRANSMISSION LINE)
2 WIRES CABLE 2 WIRES CABLE 2 WIRES CABLE 2 WIRES CABLE 2 WIRES CABLE
(TRANSMISSION LINE) (TRANSMISSION LINE) (TRANSMISSION LINE) (TRANSMISSION LINE) (TRANSMISSION LINE) (TRANSMISSION LINE) (TRANSMISSION LINE)
(POWER LINE)
2 WIRES CABLE L N L N L N L N L N L N L N L N
SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH
(POWER LINE)
FUSE FUSE FUSE FUSE FUSE FUSE FUSE FUSE
2 WIRES CABLE
(POWER LINE)
RXQ34PA / 36PA / 38PA / 40PA / 42PA / 44PA / 46PA / 48PA / 50PA / 52PA / 54PAY1
2 WIRES CABLE 2 WIRES CABLE 2 WIRES CABLE 2 WIRES CABLE 2 WIRES CABLE 2 WIRES CABLE 2 WIRES CABLE
(POWER LINE) (POWER LINE) (POWER LINE) (POWER LINE) (POWER LINE) (POWER LINE) (POWER LINE)
INDOOR UNITS INDOOR UNITS
3D052262E
324
325
2.3
INDOOR UNIT H1P LIGHT EMITTING DIODE
A1P PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD (ON-RED)
A2P PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD H2P LIGHT EMITTING DIODE
GRN R2T R3T
C1 CAPACITOR (TIMER-GREEN) S1L A3P A4P
t t SS1
F1U FUSE (F, 5A, 250V) H3P LIGHT EMITTING DIODE A1P H1P
POWER SUPPLY X2A
(FILTER SIGN-RED) H2P BS1
HAP LIGHT EMITTING DIODE ~220-240V X2M R4T
X18A X17A X15A H3P
50Hz SS2
(SERVICE MONITOR GREEN) H4P LIGHT EMITTING DIODE F1U t V1R + H4P
L RED X24A
K1R MAGNETIC RELAY (DEFROST-ORANGE) + H5P
Z1F K1R PS NOTE) 3
KPR - C1 X1A X1A H6P

Indoor Unit
KPR MAGNETIC RELAY (M1P) SS1 SELECTOR SWITCH N WHT

(MAIN/SUB) X27A RECEIVER/DISPLAY UNIT
M1F MOTOR (INDOOR FAN)
M1P MOTOR (DRAIN PUMP) SS2 SELECTOR SWITCH PNK
X30A T2 INPUT FROM
M1S MOTOR (SWING FLAP) (WIRELESS ADDRESS SET) HAP WHT OUTSIDE NOTE) 4
GRN/YLW T1
R1T THERMISTOR (AIR) CONNECTOR FOR OPTIONAL PARTS X25A YLW
YLW F2 TRANSMISSION WIRING
R2T THERMISTOR (COIL LIQUID) X24A CONNECTOR (WIRELESS M ORG
YLW ~ X35A X33A F1 CENTRALIZED REMOTE CONTROLLER
R3T THERMISTOR (COIL GAS) REMOTE CONTROLLER) NOTE) 3 NOTE) 3 BLU NOTE) 2
M1P P2 P2
BLK P1 R1T WIRED REMOTE
R4T THERMISTOR PTC X33A CONNECTOR P1 CONTROLLER
SS1
S1L FLOAT SWITCH (ADAPTOR FOR WIRING) X1M
V1R DIODE BRIDGE X35A CONNECTOR (GROUP X16A X7A X36A
X20A X20A
X1M TERMINAL STRIP CONTROL ADAPTOR)
X2M TERMINAL STRIP WIRED REMOTE CONTROLLER Z1C Z1C
N=1 N=1
Y1E ELECTRONIC R1T THERMISTOR (AIR)
M
FXFQ25P / 32P / 40P / 50P / 63P / 80P / 100P / 125PVE
BLU
BRN
RED
BLU
WHT
ORG
BRN
RED
WHT
ORG
EXPANSION VALVE SS1 SELECTOR SWITCH (MAIN/SUB) CN1
R1T
Y1E MSW WHT
Z1C FERRITE CORE A2P
Z1F NOISE FILTER MS M1S MS
M1F 3~ M1F 3~
PS POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
100, 125-CLASS 25~80-CLASS
RECEIVER/DISPLAY UNIT
(ATTACHED TO WIRELESS X24A A2P
REMOTE CONTROLLER)
A3P PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD X1M A1P
A4P PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD X2M
BS1 PUSH BUTTON (ON/OFF)

X35A X33A
CONTROL BOX
NOTES)
1. : TERMINAL , : CONNECTOR 4. WHEN CONNECTING THE INPUT WIRES FROM OUTSIDE, FORCED OFF OR
: FIELD WIRING ON/OFF CONTROL OPERATION CAN BE SELECTED BY THE REMOTE
2. IN CASE USING CENTRALIZED REMOTE CONTROLLER, CONNECT CONTROLLER. SEE INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR MORE DETAILS.
IT TO THE UNIT IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE ATTACHED 5. CONFIRM THE METHOD OF SETTING THE SELECTOR SWITCH (SS1, SS2) BY
INSTALLATION MANUAL. INSTALLATION MANUAL AND ENGINEERING DATA, ETC.
3. X24A, X33A AND X35A ARE CONNECTED WHEN THE OPTIONAL 6. SYMBOLS SHOWS AS FOLLOWS:
ACCESSORIES ARE BEING USED. RED : RED BLK : BLACK WHT : WHITE YLW : YELLOW GRN : GREEN
ORG : ORANGE BRN : BROWN PNK : PINK GRY : GRAY BLU : BLUE
3D059890A
Appendix
Si34-804_A
Si34-804_A Wiring Diagrams for Reference
FXCQ20M / 25M / 32M / 63MVE
3D039556A
Appendix 326
Wiring Diagrams for Reference Si34-804_A
FXCQ40M / 50M / 80M/ 125MVE
3D039557A
327 Appendix
FXKQ25MA / 32MA / 40MA / 63MAVE
3D039564C
Appendix 328
329
A1P PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD
C1 CAPACITOR (M1F)
F1U FUSE (F5A/250V)
HAP LIGHT EMITTING DIODE
(SERVICE MONITOR GREEN)
KPR MAGNETIC RELAY (M1P)
R1T R2T R3T
M1P MOTOR (DRAIN PUMP) t t t
FXDQ20PB / 25PB / 32PB
Q1M THERMAL PROTECTOR (M1F EMBEDDED) POWER A1P

SUPPLY X1M NOTE) 5
R1T THERMISTOR (AIR)

~220-240V PNK T2 INPUT FROM
R2T THERMISTOR (COIL-1) X13A X12A X11A X16A Z1C
50Hz WHT T1 OUTSIDE
R3T THERMISTOR (COIL-2) N=3
X2M YLW F2 TRANSMISSION
F1U X30A WIRING CENTRALIZED
S1L FLOAT SWITCH L RED
L ORG F1
T1R TRANSFORMER (220V/22V) REMOTE CONTROLLER
N N BLU BLU P2 P2 R1T NOTE) 3
V1TR PHASE CONTROL CIRCUIT X1A T1R BLK P1 P1
X31A X3A
X1M TERMINAL BLOCK GRN t SS1
X2M TERMINAL BLOCK /YLW WIRED REMOTE
X18A Z2C CONTROLLER
Y1E ELECTRONIC EXPANSION VALVE
FXDQ40NB / 50NB / 63NBVE (with Drain Pump)
Z1C Z2C NOISE FILTER (FERRITE CORE) N=3

KPR X27A
WIRED REMOTE CONTROLLER
GRY
R1T THERMISTOR (AIR) PRP
X25A BLU
SS1 SELECTOR SWITCH (MAIN/SUB) M
C1
CONNECTOR FOR OPTIONAL PARTS M
~
X16A CONNECTOR (ADAPTOR FOR WIRING) Y1E
V1TR
YLW
WHT
X18A CONNECTOR (WIRING ADAPTOR X7A M1P

X18A X16A RED M
FOR ELECTRICAL APPENDICES) ~
BLK Q1M
X4A M1F
A1P X8A HAP
X1M C1 X2M S1L

Z1C
T1R
Z2C
CONTROL BOX
NOTES)
1. : TERMINAL
, : CONNECTOR
2. : FIELD WIRING
3. IN CASE USING CENTRALIZED REMOTE CONTROLLER, CONNECT IT TO THE UNIT IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE ATTACHED INSTALLATION MANUAL.
4. REMOTE CONTROLLER MODEL VARIES ACCORDING TO THE COMBINATION SYSTEM, CONFIRM ENGINEERING MATERIALS AND CATALOGS, ETC. BEFORE CONNECTING.
5. WHEN CONNECTING THE INPUT WIRES FROM OUTSIDE, FORCED OFF OR ON/OFF CONTROL OPERATION CAN BE SELECTED BY REMOTE CONTROLLER.
IN DETAILS, REFER TO THE INSTALLATION MANUAL ATTACHED THE UNIT.
6. SYMBOLS SHOW AS FOLLOWS: RED : RED BLK : BLACK WHT : WHITE YLW : YELLOW PRP : PURPLE GRY : GRAY BLU : BLUE PNK : PINK ORG : ORANGE GRN : GREEN
3D060547
Appendix
Si34-804_A
Appendix
Si34-804_A
C1 CAPACITOR (M1F)
F1U FUSE (F5A/250V)
HAP LIGHT EMITTING DIODE
(SERVICE MONITOR GREEN)
R1T R2T R3T
Q1M THERMAL PROTECTOR (M1F EMBEDDED)
R1T THERMISTOR (AIR)
FXDQ20PB / 25PB / 32PB
t t t
R2T THERMISTOR (COIL-1) POWER A1P
SUPPLY X1M NOTE) 5
R3T THERMISTOR (COIL-2)
~220-240V PNK T2 INPUT FROM
T1R TRANSFORMER (220V/22V) X13A X12A X11A X16A Z1C
50Hz WHT T1 OUTSIDE
V1TR PHASE CONTROL CIRCUIT N=3
X2M YLW F2 TRANSMISSION
F1U X30A WIRING CENTRALIZED
X1M TERMINAL BLOCK L RED
L ORG F1
X2M TERMINAL BLOCK REMOTE CONTROLLER
N N BLU BLU P2 P2 R1T NOTE) 3
Y1E ELECTRONIC EXPANSION VALVE P1
X31A BLK P1
Z1C Z2C NOISE FILTER (FERRITE CORE) GRN SS1
WIRED REMOTE CONTROLLER /YLW WIRED REMOTE
R1T THERMISTOR (AIR) X18A Z2C CONTROLLER
X1A T1R N=3
SS1 SELECTOR SWITCH (MAIN/SUB) X3A
t X27A
FXDQ40NB / 50NB / 63NBVET (without Drain Pump)
CONNECTOR FOR OPTIONAL PARTS

GRY
X16A CONNECTOR (ADAPTOR FOR WIRING) PRP
X18A CONNECTOR (WIRING ADAPTOR M BLU
FOR ELECTRICAL APPENDICES) C1
Y1E
V1TR
YLW
WHT
X7A
X18A X16A RED M
~
BLK Q1M
X4A M1F
A1P HAP
X1M C1 X2M
Z1C
T1R
Z2C
NOTES) CONTROL BOX
1. : TERMINAL
, : CONNECTOR
2. : FIELD WIRING
3. IN CASE USING CENTRALIZED REMOTE CONTROLLER, CONNECT IT TO THE UNIT IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE ATTACHED INSTALLATION MANUAL.
4. REMOTE CONTROLLER MODEL VARIES ACCORDING TO THE COMBINATION SYSTEM, CONFIRM ENGINEERING MATERIALS AND CATALOGS, ETC. BEFORE CONNECTING.
5. WHEN CONNECTING THE INPUT WIRES FROM OUTSIDE, FORCED OFF OR ON/OFF CONTROL OPERATION CAN BE SELECTED BY REMOTE CONTROLLER.
6. SYMBOLS SHOW AS FOLLOWS: RED : RED BLK : BLACK WHT : WHITE YLW : YELLOW PRP : PURPLE GRY : GRAY BLU : BLUE PNK : PINK ORG : ORANGE GRN : GREEN
3D060548
330
331
INDOOR UNIT
NOTE-6 POWER SUPPLY COMPRESSOR ADAPTOR FOR WIRING
220-240V OPERATION (OPTIONAL ACCESSORY)
A2P TERMINAL BOARD LOW E.S.P OPERATION NOTE-5 SEPARATE POWER SUPPLY ~
C1 CAPACITOR (M1F) 50Hz X1
220-240V KCR
F1U FUSE ( B , 5A, 250V) X4A ~ X2
HAP LIGHT EMITTING DIODE (SERVICE MONITOR GREEN) 50Hz
X3
K1R-K3R A2P KFR
TERMINALS FOR
OPERATION
INDICATOR
MAGNETIC RELAY (M1F) S1H
X3A X4A X5A X4
KPR MAGNETIC RELAY (M1P) L N X3M L N X3M FAN KHuR Hu
M1F MOTOR (INDOOR FAN) HIGH E.S.P OPERATION R1T R2T R3T S1L OPERATION Y2 %H2O
K1M K1M X1M L N
M1P MOTOR (DRAIN PUMP) F1U KHR
X1A
F1U
Q1M THERMO. SWITCH (135C) OR X4A t t t BLK Y1 K1M
F1U RED BLU GRN/YLW
(145C NOTE9) (M1F EMBEDDED) F2U YC
A2P F3U A1P WHT
R1T THERMISTOR (AIR) E1H L N
F2U
X3A X4A X5A E1H X13A X12A X11A X8A X2A

R2T R3T THERMISTOR (COIL)

(20 25 32 40 50 63 TYPE) F1U
S1L FLOAT SWITCH (20 25 32 TYPE) 40 50 63 80 HAP X16A
T1R TRANSFORMER (220-240V/22V) 100 125 TYPE X3A X18A
HIGH E.S.P OPERATION
X1M TERMINAL BLOCK (POWER) X30A
FC FH FL FLL T1R PNK
X2M TERMINAL BLOCK (CONTROL) X4A X4A T2 T2 NOTE-4
Y1E ELECTRONIC EXPANSION VALVE t WHT INPUT FROM OUTSIDE
BLK ORG BRN KPR T1 T1
OPTIONAL PARTS RED X1A YLW
A2P F2 F2 NOTE-3
X3A X4A BLU
E1H ELECTRIC HEATER A2P ORG TRANSMISSION WIRING
C L LL K1R K2R K3R F1 F1
F1U-F3U FUSE ( B , 15A, 250V) (80 100 125 TYPE) BLU CENTRALIZED REMOTE CONTROLLER
Hu HUMIDIFIER X3A X4A P2 P2
X7A BLK ELECTRIC PARTS BOX
K1M MAGNETIC RELAY (E1H) RED GRY BLK ORG BRN P1 P1 X18A X16A
FC FH FL FLL X7A
S1H HUMIDISTAT WHT M X4A Y2 Y1 X2M
X3M TERMINAL BLOCK (E1H) C1 ~ Q1M
M1F (80 100 125 TYPE) RED BLK ORG BRN A1P A2P
WIRED REMOTE CONTROLLER YLW BLU
R1T THERMISTOR (AIR) A2P C L LL WHT WHT T1R C1 X1M
SS1 SELECTOR SWITCH (MAIN/SUB) X3A X4A X5A X6A
X7A M M R1T X2M
ADAPTOR FOR WIRING ~ P1 P2
F1U F2U FUSE ( B , 5A, 250V) RED GRY BLK BLU
M1P Y1E SS1
KCR MAGNETIC RELAY WHT M ORG BRN
~ WIRED REMOTE CONTROLLER
KFR MAGNETIC RELAY C1
Q1M (OPTIONAL ACCESSORY)
KHR MAGNETIC RELAY(E1H) YLW
FXSQ20M / 25M / 32M / 40M / 50M / 63M / 80M / 100M / 125MVE
M1F (20 25 32 40 50 63 TYPE)

KHuR MAGNETIC RELAY(Hu)
CONNECTOR FOR OPTIONAL PARTS
X16A CONNECTOR (ADAPTOR FOR WIRING)
X18A CONNECTOR (WIRING ADAPTOR
FOR ELECTRICAL APPENDICES)
NOTES)
1. : TERMINAL BLOCK, , : CONNECTOR, : TERMINAL
2. : FIELD WIRING
3. IN CASE USING CENTRALIZED REMOTE CONTROLLER, CONNECT IT TO THE UNIT IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE ATTACHED INSTRUCTION MANUAL.
4. WHEN CONNECTING THE INPUT WIRES FROM OUTSIDE. FORCED OFF OR ON/OFF CONTROL OPERATION CAN BE SELECTED BY REMOTE CONTROLLER. IN DETAILS, REFER TO THE
INSTALLATION MANUAL ATTACHED THE UNIT.
5. IN CASE INSTALLING THE ELECTRIC HEATER, EXECUTE THE ADDITIONAL WIRING FOR HEATER CIRCUIT (K1M, E1H). IN THIS CASE, THE MAIN POWER SUPPLY HAS TO BE SUPPLIED
INDEPENDENTLY.
6. IN CASE HIGH OR LOW E.S.P. OPERATION, CHANGE OVER THE WIRING CONNECTION FROM X4A (OF A2P) TO X3A OR X5A.
7. SYMBOLS SHOW AS FOLLOWS. (PNK : PINK WHT : WHITE YLW : YELLOW GRY : GRAY ORG : ORANGE BLU : BLUE BLK : BLACK RED : RED BRN : BROWN GRN : GREEN)
8. USE COPPER CONDUCTORS ONLY.
9. ONLY 80. 100. 125 TYPE.
3D039561B
Appendix
Si34-804_A
Appendix
Si34-804_A
INDOOR UNIT R1T THERMISTOR(SUCTION AIR) R1T R2T R3T R4T

A1P PRINTED CIRCUIT R2T THERMISTOR(LIQUID) M1P M ~ GRN
Z2C S1L
BOARD R3T THERMISTOR(GAS) GRN t t t t
POWER A1P YLW YLW
A2P PRINTED CIRCUIT R4T THERMISTOR /YLW
SUPPLY
BOARD(FAN) (DISCHARGE AIR) N=1 RED
A3P PRINTED CIRCUIT R5T THERMISTOR NTC F1U KPR X16A X18A X17A X13A X15A
BOARD(CAPACITOR) (CURRENT LIMITING) L L X25A
C1, C2, C3 CAPACITOR S1L FLOAT SWITCH N BLU PNK
N T2 INPUT FROM
F1U FUSE(T, 3.15A, 250V) V1R DIODE BRIDGE ~220-240V X27A PS WHT
F2U FUSE(T, 5A, 250V) V2R POWER MODULE 50Hz X1M Z1C T1 OUTSIDE NOTE)3
YLW
F3U FUSE(T, 6.3A, 250V) X1M TERMINAL STRIP HAP X30A ORG F2 TRANSMISSION
F1 WIRING
F4U FUSE(T, 6.3A, 250V) (POWER SUPPLY) P2 CENTRALIZED REMOTE
FOR FXMQ50 63 80 100 125 140PVE
BLU
HAP LIGHT EMITTING DIODE X2M TERMINAL STRIP TO X70A(A1P) + C2 + C3 R3 R4 X70A P1 CONTROLLER
(SERVICE MONITOR-GREEN) (CONTROL) X35A X2M NOTE)2
L1R - - X7A
(A1P, A2P) Y1E ELECTRONIC A3P BLK BLK
A2P X28A BLK SS1
KPR MAGNETIC RELAY EXPANSION VALVE P2
X3A X6A X9A FOR FXMQ20 25 32 40PVE L1R P1 R1T
K1R MAGNETIC RELAY Z1C, NOISE FILTER A2P
TO X1M R5T X1A BLK X33A WIRED REMOTE
L1R REACTOR Z2C (FERRITE CORE) X3A X6A M Y1E CONTROLLER
M1F MOTOR(FAN) Z1F NOISE FILTER RED F3U M1F
-t + C1 WHT R1 (OPTIONAL ACCESSORY)
MS F4U RED
M1P MOTOR(DRAIN PUMP) CONNECTOR OPTIONAL Z1F K1R
- 3~ RED
FXMQ20P / 25P / 32P / 40P / 50P / 63P / 80P / 100P / 125P / 140PVE
PS SWITCHING POWER ACCESSORY BLU RED + C1 F2U Z2C

X10A R2 Z1F K1R M1F L1R X28A
SUPPLY(A1P, A2P) X28A CONNECTOR V2R YLW BLU - BLU MS A
V1R 5
R1 RESISTOR (POWER SUPPLY FOR WIRING) BLU BRN 3~ A2P 3 A
X10A P 1 X35A
(CURRENT LIMITING) X33A CONNECTOR HAP ORG GRN V1R R2 ORG * P
R2 CURRENT SENSING (FOR WIRING) PNK WHT
PS GRY PS Z
DEVICE X35A CONNECTOR(ADAPTOR) X2A HAP X8A 1 X33A
R3, R4 RESISTOR WIRED REMOTE CONTROLLER C X1M X2M
(ELECTRIC DISCHARGE) R1T THERMISTOR(AIR) EL.COMPO.BOX (INDOOR)
SS1 SELECTOR SWITCH *ONLY FXMQ50 63 80 100 125 140PVE
(MAIN/SUB)
NOTES) 1. : TERMINAL : CONNECTOR : FIELD WIRING

2.IN CASE USING CENTRALIZED REMOTE CONTROLLER, CONNECT IT TO THE UNIT IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE ATTACHED INSTALLATION MANUAL.
3.WHEN CONNECTING THE INPUT WIRES FROM OUTSIDE, FORCED OFF OR ON/OFF CONTROL OPERATION CAN BE SELECTED BY REMOTE CONTROLLER.
4.COLORS BLK:BLACK RED:RED BLU:BLUE WHT:WHITE PNK:PINK YLW:YELLOW BRN:BROWN GRY:GRAY GRN:GREEN ORG:ORANGE.
3D058783C
332
FXMQ200MA / 250MAVE
3D039621B
333 Appendix
FXHQ32MA / 63MA / 100MAVE
3D039801D
Appendix 334
335
INDOOR UNIT A2P A3P
A1P PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD A1P SS1
POWER SUPPLY H1P
F1U FUSE( B , 3A, 250V) GRN R3T R2T R1T X2A BS1
H2P
220~240V X2M GRN/YLW
HAP LIGHT EMITTING DIODE SS2 H3P
~ NE t t t
(SERVICE MONITOR GREEN) 50Hz A1P H4P
M1F MOTOR (INDOOR FAN) L RED X24A X1A X1A

X14A X18A X19A
M1S MOTOR (SWING FLAP) L F1U NOTE) 8 RECEIVER/DISPLAY UNIT
R1T THERMISTOR (AIR) N N WHT PC (WIRELESS REMOTE CONTROLLER)
X24A
R2T THERMISTOR (COIL LIQUID PIPE) X27A NOTE) 5
NOTE) 8 PNK T2
PC INPUT FROM OUTSIDE
R3T THERMISTOR (COIL GAS PIPE) WHT T1
X2M HAP X35A YLW F2 TRANSMISSION WIRING
A1P X30A
X1M TERMINAL BLOCK (CONTROL) ORG F1 CENTRALIZED REMOTE CONTROLLER
X2M
X20A X36A X7A X15A BLU P2
X2M TERMINAL BLOCK (POWER) NOTE) 2
BLK P1 SS1
Y1E ELECTRONIC EXPANSION VALVE X1M P2 WIRED REMOTE
HAP X1M A1P P1 R1T CONTROLLER
PC POWER CIRCUIT HAP
BLU
BRN
RED
WHT
ORG
X1M WHT
FXAQ20MA / 25MA / 32MAVE / 40MA / 50MA / 63MAVE
RECEIVER/DISPLAY UNIT (ATTACHED

TO WIRELESS REMOTE CONTROLLER) SIDE FRONT MS MSW M 5. WHEN CONNECTING THE INPUT WIRES FROM
CONTROL BOX 3~
A2P PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD OUTSIDE, FORCED OFF OR ON/OFF CONTROL
(INDOOR UNIT) M1S Y1E
A3P PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD M1F OPERATION CAN BE SELECTED BY REMOTE
BS1 PUSH BUTTON (ON/OFF) NOTES) CONTROLLER. IN DETAILS, REFER TO THE
H1P LIGHT EMITTING DIODE (ON-RED) 1. : TERMINAL : CONNECTOR INSTALLATION MANUAL ATTACHED THE UNIT.
H2P LIGHT EMITTING DIODE : FIELD WIRING : CONNECTOR 6. REMOTE CONTROLLER MODEL VARIES
(TIMER-GREEN) 2. IN CASE USING CENTRALIZED REMOTE CONTROLLER, CONNECT IT TO THE UNIT ACCORDING TO THE COMBINATION SYSTEM, CONFIRM
IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE ATTACHED INSTALLATION MANUAL. ENGINEERING DATA AND CATALOGS, ETC. BEFORE
H3P LIGHT EMITTING DIODE
3. SYMBOLS SHOWS AS FOLLOWS: RED : RED WHT : WHITE GRN : GREEN CONNECTING.
(FILTER SIGN-RED)
PNK : PINK YLW : YELLOW BLK : BLACK ORG : ORANGE BRN : BROWN BLU : BLUE 7. CONFIRM THE METHOD OF SETTING THE SELECTOR
H4P LIGHT EMITTING DIODE
4. SHOWS SHORT CIRCUIT CONNECTOR. SWITCH (SS1, SS2) OF WIRED REMOTE CONTROLLER
(DEFROST-ORANGE)
AND WIRELESS REMOTE CONTROLLER BY INSTALL-
SS1 SELECTOR SWITCH (MAIN/SUB) WIRED REMOTE CONTROLLER CONNECTOR FOR OPTIONAL PARTS
ATION MANUAL AND ENGINEERING DATA, ETC.
SS2 SELECTOR SWITCH R1T THERMISTOR (AIR) X15A CONNECTOR (FLOAT SWITCH)
8. X24A IS CONNECTED WHEN THE WIRELESS
(WIRELESS ADDRESS SET) SS1 SELECTOR SWITCH (MAIN/SUB) X35A CONNECTOR (GROUP CONTROL ADAPTOR) REMOTE CONTROLLER KIT IS BEING USED.
3D034206D
Appendix
Si34-804_A
FXLQ20MA / 25MA / 32MA / 40MA / 50MA / 63MAVE

FXNQ20MA / 25MA / 32MA / 40MA / 50MA / 63MAVE
3D039826E
Appendix 336
FXUQ71MA / 100MA / 125MAV1
3D044973A
337 Appendix
FXMQ125MF / 200MF / 250MFV1
3D044996C
Appendix 338
BEVQ71MA / 100MA / 125MAVE
3D044901B
339 Appendix
Si34-804_A List of Electrical and Functional Parts
3. List of Electrical and Functional Parts

3.1 Outdoor Unit
3.1.1 RXQ5PAY1~8PAY1
Model
Item Name Symbol
RXQ5PAY1 RXQ8PAY1
Type JT1GCVDKYR@SB JT1GCVDKYR@T
Inverter OC protection M1C
14.7A
device
Type
Compressor STD 1 OC protection M2C
device
Type
STD 2 OC protection M3C
device
OC protection
Fan motor M1F 1.15A 3A
device
Electronic expansion valve (Main) Y1E Fully closed: 0pls Fully open: 480pls
Fully closed: 0pls
Electronic expansion valve (Subcooling) Y2E Fully open: 480pls
+0
For M1C S1PH OFF: 4.0 0.12 MPa ON: 3.00.15MPa
High pressure
Pressure switch For M2C S2PH
protection
For M3C S3PH
Low pressure sensor SLNPL OFF: 0.07MPa
Discharge gas temperature
protection R3T OFF: 135C
Temperature (Discharge pipe thermistor)
protection Inverter fin temperature
(Radiator fin thermistor)
A1P 250V, 15A
For main PCB
A2P 250V, 3A
Others Fuse
For Noise filter F1U 250V AC 5A Class B
PCB
Appendix 340
List of Electrical and Functional Parts Si34-804_A
3.1.2 RXQ10PAY1~12PAY1
Model
Item Name Symbol
RXQ10PAY1 RXQ12PAY1
Type JT1GCVDKYR@T
14.7A
device
Type JT170G-KYE@T
15.0A
device
Type
device
OC protection
Fan motor M1F 3A 1.15A
device
Electronic expansion valve (Subcooling) Y2E Fully closed: 0pls Fully open: 480pls
+0
High pressure +0
Pressure switch For M2C S2PH OFF: 4.0 0.12 MPa ON: 3.00.15MPa
protection
For M3C S3PH
A1P 250V, 15A
For main PCB
A2P 250V, 3A
Others Fuse
PCB
341 Appendix
Model
Item Name Symbol
RXQ14PAY1 RXQ16PAY1 RXQ18PAY1
Type JT1GCVDKYR@T
14.7A
device
Type JT170G-KYE@T
15.0A
device
Type JT170G-KYE@T
15.0A
device
OC protection
Fan motor M1F 1.15A 3A
device
Electronic expansion valve (Subcooling) Y2E Fully closed: 0pls Fully open: 480pls
+0
+0
High pressure For M2C S2PH OFF: 4.0 0.12 MPa ON: 3.00.15MPa
Pressure switch
protection +0
OFF: 4.0 0.12 MPa
For M3C S3PH
ON: 3.00.15MPa
A1P 250V, 15A
For main PCB
A2P 250V, 3A
Others Fuse
PCB
Appendix 342
3.2 Indoor Side

3.2.1 Indoor Unit
Model
Parts Name Symbol FXFQ25 FXFQ32 FXFQ40 FXFQ50 FXFQ63 FXFQ80 FXFQ100 FXFQ125 Remark
PVE PVE PVE PVE PVE PVE PVE PVE
Wired Remote
BRC1E61
Remote Controller
Option
Controller Wireless Remote
Controller BRC7F635F
Fan Motor M1F DC280V 56W 8P DC 320V 120W 8P

AC220-240V (50Hz)
Drain Pump M1P PLD-12230DM
Motors
Thermal Fuse 145C
MP35HCA[3P080801-1]
Swing Motor M1S Stepping Motor DC12V
Thermistor (Suction Air) R1T In PCB A2P or wired remote controller
Thermistor (for Heat ST8605-14 8 L1000
Thermistors Exchanger High Temp.) R3T 20k (25C)
Thermistor (Heat R2T ST8602A-15 6 L1000
Exchanger) 20k (25C)
Float Switch S1L FS-0211B
Fuse F1U 250V 5A 5.2
Others
Thermal Fuse TFu
Transformer T1R
Model
Parts Name Symbol FXCQ FXCQ FXCQ FXCQ FXCQ FXCQ FXCQ FXCQ Remark
20MVE 25MVE 32MVE 40MVE 50MVE 63MVE 80MVE 125MVE
Wired Remote BRC1E61
Remote Controller
Option
BRC7C67
Controller
AC 220~240V 50Hz
110W 115W 120W 130W 150W 185W
Fan Motor M1F
Thermal protector 135C : OFF
Thermal Fuse 152C 87C : ON
Motors
AC220-240V (50Hz)
Thermal Fuse 145C
Swing Motor M1S MT8-L[3PA07509-1]

AC200~240V
Thermistor (Suction Air) ST8601-6 4 L1250

R1T
20k (25C)
Thermistors Thermistor (for Heat ST8605-6 8 L1250

Exchanger High Temp.) R3T 20k (25C)
Others Fuse F1U 250V 5A 5.2
Transformer T1R TR22H21R8
343 Appendix
Model
Parts Name Symbol FXKQ FXKQ FXKQ FXKQ Remark
25MAVE 32MAVE 40MAVE 63MAVE
Wired Remote BRC1E61 Option
Remote Controller
BRC4C63
Controller
AC 220~240V 50Hz
115W 4P 120W 4P 145W 4P
Fan Motor M1F
Thermal Fuse 146C Thermal protector 120C : OFF 105C :
ON
Motors
AC 220-240V (50Hz)
Thermal Fuse 145C
MP35HCA [3P080801-1]
Swing Motor M1S
AC200~240V

R1T 20k (25C)
Thermistors Thermistor (for Heat R3T ST8605-7 8 L1600

Exchanger High Temp.) 20k (25C)
Model
Parts Name Symbol FXDQ FXDQ FXDQ FXDQ FXDQ FXDQ Remark
20PBVE(T) 25PBVE(T) 32PBVE(T) 40NBVE(T) 50NBVE(T) 63NBVE(T)
Remote Controller
Option
BRC4C66
Controller
AC 220~240V 50Hz
162W 1130W
Fan Motor M1F
Thermal protector
Motors 130C: OFF, 83C: ON
AC220-240V (50Hz)
Thermal Fuse 145C
Thermistor (Suction Air) ST8601-1 4 L=250

R1T
20k (25C)
Thermistors Thermistor (for Heat ST8605-4 8 L=800

Thermistor (Heat R2T ST8602A-4 6 L=800
Float Switch S1L FS-0211E
only for FXDQ20~32PBVE (with Drain Pump Type)
Appendix 344
Model
Parts Name Symbol FXSQ FXSQ FXSQ FXSQ FXSQ FXSQ FXSQ FXSQ FXSQ Remark
20MVE 25MVE 32MVE 40MVE 50MVE 63MVE 80MVE 100MVE 125MVE
Remote Controller
Option
BRC4C64
Controller
AC 220~240V 50Hz
150W 165W 185W 1125W 1225W
Fan Motor M1F
Thermal Fuse 152C Thermal protector
Motors 135C : OFF 87C : ON
AC220-240V (50Hz)
Thermal Fuse 145C

R1T
20k (25C)

Model
Parts Name Symbol FXMQ FXMQ FXMQ FXMQ FXMQ FXMQ FXMQ FXMQ FXMQ FXMQ Remark
20PVE 25PVE 32PVE 40PVE 50PVE 63PVE 80PVE 100PVE 125PVE 140PVE
Wired Remote
Controller BRC1E61
Remote
Controller BRC4C65
Fan Motor M1F DC280V 140W 8P DC373V 350W 8P

Motors AC220-240V (50Hz)
Thermal protector 145C
Thermistor (Suction Air) ST8601-3 L630

R1T 20k (25C)

Thermistor (for Heat ST8602A-6 8 L1250
Exchanger) R2T 20k (25C)
Fuse (A1P) F1U 250V 3.15A
Others F3U
Fuse (A2P, A3P) F4U 250V 6.3A
Fuse (A2P) F2U 250V 5A
345 Appendix
Model
Parts Name Symbol Remark
FXMQ200MAVE FXMQ250MAVE
Wired Remote
BRC1E61
Remote Controller
Option
Controller BRC4C64
AC 220~240V 50Hz
Fan Motor M1F
Motors 1380W2
Capacitor for Fan Motor C1R 10 F 400V 12 F 400V
Thermistor (Suction Air) R1T ST8601A-13

4 L630
Thermistors Thermistor (for Heat ST8605A-5

R3T
Exchanger High Temp.) 8 L1000
Thermistor (Heat ST8602A-6
Exchanger) R2T 6 L1250
Float switch S1L FS-0211
Model
Parts Name Symbol FXHQ FXHQ FXHQ Remark
32MAVE 63MAVE 100MAVE
Wired Remote
Remote BRC1E61 Option
Controller
Controller
Wireless Controller BRC7E66
AC 220~240V 50Hz
Fan Motor M1F 163W 1130W
Thermal protector 130C : OFF 80C : ON
Motors
Capacitor for Fan Motor C1R 3.0F-400V 9.0F-400V
MT8-L[3P058751-1]
Swing Motor M1S
AC200~240V
Thermistor (Suction Air) ST8601A-1 4 L250

R1T 20k (25C)
Thermistor (for Heat R3T
ST8605-6 8 L = 1250 ST8605-6 8 L = 1250
Thermistors Exchanger High Temp.) 20k (25C) 20k (25C)
Thermistor (Heat
R2T
ST8602A-6 6 L = 1250 ST8602A-6 6 L = 1250
Exchanger) 20k (25C) 20k (25C)
Others
Appendix 346
Model
Parts Name Symbol FXAQ FXAQ FXAQ FXAQ FXAQ FXAQ Remark
20MAVE 25MAVE 32MAVE 40MAVE 50MAVE 63MAVE
Remote Controller
Option
Controller Wireless Remote BRC7E619
Controller
AC 220~240V 50Hz
Motors Thermal protector 130C : OFF 80C : ON
Swing Motor M1S MP24 [3SB40333-1] MSFBC20C21 [3SB40550-1]

AC200~240V AC200~240V
Thermistor (Suction Air) R1T ST8601-2 4 L400

20k (25C)

Thermistor (for Heat R2T ST8602-2 6 L400
Float Switch S1L OPTION
Others
Model
Parts Name Symbol FXLQ FXLQ FXLQ FXLQ FXLQ FXLQ Remark
Wired Remote
Controller BRC1E61
Remote
Controller Option
Wireless Remote
Controller BRC4C64
AC 220~240V 50Hz
Fan Motor M1F 115W 125W 135W
Motors
Capacitor for Fan Motor C1R 1.0F-400V 0.5F-400V 1.0F-400V 1.5F-400V 2.0F-400V
Thermistor (Suction Air) R1T ST8601-6 4 L1250

20k (25C)

Thermistor (for Heat R2T ST8602A-9 6 L2500
Fuse F1U AC250V 5A
Others
347 Appendix
Model
Parts Name Symbol FXNQ FXNQ FXNQ FXNQ FXNQ FXNQ Remark
Remote Controller
Option
Controller Wireless Remote BRC4C64
Controller
AC 220~240V 50Hz
Fan Motor M1F 115W 125W 135W
Motors
Capacitor for Fan Motor C1R 1.0F-400V 0.5F-400V 1.0F-400V 1.5F-400V 2.0F-400V

R1T
20k (25C)

Exchanger High Temp.) R3T
20k (25C)
Thermistor (for Heat ST8602A-9 6 L2500
R2T
Fuse F1U AC250V 5A
Others
Model
FXUQ71MAV1 FXUQ100MAV1 FXUQ125MAV1
Wired Remote
Controller BRC1E61
Remote Option
Controller Wireless Remote BRC7C529W
Controller
AC 220~240V 50Hz
Thermal protector 130C Thermal protector 130C : OFF 83C : ON
Motors
AC220-240V (50Hz)
Drain Pump M1P PJV-1426
Swing Motor M1S MT8-L[3PA07572-1]

AC200~240V

R1T
20k (25C)
Thermistors
Thermistor (Heat ST8602A-4 6 L=800
Exchanger) R2T 20k (25C)
Others Float Switch S1L FS-0211B
Appendix 348
Model
FXMQ125MFV1 FXMQ200MFV1 FXMQ250MFV1
Wired Remote
BRC1E61
Remote Controller
Option
Controller
AC200~240V 50Hz
Fan Motor M1F 1380W
Motors Thermal protector 135C : OFF 87C : ON
Capacitor for Fan Motor C1R 10 F 10 F 16 F

400V2 400V 400V
Solenoid Solenoid valve Body: VPV-603D
(Hot gas) Y1S
valve Coil: NEV-MOAJ532C1 AC220-240V

R1T 20k (25C)
Thermistor (for Heat R3T ST8605-6 8 L=1250
Thermistors
Thermistor (Heat ST8602A-2 6 L=1250
R2T
Thermistor (for ST8605-8 L=2000
R4T
discharge air) 20k (25C)
Float switch S1L Option
349 Appendix
Si34-804_A Option List
4. Option List
4.1 Option List of Controllers
Operation Control System Optional Accessories
Type FXDQ-NB FXLQ-MA
No. FXFQ-P FXCQ-M FXKQ-MA FXDQ-PB FXUQ-M FXSQ-M FXMQ-MA FXMQ-P FXHQ-MA FXAQ-MA FXNQ-MA
Item
Remote Wireless BRC7F635F BRC7C67 BRC4C63 BRC4C66 BRC7C529W BRC4C64 BRC4C66 BRC7E66 BRC7E619 BRC4C64
1 controller Wired BRC1E61
2 Wired remote controller BRC1D61
with weekly schedule timer
Simplified remote Note 8 Note 8 Note 8
3
controller BRC2C51 BRC2C51 BRC2C51
Remote controller for
4 BRC3A61 BRC3A61 BRC3A61
hotel use
5 Adaptor for wiring KRP1C63 KRP1B61 KRP1B61 KRP1B56 KRP1B61 KRP1C64 KRP1C3 KRP1B61
Wiring adaptor for
6-1 KRP2A62 KRP2A61 KRP2A61 KRP2A53 KRP2A62 KRP2A61 KRP2A61 KRP2A62 KRP2A61 KRP2A61
electrical appendices (1)
Wiring adaptor for
6-2 KRP4AA53 KRP4A51 KRP4A51 KRP4A54 KRP4A53 KRP4A51 KRP4AA51 KRP4A52 KRP4A51 KRP4A51
electrical appendices (2)
7 Remote sensor KRCS01-4B KRCS01-1 KRCS01-1 KRCS01-4B KRCS01-1
Installation box for Note 2, 3 Note 2, 3 Note 4, 6 Note 5 Note 2, 3 Note 3 Note 2, 3
8 KRP1B97
adaptor PCB KRP1H98 KRP1B96 KRP1B101 KRP4A91 KRP4A96 KRP1C93 KRP4A93
Centralized remote
9 DCS302CA61
controller
Electrical box with earth
9-1 KJB311AA
terminal (3 blocks)
10 Unified on/off controller DCS301BA61
Electrical box with earth
10-1 KJB212AA
terminal (2 blocks)
Noise filter (for
10-2 electromagnetic interface KEK26-1A
use only)
11 Schedule timer DST301BA61
External control adaptor
12 for outdoor unit (Must be DTA104A61 DTA104A61 DTA104A61
DTA104A62 DTA104A61 DTA104A53 DTA104A61 DTA104A62 DTA104A61
installed on indoor units)
13
Interface adaptor for Note 7
SkyAir series DTA102A52
Note:
1. Installation box (No.8) is necessary for each adaptor marked .
2. Up to 2 adaptors can be fixed for each installation box.
3. Only one installation box can be installed for each indoor unit.
4. Up to 2 installation boxes can be installed for each indoor unit.
5. Installation box (No. 8) is necessary for second adaptor.
6. Installation box (No. 8) is necessary for each adaptor.
7. This adaptor is required when connecting with optional controller for centralized control.
8. BRC2A51 is also available.
Various PCB
No. Part name Model No. Function
KRP1B56
KRP1B57
1 Adaptor for wiring KRP1B59 PCB when equipped with auxiliary electric heater in the indoor unit.
KRP1B61
KRP1C3
Up to 1024 units can be centrally controlled in 64 different groups.
2 DIII-NET Expander Adaptor DTA109A51 Wiring restrictions (max. length: 1000m, total wiring length: 2000m, max. number of
branches: 16) apply to each adaptor.
Appendix 350
Option List Si34-804_A
System Configuration
No. Item Model No. Function
Up to 16 groups of indoor units (128 units) can be easily controlled using the large LCD
Residential centralized remote Note *2
1 controller DCS303A51 panel. ON/OFF, temperature settings and scheduling can be controlled individually for
indoor units.
2 Centralized remote controller DCS302CA61 Up to 64 groups of indoor units(128 units) can be connected, and ON/OFF, temperature
setting and monitoring can be accomplished individually or simultaneously. Connectable up
2-1 Electrical box with earth terminal (3 blocks) KJB311AA to 2 controllers in one system.
3 Unified ON/OFF controller DCS301BA61
Up to 16 groups of indoor units(128 units) can be turned, ON/OFF individually or
3-1 Electrical box with earth terminal (2 blocks) KJB212AA simultaneously, and operation and malfunction can be displayed. Can be used in
Noise filter (for electromagnetic combination with up to 8 controllers.
3-2 interface use only) KEK26-1A
Programmed time weekly schedule can be controlled by unified control for up to 64 groups
4 Schedule timer DST301BA61 of indoor units (128 units). Can turn units ON/OFF twice per day.
For SkyAir,
Interface adaptor for FD(Y)M-FA,
5 FDY-KA *DTA102A52 Adaptors required to connect products other than those of the VRV System to the high-
SkyAir-series FDYB-KA, speed DIII-NET communication system adopted for the VRV System.
FVY(P)J-A * To use any of the above optional controllers, an appropriate adaptor must be installed on
the product unit to be controlled.
Central control For UAT(Y)-
6 adaptor kit K(A),FD-K *DTA107A55
7 Wiring adaptor for other air-conditioner *DTA103A51 Up to 1024 units can be centrally controlled in 64 different groups.
Wiring restrictions (max. length : 1,000m, total wiring length : 2,000m, max. number of
8 DIII-NET Expander Adaptor DTA109A51 branches : 16) apply to each adaptor.
8-1 Mounting plate KRP4A92 Fixing plate for DTA109A51
Note:
1. Installation box for * adaptor must be obtained locally.
2. For residential use only. Cannot be used with other centralized control equipment.
Building Management System

No. Part name Model No. Function
Air Conditioning management system that can be controlled by
1 Basic Hardware intelligent Touch DCS601C51
intelligent Touch
Controller a compact all-in-one unit.

Controller
1-1 Hardware DIII-NET plus adaptor DCS601A52 Additional 64 groups (10 outdoor units) is possible.
1-2 Option P.P.D. DCS002C51 P. P. D.: Power Proportional Distribution function
Software Monitors and controls the air conditioning system using the
1-3 Web DCS004A51 Internet and a Web browser application on a PC.
1-4 Electrical box with earth terminal (4 blocks) KJB411A Wall embedded switch box.
128 units DAM602B52
Number of 256 units DAM602B51
2 Basic Hardware units to be 512 units DAM602B51x2 Air conditioner management system that can be controlled by
Manager III
personal computers.
intelligent
connected 768 units DAM602B51x3

1024 units DAM602B51x4
2-1 P.P.D. DAM002A51 Power Proportional Distribution function
Monitors and controls the air conditioning system using the
2-2 Option Software Web DAM004A51 Internet and a Web browser application on a PC.
2-3 Eco DAM003A51 ECO (Energy saving functions.)
2-4 Optional DIII Ai unit DAM101A51 External temperature sensor for intelligent Manager III.
2-5 Di unit DEC101A51 8 pairs based on a pair of On/Off input and abnormality input.
2-6 Dio unit DEC102A51 4 pairs based on a pair of On/Off input and abnormality input.
Interface unit to allow communications between VRV and BMS.
*1 Interface for use in BACnet
Communication line
3 DMS502B51 Operation and monitoring of air conditioning systems through

BACnet communication.
Expansion kit, installed on DMS502B51, to provide 2 more DIII-
3-1 Optional DIII board DAM411B51 NET communication ports. Not usable independently.
Expansion kit, installed on DMS502B51, to provide 16 more
3-2 Optional Di board DAM412B51 wattmeter pulse input points. Not usable independently.
Interface unit to allow communications between VRV and BMS.
4 *2 Interface for use in LONWORKS DMS504B51 Operation and monitoring of air conditioning systems through
LONWORKS communication.
Parallel interface Enables ON/OFF command, operation and display of
5 Basic unit DPF201A51 malfunction; can be used in combination with up to 4 units.
Contact/analog
Temperature Enables temperature measurement output for 4 groups; 0-

6 DPF201A52
signal
measurement units 5VDC.

Temperature Enables temperature setting input for 16 groups; 0-5VDC.
7 DPF201A53
setting units
Unification adaptor for Interface between the central monitoring board and central
8 computerized control * DCS302A52 control units.
Note:
*1. BACnet is a registered trademark of American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air
Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE).
*2. LONWORKS is a registered trade mark of Echelon Corporation.
*3. Installation box for * adaptor must be procured on site.
351 Appendix
Si34-804_A Option List
4.2 Option Lists (Outdoor Unit)

RXQ5 ~ 18PAY1(S)
RXQ12PAY1(S)
Optional accessories RXQ8PAY1(S) RXQ14PAY1(S)
RXQ5PAY1 RXQ16PAY1(S)
RXQ10PAY1(S)
RXQ18PAY1(S)
KHRP26M22H, KHRP26M22H, KHRP26M33H,
Distributive
REFNET header KHRP26M22H (Max. 4 branch) (Max. 4 branch) (Max. 8 branch)

Piping
(Max. 4 branch) KHRP26M33H KHRP26M72H

(Max. 8 branch) (Max. 8 branch)
REFNET joint KHRP26A22T KHRP26A22T, KHRP26A22T, KHRP26A33T,

KHRP26A33T KHRP26A72T
Outdoor unit multi connection piping kit
Central drain pan kit KWC26C160 KWC26C280 KWC26C450
Digital Pressure Gauge Kit BHGP26A1(E)
Filter kit BHF26A450F
C : 3D056901C
RXQ20 ~ 36PAY1(S)
RXQ30PAY1(S)
RXQ20PAY1(S) RXQ24PAY1(S) RXQ32PAY1(S)
Optional accessories RXQ26PAY1(S)
RXQ22PAY1(S) RXQ28PAY1(S) RXQ34PAY1(S)
RXQ36PAY1(S)
KHRP26M22H
(Max. 4 branch),
KHRP26M33H KHRP26M22H, KHRP26M33H, KHRP26M72H, KHRP26M73H
Distributive
REFNET header (Max. 8 branch), (Max. 4 branch) (Max. 8 branch) (Max. 8 branch) (Max. 8 branch)
Piping
KHRP26M72H
(Max. 8 branch)
KHRP26A22T,
REFNET joint KHRP26A33T, KHRP26A22T, KHRP26A33T, KHRP26A72T, KHRP26A73T
KHRP26A72T
Outdoor unit multi connection piping kit BHFP22P100
Pipe size reducer KHRP26M73TP, KHRP26M73HP
KWC26C280
Central drain pan kit KWC26C450 KWC26C4502
C : 3D056901C
RXQ38 ~ 54PAY1(S)
RXQ38PAY1(S) RXQ48PAY1(S)
RXQ40PAY1(S)
Optional accessories RXQ42PAY1(S) RXQ50PAY1(S)
RXQ52PAY1(S)
RXQ44PAY1(S) RXQ54PAY1(S)
RXQ46PAY1(S)
KHRP26M22H, KHRP26M33H, KHRP26M72H, KHRP26M73H
Distributive
REFNET header (Max. 4 branch) (Max. 8 branch) (Max. 8 branch) (Max. 8 branch)
Piping
REFNET joint KHRP26A22T, KHRP26A33T, KHRP26A72T, KHRP26A73T

KWC26C280 KWC26C4503
Central drain pan kit KWC26C4502
C : 3D056901C
Appendix 352
Option List Si34-804_A
RXQ16 ~ 18PAHY1(S)
RXQ16PAHY1(S)
Optional accessories RXQ18PAHY1(S)
KHRP26M22H, KHRP26M33H,
Distributive
(Max. 4 branch) (Max. 8 branch)

Piping
REFNET header KHRP26M72H

(Max. 8 branch)
REFNET joint KHRP26A22T, KHRP26A33T, KHRP26A72T
Central drain pan kit KWC26C2802
C : 3D053053A
RXQ24 ~ 30PAHY1(S)
Optional accessories RXQ24PAHY1(S) RXQ28PAHY1(S)
Distributive
Piping

KWC26C2802
C : 3D053053A
RXQ32 ~ 50PAHY1(S)
RXQ36PAHY1(S)
RXQ38PAHY1(S)
RXQ40PAHY1(S)
Optional accessories RXQ32PAHY1(S) RXQ42PAHY1(S)
RXQ44PAHY1(S)
RXQ46PAHY1(S)
RXQ48PAHY1(S)
RXQ50PAHY1(S)
Distributive
Piping

KWC26C280
C : 3D053053A
353 Appendix
Si34-804_A Piping Installation Point
5. Piping Installation Point

5.1 Piping Installation Point
5m or less
than 5m
Connection Connection Maximum length from a connection

Kit A Kit B kit. 10m or less from first branch.
(Equivalent Piping Length 13m)
Since there is a possibility that oil may be collected on a stop machine side, install piping
between outdoor units to go to level or go up to an outdoor unit, and to make a slope.
The projection part between multi connection piping kits
When the piping length between the multi connection kits or between multi connection kit and
outdoor unit is 2m or more, prepare a vertical projection part (200mm or more as shown below) only
on the gas pipe line location less than 2m from multi connection kit.
In the case of 2m or less
Less than 2m
In the case of 2m or more
Vertical
Projection
200mm or
more
Less than 2m
2m or more
Vertical Vertical
Projection Projection
Less than 2m Less than 2m
Appendix 354
Piping Installation Point Si34-804_A
5.2 The Example of a Wrong Pattern
Wrong

Oil is collected to the outdoor
unit at the time of a stop,
because of bottom omission of
piping.
Wrong

Oil is collected to the low level outdoor
unit at the time of a stop, because of
downward slope of piping.
The example of installation on which oil is not collected.
Good Good
Vertical
Projection
Outdoor Unit - Multi Connection Piping Kit Actual piping length 10m or less, equivalent length 13m or less
Max. allowable Multi Connection Piping Kit - Indoor Unit Actual piping length 165m or less, equivalent length 190m or
less, the total extension 1000m or less
Piping Length
Actual piping length 40m or less
REFNET Joint - Indoor Unit (Refer to Note 2 on P.357 in case of up to 90m)
Outdoor Unit - Outdoor Unit 5m or less
Allowable 50m or less 90m or less
Level Outdoor Unit - Indoor Unit (when an outdoor unit is lower than indoor units: 40m or less in
Difference case of RXQ5PA)
Indoor Unit - Indoor Unit 15m or less
Note): Available on request if the outdoor unit is above.
355 Appendix
Si34-804_A Example of Connection (R-410A Type)
6. Example of Connection (R-410A Type)

Example of connection Example refrigerant branch using REFNET joint Example refrigerant branch using REFNET joint and REFNET header Example refrigerant branch using REFNET header
(Connection of 8 indoor units) Outdoor unit REFNET joint (A B) Outdoor unit REFNET header
Outdoor unit REFNET joint (A-G)
(1) indicate the Outdoor unit multi i
Single outdoor a a
connection piping kit a b c d e f g H1
A B
k
system H1 b j
(2)In case of multi outdoor system, re-read to the first A B C D E F G REFNET header 7 8 H1
h i j k l m n p H2
Outdoor unit multi connection piping kit as seen c d e f g h b c d e f g h i
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 H2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 H2
from the indoor unit. 1 2 3 4 5 6
8 8
Indoor units ( 1 - 8 ) Indoor units ( 1 - 8 ) Indoor units ( 1 - 8 )
Outdoor unit Outdoor unit Outdoor unit
REFNET joint (A-G) REFNET header
H3 REFNET joint (A B) H3
H3
i
Multi outdoor a a
A B
a b c d e f g H1
system H1 b j
k H1
A B C D E F G REFNET header 7 8
h i j k l m n p H2
First Outdoor c d e f g h b c d e f g h i
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 H2
unit multi connection 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 H2
piping kit 8
Indoor units ( 1 - 8 ) Indoor units ( 1 - 8 ) Indoor units ( 1 - 8 ) 8
Pipe length between outdoor (2) and indoor units 165m

Actual pipe length
Between outdoor (2) Example unit 8 : a + b + c + d + e + f + g + p 165m Example unit 6 : a + b + h 165m, unit 8 : a + i + k 165m Example unit 8 : a + i 165m
Maximum and indoor units Equivalent length Equivalent pipe length between outdoor (2) and indoor units 190m (assume equivalent pipe length of REFNET joint to be 0.5m, that of REFNET header to be 1m, calculation purposes) (See Note 1 - Next page)
allowable Total pipe length from outdoor unit (2) to all indoor units 1000m
Total extension length
length
Between outdoor unit and Outdoor unit multi Actual pipe length
connection piping kit (Only for multi system) Pipe length between outdoor unit and Outdoor unit multi connection piping kit 10m, Equivalent length between outdoor unit and Outdoor unit multi connection piping kit 13m Outdoor unit
Equivalent length
r 10m (Equivalent length: 13m)
Allowable Between outdoor and indoor units Difference in height Difference in height between outdoor and indoor units (H1) 50m ( 90m if the outdoor unit is below)
s 10m (Equivalent length: 13m)
height Between indoor and indoor units Difference in height Difference in height between indoor units (H2) 15m r
t
length s t 10m (Equivalent length: 13m)
Between outdoor and outdoor units Difference in height Difference in height between outdoor unit (H3) 5m
Pipe length from first refrigerant branch kit (either REFNET joint or REFNET header ) to indoor unit 40m (See Note 2 - Next page)
Allowable length after the branch Actual pipe length
Example unit 8 : b + c + d + e + f + g + p 40m Example unit 6 : b + h 40m, unit 8 :i + k 40m Example unit 8 : i 40m
Refrigerant branch kit selection How to select the REFNET joint How to select the REFNET header
When using REFNET joint at the first branch counted from the outdoor unit side. Choose from the following table in accordance with the total capacity index of all the indoor units connected below the REFNET header.
Choose from the following table in accordance with the outdoor unit capacity type. Note: 250 type indoor unit cannot be connected below the REFNET header.
Refrigerant branch kits can only be (Example: REFNET joint A)
used with R-410A. Indoor unit total capacity index Refrigerant branch kit name
Outdoor unit capacity type Refrigerant branch kit name
< 200 KHRP26M22H (Max. 4 branch)
5HP type KHRP26A22T
When multi outdoor system are installed, be sure to 200 x< 290 KHRP26M33H (Max. 8 branch)
8, 10HP type KHRP26A33T
use the special separately sold Outdoor unit multi 290 x< 640 KHRP26M72H (Max. 8 branch) (See Note 3 - Next page)
connection piping kit. 12~22HP type KHRP26A72T
640 KHRP26M73H (Max. 8 branch) + KHRP26M73HP
The table at right shows how to select the proper kit. 24HP type~ KHRP26A73T + KHRP26M73TP
Choose the REFNET joints other than that for the first branch from the following table in accordance with the total
How to select the Outdoor unit multi connection piping kit (This is required when the system is multi outdoor unit system.)
capacity index of all the indoor units connected below the REFNET joint.
Choose from the following table in accordance with the number of outdoor units.
Indoor unit total capacity index Refrigerant branch kit name
Number of outdoor units Connection piping kit name
< 200 KHRP26A22T
2 units BHFP22P100
200 x< 290 KHRP26A33T
3 units BHFP22P151
290 x< 640 KHRP26A72T
640 KHRP26A73T + KHRP26M73TP
Example REFNET joint B: indoor units 7 + 8
Example for indoor units connected downstream Example REFNET joint C: indoor units 3 + 4 + 5 + 6 + 7 + 8 Example REFNET header: indoor units 1 + 2 + 3 + 4 + 5 + 6 + 7 + 8
Example REFNET header: indoor units 1 + 2 + 3 + 4 + 5 + 6
Pipe size selection Temper grade and wall thickness for pipes. Piping between Outdoor unit and first refrigerant branch kit. Piping between refrigerant branch kits
(Temper grade, O type and 1/2H type indicate the material types specified in JIS Piping between first Outdoor unit multi connection piping kit and first refrigerant Choose from the following table in accordance with the total capacity index of
Caution H 3300.) branch kit. (Part A) all the indoor units connected below this.
(Unit:mm) Choose from the following table in accordance with the outdoor unit capacity type. Do not let the connection piping exceed the main refrigerant piping size. (Unit:mm)
The thickness of the pipes in the table shows the requirements of Japanese
High Pressure Gas Control low. (As of Jan. 2003) Copper tube W.T. Piping between Outdoor unit multi connection piping kits. (Part B) Piping size (O.D.)
Copper tube O.D. Temper grade
The thickness and material shall be selected in accordance with local code. (Minimum requirement) Piping between outdoor unit and Outdoor unit multi connection piping kit. (Part C) Indoor unit total capacity index
Choose from the following table in accordance with the total capacity type of all Gas pipe Liquid pipe
6.4 0.80 15.9
For the multi outdoor unit system, select in accordance with the following figure. the outdoor units connected above Outdoor unit multi connection piping kit. < 150
9.5 0.80 150 x< 200 19.1
O type (Unit:mm) 9.5
12.7 0.80 200 x< 290 22.2
Piping size (O.D.)
15.9 0.99 Outdoor unit capacity type
290 x< 420 12.7
Gas pipe Liquid pipe 28.6
19.1 0.80 420 x< 640 15.9
5HP type 15.9
22.2 0.80 640 x< 920 34.9
8HP type 19.1 9.5 19.1
25.4 0.88 920 41.3
10HP type 22.2
28.6 0.99 12~16HP type 12.7 Piping between refrigerant branch kit and indoor unit
1/2H type
31.8 1.10 28.6 Match to the size of the connection piping on the indoor unit.
18~22HP type (Unit:mm)
34.9 1.21 15.9 Piping size (O.D.)
24HP type
38.1 1.32 34.9 Indoor unit capacity type
26~34HP type Gas pipe Liquid pipe
41.3 1.43 19.1 20 25 32 40 50 type 12.7 6.4
36~54HP type 41.3
63 80 100 125 type 15.9
Part A Part B Part C (See Note 1 - Next page)
200 type 19.1 9.5
250 type 22.2
Appendix 356
Example of Connection (R-410A Type) Si34-804_A
How to calculate the additional Total length(m) of liquid Total length(m) of liquid
piping size at 22.2 0.37 piping size at 19.1 0.26 REFRIGERANT REFRIGERANT AMOUNT
refrigerant to be charged AMOUNT FOR FOR EXCEEDING CONNECTION
Total length(m) of liquid Total length(m) of liquid HEAT PUMP SYSTEM CAPACITY OF INDOOR UNIT
Additional refrigerant to be charged : R (kg) R= piping size at 15.9 0.18 piping size at 12.7 0.12
(R should be rounded off in units of 0.1 kg.)
TABLE A TABLE B
Total length(m) of liquid Total length(m) of liquid
piping size at 9.5 0.059 piping size at 6.4 0.022
TABLE A TABLE B
THE AMOUNT OF INDOOR CONNECTION MODEL NAME [RXQ ~ P]
MODEL NAME REFRIGERANT CAPACITY [X] 5P~8P 10P 12P~14P 16P 18P~22P 24P~28P 30P~32P 34P 36P 38P 40P 42P~44P 46P~48P 50P 52P~54P
RXQ5P 0kg X 100% 0kg
RXQ8 ~ 12P 0.5kg 100% < X 120% 0.5kg
RXQ14 ~ 22P 1.0kg 120% < X 130% 0.5kg 1.0kg
RXQ24 ~ 30P 1.5kg 130% < X 140% 0.5kg 1.0kg 1.5kg
RXQ32 ~ 38P 2.0kg 140% < X 150% 0.5kg 1.0kg 1.5kg 2.0kg
RXQ40 ~ 48P 2.5kg 150% < X 160% 0.5kg 1.0kg 1.5kg 2.0kg 2.5kg
RXQ50 ~ 54P 3.0kg 160% < X 170% 0.5kg 1.0kg 1.5kg 2.0kg 2.5kg
170% < X 180% 0.5kg 1.0kg 1.5kg 2.0kg 2.5kg 3.0kg
180% < X 190% 0.5kg 1.0kg 1.5kg 2.0kg 2.5kg 3.0kg 3.5kg
190% < X 200% 0.5kg 1.0kg 1.5kg 2.0kg 2.5kg 3.0kg 3.5kg 4.0kg
Example for refrigerant branch using REFNET joint and REFNET header for the systems and each pipe length as shown below.
Outdoor system : RXQ34P~ R = ( 30 0.26 + 10 0.18 + 10 0.12 + 40 0.059 + 49 0.022 )+ 2.0 + 0.5
Total capacity of indoor unit : 116%
a : 19.1 30m d : 9.5 10m g : 6.4 10m j : 6.4 10m a b i c+d+e+f g+h+i+j+k RXQ34P~ 116%
b : 15.9 10m e : 9.5 10m h : 6.4 20m k : 6.4 9m = 16.738 16.7kg
c : 9.5 10m f : 9.5 10m i : 12.7 10m Round off units of 0.1 kg.
Note 1
When the equivalent pipe length between outdoor and indoor Diameter of above case
units is 90m or more, the size of main pipes (both gas side and
liquid side) must be increased. Model Gas Liquid Model Gas Liquid Model Gas Liquid Model Gas Liquid
Depending on the length of the piping, the capacity may drop, but RXQ5 Type 19.1 Not Increased RXQ20 Type 31.8* 19.1 RXQ34 Type 38.1* 22.2 RXQ48 Type Not Increased 22.2
even in such case it is able to increase the size of main pipes. RXQ8 Type 22.2 12.7 RXQ22 Type 31.8* 19.1 RXQ36 Type Not Increased 22.2 RXQ50 Type Not Increased 22.2
The first refrigerant branch kit RXQ10 Type 25.4* 12.7 RXQ24 Type Not Increased 19.1 RXQ38 Type Not Increased 22.2 RXQ52 Type Not Increased 22.2
Outdoor unit
RXQ12 Type Not Increased 15.9 RXQ26 Type 38.1* 22.2 RXQ40 Type Not Increased 22.2 RXQ54 Type Not Increased 22.2
Indoor unit
Main pipes RXQ14 Type Not Increased 15.9 RXQ28 Type 38.1* 22.2 RXQ42 Type Not Increased 22.2 *If available on the site, use this size.
RXQ16 Type 31.8* 15.9 RXQ30 Type 38.1* 22.2 RXQ44 Type Not Increased 22.2 Otherwise, it can not be increased.
Increase
RXQ18 Type 31.8* 19.1 RXQ32 Type 38.1* 22.2 RXQ46 Type Not Increased 22.2
Note 2
Allowable length after the first refrigerant branch kit to indoor units is 40 m or less, however it can be extended up to 90 m if all the following conditions are satisfied. (In case of Branch with REFNET joint )
Required Conditions Example Drawings
*If available on the site, use
1.It is necessary to increase the pipe size between the first branch kit and the final 8 b + c + d + e + f + g + p 90 m Increase the pipe size as follows
this size.
branch kit. (Reducers must be procured on site) increase the pipe size of b, c, d, e, f, g 9.5 12.7 15.9 19.1 22.2 25.4* 34.9 38.1* Otherwise it can not be
However, the pipes that are same pipe size with main pipe must not be increased. 12.7 15.9 19.1 22.2 28.6 31.8* increased.
2.For calculation of Total extension length, the actual length of above pipes must be a+b2+c2+d2+e2+f2+g2 Outdoor unit REFNET joint (A-G)
doubled. (except main pipe and the pipes that are not increased) + h + i + j + k + l + m + n + p 1000 m
3.Indoor unit to the nearest branch kit 40 m h, i, j....... p 40 m a b c d e f g H1

A B C D E F G
p
4.The difference between The farthest indoor unit 8 h i j k l m n
The nearest indoor unit 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
[Outdoor unit to the farthest indoor unit] and [Outdoor unit to the nearest indoor unit]
8
40 m ( a + b + c + d + e + f + g + p ) - ( a + h ) 40 m Indoor units ( 1 - 8 )
Note 3
If the pipe size above the REFNET header is 34.9 or more, KHRP26M73HP is required.
357 Appendix
Si34-804_A Thermistor Resistance / Temperature Characteristics
7. Thermistor Resistance / Temperature

Characteristics
Indoor unit For air suction R1T
For liquid pipe R2T
For gas pipe R3T
Outdoor unit for fin thermistor R1T Outdoor unit For outdoor air R1T
For coil R2T
For suction pipe R4T
For Receiver gas pipe R5T
For Receiver outlet liquid pipe R6T
TC k TC k TC k TC k TC k
-10 - -20 197.81 -19.5 192.08 30 16.10 30.5 15.76
-8 - -19 186.53 -18.5 181.16 31 15.43 31.5 15.10
-6 88.0 -18 175.97 -17.5 170.94 32 14.79 32.5 14.48
-4 79.1 -17 166.07 -16.5 161.36 33 14.18 33.5 13.88
-2 71.1
-16 156.80 -15.5 152.38 34 13.59 34.5 13.31
0 64.1 -15 148.10 -14.5 143.96 35 13.04 35.5 12.77
2 57.8
-14 139.94 -13.5 136.05 36 12.51 36.5 12.25
4 52.3
6 47.3 -13 132.28 -12.5 128.63 37 12.01 37.5 11.76
8 42.9 -12 125.09 -11.5 121.66 38 11.52 38.5 11.29
10 38.9 -11 118.34 -10.5 115.12 39 11.06 39.5 10.84
12 35.3 -10 111.99 -9.5 108.96 40 10.63 40.5 10.41
14 32.1 -9 106.03 -8.5 103.18 41 10.21 41.5 10.00
16 29.2 -8 100.41 -7.5 97.73 42 9.81 42.5 9.61
18 26.6 -7 95.14 -6.5 92.61 43 9.42 43.5 9.24
20 24.3 -6 90.17 -5.5 87.79 44 9.06 44.5 8.88
22 22.2 -5 85.49 -4.5 83.25 45 8.71 45.5 8.54
24 20.3 -4 81.08 -3.5 78.97 46 8.37 46.5 8.21
26 18.5
28 17.0 -3 76.93 -2.5 74.94 47 8.05 47.5 7.90
-2 73.01 -1.5 71.14 48 7.75 48.5 7.60
30 15.6
-1 69.32 -0.5 67.56 49 7.46 49.5 7.31
32 14.2
34 13.1 0 65.84 0.5 64.17 50 7.18 50.5 7.04
36 12.0 1 62.54 1.5 60.96 51 6.91 51.5 6.78
38 11.1 2 59.43 2.5 57.94 52 6.65 52.5 6.53
40 10.3 3 56.49 3.5 55.08 53 6.41 53.5 6.53
42 9.5 4 53.71 4.5 52.38 54 6.65 54.5 6.53
44 8.8 5 51.09 5.5 49.83 55 6.41 55.5 6.53
46 8.2 6 48.61 6.5 47.42 56 6.18 56.5 6.06
48 7.6 7 46.26 7.5 45.14 57 5.95 57.5 5.84
50 7.0 8 44.05 8.5 42.98 58 5.74 58.5 5.43
52 6.7 9 41.95 9.5 40.94 59 5.14 59.5 5.05
54 6.0
10 39.96 10.5 39.01 60 4.96 60.5 4.87
56 5.5
58 5.2 11 38.08 11.5 37.18 61 4.79 61.5 4.70
12 36.30 12.5 35.45 62 4.62 62.5 4.54
60 4.79
62 4.46 13 34.62 13.5 33.81 63 4.46 63.5 4.38
64 4.15 14 33.02 14.5 32.25 64 4.30 64.5 4.23
66 3.87 15 31.50 15.5 30.77 65 4.16 65.5 4.08
68 3.61 16 30.06 16.5 29.37 66 4.01 66.5 3.94
70 3.37 17 28.70 17.5 28.05 67 3.88 67.5 3.81
72 3.15 18 27.41 18.5 26.78 68 3.75 68.5 3.68
74 2.94 19 26.18 19.5 25.59 69 3.62 69.5 3.56
76 2.75 20 25.01 20.5 24.45 70 3.50 70.5 3.44
78 2.51
21 23.91 21.5 23.37 71 3.38 71.5 3.32
80 2.41 22 22.85 22.5 22.35 72 3.27 72.5 3.21
82 2.26
23 21.85 23.5 21.37 73 3.16 73.5 3.11
84 2.12
86 1.99 24 20.90 24.5 20.45 74 3.06 74.5 3.01
88 1.87 25 20.00 25.5 19.56 75 2.96 75.5 2.91
90 1.76 26 19.14 26.5 18.73 76 2.86 76.5 2.82
92 1.65 27 18.32 27.5 17.93 77 2.77 77.5 2.72
94 1.55 28 17.54 28.5 17.17 78 2.68 78.5 2.64
96 1.46 29 16.80 29.5 16.45 79 2.60 79.5 2.55
98 1.38 30 16.10 30.5 15.76 80 2.51 80.5 2.47
Appendix 358
Thermistor Resistance / Temperature Characteristics Si34-804_A
Outdoor Unit
Thermistors for
Discharge Pipe
(R3T, R3133T)
TC k TC k TC k TC k TC k TC k
0 640.44 0.5 624.65 50 72.32 50.5 70.96 100 13.35 100.5 13.15
1 609.31 1.5 594.43 51 69.64 51.5 68.34 101 12.95 101.5 12.76
2 579.96 2.5 565.78 52 67.06 52.5 65.82 102 12.57 102.5 12.38
3 552.00 3.5 538.63 53 64.60 53.5 63.41 103 12.20 103.5 12.01
4 525.63 4.5 512.97 54 62.24 54.5 61.09 104 11.84 104.5 11.66
5 500.66 5.5 488.67 55 59.97 55.5 58.87 105 11.49 105.5 11.32
6 477.01 6.5 465.65 56 57.80 56.5 56.75 106 11.15 106.5 10.99
7 454.60 7.5 443.84 57 55.72 57.5 54.70 107 10.83 107.5 10.67
8 433.37 8.5 423.17 58 53.72 58.5 52.84 108 10.52 108.5 10.36
9 413.24 9.5 403.57 59 51.98 59.5 50.96 109 10.21 109.5 10.06
10 394.16 10.5 384.98 60 49.96 60.5 49.06 110 9.92 110.5 9.78
11 376.05 11.5 367.35 61 48.19 61.5 47.33 111 9.64 111.5 9.50
12 358.88 12.5 350.62 62 46.49 62.5 45.67 112 9.36 112.5 9.23
13 342.58 13.5 334.74 63 44.86 63.5 44.07 113 9.10 113.5 8.97
14 327.10 14.5 319.66 64 43.30 64.5 42.54 114 8.84 114.5 8.71
15 312.41 15.5 305.33 65 41.79 65.5 41.06 115 8.59 115.5 8.47
16 298.45 16.5 291.73 66 40.35 66.5 39.65 116 8.35 116.5 8.23
17 285.18 17.5 278.80 67 38.96 67.5 38.29 117 8.12 117.5 8.01
18 272.58 18.5 266.51 68 37.63 68.5 36.98 118 7.89 118.5 7.78
19 260.60 19.5 254.72 69 36.34 69.5 35.72 119 7.68 119.5 7.57
20 249.00 20.5 243.61 70 35.11 70.5 34.51 120 7.47 120.5 7.36
21 238.36 21.5 233.14 71 33.92 71.5 33.35 121 7.26 121.5 7.16
22 228.05 22.5 223.08 72 32.78 72.5 32.23 122 7.06 122.5 6.97
23 218.24 23.5 213.51 73 31.69 73.5 31.15 123 6.87 123.5 6.78
24 208.90 24.5 204.39 74 30.63 74.5 30.12 124 6.69 124.5 6.59
25 200.00 25.5 195.71 75 29.61 75.5 29.12 125 6.51 125.5 6.42
26 191.53 26.5 187.44 76 28.64 76.5 28.16 126 6.33 126.5 6.25
27 183.46 27.5 179.57 77 27.69 77.5 27.24 127 6.16 127.5 6.08
28 175.77 28.5 172.06 78 26.79 78.5 26.35 128 6.00 128.5 5.92
29 168.44 29.5 164.90 79 25.91 79.5 25.49 129 5.84 129.5 5.76
30 161.45 30.5 158.08 80 25.07 80.5 24.66 130 5.69 130.5 5.61
31 154.79 31.5 151.57 81 24.26 81.5 23.87 131 5.54 131.5 5.46
32 148.43 32.5 145.37 82 23.48 82.5 23.10 132 5.39 132.5 5.32
33 142.37 33.5 139.44 83 22.73 83.5 22.36 133 5.25 133.5 5.18
34 136.59 34.5 133.79 84 22.01 84.5 21.65 134 5.12 134.5 5.05
35 131.06 35.5 128.39 85 21.31 85.5 20.97 135 4.98 135.5 4.92
36 125.79 36.5 123.24 86 20.63 86.5 20.31 136 4.86 136.5 4.79
37 120.76 37.5 118.32 87 19.98 87.5 19.67 137 4.73 137.5 4.67
38 115.95 38.5 113.62 88 19.36 88.5 19.05 138 4.61 138.5 4.55
39 111.35 39.5 109.13 89 18.75 89.5 18.46 139 4.49 139.5 4.44
40 106.96 40.5 104.84 90 18.17 90.5 17.89 140 4.38 140.5 4.32
41 102.76 41.5 100.73 91 17.61 91.5 17.34 141 4.27 141.5 4.22
42 98.75 42.5 96.81 92 17.07 92.5 16.80 142 4.16 142.5 4.11
43 94.92 43.5 93.06 93 16.54 93.5 16.29 143 4.06 143.5 4.01
44 91.25 44.5 89.47 94 16.04 94.5 15.79 144 3.96 144.5 3.91
45 87.74 45.5 86.04 95 15.55 95.5 15.31 145 3.86 145.5 3.81
46 84.38 46.5 82.75 96 15.08 96.5 14.85 146 3.76 146.5 3.72
47 81.16 47.5 79.61 97 14.62 97.5 14.40 147 3.67 147.5 3.62
48 78.09 48.5 76.60 98 14.18 98.5 13.97 148 3.58 148.5 3.54
49 75.14 49.5 73.71 99 13.76 99.5 13.55 149 3.49 149.5 3.45
50 72.32 50.5 70.96 100 13.35 100.5 13.15 150 3.41 150.5 3.37
359 Appendix
Si34-804_A Pressure Sensor
8. Pressure Sensor
PH = 1.38VH-0.69 VH : Output Voltage [High Side] VDC

PL = 0.57VL-0.28 VL : Output Voltage [Low Side] VDC
Detected Pressure PH : High pressure (MPa)
PL : Low pressure (MPa)
High Pressure (PH)
Low Pressure (PL)
Output Voltage (VH, VL)
Appendix 360
Method of Checking the Inverters Power Transistors and Diode Modules Si34-804_A
9. Method of Checking the Inverters Power

Transistors and Diode Modules
9.1 Method of Checking the Inverters Power Transistors
and Diode Modules
Checking failures in power semiconductors mounted on inverter PCB
Check the power semiconductors mounted on the inverter PCB by the use of a multiple tester.
<Items to be prepared>
z Multiple tester : Prepare the analog type of multiple tester.
For the digital type of multiple tester, those with diode check function are
available for the checking.
<Test points>
z Turn OFF the power supply. Then, after a lapse of 10 minutes or more, make measurement
of resistance.
<Preparation>
z To make measurement, disconnect all connectors and terminals.
Inverter PCB
J1
J2
J3
N3 U V W
P1 P3
Electronic circuit
P1 P2 P3
DM IGBT
X10A K2
L1 J1
L2 J2
L3 J3
N3
U V W
X11A
According to the checking aforementioned, it is probed that the malfunction results from the
faulty inverter. The following section describes supposed causes of the faulty inverter.
z Faulty compressor (ground leakage)
z Faulty fan motor (ground leakage)
z Entry of conductive foreign particles
z Abnormal voltage (e.g. overvoltage, surge (thunder), or unbalanced voltage)
In order to replace the faulty inverter, be sure to check for the points aforementioned.
361 Appendix
Si34-804_A Method of Checking the Inverters Power Transistors and Diode Modules
1. Power module checking

When using the analog type of multiple When using the digital type of multiple
tester, make measurement in resistance tester, make measurement in diode check
measurement mode in the x1k range. mode ( ).
Measuring Measuring
No. point Criterion Remark No. point Criterion Remark
+ - + -
1 P3 U 1 P3 U Not less It may take time to
than determine the voltage
2 P3 V 2 to 15k 2 P3 V 1.2V due to capacitor
3 P3 W 3 P3 W (including) charge or else.
4 U P3 4 U P3
5 V P3 It may take 5 V P3
Not less time to
6 W P3 than determine the 6 W P3
0.3 to 0.7V
7 N3 U 15k resistance due 7 N3 U
(including) to capacitor
8 N3 V charge or else. 8 N3 V
9 N3 W 9 N3 W
10 U N3 10 U N3 Not less It may take time to
11 V N3 2 to 15k 11 V N3 1.2V due to capacitor
12 W N3 12 W N3 (including) charge or else.
2. Diode module checking

When using the analog type of multiple When using the digital type of multiple
tester, make measurement in resistance tester, make measurement in diode check
measurement mode in the x1k range. mode ( ).
Measuring Measuring
No. point Criterion Remark No. point Criterion Remark
+ - + -
1 P1 J1 1 P1 J1 Not less It may take time to
2 P1 J2 2 to 15k 2 P1 J2 1.2V due to capacitor
3 P1 J3 3 P1 J3 (including) charge or else.
4 J1 P1 4 J1 P1
5 J2 P1 It may take 5 J2 P1
Not less time to
6 J3 P1 than determine the 6 J3 P1
0.3 to 0.7V
7 N3 J1 15k resistance due 7 N3 J1
(including) to capacitor
8 N3 J2 charge or else. 8 N3 J2
9 N3 J3 9 N3 J3
10 J1 N3 10 J1 N3 Not less It may take time to
11 J2 N3 2 to 15k 11 J2 N3 1.2V due to capacitor
12 J3 N3 12 J3 N3 (including) charge or else.
Appendix 362
Si34-804_A
Part 8
Precautions for New
Refrigerant (R-410A)
1. Precautions for New Refrigerant (R-410A) .........................................364
1.1 Outline ..................................................................................................364
1.2 Refrigerant Cylinders............................................................................366
1.3 Service Tools........................................................................................367
363 Precautions for New Refrigerant (R-410A)

Si34-804_A Precautions for New Refrigerant (R-410A)
1. Precautions for New Refrigerant (R-410A)

1.1 Outline
1.1.1 About Refrigerant R-410A
Characteristics of new refrigerant, R-410A
1. Performance
Almost the same performance as R-22 and R-407C
2. Pressure
Working pressure is approx. 1.4 times more than R-22 and R-407C.
3. Refrigerant composition
Few problems in composition control, since it is a Quasi-azeotropic mixture refrigerant.
HFC units (Units using new refrigerants) HCFC units

Refrigerant name R-407C R-410A R-22
Non-azeotropic mixture Quasi-azeotropic mixture
Composing Single-component
of HFC32, HFC125 and of HFC32 and HFC125
substances refrigerant
HFC134a (*1) (*1)
3.2 MPa (gauge pressure) 4.0 MPa (gauge pressure) 2.75MPa (gauge pressure)
Design pressure
= 32.6 kgf/cm2 = 40.8 kgf/cm2 = 28.0 kgf/cm2
Refrigerant oil Synthetic oil (Ether) Mineral oil (Suniso)
Ozone destruction 0 0 0.05
factor (ODP)
Combustibility None None None
Toxicity None None None
1. Non-azeotropic mixture refrigerant: mixture of two or more refrigerants having different
boiling points.
2. Quasi-azeotropic mixture refrigerant: mixture of two or more refrigerants having similar
boiling points.
3. The design pressure is different at each product. Please refer to the installation manual for
each product.
(Reference) 1 MPa 10.19716 kgf / cm2
Pressure-Enthalpy curves of HFC-32/125 (50/50wt%)
Precautions for New Refrigerant (R-410A) 364

Precautions for New Refrigerant (R-410A) Si34-804_A
Thermodynamic characteristic of R-410A
Temperature Steam pressure Density Specific heat at constant Specific enthalpy Specific entropy
( ) (kPa) (kg/m3 ) pressure (kJ/kgK) (kJ/kg) (kJ/KgK)
Liquid Vapor Liquid Vapor Liquid Vapor Liquid Vapor Liquid Vapor

1.2 Refrigerant Cylinders

Cylinder specifications
The cylinder is painted refrigerant color (pink).
The cylinder valve is equipped with a siphon tube.
Cylinder
Siphon tube
Refrigerant can be charged in liquid state with cylinder in
upright position.
Caution: Do not lay cylinder on its side during charging, since

it cause refrigerant in gas state to enter the system.
Handling of cylinders
(1) Laws and regulations
R-410A is liquefied gas, and the High Pressure Gas Safety Law must be observed in
handling them. Before using, refer to the High Pressure Gas Safety Law.
The Law stipulates standards and regulations that must be followed to prevent accidents
with high pressure gases. Be sure to follow the regulations.
(2) Handing of vessels

Since R-410A is high pressure gas, it is contained in high pressure vessels.
Although those vessels are durable and strong, careless handling can cause damage that
can lead to unexpected accidents. Do not drop vessels, let them fall, apply impact or roll
them on the ground.
(3) Storage
Although R-410A is not flammable, it must be stored in a well-ventilated, cool, and dark
place in the same way as any other high pressure gases.
It should also be noted that high pressure vessels are equipped with safety devices that
releases gas when the ambient temperature reaches more than a certain level (fusible plug
melts) and when the pressure exceeds a certain level (spring-type safety valve operates).

1.3 Service Tools

R-410A is used under higher working pressure, compared to previous refrigerants
(R-22,R-407C). Furthermore, the refrigerating machine oil has been changed from Suniso oil to
Ether oil, and if oil mixing is occurred, sludge results in the refrigerants and causes other
problems. Therefore, gauge manifolds and charge hoses that are used with a previous
refrigerant (R-22,R-407C) can not be used for products that use new refrigerants.
Be sure to use dedicated tools and devices.
Tool compatibility
Compatibility
Tool HFC HCFC Reasons for change
R-410A R-407C R-22
Do not use the same tools for R-22
Gauge manifold and R-410A.

Charge hose Thread specification differs for
R-410A and R-407C.
Charging cylinder { Weighting instrument used for HFCs.
Gas detector { The same tool can be used for HFCs.
Vacuum pump To use existing pump for HFCs,
(pump with reverse flow { vacuum pump adaptor must be
preventive function) installed.
Weighting instrument {
Seal material is different between
R-22 and HFCs.
Charge mouthpiece
Thread specification is different
between R-410A and others.
Flaring tool (Clutch type) { For R-410A, flare gauge is necessary.
Torque wrench { Torque-up for 1/2 and 5/8
Pipe cutter {
Pipe expander {
Pipe bender {
Due to refrigerating machine oil
Pipe assembling oil change. (No Suniso oil can be used.)
Refrigerant recovery Check your recovery device.
device
Only 19.1 is changed to 1/2H material
Refrigerant piping See the chart below. while the previous material is "O".
As for the charge mouthpiece and packing, 1/2UNF20 is necessary for mouthpiece size of
charge hose.
Copper tube material and thickness

R-407C R-410A
Pipe size Thickness Thickness
Material Material
t (mm) t (mm)
6.4 O 0.8 O 0.8
9.5 O 0.8 O 0.8
12.7 O 0.8 O 0.8
15.9 O 1.0 O 1.0
19.1 O 1.0 1/2H 1.0
22.2 1/2H 1.0 1/2H 1.0
25.4 1/2H 1.0 1/2H 1.0
28.6 1/2H 1.0 1/2H 1.0
31.8 1/2H 1.2 1/2H 1.1
38.1 1/2H 1.4 1/2H 1.4
44.5 1/2H 1.6 1/2H 1.6
* O: Soft (Annealed)
H: Hard (Drawn)

1. Flaring tool
Flare gauge
Specifications
Dimension A
Unit:mm
Tube O.D. A +00.4
Nominal size
Do Class-2 (R-410A) Class-1 (Conventional)
1/4 6.35 9.1 9.0
3/8 9.52 13.2 13.0
1/2 12.70 16.6 16.2
5/8 15.88 19.7 19.4
3/4 19.05 24.0 23.3
Differences
Change of dimension A
Dimension A
For class-1: R-407C

For class-2: R-410A
Conventional flaring tools can be used when the work process is changed.
(change of work process)
Previously, a pipe extension margin of 0 to 0.5mm was provided for flaring. For R-410A air
conditioners, perform pipe flaring with a pipe extension margin of 1.0 to 1.5mm.
(For clutch type only)
Conventional tool with pipe extension margin adjustment can be used.

2. Torque wrench
Specifications
Dimension B Unit:mm
Nominal size Class-1 Class-2 Previous
1/2 24 26 24
5/8 27 29 27
No change in tightening torque
No change in pipes of other sizes
Differences
Change of dimension B
Only 1/2", 5/8" are extended
For class-1: R-407C

For class-2: R-410A
Dimension B
3. Vacuum pump with check valve
Vacuum pump adaptor

Reverse flow preventive
vacuum adaptor
Specifications
Discharge speed z Maximum degree of vacuum
50 l/min (50Hz) Select a vacuum pump which is able to keep
Suction port UNF7/16-20(1/4 Flare) the vacuum degree of the system in excess of
UNF1/2-20(5/16 Flare) with adaptor 100.7 kPa (5 torr 755 mmHg).
Differences
Equipped with function to prevent reverse oil flow
Previous vacuum pump can be used by installing adaptor.

4. Leak tester
Specifications
Hydrogen detecting type, etc.
Applicable refrigerants
R-410A, R-407C, R-404A, R-507A, R-134a, etc.
Differences
Previous testers detected chlorine. Since HFCs do not contain chlorine, new tester detects
hydrogen.
5. Refrigerant oil (Air compal)
Specifications
Contains synthetic oil, therefore it can be used for piping work of every refrigerant cycle.
Offers high rust resistance and stability over long period of time.
Differences
Can be used for R-410A and R-22 units.
6. Gauge manifold for R-410A
Specifications
High pressure gauge
- 0.1 to 5.3 MPa (-76 cmHg to 53 kg/cm2)
Low pressure gauge
- 0.1 to 3.8 MPa (-76 cmHg to 38 kg/cm2)
1/4" 5/16" (2min 2.5min)
No oil is used in pressure test of gauges.
For prevention of contamination

Temperature scale indicates the relationship between pressure and temperature in gas
saturated state.
Differences
Change in pressure
Change in service port diameter
7. Charge hose for R-410A
(Hose with ball valve)
Specifications
Working pressure 5.08 MPa (51.8 kg/cm2)
Rupture pressure 25.4 MPa (259 kg/cm2)
Available with and without hand-operate valve that prevents refrigerant from outflow.
Differences
Pressure proof hose
Change in service port diameter
Use of nylon coated material for HFC resistance
8. Charging cylinder
Can not be used
Specifications
Use weigher for refrigerant charge listed below to charge directly from refrigerant cylinder.
Differences
The cylinder can not be used for mixed refrigerant since mixing ratio is changed during
charging.
When R-410A is charged in liquid state using charging cylinder, foaming phenomenon is
generated inside charging cylinder.

9. Weigher for refrigerant charge
Specifications
High accuracy
TA101A (for 10-kg cylinder) = 2g
TA101B (for 20-kg cylinder) = 5g
Equipped with pressure-resistant sight glass to check liquid refrigerant charging.
A manifold with separate ports for HFCs and previous refrigerants is equipped as standard
accessories.
Differences
Measurement is based on weight to prevent change of mixing ratio during charging.
10.Charge mouthpiece
Specifications
For R-410A, 1/4" 5/16" (2min 2.5min)
Material is changed from CR to H-NBR.
Differences
Change of thread specification on hose connection side (For the R-410A use)
Change of sealer material for the HFCs use.

Warning Daikin Industries, Ltd.s products are manufactured for export to numerous countries throughout the
world. Daikin Industries, Ltd. does not have control over which products are exported to and used in a
particular country. Prior to purchase, please therefore confirm with your local authorised importer,
distributor and/or retailer whether this product conforms to the applicable standards, and is suitable for
use, in the region where the product will be used. This statement does not purport to exclude, restrict
or modify the application of any local legislation.
Ask a qualified installer or contractor to install this product. Do not try to install the product yourself.
Improper installation can result in water or refrigerant leakage, electrical shock, fire or explosion.
Use only those parts and accessories supplied or specified by Daikin. Ask a qualified installer or
contractor to install those parts and accessories. Use of unauthorised parts and accessories or
improper installation of parts and accessories can result in water or refrigerant leakage, electrical
shock, fire or explosion.
Read the User's Manual carefully before using this product. The User's Manual provides important
safety instructions and warnings. Be sure to follow these instructions and warnings.
If you have any enquiries, please contact your local importer, distributor and/or retailer.
Cautions on product corrosion

1. Air conditioners should not be installed in areas where corrosive gases, such as acid gas or alkaline gas, are produced.
2. If the outdoor unit is to be installed close to the sea shore, direct exposure to the sea breeze should be avoided. If you need to install
the outdoor unit close to the sea shore, contact your local distributor.
Organization:
DAIKIN INDUSTRIES, LTD. Organization:
AIR CONDITIONING MANUFACTURING DIVISION DAIKIN INDUSTRIES
(THAILAND) LTD. All of the Daikin Groups business
Scope of Registration: facilities and subsidiaries in Japan
THE DESIGN/DEVELOPMENT AND MANUFACTURE OF Scope of Registration: are certified under the ISO 14001
COMMERCIAL AIR CONDITIONING, HEATING, COOLING, THE DESIGN/DEVELOPMENT international standard for
REFRIGERATING EQUIPMENT, COMMERCIAL HEATING AND MANUFACTURE OF AIR environment management.
EQUIPMENT, RESIDENTIAL AIR CONDITIONING CONDITIONERS AND THE
EQUIPMENT, HEAT RECLAIM VENTILATION, AIR COMPONENTS INCLUDING
JMI-0107 CLEANING EQUIPMENT, MARINE TYPE CONTAINER JQA-1452 COMPRESSORS USED FOR THEM
REFRIGERATION UNITS, COMPRESSORS AND VALVES.
Dealer
Head Office:
Umeda Center Bldg., 2-4-12, Nakazaki-Nishi,
Kita-ku, Osaka, 530-8323 Japan
Tokyo Office:
JR Shinagawa East Bldg., 2-18-1, Konan,
Minato-ku, Tokyo, 108-0075 Japan
http://www.daikin.com/global_ac/
c All rights reserved
Specifications, designs and other content appearing in this brochure are current as of August 2009 but subject to change without notice.
Si34-804_A
08/2009 AK

Aqidah Ahlus Sunnah Wal Jamaah

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Aqidah Ahlus Sunnah Wal Jamaah

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Si34 - 804_A

R-410A Cooling Only

Part 1 General Information ........................................................... 1

Part 2 Specifications .................................................................. 11

Part 3 Refrigerant Circuit ........................................................... 56

Part 5 Test Operation ............................................................... 128

Part 6 Troubleshooting ............................................................. 184

3. Troubleshooting by Indication on the Remote Controller ....................206

iii Table of Contents

3.40 LC Outdoor Unit: Malfunction of Transmission Between

Part 7 Appendix......................................................................... 308

3. List of Electrical and Functional Parts .................................................340

Part 8 Precautions for New Refrigerant (R-410A) .................... 363

When disconnecting the suction or discharge pipe of the compressor at the

The step-up capacitor supplies high-voltage electricity to the electrical

Do not clean the air conditioner by splashing water.

Be sure to provide the grounding when repairing the equipment in a humid or

Do not tilt the unit when removing it.

1.1.2 Cautions Regarding Products after Repair

1.1.3 Inspection after Repair

1.1.4 Using Icons

1.1.5 Using Icons List

Warning A warning is used when there is danger of personal injury.

Reference A reference guides the reader to other places in this binder or

After Sales Service Division

1. Model Names of Indoor/Outdoor Units....................................................2

1. Model Names of Indoor/Outdoor Units

Outdoor Air Processing FXMQ-

High COP Series (Energy Saving Series)

Power Supply VE : 1 phase 220~240V, 50Hz

Ceiling Mounted Cassette Type (Double Flow) Ceiling Suspended Type

Ceiling Mounted Cassette Corner Type Wall Mounted Type

Slim Ceiling Mounted Duct Type Floor Standing Type

Ceiling Mounted Built-in Type Concealed Floor Standing Type

2.2 Outdoor Units

RXQ5PA RXQ8PA, 10PA RXQ12PA, 14PA, 16PA, 18PA

5HP 8, 10HP 12, 14, 16, 18HP

RXQ20PA, 22PA, 24PA, 26PA, 28PA RXQ30PA, 32PA, 34PA, 36PA

20, 22, 24, 26, 28HP 30, 32, 34, 36HP

RXQ38PA, 40PA, 42PA, 44PA, 46PA RXQ48PA, 50PA, 52PA, 54PA

38, 40, 42, 44, 46HP 48, 50, 52, 54HP

High COP Series (Energy Saving Series)

RXQ16PAH, 18PAH RXQ24PAH, 26PAH

16, 18HP 24, 26HP

RXQ28PAH, 30PAH RXQ32PAH, 34PAH

28, 30HP 32, 34HP

RXQ36PAH, 38PAH, 40PAH, 42PAH, 44PAH, 46PAH, 48PAH, 50PAH

36, 38, 40, 42, 44, 46, 48, 50HP

3. Combination of Outdoor Units

High COP Series (Energy Saving Series)

High COP Type (Energy Saving Type)

Connectable Indoor Unit

FXDQ- 20PB 25PB 32PB

Outdoor Air Processing FXMQ-

Connection Unit BEVQ-MA 71MA 100MA 125MA VE

Note: FXDQ has following 2 Series, as show below.

Indoor unit capacity

Differences from Conventional Models

The Reference Number

Model Name RXQ10PAY1 RXQ12PAY1

Model Name RXQ14PAY1 RXQ16PAY1

Model Name (Combination Unit) RXQ18PAY1 RXQ20PAY1

Model Name (Combination Unit) RXQ22PAY1 RXQ24PAY1

Model Name (Combination Unit) RXQ26PAY1 RXQ28PAY1